Children Of The Sun j346e

Children of the Sun

ALIF SAHIB LUMUMBA LIM NAM YAH’YA’

AuthorHouse™ 1663 Liberty Drive Bloomington, IN 47403 www.authorhouse.com Phone: 1 (800) 839-8640

© 2019 Alif Sahib Lumumba Lim Nam Yah’ya’. All rights reserved.

No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted by any means without the written permission of the author.

This is a work of fiction. All of the characters, names, incidents, organizations, and dialogue in this novel are either the products of the author’s imagination or are used fictitiously.

Published by AuthorHouse 01/07/2020

ISBN: 978-1-7283-3671-8 (sc) ISBN: 978-1-7283-3669-5 (hc) ISBN: 978-1-7283-3670-1 (e)

Any people depicted in stock imagery provided by Getty Images are models, and such images are being used for illustrative purposes only. Certain stock imagery © Getty Images.

Because of the dynamic nature of the Internet, any web addresses or links contained in this book may have changed since publication and may no longer be valid. The views expressed in this work are solely those of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of the publisher, and the publisher hereby disclaims any responsibility for them.

Contents

Chapter I

Chapter II Maura

Chapter III Maura And Larobe

Chapter IV Maura

Chapter V Larobe

Chapter VI Old Ben

Chapter VII Jadur

Chapter VIII Glory

Chapter IX Maura

Chapter X Maura And Old Ben

Chapter XI Black Bob

Chapter XII Old Ben

Chapter XIII Larobe

Chapter XIV The Escape

Chapter XIV Runaways

Chapter XVI Black Bob

Chapter XVII The Runaways

Chapter XVIII The Hunting Party

Chapter XIX Black Bob

Chapter XX A New Home

Chapter XXI Black Bob And Jadur

Chapter XXII Preparation For War

Chapter XXIII The Decision

Chapter XXIV Black Bob

Chapter XXV Larobe

Chapter XXVI The Storm

Chapter XXVII Old Ben

Chapter XXVIII Westward Trek

Chapter XXIX Others

Chapter XXX Maura And Glory

Chapter XXXI Jadur

Chapter XXXII The Journey

Chapter XXXIII Maura & Glory

Chapter XXXIV At Work

Chapter XXXV Stilly

Chapter XXXVI Yueng Ling, Deadeye, Pecos &Trouble

Chapter XXXVII Fawn & The Scouting Party

Chapter XXXVIII Danger

Chapter XXXIX The Caravan

Chapter XL Freedom

Chapter XLI Maura

Chapter XLII Jadur

Chapter XLIII Bob And Liza

Chapter XLIV Larobe

Chapter XLV Glory And Jadur

Chapter XLVI Glory

Chapter XLVII Jadur

Chapter XLVIII Glory And Maura

Chapter XLIX Larobe And Fawn

Chapter L Glory And Maura

Chapter LI Maura And Larobe

Chapter LII Enlightenment

Chapter LIII Maura And Larobe

Chapter LIV Maura And Larobe

Chapter LV The Escape

EPILOGUE

This work is dedicated to Mrs. Daisy Kemp without whom it may never have happened.

CHAPTER I

W hen Larobe was six years old he meandered among waves along a beach that he thought was the most beautiful in the whole world. The subtle white-capped water glimmered in the silver sunlight as it rolled upon the white sand and gently died before it reached the darkly green forest of which the sunlight made a tapestry of warm light and shadows just beyond the beach Just a hundred feet or so further back from the waves was his father, mother and younger brother. Larobe’s father had very dark brown skin though not as dark as some and was very thickly muscled. He was a tall man, well over six feet tall and quite handsome with plump lips and a wide sort of flat nose but not too flat. His hair which grew close to his head was black, even and trimmed His eyes which watched over his family were brown like the bark of an acacia tree and shone with the love of a proud father and husband. Today while holding onto his youngest son he lay atop the white sand on a straw blanket resplendent in a full flowing blue and green dashiki of which the colors flowed in and out of each other and came to stop just below his knees. He was watching his wife who was a few feet away preparing their meal upon a wooden table made from a tree trunk near an open fire in a slightly dug out open pit. She was browner than her husband who was almost black and today she was wrapped in an elegant red gown that hugged her upper body and flowed from her waist gradually widening in a flow of crimson splendor until it stopped just above her feet which were buried in the warm sand. Her luxuriant brown eyes sat beneath a high slightly receding forehead and her nose was a little keener than her husband’s. Her cheeks sat high on her sculptured face. She was tall, though not as tall as her husband, and her hair was braided in short plaits and was tied with a red band which matched her gown. Larobe thought the only way to describe her was to say she was exquisite; this is how his father referred to the markets of Timbuktu whenever he returned from a trip there. Timbuktu is where his father purchased his mother’s gown and Larobe’s boat, which was now being lapped by the brilliant waves and overturned. Larobe picked up his toy and continued to wander along the beach. He was a tall

lad for his age and had inherited his mother’s more slender body although he had his father’s features and his skin was just as dark. He was thinking how much he enjoyed these picnics with his parents and baby brother. When his mother had prepared everything, there would be fruits and fish and drinks sweetened with honey that his father and other villagers had procured from the highest trees in the forest. Meanwhile he wandered among the ebb and flow of the silver and white waves sometimes letting them lap at his calves as he sailed his toy boat and continued his roving along the seaside frolicking in all the beauty that abounded here. His mind also wondered as he wandered and he thought about other worlds and people beyond this beach and his village. He imagined what it would be like to sail a real ship off into the ocean. He thought of himself as captain of a big ship traveling to far off ports. His father had told him about how the ancestors had traded with people in a far off land who had long silky black hair and a lighter brown, almost tan, skin color. He longed for adventure and to meet other people in foreign lands. He was sure he would go there someday. His thoughts took him to visit villages and cities near and far, and he would meet many interesting people and explore many lands of wonder and intrigue. As he contemplated these events he roamed farther and farther from his family as he was completely lost in his deliberation. Man, he thought I can’t wait to grow up and discover new worlds. And then, suddenly he was jostled from his musing by a frightening scene. He came upon men in chains and ropes who were being herded into large wooden boats with oars all around. The men doing the herding were unlike any he had ever seen before. They were pale with a sort of red or pink tint to their skin and dark wet stringy hair which hung from their heads and faces. There was much wailing and yelling and utter chaos. Larobe spied some rocks near the forest and quickly ran there to hide. He didn’t know what was going on but his young mind sensed there was danger here. From his hiding place Larobe witnessed the most vicious vision of his young life. Some of the men being driven were bleeding from grisly wounds where the chains and ropes had torn into the flesh about their ankles and necks. They were being beaten with whips and longs sticks as they were pushed, kicked and hurled onto the long boats. This activity was boisterous and he wondered how he had

come so near this terrible scene without hearing the clamor. Where were his parents? Did they not hear this uproar? Had he wandered so far and had they not called to him; oh how did he come to this awful place? He was thinking these thoughts and that he had better get back to his family when suddenly he felt a wet clammy hand on the back of his neck. “Well what have we got here,” said a raspy voice as a short and thick pale man with stringy brown hair lifted him kicking and screaming from his hiding place. “Put me down; put me down!” Larobe screamed. But the pale man could no more understand him than Larobe could understand the pale man. Not that it would have mattered for Larobe was hurriedly taken down to the water and thrust onto one of the long boats where another pale man immediately stepped into his tiny chest with a wet black boot to keep him from thrashing about or leaping from the boat. “Alright, let’s get off this shore before some of them others get here,” Shouted one of the pale men! “We need to hurry! One of them English ships might show up! Wallop any of them who are trying to get away! Don’t let them jump!” This was all said very hurriedly and loudly as the pale men beat shoved and kicked the Africans into their long boats. Everything was rushed now as the four long boats were hastily rowed out into the ocean where a huge ship awaited them. The oars were manned by four pale men while another three or four furiously tried to keep their captives aboard. The Africans became desperate to escape when they saw the huge ship because they had heard of the severe treatment that was meted out on the slave ships. The crew beat, whipped and held onto the Africans as well as they could, yet some managed to escape taking all that were chained together with them. Some were hauled back into the boat by holding onto the last one. Others were simply held by the chain or rope as they thrashed about in the water while the boats made their way into the ocean. Most of those who jumped and escaped the efforts of the pale men did not make it to the shore since they were chained hand and foot and to each other but they jumped anyway. When they arrived at the ship, Larobe and the men were forced off the smaller boats onto the huge ship; and although they resisted they were dragged and pushed onto to the deck where there were many posts and ropes and masts holding the sails. The deck itself was creaky and the salt water had rotted some

of the planks but it was still sea worthy. When they had all been transferred from the long boats, one of them was immediately shot and Larobe was mortified, as one of the captives lay bleeding and dying before his eyes. He had never seen a rifle or its consequences before and the deafening report of the rifle and its results silenced all aboard and dispelled all resistance. And then again they were being dragged, pushed and kicked; this time into the hold of the ship where he fell onto bodies of men and women who were restrained by ropes and chains. There were people everywhere, there was not room to move about because they were so tightly packed. On the walls of the hold ledges had been built about three feet above the floor so that more people could be stacked. The stench was overwhelming and cries and moans were the only sounds emanating here. Larobe’s only reaction to the hold was involuntary as he retched and heaved and his body fluids ed those already on the floor. After what seemed like hours, Larobe regained some control of his body and as his eyes adjusted to the darkness of the hold he beheld a terrifying scene. What he saw were the emaciated bodies of men and women strewn around and upon each other in a dank, dark disease infested chamber filled with their moans of pain, sickness and loathing. This had such a crushing effect on him and he imagined that he was really not here and that he must be dreaming until the stench drifting through this den of agony caused him to cover his nose; and the slime from his hands made him realize that he was undeniably here and he was in a very bad situation. While Larobe tried to recall things his father had told him about bad situations, some of the pale men entered the hold and bound the new captives to the old ones and to the poles. As he witnessed the sad scenario before him he wanted to cry out to his mother but he knew that she would not hear him. He didn’t know what to do: his father had not prepared him for a situation such as this. As his eyes became adjusted to the dark, Maura, one of the men who were captured with Larobe saw this child sitting in the midst of this wretchedness and called to him. “You there, boy, come over here.” “What, who’s calling out,” Larobe answered. “It is I,” Maura said motioning with his head. “Come here.” Maura was only a few feet away but he was bound by chains to a pole and to

another captive. Although most of the captives were in a sitting or lying position, Maura had managed to get to his feet albeit in a stooped position. He could see Larobe slipping on the floor which was mushy and slick with human excretions, as he made his way towards him. When Larobe was very near, Maura began speaking in a soothing whisper. “Don’t worry little man,” He said softly. “There are many of us here. We will overcome this. It is good that you are unrestrained. We shall use that to our advantage.” Larobe was on his hands and knees now. The floor was too slick for him to walk upon so he crawled through this mishmash of human urine, feces, sweat, blood and other bodily fluids. He looked up into the strong black face of Maura. Since Maura was stooping their faces were only inches apart. “What can I do,” he asked tearfully? “You must move among us and be our communications link. Try to find out where the others are from and how they came to be here. See if there are others who speak as we do,” Maura whispered. “But it’s so dreadful here. I don’t know what to do. I, I don’t know how. I, I don’t…” Larobe started but did not finish. “Shhh,” Maura cut him off. “Now you mustn’t be afraid. You must be strong. I am counting on you. We may all have to count on you.” He soothed. But who was he kidding: he himself was afraid; they were all afraid for they knew not what awaited them. With Maura’s reassuring words Larobe began to calm down and he again tried to his father’s words about bad situations as he began to move about in the darkness, his every sense assaulted by the stench and cries and fluids of human misery. His feet slipped on a floor ravaged with excrement and bile. He fell and now his arms and body were covered with this slimy mess. He tried to wipe this foul-smelling, ill-feeling matter from his body; but this only speeded it over his tiny torso. He picked himself up and tried again but the darkness would not allow him to see where he was going and he tripped over bodies that were strewn about the slimy floor and again he fell into that dreadful substance. It was no use, regardless of how much he wanted to be that little man that Maura was counting on, he was only a child and he was overcome by the horrendous

conditions that beset him. He began to cry, but his cries were no more heeded that were the wails and whimpers of the many other miserable souls here. As Larobe sat among his fellow captives in this most vile of circumstances with the tears streaming from his eyes abetting the slime which covered his body, he thought of his family. What if they were captured? Were they on a boat such as this? Were they on this boat? As thoughts of his family seized his young mind he began to crawl about crying out for them. “Mama, Ababa, Mama, Ababa!” The sounds of a small child crying out for his parents only served to awaken the pity and empathy of the others and the hold of the ship became even more despondent as the sorrowful sounds reverberating here was occasioned by this epitome of human suffering. On the upper deck of the ship much wailing could be heard wafting from the hold most days, but today the weeping and whimpering seemed even more pathetic than usual but the men there paid no heed. They knew that in a few days that the new captives would be in a much weakened state and then they would enter the hold and clean it. The captives would be brought from the hold at this time and fed a meal of boiled beans or maybe rice or com meal mush or salted meat but they would only be given enough to keep them alive. This was done to keep the captives weak but not to a point which endangered their lives; this was the way of the business of trading in human flesh. Captain Borikov was a tall heavyset man with light, almost yellow hair dangling from beneath a dark pointed hat with the brim upturned on both sides and meeting at a point in the front. He had a thin yellow beard and moustache that encircled a grim thin-lipped mouth and he considered himself lucky to have come upon these Africans resting on the beach. He and some of his crew had gone ashore to gather fruit and to hunt some small animals when they saw them and surprised them by surrounding the Africans and firing their rifles, and when the Africans started toward them, one of them was immediately shot. The shock of seeing their companion dying and bleeding in an instant caused them to drop their weapons which were spears and bows and arrows when motioned to do so by the invaders. They were then binded and chained. The Africans were quite puzzled by this

quick capture until they saw the ship anchored at sea and then the terror of all they had heard about slavery and a new world overcame them and they thrashed about and did all that they could to avoid capture until two more of their party were shot. The others who were in the hold had been purchased from Arabians, Africans and some European whites and some who called themselves Jews, however the trade in Africans had been banned in the old world by this time, but the practice was very much alive. Therefore the traders had to obtain their humans for sale wherever they could. They also had to be very much on the lookout for the British vessels that scoured the African coast in search of those who defied the law. Now the crew got ready to sail to the new world where their cargo of humans would bring more income than it would in Europe but the journey would be long, grueling and dangerous. Besides the natural danger of treacherous weather, there was the possibility that the captives would attack them and try to escape making the journey even more menacing, but if they arrived with enough of their cargo alive the profits could be enormous. Of course the conditions in the hold would cause many deaths but the captors could not chance letting the Africans out of the hold for very long because of the threat they posed to the captors and the chance they would dive into the sea to escape. Yet they would need to keep as many of the captives alive as possible in order to turn a worthy profit. On the day when the hold was cleaned the newer captives were brought out first and although they were tied and chained hand and foot, they were also tied to each other and to the masts and posts of the ship to prevent them from attacking or jumping overboard. The captors had much experience with captives and they took no chances that they would escape or attack. Eventually all the captives were brought from the hold and many of them were pulled or dragged because they were so weak. When Larobe grew accustomed to the sunlight he saw men and women with festering sores who could only lie in place and moan, and others who were so emaciated that their entire skeletons seem to protrude through their skin. He also saw the dead and nearly dead who were piled near the ship’s edge whom the crew was tossing into the swirling sea. This vision so devastated Larobe’s spirit

and he was sure that these pale men were the demons of some of the stories he had heard and his frantic eyes prowled for the only soul here that might be able to offer him a bit of respite from this horrific spectacle. Larobe found Maura near the center of the vessel chained to the others and to chains that were attached to the ship’s deck and still bound hand and foot. He threw himself against his legs weeping and sobbing to no end. “Now, now, little man,” Maura coaxed. “You must be strong, and there will be time for remorse later.” But even as he spoke these words the scene unfolding before him had sickened him so that he himself felt the quickness of spirit ebbing from his body and he had reared against the chains until he realized the futility of his force which only served to cause more agony to those chained to him. His eyes now focused on Larobe and perhaps it was the presence of this small child that kept him from going insane but Larobe could not answer him: he could only weep and weep more. Maura tried to soothe him but he considered his own disillusionment at this appalling circumstances unfolding before him and the dismay of the others and realized that a child as young as Larobe could not be expected to cope with such a savage situation and so he merely cooed, “Now, now little man.” Below deck salt water and ammonia were used to clean the hold. The excrement and other crud was scraped into barrels and cast into the sea. This was done to insure that the ship would arrive at its new world port with a live cargo. The captives were given salted meat and water before they were thrown back into their miserable chamber and Larobe, who was still not chained, clung to Maura every minute. Maura was content to try and soothe him; he realized that the tragedy that plagued them was just as much beyond the comprehension of this child as it was outside his understanding. After the cleaning there were small tubs and slop buckets placed in the hold but the chains made it impossible for most to use them and many were too weak so they just got kicked over in most attempts to do so. So in a day or two, this rotting cavity of the ship was just as defiled as before and this miserable multitude again abided in the dismal demented deathly surroundings which not only caused demise and disease but produced, if not an insanity, a hatred which

would endure for generations.

CHAPTER II

Maura

M aura squatted among the filth and wretchedness but refused to submit to the hopelessness of his situation. He was now chained to a wooden pole and another captive. He didn’t know how long he had been on this ship. In this rank darkness he could see those who had succumbed to the conditions and now lay on the floor amid the waste. The body to which he was chained lay on the floor covered with bile and feces and whatever other obscene fluid that the floor contained. As he strained to accustom his eyes to the darkness he thought that he could see those like himself who remained on their feet, albeit stooped and bending. He looked in front and saw Larobe still standing and clinging to his leg and he now took his inspiration from a small child and he thought of the day he was captured. Maura awakened that morning to the drums bearing an urgent message that whites had been seen nearby and he hurriedly dressed and made his way to the meeting place in the center of the village of one and two room houses made of mud and grass and leaves. This settlement was not far from the sea and the salty sea breezes brought with them the scent of danger as they wafted in with the rhythm of the drums. The village was constructed with two rows of about twenty houses facing another two rows of twenty or so houses across a grassy area of a few yards and was surrounded by forest; there were a couple of fruit palms that stood at both ends of the grassy plot. The men assembled in the center of the village with their weapons and decided to pursue the pale men who had been spotted not far away. As the party traipsed into the forest they came upon another group from a nearby village who were also seeking the whites. “Let us combine in our hunt for the pale ones.” Said the leader of the group. “Let it be so.” Answered the men of Maura’s village.

And so the men of the two villages broke into four groups so they could better search the forest, but still they found no sign of them and they met at a prearranged site which was a small clearing in the forest with a melodic creek nearby that dribbled bubbly over small rocks and sang its quiet song of splishes and splashes as it swished downstream. Some logs and natural flat stones made this a natural meeting place and the men were seated and drinking water and discussing the whereabouts of the pale men when they were set upon by their captors. First there was a loud noise like they had not heard before and the men leapt to their feet grabbing their spears, shields and bow and arrows, but the weapons of the pale men reported again and one of their hunting party lay writhing and dying before them. The men had not seen such weapons before but after the initial shock, they started toward the pale ones again and the pale men fired shot guns this time and two more of the hunting party fell before them in a heap of blood and guts. This completely frightened the Africans and they dropped their weapons when gestured to do so by the pale men. While some of the pale men went to fetch chains and ropes the Africans were herded into a circle and surrounded by the pale men and after they were bound, they were forced down to the sea where they saw the ship that awaited them. Maura ed the stories he had heard about the journey into the new world but nothing he had heard had prepared him for the wretched predicament he now faced. Most of the men who were captured with Maura were now scattered among the others here and he had no way of communicating with them. He called out to one he knew; “Mlani, Mlani!” But his only answer were the anguished cries of others. He had long stopped trying to get Larobe to circulate for it was an impossible task for a child of six or seven. And so he was content to talk to Larobe to keep them both from going insane as he stooped among those who moaned and wailed as they wallowed in the filth. Much of the wailing was prayer and words to the ancestors and to the Deity Romokoko. This was the deity of Maura and with Larobe clinging to him he sometimes called out, “Romokoko, what have You done to us? What have we done to You?” He was then silent but he would eventually answer himself. “It is a test, it is a test; our wise Lord would not forsake us.” Although Maura spoke these words he could not help questioning why they had come to such a fate.

And so this journey continued for days like this with men and women and one small child agonizing in the bowels of a ship with only their distressed cries and prayers to sustain them as they survived day after day amidst filth, disease and decay. Maura still spoke reassuringly to Larobe and this somehow helped to sustain himself because he now took on the responsibility for this small child and his purpose was now doubled: not only must he survive but he must also see that this child survives. Most of the Africans here were from the south of Maura’s village. Some were from cities and others from small villages. Some had been the price of goods as they had been in the unfortunate position of having been captured in battle. Still others had been tricked by promises of treasure and some had been captured as Maura had. They were from many places. Maura recognized Susus, Awikam, Ashanti, Berbers, Yoruba, lbibois, Efiks, Ibo, Seke, Krumen and others. There were even Egyptians, Ethiopians and Bantu. He knew of these people because he had visited many of their villages and cities such as Timbuktu, Mali, Benin, Kongo, Menbombe and other places, and he was able to recognize their features and marking when they were brought to the deck for feedings. As for Maura he was from Kanga, a village in the eastern north in Kush, but his father told him he was of Ethiopian and Hebrew blood. “You are born of royalty of two bloods,” he said. “Your ancestor, the great Nubian queen of Ethiopia heard of this most wise and comely black king of the North and went in search of him. He received her in his palace for some time and when she returned to her home she was with child, who was the rightful heir to both thrones. Indeed, he became ruler of the land of the burnt skins in Ethiopia but the throne of the North of the Hebrews was never bequeathed him. This is your blood, this is who you are. You are chosen, these are your ancestors, and so no matter where you go–you and your offspring will always be royalty.” He would these words always. Still at feeding times those who were able were made to dance and hop about as best they could while chained and they would always begin to sing. One of the crew would strike a beat on a loud drum or barrel and the captives would begin to sing pitiful, melancholy laments, or words of combat which the crew never understood, while they hopped about. The pale men thought it strange that those in such deathly positions could sing while they danced. And they never knew why the Africans sang, nor did they care; their only purpose was to keep the human cargo alive; so if the exercise was accompanied by song although it was

sorrowful or combative it was not discouraged. Yet at times, there were others who would not eat and who preferred starvation to the miserable existence of the hold and they were force fed by searing their lips with hot coals until they opened their mouths. Other times thumbscrews were used to force their mouths open. As the days ed, these and other tortuous behaviors by the crew added to the anger of the captives and caused their hate for their captors to intensify. The pale men were careful to bind their captives with chains at first, but as the journey continued and the captives became weaker, there was less need for chains while in the hold, except for Maura and a few others, so they just forced them out of and into the hold after each cleaning and feeding, and the captives because of their weakened state were totally compliant. However one day while the hold was being cleaned; three men and a woman managed to free themselves and they attacked and overpowered one of the crew . But this was a futile event. Before they could manage to escape or free any of the others, they were overwhelmed by the rest of the crew. Maura and the others could only watch as the rest of the events of the day unfolded. First the four were tied to the mast of the vessel and a blade was ran through one of the men and as they all stood bound to the mast; his heart and liver were severed from his bloody torso. These were boiled in some of the water from the sea and force fed to the other three. After this horrible display, the other men were slain in the same manner as the first and cast into the ocean but the woman, however, received a different fate. She was flogged across her back with a leather whip and was left at the mast for days with salted bandages on her wounds and when the captives were returned to the hold, her pathetic cries could be heard above all the other misery aboard this ship. In four days when the captives were again taken out of the hold, she was yet again flogged and bandaged in the same way. Mercifully she died after two such bloodlettings. This insane punishment although it intensified the hate of the captives for their captors, it served to discourage others from trying to escape. Maura later learned that the crew could treat the captives with such cruelty because they themselves were treated cruelly. They barely got more to eat than the captives. And when one of them took more food he was flogged with a

leather whip. This mistreatment of the crew was calculated to cause them to seek their revenge against the captives and it worked very well. This left Maura to ponder whether the survivors of this journey would encounter conditions worse than those encountered on this voyage?

CHAPTER III

Maura And Larobe

E verything was again hurried as Captain Borikov, his wet yellow hair now hanging in draggles, stood at helm of the ship and barked orders. “Tighten up on that rope, git them boats ready to drop; we’re not going to take all day getting these darkies outa here!” The crew was scurrying about dropping the long boats and tying the ship with long thick ropes to a wooden pier which extended many yards out into the ocean. “Alright, start bringing them niggers up that can walk! We’ll start moving them first!” He bellowed. Those that could still walk were brought up first and forced into the long boats by shoving, striking or kicking or any other means to hurry the process. This activity was frenzied as the captives were hauled from the hold amid a din of noise and callous skirmishes as the crew shouted instructions which the captives did not understand and were whacked with long sticks when they did not obey. The cries of these only added to the racket of these doings and it now became a litany of shrieks of pain and pleas for mercy which were answered with screams of disdain and scorn As they tumbled into the vessels and righted themselves and became accustomed to the light, they saw many of their fellow captives being yanked from the hold by the chains which bound them which caused ghastly gashes and sores to run and bleed. However they also saw others who had not survived the journey who were tossed into the choppy green waters and knew not if these were the lucky ones. As the long boats neared the beach they beheld a shoreline not unlike the one they had left some weeks ago and at first they thought they were home. The beach was sandy and white and the forest here was not unlike that of their home with tropical trees and other vegetation that gently swayed in the warm sea breezes. However although the captives were at first fooled by this scenery, their

treatment and when they realized that most of the men on shore were pale men assured them that they were not home by any means. Now they were loaded onto horse drawn wagons with wooden plank floors and shallow wooden side boards set on metal axles with high iron wheels which encased tall wooden spokes, and they rode along on the softness of a road of underbrush that led deeper into the forest until they reached a clearing having a long lean-to shed about ten feet high. It was constructed of posts made of tree trunks and a slanted corrugated tin roof; it had no sides. It had been constructed for the shelter of the captives and it was filled with loose hay and straw. Here they unresistingly drifted into the custody of other pale men who in addition to chaining their ankles and hands also fitted some of the more muscular and strong ones with iron collars attached to long wooden poles and thrust them into the straw. The captives remained here for about nine weeks and were fed reasonably well with rice and fruits and boiled meats in order to regain their health and vitality while they remained chained to each other and under constant guard. Of course there were those who did not reclaim their vigor and died or remained too weak to function and were taken away. The captives did not know where. When some of them were fit enough they were again loaded onto a ship but this trip was only a day or so until they arrived at another tropical coast and were then taken to another compound like the one they had left. The conditions in the hold of the ship were less terrifying this time because there were less captives and their surrounding had no time to deteriorate, but the lean-to that they were taken to was an exact replica of the other one. Here they remained—chained and under guard for a lifetime so Maura figured but it was only for a little over a year. Larobe had so taken to Maura that he would not be denied his presence and he wailed and yelled and cried whenever they were separated until the guards relented and he was now chained to Maura as they were forced to sit under the lean-to with the other captives. Here the captives were trained to be slaves. Maura was one of those with the iron collar around his neck and he and the others were led about with the long sticks and the others who only had chains were made to walk with their chains. This was done to keep the captives agile and to teach them obedience. Orders such as “stop” or “turn” or “go back” were

shouted to them as they walked to teach them how to react to white people and any perceived disobedience was punished with whacks from a stinging whip which most of the many angry guards carried; they also carried shotguns, rifles or pistols and the captives knew very well the consequence of these. This training and guarding of the captives was necessary because most of them did not comprehend the language and also because the captors were very wary that the captives might escape, and also because a disobedient captive was not marketable. However there were also those here both men and women who had been here for generations and understood the pale men but had no knowledge of Africa and these, at the instructions of the guards, showed the others the correct response to the commands. They also used machetes and reapers on the forest vegetation to show the newer captives how to harvest cane and others crops, but the captors only let the newer arrivals watch this activity because they did not trust them with these instruments. Yes some of these here were also of those that were on the ship with Maura but many had come from other places and spoke different languages and besides conversation was not allowed among the captives. The only time they were allowed to talk was when they were being taught to say “yes sir” and “no sir”, or when they were being taught some other slave discipline. Therefore there was not much conversation except for Larobe’s constant questioning of Maura which brought a strong rebuke and a whack to Maura with a long thin whip from one of the guards each time he heard Larobe speak. So on this day as Maura was seated among the straw hay beneath the long leanto with Larobe shackled to his ankle chains, he tried to gather himself in the shade to ease the torment of the collar burning his neck as the sun sank it fiery rays into the metal; but the pole attached to the collar greatly hampered his maneuverability. However he was further made miserable by whacks from the guards’ whips each time Larobe pestered him. “Where will we go next? What will happen to us? Will we go home?” The queries were in rapid sequence and Maura tried to quiet the lad in order to quell the whacks that he received for this chatter. “Shhh,” Maura whispered. “One question at a time. I don’t know what is going

on. I have heard stories about slavery in a new world. We must be quiet and listen.” Larobe looked very troubled. He didn’t know what slavery was; he just wanted his mother and father. “Can I stay with you?” He asked. “Sure you can,” Maura grimaced as the whacks with the thin whip continued and he jolted in agony with every lash. “Now please be quiet.” He shushed Larobe by putting his hand over his mouth because he wanted to stop the whacks with that stinging whip. But Maura knew only with answers would Larobe relent so he whispered to him. “You may stay with me but you must be quiet for now.” On a hot and steamy morning some months later when they had finally settled down and Larobe was noiseless in the lean-to they were awakened by a high crackling gruff voice say: “Bring that big buck and his pickininny and about five of them other strong looking ones and five of them strong wenches. Judge McCabe is coming today and he’ll be looking for some strong stock.” They sat up to see a short stumpy pale man with white hair and a white moustache and a gravel voice who commanded this! He was dressed in a dark suit and a wide felt white hat and black boots and carried a walking cane; he had purchased Maura and about twenty five other captives from another white man who had purchased them from Captain Borikov and some others. Maura did not understand everything he said but he knew that he was that big buck with the pickininny because he was always referred to that way and he now recognized whenever he was wanted. This time Maura and the others were taken to a small rather non-descript town with a dusty main street lined with dreary weather beaten gray one and two story wooden storefront buildings displaying wooden signs hanging from dilapidated porches. Some of the signs that said hotel or restaurant or doctor’s office or some other business were barely dangling on as the nails had worked their way out of one end. The structures faced each other across the brown dirt incrusted street that whirled with a dust devil now and then. This town was about a mile from the compound and it had at one end of the street a hanging gallows and at the other end was the platform where Maura and Larobe were to be taken; however anyone just ing by would think that none of these business are operating except for the gallows and the platform.

There were many captives here surrounded by lots of pale men, dressed in dull brown or some other dark color pants and plaid shirts and brogan shoes who carried whips and guns, and drove them like cattle toward the platform at the end of the street where other pale men gathered. Many of the other captives here were also in chains although some were not bound, but Maura recognized no one from his village although he thought he saw a vaguely familiar face from the other hunting party. He couldn’t be sure; besides, he couldn’t get close enough to speak to him as the captives were shoved, jerked, dragged and beaten until they understood they were to go and sit on the ground just behind the platform where other pale men gathered. Although Maura did not completely understand the language, he understood what was happening here. “Bring that big black one and his pickininny,” graveled the short stumpy man with the grainy voice! At this behest Maura was jerked by his chain that was now attached to the iron collar about his neck and prodded with a long stick until he got to his feet. His and Larobe’s chains were separated from the others and they were almost dragged to the platform by another pale man yanking on his neck chain while Larobe clung to his calves. “Now what am I bid for this fine buck?” The stumpy man said to the throng of pale men gathered here as he poked at Maura with his cane while Maura was made to stand erect by means of snatches on his collar chain. His voice had now changed to more high-pitched sound but it still grated as if it was scratching across stone. “He’ll make a good worker and a find breeder. Why just look at this fine little one he has already sired. What say we start the bidding at…?” The man started to specify a price but was cut off by a bidder. “Fifteen hundred dollars and throw his pickininny in with him!” Judge Leroy McCabe shouted. The judge was a tall and stout pale man with dreary grey hair and moustache. He was dressed in a black suit with a black and white plaid vest and white starched shirt with a small black string tie. He also wore a black wide brim hat and black boots where his pant legs were tucked. The Judge was in his late forties even though he looked much older and Larobe and Maura thought he was dressed strangely; in fact all these pale men dressed strangely to these two African captives, especially the ones doing the bidding. “Sold!” Shouted the auctioneer. He knew that no one would bid against the judge when he made such a high bid.

This was a very abnormal price but the Judge did this from time to time to let the sellers know that he appreciated their stock however he would easily recoup his generosity by the sons that Maura would sire. A big strong buck could sire many good slaves and tall muscular men such as Maura were used just as one would use a bull among his cows. He had already purchased six others and now they and Maura and Larobe were led to another wagon like the other one that had two horses harnessed to it. The wagon was filled with burlap sacks of grain or seed and had one long seat suspended on iron braces above the sacks across the front. Here sat two pale men and then another pale man bound Maura and the others together to the back of the wagon and ed the ones on the seat, but he sat facing the captives with a rifle across his lap. “The Judge is gonna stay in town for a while. He wants us to get these darkies out to the ranch.” Sam Bronson who was the foreman on the Judge’s ranch said to the wagon driver. Sam was a tall thin pale man whose hair did not hang from beneath his hat like most of the pale men Maura had seen. In fact none of these men’s hair hung from beneath their hats and they were dressed like the men who herded them here. They wore pants like those issued to the captives but the captives pants barely ed their knees while theirs were past their ankles, and they wore plaid shirts and thick brogan shoes and their hats were of straw while the captive men had no shirts, shoes or hats. Though the captive men wore no shirts and their pants were all of same dull brown color, the captive women had been given some loose fitting cotton dresses of brilliant colors but none of the captives wore shoes as they trekked the rocky and hard road, along behind the wagon. They were chained all in a line behind the crusty wagon with ankle chains that barely left enough slack to walk. These were ed by another chain as each one was chained to the other; Maura who was in front next to the wagon still had the collar on but it was linked by a two foot chain that hung from the collar now instead of the wooden pole. They were ed to the wagon by another length of chain that ran from Maura’s ankle chains to the wagon. The party moved along for miles; four women brightly dressed in their colorful dresses and head rags and three men in their dingy pants and bare chested and one nearly naked small boy sweating and wearying in the blistering sun,

skipping and hopping on this rocky road each time their feet suffered some hurt. Once or twice one or more of them fell and was dragged until the others could help them to their feet. However the pale men only laughed at this but the cruelty of the whites had ceased to amaze Maura. The road was quite unlike the soft underbrush of the forest that they were used to and they had trouble keeping their balance with the small rocks digging into their feet. “You niggers better keep up. I don’t want to have to drag you along and put extra work on these animals.” The wagon driver shouted! And though Maura understood not a word, he knew these were not words of endearment. Suddenly, ahead of the driver Maura saw the clearing of a ranch. At first he saw only open land with short grasses green and flowing in warm summer breezes, but as the road became smoother and softer as they got closer there were gardens of zinnias, marigolds, hibiscus and other exotic blooms and shrubs. Just between the flower gardens and shrubs was a curved walkway of flat white stones lined with stately elm or oak trees that led to a huge white house with vast columnar pillars reaching to the roof. There was an upper and lower porch both back and front and there were windows all around both stories. It was surrounded on both sides with red yellow and white petals of roses yielding salient sweet fragrances and made the house appear to rise right out of these. In the back of the house where two towering pecan trees soared were vegetable gardens with various sections divided by red bricks laid flat as to form walkways which was the same as the walkway that led to the back porch which was screened. There was a worn path from the garden that led to two shacks without porches that sat away back from the gardens. Some distance to the east of the house further from the shacks were orchards of apple, peach, pear, and fig trees all planted in perfect rows. On the west side of the house some distance away were several barns and stables with haylofts and just a little further was a long bunkhouse where the white guards and overseers slept. In the distance he saw fields of crops where the sugar cane grew like corn stalks. He also got a glimpse of the waist high cotton fields and the tobacco fields with it tall stems and broad leaves and the many captives at work: men women and children. Maura spotted three pale women and one large brown woman on the upper patio and he also spied an old black man working in one of the gardens. He also saw

several pale men with rifles or pistols. Just then the wagon veered off the main road and headed down a smaller road and Maura saw just a few hundred feet from the main house two rows of twentyfive or thirty rundown gray clapboard shacks facing each other across a dirt plot of a few yards that looked as if any gust that came along would demolish them. One shack on the end sat between them and the big house. At the other end of the shacks was a pig pen filled with mud and slop and hogs, pigs, and piglets. All of these shacks had tin roofs all slanted toward the back but they had porches in the front that were covered by a roof that was slanted forward. The posts that held the porch roof were rotted and leaning creating the impression that they might tumble any minute. These shacks teetered precariously upon bricks and stones and were about a foot above the ground and just a few hundred or so feet beyond them was an area of forest which led to the swamp. Here the wagon stopped. Although the shack had rotted posts, a thick tree stump that was fitted with chains especially for shackling captives grew next to one decayed porch. “Take that big one to the middle shack and chain him to the whipping post. He ain’t been broken yet. We don’t want him running loose.” Sam called to the other men. “Put them others in whichever shacks that are empty and keep an eye on them. I’ll fetch somebody to help you watch them, and I’ll get Black Bob to watch that wild one.” Sam said. The driver answered him. “Okay, Sam, but you hurry back, it’s too many new darkies for Jim to watch alone and the Judge wants me to turn this here pickininny over to them niggers in the big house.” When Sam returned with a pale man and Black Bob, Maura was manacled to the whipping post and he could only watch as Larobe was dragged away kicking and screaming by the other pale man. Larobe was taken to the big house to be trained by African women who had never been to Africa, and whom the captors considered docile and domesticated. And Maura would start his life on the McCabe ranch under the tutelage of another captive and although he could do nothing now, there would come a time when he would his pledge to Larobe.

CHAPTER IV

Maura

B lack Bob who was assigned the task of training Maura didn’t really like his job as a breaker of new captives although to the hands and captives, he seemed to revel in it. He was a giant of a man whose head was always shaven. His skin was just as dark as Larobe’s and Maura’s, and his face was always in a scowl except when talking to the pale men. He had mean brown eyes, that showed no emotion except anger, set wide apart above his broad straight nose; and he was a very muscular man who seemed to have muscles in his temples, and though Maura was over six feet tall; Bob was even taller. The two men would spend much time together in the coming months and over time they would each reveal a yearning to be free. In the following months, every morning while Sam and George looked on, Bob would lead Maura down to the fields, with his ankle chains clinking in the morning quietness and the collar gnawing into his neck, and now an iron bit tearing the corners of his mouth. “Now come on boy,” Bob spoke harshly. “You got to learn to cut this cane just right. You got to earn your keep.” He roared this and other orders at him as he tugged on his bit. At first Maura didn’t understand a word but he quickly learned the language from Bob and the other captives, and those who worked for the Judge, but not as fast as he learned to anticipate which way Bob was going tug on the bit that was in his mouth which only intensified the pain already felt from the collar and ankle chains. At first his mouth was quite sore from the bit but as he learned to anticipate Bob’s movements and commands, he was able to alleviate much of the pain, besides Bob told him that the bit was just for control and he really did not yank on it as the white hands did when they controlled him. Still this situation kept Maura in pain day and night but he sensed that Bob was

being as lenient as possible under the circumstances and his rage was directed toward the whites. This went on for more than half a year and Maura learned to cut cane and tobacco and to hoe and pick cotton, but as time ed he also noticed that Bob treated him much more cruelly when the pale men were around. However when they were alone or in the yards, Bob’s tenseness eased and his face became more pleasant and he became just another captive who knew not how to free themselves from their depravity. In the yard there would be much activity. About ten fires were started and iron pots were brought from the shacks and hung on makeshift brackets just above the fires. There were about fifteen or sixteen equally numbered boys and girl under twelve years of ages with their ragged pants and girls with their ragged dresses running to and fro gathering wood so that the fires could keep going and another thirty or so who were a few years older who helped with the cooking and chores. The thirty or so older men sat on the dilapidated porches and watched as thirty or so women dressed in dirty pants and shirts just like the men, or some in ill-fitting cotton dresses prepared the food. Sometimes some of the men would have rabbits or some other animal to skin and add to the pots but all in all there would be much bustle and chatter in the yard. The children making games of their chores with little squeals and yells as they ran back and forth; the women talking to each other as they fussed over the pots and at the children, and the men on the porches would get up and preen now and then and have a story to tell. This took place most every night but it was not for long because the workers needed much rest. Most evenings after the chores of the day were completed the captives gathered in the area where the shacks faced each other and cooked and ate their meals and conversed with each other; but Maura had not been broken according to the whites, so he was still chained and not allowed to interact with the other captives so he took his meal alone on the raggedy porch with Black Bob. At these times the bit was removed from his mouth and he sometimes conversed with Bob who was assigned to watch him until he went to bed. One evening Maura asked Bob about the bit and the treatment that he received as opposed to the treatment of the other captives. “Just why is it that I am treated so differently?” He whispered. Maura had learned that everything that might offend

the whites had to be said in secret or there would be some terrible tragic retribution to bear. He had also learned that if a captive was trying to learn something or questioning anything that the Massa did, it was offensive to them; therefore he only questioned Bob when he was sure that no one could hear him. “Cause dey don’t think you is broken.” Bob whispered back. “You got to stop looking at dem so mean. You got to look at the others and see how dey act and act like dey do. Laugh and grin sometimes. Make dem think you is getting along all right.” “Is this why you treat me so mean?” Maura asked puzzled but still whispering. “I got to make dem white folks think I treats you mean all the time, cause iffen I don’t, then, dey will think you and me is plotting against them,” Bob answered in whispers. “Why is this so?” Maura asked? “Cause dey is afraid we will get together and slaughter dem cause dey treats us so bad.” He answered. “But why do they treat us so foul in the first place. Don’t they know that such ill treatment will make us want to slay them?” He asked. “I don’t know bout that.” Bob answered. “Dey’s some strange people-not like us niggers–dey think the worse dey treat us, the more we is gonna do as dey say. But you see, I always thought the better dey treat us, the better we is gonna act like dey want us to.” “That is one of the principles of nature.” Maura replied. “Maybe somehow they have a backwards spirit in them?” “I don’t know about dat neither.” Bob said. “I only knows how dey treat us niggers.” “And why do you keep calling us niggers.” Maura asked? “Cause dat is what dey call us. Dey say we is niggers but sometimes dey call us jigs or coons or darkies.” He answered.

“Well, I will not call us niggers.” Maura said adamantly. “You better.” Bob said looking scared. “And you better talk more like Me.” He said, referring to the command of the language Maura had. “Dey will beat you if you is uppity.” Although Maura had learned the language rather well, he did not know this word, uppity; he did not know that the word as Bob meant it was that he was getting out of his place, therefore he figured it meant human and he decided he would always act human. “You got to go on in to sleep now and don’t ask so many questions cause if any white folk sees us talking like this, dey will say we is plotting against dem. And if dey ever think that, Lawd have mercy on you and me,” Bob said cutting off his pupil’s questions. “And anyway,” He added. “If you start to act more like a nigger and respond to dem, I think dey will let me take the bit out your mouth in a week or so.” They both then rose and Bob followed Maura inside the barewooden-walled shack, which was empty except for a bed of straw in one corner. He shackled his ankle chains to a beam in the floor next to his straw berth which was covered with two drab army green blankets and left. Bob didn’t talk to Maura in the fields except to give orders or to instruct him because he was afraid one of the hands would think he was being too friendly toward him, but they continued to converse back at the shack. As per Bob’s advice Maura began to cast his eyes down whenever the white hands spoke to him instead of staring. He still had not brought himself to the point that he could speak to them in the dialect of Bob and he was even ashamed of the humbleness of his downcast manner but he needed to win their trust somehow so that he could be treated as the other captives and Bob was more than willing to teach him. As Bob had predicted, he took the bit from Maura’s mouth within a week, but the ankle chains and iron collar remained. In the following weeks when the soreness of his mouth was nearly healed he was pleased but he still questioned Bob about the chains. “Why must I continue to have these chains and collar?” He asked one evening. “Because you still don’t act like a nigger.” Bob answered. “You don’t answer when dey is talking to you. You is got to say something to make dem know you

is getting use to being a slave. When dey say, how you doing Sambo, you got to say I is fine Massa, show is a fine day, or something like that to let dem know you is a good nigger.” “But I am not a nigger nor am I a slave.” Maura whispered more loudly. “My ancestors were kings and queens and princes. I am an Ethiopian prince who stands to inherit the leadership of my village. Leadership has ed through my family for ages.” Bob nearly jumped out of his skin when he heard Maura talk this loud and he sheepishly looked around to see if anyone had heard him. “Over here you is a nigger and a slave.” Bob whispered much more quietly now. “You need to forget all that prince and Ethiopian stuff iffen you want dem chains off. You got to show dese white folk you know how to act, and stop talking dat prince stuff.” Over the next few months, Maura thought about what Bob had said and he began to see some merit to it. He knew he could do nothing with the chains on because each night Bob made sure he was well secured so there was no chance of him escaping. However although Sam Bronson had become accustomed to his silence, each day while in the cane field, he rode up on a brown stallion and prodded Maura. This poking was to test Maura’s resistance to slavery. “How you doing there ol black Sambo?” He would say as he poked him with a long stick. But on this day Maura had made up his mind that he would finally acquiesce to the final degradation. “Fine Massa, suh.” Maura answered grinning up at him, but that was as much as he could muster because he felt he was betraying something inside and he quickly changed his expression to one of disdain. But Sam was so taken aback by Maura’s reply that he sat astride his horse with his mouth gaping. He then turned the horse abruptly aside and rode off trampling the cane as he hurried away and never noticed Maura’s insolent countenance. That evening back at the shack Bob congratulated Maura and gave him further coaching. “That was good what you said to Massa Sam today, but you got to grin and add something like, ‘this o1 cane can’t beat me,’ so he’ll know you is coming along.” “But it hurt so much.” Maura grimaced.

“Does it hurt as much as dem chains and collar?” Bob lambasted him defiantly! “I done told you, you have to act like a nigger iffen you want dem chains off. You got to really make these white folks see dat you is a good nigger because dey is scared if dey turn you loose right now that you might break in the house and slaughter them, or you might try to run and take some of us with you.” Bob took a deep breath or sigh, Maura didn’t know which then he continued. “Man you don’t know what it is to be a nigger; you got to do everything dey tell you even though you know it’s wrong. If dey tell you to lash one of us or any other misdeed we have to do it or else dey will do the same thing to us.” As he was speaking Maura was recalling some of the treatment he had absorbed and witnessed and he understood why the captives act the way they do. He could see that Bob as the mean overseer was only an act that Bob felt that he had to play in order to save himself from punishment. So then he deduced that all the rest must just be acting in order to please the whites therefore there might be someone here he could trust. After that first time speaking to Sam, conversation began to come easier for Maura and although it still hurt, he kept his purpose in mind. Each time he said “suh” or “massa” or “sho is a fine day for cutting cane,” he figured he was that much closer to getting the chains removed and each evening Bob encouraged him. ‘’Now you is getting the hang of it,” Bob grinned. “You is becoming a real nigger.” Although Maura hated the word nigger, he understood the predicament Bob was in. Bob was born here, and though he had known his mother, neither he nor his mother knew who his father was. He knew nothing more of his ancestry because his mother knew none of hers, but they were only two of many who knew nothing of their lineage or of Cush, Alkebulan or Ethiopia. They were many here who were either conceived during one of the forced breeding sessions and never knew their parents or they were sold away from their parents when very young. As time ed Maura was allowed to work the fields without the collar but his ankles remained chained. He became one of the best cane and tobacco cutters and cotton pickers on the ranch. He also learned to grin and laugh when he responded to the white overseers. And although his feet were still chained, he was now allowed to sit in the shack yard and converse with the others but still he

said very little to anyone except Bob and he still sat on this ragged porch and watched as the captives went about their tasks of preparing food. Except for the children’s squeals most of the conversations appeared to be just the chatter of tired ranch hands but Maura was trying to learn all he could about the land and the people, both blacks and whites, so he listened to everything. “I when me and my mammy lived on the Cunningham place. We only had to work nine or ten hours a day.” Earl, a short brown African who was standing in front was speaking to about five or ten men who had gathered near one of the porches. He was known to things that were more pleasant than his present situation. “Ah, go on Earl, you know Massa Cunningham worked you just as hard as Massa McCabe.” Answered Leroy, a dark skinned African of medium build who was seated on one of the wobbly porches. “Well, I’ll tell you,” said another. “I don’t mind the work at all jes so the judge gives me a piece of meat for my stew now and then; I’d pick cotton and cut cane any day.” “You gonna pick and cut everyday whether the Massa gives you meat or not,” Another said. They all laughed at this. Maura sat on the edge of the rundown porch alone with Black Bob, with his back resting against one of the shabby poles that held the teetering roof, which looked as if it might tumble upon him at any moment; he had great interest in the proceedings. The fires in the center of the yard were bright now and the captives were going about their evening tasks before retiring for the night. Some of the women had pots hanging from the makeshift rods and others had pots setting directly in the fire. Others brought food from the shacks. Most of the food from the pots and shacks was shared by all. These captives would eat and converse like this most evening; just like one big family who lived here and worked for Judge McCabe. “Are there other ranches near here?” Maura leaned toward Bob, who was never far from him, and asked in a hushed whisper. He knew that talking about other places was taboo among captives. “Shore there is.” Bob answered in an equally hushed voice. “But you better not

let Massa Sam or dem others hear you asking about things like dat. Dey will for shore put that collar and bit back on you cause dey will think you is planning to run.” The captives never said running away because it was imbedded in them that regardless of where or when they ran there was always someone to bring them back and they had never known anyone who had ran away and not been caught. Many times they had witnessed the punishment of a captive who ran: from a lashing to cutting off limbs and even up to murder but some they never saw again. So they were taught by their captives even those who did not return were caught and killed. “Why don’t we all try to make our way to the sea and build a boat or do something to try and get away from here?” Maura asked. “Now don’t you go talking like that. Don’t you know that we couldn’t get nowhere near that water before all the whites in the land would be down on us? Besides, where would we go? No suh, don’t you go getting us in trouble with your talk of running.” Bob answered looking incredulously and scared. Maura started to say more but thought better; he figured he had said enough to Bob for now, but there had to be someone he could talk to; someone who was not afraid to make a break for freedom and he leaned against the pole and thought about his situation. No one would even talk about getting away; it was forbidden. Furthermore there was no one who spoke his language and besides it was also not allowed. He was chained and he knew not where he was, yet he was determined a “nigger’s” life would not be his life. All these thoughts flooded his mind as he contemplated his plight. While Maura thought, Bob was also thinking. All this talk about running was making him nervous because he knew if any one captive ran, things would get worse for all, especially for him, the overseer. But he didn’t think Maura would really run, he figured the collar and chains were causing this line of reasoning. “Iffen you stop talking about running and gets to be friendlier, I’ll tell Massa you is ready for the chains to come off,” he mumbled. This caught Maura by surprise. The chains off, he thought and his eyes lightened up. He hoped that he had not said these words aloud because his eagerness would surely alert Bob to his thoughts of running away but it had been so long

since he was chained. He had not been without chains since that day when he was captured. It had been at least fifteen to twenty seasons. He had lost count. However his thoughts were now of freedom since he heard these words and he could almost feel his autonomy creeping back to him but he dare not speak now and he hoped the light in his eyes did not reveal his thoughts. He decided he would be friendlier with everyone, both captives and captors so that he could begin to learn of the land, but most of all, he must find someone he could trust. However all of this must be done without arising suspicion. He also thought of Larobe. He had not seen him since they were first brought here, yet he knew that when he left, he would take Larobe with him.

CHAPTER V

Larobe

I nside the McCabe house was absolute splendor. An oversized high shiny wooden door opened into a marble vestibule where a magnificent hand painted vase sat just beside the varnished double doors with stained glass black Madonna and child atop. These doors led to the parlor. The parlor was wide and large with a high ceiling and white lace curtains and lavish couches and soft chairs upon lush carpets of the east which only partly covered a gleaming hardwood floor. The walls all painted white contrasted perfectly with the dark mahogany woodwork at their base and around the wide windows that covered most of the east wall. The other walls were adorned with portraits of the Judge’s family and ancestors interspersed with striking likenesses of landscapes and horses grazing is lush pastures. There was a very large portrait of the judge’s grandfather occupying most of the space over the fireplace between the mantel and the ceiling. The mantel itself contained three statues of white angels with smiling pink faces standing upon a white embroidered doily. A glistening chandelier of candles hung from the center of the high ceiling, and all the strategically placed shiny cherry or mahogany wooden tables with lamps that sat beside the couches and chairs were adorned with small white doilies, embroidered with subtle colors of green and yellow to match the lamp’s delicate globes of fragile glass. The wide windows adorned with heavy draperies and lace curtains across the east wall highlighted the grandeur of the room, with soft sunlight in the mornings and this finery was resplendently maintained throughout the house. Just beyond this room through the wide hallway on the left was a dining room with its polished floor and colorful rugs and thick open dark green draperies divided by white lace curtains in the middle. Another brilliant crystal chandelier hung above a long gleaming mahogany table with a white lace tablecloth with eight shiny wooden chairs with white cushion seats in the center of the room.

Near one wall was a very large breakfront displaying the finest chinaware and near another was a server adorned with a large golden candelabra with tall white candles. The other wall was mirrored with small glass shelves containing many glasses of many shapes and sizes behind a thick gleaming mahogany bar containing the finest whiskies and liqueurs. On the mantel above the fireplace was a large Statue of white Jesus on the cross bleeding from his wounds with a crown of thorns on his head. This room was immaculate and well lighted by the later morning sunlight which showed off its magnificence as it shifted from the parlor. Just down the hall was the library, which also had the same grand curtains, draperies and carpet as the dining room but its walls were faced with bookshelves containing many law and other books except for the windows and the space over the mantel where there was a large handwritten copy of the Lord’s prayer done in the style of old English which could be read from anywhere in the room. However there was also a locked cabinet above the poster containing parts of such secret books as the Rig Veda, The Mahabharata, The Upanishads, The Egyptian Book of the Dead, The Koran and other writings of Hippocrates, Plato, Aristotle, Saint Thomas Aquinas and other great thinkers such as Descartes, Anthanasius Kircher, Manetho, Thutmose IV, Prince Khaeweset and other Egyptian and Muslim thinkers. And it too had soft chairs paired with shiny tables and lamps, and a huge walnut desk with a gleaming satin finish which always had an open bible and papers lain about near the wall opposite the fireplace. Similarly to the other rooms the light upon the bright rugs and the delicate lamps as the sun went about it daily travels from window to window also flaunted the majesty of this room. In an extensive foyer just beyond the library and dining room and was an imposing spiral staircase that led to the upstairs bedrooms. The wall up the stairs was white just as the rest of the house and was adored with beautiful landscapes and the stairs themselves were wide and shiny marble while the railing which was polished sculpted brass curved with the stairs. From the foyer there was a hallway which lead to a large and roomy kitchen with it shiny hardwood floors and a six burner wood stove toward one wall, and a white wooden table and four chairs that sat in the middle of the room. It had white cabinets all around the upper walls except where the wide window adorned with short yellow curtains embroidered with white butterflies decorated

the window above the sink. The bottom walls were also cabinets with counter tops all around. On the wall opposite the sink where the stovepipe fit into the brick chimney that protruded a little were hung various skillets and cookware and decorative plates bearing likenesses of George Washington, Thomas Jefferson and other politicians and just behind the stove was the wood box. This is the room where Larobe received most of his training and a room that the whites hardly ever entered. Through the back door which sat in the middle of one kitchen wall was the back porch which was screened and was used mostly for storing firewood in winter. There were six bedrooms on the second floor but only five were occupied. The judge and his wife inhabited the front bedroom and each of his grown daughters occupied the two in the back of the house and two of the middle rooms were taken by Lee Lee and his slightly older sister Maureen. Each of these were just as lavish as the rest of the house with white lace curtains and silk bedspreads and colorful carpet and draperies to match the color of the bedspread covering the huge poster beds whether it be a pastel pink or green or blue. The bureaus, chiforobes, dressers and chests in these rooms were huge and of the finest quality of mahogany or cherry or walnut and were adorned with luxuriously trimmed mirrors and jewelry boxes and expensive cosmetics of various varieties except for Lee Lee’s and Maureen’s which only had a green globe lamp and some children’s books atop them. All the rooms were equal in size except for the Judge’s room which occupied the whole front of the house and was furnished with soft chairs in addition to the other furniture. The other rooms were divided by an expansive hallway covered with scarlet carpet and it too just as the bedrooms replicated the splendor of the house with it glossy tables shiny floor and globed lamps. Maybelle, Mamie and Blanch lived within the McCabe household and Larobe lived with them in the attic and at first Larobe slept with them but as he grew older they separated his portion with cardboard and planks. There was a small two feet by two feet window in back and front and on each side of the attic which let in some daylight but the women had a lantern for light otherwise. However because the roof was slanted to each side, there was not enough room for a person to stand erect except in the middle so there was only sleeping to be done here. The women each had cotton mattresses and quilts to sleep on that were placed just off the the middle of the attic but Larobe only had quilts in his

segment which was on the other side. There was a creaky ladder in the hallway next to the kitchen which could be let up or down that gave access to this space. Larobe had grown a lot in the five or six years he had been on the McCabe ranch and he was now more than eleven years old and close to five feet tall; and he had gradually grown accustomed to his duties and the people around the McCabe household even though he could not understand why this was to be his lot. The Judge and his family hardly ever said anything to him unless they were chastising him but the captive women that were here explained his duties and the manner in which he should carry himself. These three women captives did all they could to drum into his mind that he was a slave and that he must act like a subservient person. At first his young mind did not comprehend the haplessness of his situation but over time and after many lessons learned, he would come to recognize that the rules for white folk and black folk were not the same. On the day when the driver brought him to the big house and turned him over to three African women all very neatly dressed in black short sleeve dresses that stopped near their ankles and white bibbed aprons, he cried and screamed for Maura. But he eventually quieted down as they soothed and spoke to him in the strange language of the pale ones; and soon they were feeding him and taking turns patting his head and cheeks. Such cajoling went on for days and Larobe was deeply fascinated and it brought to mind his mother; how she would pamper him when he was hurt or afraid. But as he matured in the household it became apparent that he was expected to do whatever anyone in the house told him to do and whatever treatment he received for his efforts was strictly the purview of white folks. As he learned the language these women also taught him how to talk to white people because Larobe had learned to speak very well from the McCabe children and had taken to conversing as they did. “Now don’t you go saying no and yes to Massa and missus boy, you say no suh and yes maam.” They told him. “And you talk that way to the children too, you hear boy. You have to talk this way or Massa will whup you and whup us too cause he will think we taught you to sass him.” They told him every day until he could understand the lesson. Sometime later Maybelle onished him one day as she stood over the stove stirring pots and peeking into the oven and Larobe was seated at the table. “You is a house nigger now boy and you don’t know how lucky you is that Massa

didn’t put you in them fields. But still you can’t never forget that you is a nigger or ain’t no tellin what them white folks might do to you.” This went on for at least the first six months that he was in the big house and what she was conveying to him was that he must never be perceived to be insolent or he might suffer punishment that could be anything from a slap across the face to murder, but she also explained his house nigger privileges to him. When Maybelle explained his situation she tried to convince him that he was really fortunate to be a slave in this household because there was no better life for him. “When you is a house nigger there is things what you get that the field niggers don’t get as long as you know how to act. You get to eat food that the master eat and you sleep in the big house and you get better clothes and you ain’t got to work in that sun all day, and Lawd knows what else goes on out there that you don’t have to do.” “We is trying to keep you safe boy. Do you understand that?” Added Blanch as she entered from the patio door into the kitchen and ed right in on the conversation. “And never look up into white folks eyes like you do us,” Mamie who was seated at the table preparing some of the supper chimed in. Maybelle was a very large brown woman who Larobe knew to be soft and cuddly from his first day at the big house–the big house is what everybody called the McCabe house and she usually could be heard humming and singing throughout the house while she fussed over Mrs. McCabe’s, Melanie’s or Aisha’s hair or clothing. She also made a fuss over Maureen and Little Lee-Lee who were the McCabe’s daughter of twelve and son of ten years old. Anyone who witnessed her fussing over these people could see that there was either a great love for them or a great love for her duties. Blanche was also a large brown woman and her duties were to clean and cook and serve meals just as Maybelle duties were mostly with the children and women of the household. Mamie was a dark skinned woman of medium build and height and her duties were to keep the house sparkling clean but they all helped with all the chores. These three women did all the cooking and cleaning in the McCabe household and they also tended to the McCabe children, Mrs. McCabe and their two grown daughters.

Larobe duties were to keep all the fires going whenever necessary and to be at the service of these women and everybody else in the household. Larobe came to know and love these women dearly and he thought each of them very beautiful though not as exquisite as his mother, but his emotions about the McCabes were predicated on his interactions with them and they were not exactly love. Larobe also came to know the McCabes very well. His only words to them were usually “no suh” or “no maam” or “yes suh” or “yes maam”, but this did not stop him from hearing their conversations although the women had taught him to never let them know he was listening. “That nigger Sambo is working out well,” the judge said one evening while seated at the dinner table with his family. “Sam said he is one of the best cane cutters we have. He out cuts most of them others two to one. If we could take them chains of him, ain’t no telling how much he would cut. But we can’t chance that. No, we don’t know what them wild ones from Africa might do.” Larobe thought, how could he think Maura wild when it was the pale men, who kidnapped him from his family and mistreated him from the beginning, but he had learned from the women to never interject into white folks’ conversations? “I saw him in the field one day,” said Melanie. “He didn’t look so wild to me.” “What were you doing down near the fields?” The judge asked offended by her noticing a black man. “Haven’t I told you to stay away from them niggers?” He scolded. “Oh, she always goes down there when Sam Bronson ain’t paying her no attention,” Aisha said. “I do not, it’s you who always sneak down to the fields and drool over the muscles of them darkies!” Melanie angrily spurted at Aisha. “Now girls, hush such talk at the dinner table?” Their mother chided. The judge shouted angrily to his wife as he rose from the table. “Is this what you have raised? White women who sneak off to have fantasies about niggers?” “Maybe it your trips down to the shacks they are imitating?” Mrs. McCabe calmly responded.

“Well I never! Wife and daughters with no more respect than to talk about sexual encounters with niggers at the dinner table? What is this world coming to?” The judge solemnly exclaimed as he stormed away from the table and out of the room. Of course Larobe did not understand all the implications of this conversation, but he did know that Maura was the only captive in the fields in chains and he had heard the African women speak of him as Sambo. Larobe didn’t know any of the other captives, who worked the fields, but he did know old Ben who limped around as he worked the yard plants and the vegetable gardens and Glory who lived in one of the shacks that was behind the big house and were a little ways from the other shacks. He never talked to Ben or Glory because the women of the big house forbade it, but sometimes old Ben looked at him as if he wanted to tell him something but Larobe would quickly turn away. The women of the big house told him that if he was ever caught talking to any field nigger; he would be taken to the fields to become a field nigger. Larobe didn’t know exactly what field niggers did, but from the stories he had heard, he knew he did not want to be one. Larobe did know Lee-Lee and Maureen and one time when he was about eight or nine he learned one of the lessons of life in America. He had nearly completed his duties for that day when they asked Maybelle if he could come and play with them. She gave him permission but warned him not to wander into any of the gardens or shrubbery. “You’re it!” Lee-Lee shouted as he hit Larobe rather hard and began to run. Maureen also began to run around the yard. They ran in and out of the gardens and around the roses and shrubs knowing that Larobe had better not. Larobe realized that he would never catch them and he began to tire of the game. As he wandered back toward the house, they hid near the rose garden at the side of the house and called him. When he neared the roses, they both sprang from their hiding place and shoved him into the roses. He tumbled among these delicate fragrant petals but the piercing thorns tore into the flesh of his face and arms as his two playmates squealed with delight. As he tried to free himself, the stickles tore and stung his flesh even more. Finally he escaped and ran crying and bleeding to Maybelle who was standing in the back door watching all the while. He received no sympathy.

“You will have to be more careful when you run.” She scolded him. “White folks always have the upper hand and us niggers must be on our toes all the time. Ain’t no telling what they is up to so you just got to be careful whenever you deal with them. Now hush that crying and go ahead up to my room and clean yourself up!” She finished as he sulked away trying to stifle his sobs and tears. Soon after this incident Larobe was again playing tag with Lee-Lee and Maureen but this time when Lee-Lee hit him and called “you’re it”, Larobe tagged him right back and began to run. Both children started to run after him but Larobe was too fast for them. He ran until he tired them out and then he hid behind a tree that was beside a big mud puddle from the recent rain. He called to them when they tired of looking for him and they went toward the sound of his voice. When they neared his hiding place, he shouted startling them and then dashed from his cover and shoved them and they went splashing into the puddle. With the mud splattering their clothes, faces and hair, both children sat in the puddle bawling as Larobe gave a shout of glee. When Maybelle came running from the house and saw them sitting in the mud puddle with mud streaming down their faces, she became gravely concerned. “Oh my poor, poor babies,” she cooed. “What happened to you?” “He did it!” They both cried, pointing at Larobe. “Come, come, my darlings.” Maybelle soothed with much sweetness as she gathered them from the mud. Then she looked sternly at Larobe and said harshly. “I’m gonna deal with you later.” As she walked away carrying the screaming Lee-Lee and pulling the other screaming behind her, Larobe thought himself vindicated. He laughed to himself at the sight of the two muddied children–one lying across Maybelle’s shoulder dripping mud down the front of her white apron and the back of her black dress, the other saturated with mud from her hair and face to her feet being pulled hurriedly to the house brought cheer to his often cheerless life. Later when Maybelle returned to the kitchen, she and the children were spotlessly clean, but she was in quite an uproar. She called Larobe into the kitchen. “Now you done done it, you done made a mess out of Massa’s children. I don’t know what Massa is gonna do.” She paced back and forth staring at Larobe as if he had committed the worse transgression since the sins of David

against the Hittite. ‘’I have a good mind to lash you myself.” She stopped her pacing and reached for the razor strap hanging beside one of the cabinets and grabbed him almost simultaneously and he was not prepared for the punishing blows of the strap which came next. He screamed as the first blow struck him and struggled to get away but she was much too strong for him and the blows kept coming. The children stood laughing as Larobe cried and screamed and struggled until he and Maybelle were both breathless. They watched this scene with delight but Larobe didn’t understand any of it: when he was pushed into the thorns, it was he who was scolded then too. She finally stopped beating him and panted to the children. “Now you two run along and don’t get all sullied up again.” After the children left, Larobe sat on the shiny wooden floor whimpering in a corner near one of the cabinets, with his knees drawn up to his face and his arms holding his legs tight to him while Maybelle spoke to him sternly but more softly this time while her breath still came in heaves. “Don’t you know you can’t do to white folks what they do to you? I don’t know how many times I done told you this. Now I done whup you because I want Massa to know that I already done punished you and I am shore the children is gonna tell him too; but he might still want to do it his self or have Sam or Black Bob do it and, if they do; I feel sorry for you boy. Don’t you understand I am trying to help you? I want you to learn that a nigger can’t never put his hands on white people unless he is trying to help them, and he better ask them if it is alright then. “Lawd have mercy boy,” She went on. “The Massa might send you to the fields for this and the Lord knows you ain’t strong enough for no field work. And there is stories about field niggers and I don’t know what they might do to you.” She was calming down now and said pleadingly. “Don’t you see I whup you for your own good?” Larobe sat in the corner on the floor hugging his legs to his body with his head down and pressed against his knees, still whimpering and sucking the snot back up his nose although his tears had dried up. He didn’t understand why things were like they were, but he was beginning to see what Maybelle was saying to him. Although she had beaten him before; never had she beaten him so severely, and usually he was beaten when he forgot to do something but she always said it was for his own good. And now while she panted and talked, he began to realize

just how unfair his situation was since he was beaten for the same crime that the white children were not even scolded for. Later that evening the judge threatened to have Sam or Black Bob lash him but it was only an idle threat because he knew that if he ever decided to sell him, the scars from a lashing would indicate disobedience and he would therefore bring a lesser price. Maybelle and the children also convinced the judge that she had punished him very severely. She also pleaded to keep him around the house because she said that it would be too much trouble to train one of them field pickininnies. And so Larobe did not sustain the lashing nor lose his status as a house nigger but he did change his manner of dealing with whites from that very day. From that day forward, whenever he was solicited to play with the McCabe children, he always tagged them back immediately whenever he was tagged and he always kept them in sight. And because he could out maneuver them, he easily stayed away from their efforts to re-tag him. Since they could not catch him, they soon tired of even asking for him to play with them. And thus one of Maybelle’s warnings was heeded–stay away from white people unless you are helping them. As time ed Larobe would strain to see what was going on down at the slave shacks. Once or twice he thought he glimpsed Maura but he was not sure. He did see old Ben from time to time and once he even thought that he heard him call to him in his native language but he ran away. He did not want be caught talking to a field nigger or he would be sent to the fields, and the stories he heard about what happened in the shacks and fields were horrible. One such story Blanche told him was that if you did not pick enough cotton or cut enough cane or tobacco, you would be lashed and salt placed into your wounds and you would be tied out in the fields overnight where your moans and the smell of blood would draw the gators and other wild animals. But if you were lucky, it would rain and the salt would be washed out and the smell of blood washed away. Therefore the gators and animals would not hear your moans or smell your blood and you would not be eaten alive. This reminded him of that awful time on the ship of captives when that woman was lashed and salted and he believed every word.

There were other stories, most of which were not true. They described what the field niggers would do to him if a house nigger was ever turned out to the fields. Larobe did not understand why these stories were or even if they had any merit at all; but they kept him from ever wanting to be a field nigger.

CHAPTER VI

Old Ben

O ld Ben limped about as he weeded the vegetable garden in back of the big house; his bibbed overalls stained with perspiration and the sweat dripping from his white hair on to his black scarred forehead. He wore a tattered straw hat and no shirt and though he was old for a slave his arms and torso seemed to belong to a much younger man. He had cut a stack of firewood for the big house and had gone over to the vegetable garden to do some weeding when he saw the boy come out to get some wood. “Hey watoto, kuja hapa!” He called in the language he had heard the boy use when he first arrived. He knew he was taking a chance by using an African language but he had not been able to get him to respond any other way. The boy looked up but continued stacking the wood in his arms. When Old Ben shuffled toward him he quickly finished stacking the wood in his arms and hurried into the house. “Well,” said Old Ben to himself, “I’ll get to him later.” And then added, “I hope.” As he continued his weeding As he weeded the vegetable garden he thought back to when the strangers came to his village: They came riding strange animals and bearing many kinds of cloths and were allowed into his village, which was not unlike Maura’s village with its rounded huts and houses of grass and leaves with pointed roofs, set across from each other in a clearing in the forest with fruit trees at each end and shade trees throughout. The elders sat down to barter with them near the large rectangular community house which was in the middle of the rounded shelters where all serious meetings were held, but Ben, whose name was Sutan, sat not far away listening to the men haggle with the strange visitors. They wore long flowing robes and their heads were covered with cloths that hung around their backs and shoulders. They also wore long knives in sheaths around their waist and they spoke in a strange language that Sutan knew to be the language of the people above the desert.

As he continued to listen, Sutan realized that these men wanted to trade for men and women, but the elders refused and explained that they held no prisoners and that the people of their village were much too precious to be bargained for. However after realizing that the elders would not barter for their citizens and quibbling over some more details concerning other goods, the strangers accepted the goods that the elders proffered for their fabrics and assented to an offer to spend the night within the village. But although the citizens of the village were excited about the visitors and their wares; this visit led to a night that Sutan would never forget. That night the new cloths were distributed to the families and the men came out to eat and drink with the strangers. Fires were started and food was prepared as the strangers and the men of the village prepared for a celebration. There was an air of friendliness in this little village as the men and the strangers sat around the fires, some on upturned logs but most sat on the grass or squatted, and broke bread together. Sutan who was no stranger to the strong drink that was served took part in this gala. His family was one of the lucky ones who received the scarlet cloth that many of the villagers preferred and so he celebrated with the rest and drank more than his share of the wine. Later when the night grew still and most were asleep, especially the young men who had sampled the strong drink, more of the strangers crept into the village and they were very careful who they captured and who they killed. They set about very quietly binding the drunken young men with ropes and chains and using their long knives to murder the elderly men as they slept. Those young men who struggled mightily and could not be quietly constrained were killed lest they alert the others, and many of the women and children were slaughtered as they awoke and tried to escape this ghastly predicament. Cries for mercy and shrieks of pain sounded throughout the night as most in the village were either killed or captured by the strangers. When this carnage was over, men women and children lay inside and outside the simple village homes; their blood oozing and glowing eerily in the moonlight; and the the faint blue-black smoke from glowing embers that remained from the fires appeared to be spirits that quitted the dead bodies as it wafted upwards. Some of the elderly women and very young children who were not killed were herded into the center of the village cowering and afraid and bewildered by the vision before them and wondered if such butchery could be but a dream.

Sutan awoke to this grisly scene chained to a tree along with many other young men. When he saw his wife lying near her shelter and his young son lying with his head on her breast swathed with her seeping blood, he rendered a heart wrenching cry that shook the soles of the feet of all within earshot. But in this village there were many such cries and try as they might, their capturers were old hands at this sort of thing and they knew the strength of anguish, and had thus compensated for the extra-ordinary force in their binding of them. The strangers captured twenty young men and thirty-five young women and also twenty or twenty-five children; another one hundred or so villagers, men women and children, were slaughtered before they began a trek to the strangers’ camp. The very young and the elderly women who were not massacred were left to wander among the dead because the strangers realized that they would not likely survive the trip ahead. In the desert they walked all day and night and into the next day bound together and growing weaker with each ing minute as they trailed behind the strangers and their strange animals. Some of them perished while crossing the scorching sands, but most made it to the stranger’s camp where other strangers ed them. After resting they again began their journey but they now traveled mostly at night when it was cooler. This went on for two to three days or two or three weeks–Sutan didn’t know-he was too weak and exhausted to know the difference. After crossing the desert, Sutan and the others were brought to a port and sold to some pale men, the likes of which he had not seen before. And so years before Maura and Larobe, Old Ben had made the mesmerizing dehumanizing journey across the ocean locked in the bowels of a ship teeming with death and disease. “Hey, what you doing nigger? You better get that hoe to moving.” Old Ben flinched and gripped his hoe tighter as if he was gripping a weapon when he was jolted back to the present. He turned slowly around to see Glory smiling at him. “Why you come up behind me like that and you know I hate it when anyone calls me nigger.” He said angrily. “Just don’t want you to lose sight of where you are and what you are doing here.” She said laughing now; she had caught him deep in thought and knew that

his motionlessness might reveal his thoughtfulness of which neither was allowed by the captives here on the McCabe ranch. Glory was a beautiful young brown woman with her hair in short plaits tied by a white scarf; her eyes were light brown set above a pert nose just above her slightly darker plush lips. She was dressed in a black ankle length skirt and white loosely fitting long sleeve blouse that overlapped the waist of her skirt. Her clothes were different from most of the captive women because the judge allowed her a few privileges that the other women did not have such as clothes and her duties in the orchards. However she was not fooled by any appearance of leniency on the part of the judge; she was very much a captive woman who yearned for freedom. Glory lived in one of the shacks that were separated from the other slave quarters; she always tried to cheer up Old Ben who lived in the other shack but Old Ben hardly ever smiled or laughed. She and Ben’s shack were removed from the others but hers was one of the shack that Mrs. McCabe meant when she mentioned the Judge visiting the shacks. “You know I will never forget where I am after all these people have put me through.” He answered her still scolding. “Of course you won’t, but I’m just making sure.” Glory was still laughing. Old Ben did not laugh, but both these captives knew that he would never forget where he was and what his situation was, and Glory was just teasing him and reminding him of the rules for captives. But he needed no reminder; he had been reminded each time he tried to escape and now the pain of slavery was with him constantly, and left him no time to be jovial. But although he knew that he would never be able to change his fate, he was always watching for someone who wanted to escape so that he may lend a hand. He had only half a foot on his right side: the other half had been lopped off with a sharpened axe the last time he was returned to the ranch but he still kept his running spirit alive through others although he was continually in pain. Glory bathed his half a foot a couple times a week in herbs she gathered and she coated it with a salve she made from hog fat and herbs, but when the weather was damp, which was most of the time, he still had great pain. He also had pain in the scars on his back from the lashings and in his ankles from the chains he wore

for many years. As he leaned on his hoe and watched her laugh at the joke she had made, he was intensely serious and said to her very discreetly. “I’m going to try to get around to Sambo’s shack soon. He seems like one who is not going to be around here much longer.” Glory looked surprised at this observation by Old Ben and she too was now guilty of idleness when she stopped her walking. “I have only seen him once or twice but I have heard he is not one to talk much. How can you tell he is one to run?” She asked quietly also. Both these captive knew that they were discussing a taboo subject and their voices became much quieter and they automatically begin to look around to make sure they are not heard by anyone. They continued to converse in the garden, she again walking beside him while he chopped the weeds. “Oh, I have seen how he looks for answers in others eyes. He is always watching others to see if there is a clue in their eyes to how he might get out of this situation.” “Go on, you can tell that just from watching from a distance?” Glory was almost laughing again. Old Ben was still very serious as he continued to hoe. “Hush that grinning girl this is serious, you got to that I was a runner and I can tell a runner when I see one.” “Is that why you are always looking for someone to help escape?” She asked walking slowly alongside him. “Girl, a man got to be a runner, if you just stay here doing what they want you to do, you will just be a slave—a nigger–a non-person–just going through the motions but never living. Even if you marry and have children, they ain’t yours, your wife ain’t yours. The master can take your children and sell them or give them away or kill them or anything he wants to do with them. He can take your wife whenever he wants her and there ain’t nothing you can do. So you see, no maam, I don’t ever want to become contented with this life. So helping others who want to get away makes me a whole person–makes me a man–because with this half a foot I can’t run anymore.” He was beginning to hoe faster and harder

as he said this. “Well man,” Glory said emphasizing man and becoming very serious. “Can you get me away from here? I am weary of being a non-person and I am tired of never seeing anything but this ranch. I want to be done of having chores and work that only benefits someone else and I would like to have a husband and a family that will belong to me. And, I am fed up with that nasty old peckerwood forcing his self on me whenever he wants to. But most of all I just want to be free to do as I please. “Don’t you know that women need to be free too? You see,” She pleaded. “No man will ever be free if his woman is not free because his children will be born in captivity, so I’ve just got to get away; can you help me get away?” She was very emotional as she walked slowly beside him careful not to step on any of the plants. Old Ben thought for a moment; he had heard of some women running, even some who made it. But they were mostly the ones who could , and he had never known one to make it through the swamps by herself. However he saw in Glory what the white folks call a runner. “Maybe I can.” He said while stopping and thinking and fingering the gray stubble on his chin growing around the scars of the lashing he received after his last escape, but she nudged him to continue his weeding. As he got back to his hoeing he continued. “But the swamp and the wild is hard for a man to get through, and for a woman; it would be even harder. You will need help. There is snakes and gators and lions and panthers and other wild creatures out there. No maam, it ain’t no place for a woman but if there is a determined man or two with you, you just might make it. But there must be someone who is willing to take you along.” “Well you think about it,” Glory whispered. She was almost in tears but she had learned long ago that tears were of no use in the life of a captive. “I don’t want to be no slop-pot for no peckerwood and keep having to get rid of every seed that goes into me.” She said shudderingly as if a cold wind had blown over her. “I guess it must be harder for you than for men now that you put it that way.” He said. He paused again and thought for a moment and then added. “When I get a chance to talk to Sambo and sees that he wants to escape. I will see how he feels

about a woman going with him.” “You do that Ben, please,” Glory said still gainfully fighting her tears and the cold. “I will to try and get friendly with him also. But Ben, please be careful, if they get wise to your plan they are likely to cut off your other foot or even a leg,” she cautioned. “Now don’t you fret none about that,” Ben whispered. “I ain’t gonna be losing no more body parts.” And then he smiled for the first time. But then Glory’s tears were streaming and the cold she felt had overtaken her as she trembled. “Please be careful Ben.” She said. “I must get away. I just can’t take it much longer. I don’t know when his seed might get through and then I would just die. I can’t bear to have his child. I would just die; I know it!” “Now don’t you start no tears girl,” Old Ben said soothingly now. “Old Ben knows a runner when he sees one and that Sambo ain’t been here long enough to know about this here America; he will need company when he runs.” And as she wiped her tears with the sleeve of her blouse Old Ben changed the conversation. “Have you talked to that young lad up at the big house; they say it’s his child?” He asked. “No, I haven’t talked to him. I have smiled and tried to coax him to talk to me but I haven’t been successful. I bet Maybelle has scared him. You know all those stories she tells about field niggers and all.” Glory answered composed now and standing erect and proud not wanting to appear as weak because of her tears because she was very much wanted to run away from here. “Yeah I know,” Ben said continuing to work the garden. “But I’m sure I heard him calling out to Sambo when he first came here. Maybe he and Sambo are father and son.” Then he stopped again and thought. “I tell you what,” He said. “You work on getting him to talk; he might tell us something about Sambo and I’ll work on Sambo.” Glory agreed then nudged him again to continue his work before she walked off toward the orchards maybe a little melancholy about her situation but also a little hopeful, and old Ben went back to his hoeing with a smile for the first time in a

while. Yes, he thought, it was going to be exciting for him; and as for Glory, she had the only tiny glimmer of hope for freedom that she had ever felt. And so today as he tended the garden his pain was more excruciating, but with a runner afoot the pain was of little importance; and as Glory picked fruit from low hanging branches, she allowed herself to think of herself as free for the first time. While he continued his gardening Old Ben allowed himself to reflect on the times when he ran. Yes that first time he just ran with no plan but after he was dragged back to the ranch on the end of a rope, his flesh torn from his bones as the big African, not unlike Bob in size, kept his horse at a gallop, and afterwards when he was lashed and his wounds salted; he agonized for months. These thoughts tormented him and he tried to force that memory from his mind however they also reminded him that he would need a plan next time However Old Ben’s foot never let him forget that last time he ran away: It had been more than three years since the other time and the lashes on his back were well healed, however that first time he just ran when he saw a chance, he had no plan, he just wanted to get away, but after such severe lashings he decided he had better have a plan. So when he was first brought back chained and under constant guard he heard about other ranches and farms from his guards as they talked to each other and he learned from white visitors that came to the ranch. He even listened to any and everybody to gain any splinter of knowledge about the outside world. He listened to the old ones who knew of the swamps and tricks to play on the captors and he listened to the ones who knew what to eat and which plants were poisonous. He heard others who knew healing and he particularly noted what those who knew what was outside of this ranch had to say. He wanted to leave no part of his plan un-plotted because he was determined to get away to any place that was better than here. And while gaining this knowledge Ben became so docile in his manner and actions that after a year or two they unchained him because they figured he had learned a lesson. When he was again a trusted slave and he was allowed to live in the shacks he talked to the new slaves that came to learn about attitudes of other white people and what was going on in other places. And even from those whom had no details of anything else but slavery on this ranch, he gained information; he listened to children, men and women alike to gain any morsel of knowledge.

And when he figured that his store of knowledge was sufficient he ran again. It was dark in the yard of the shacks and the pale man watching him was more interested in the captive women than watching Ben so Ben told him he was going inside and went to the corner of his shack where he had some blankets and straw which was his bed. He at first lay down and waited for the guard to look in on him. After the guard made his customary peep into the shack, Ben removed several boards he had previously loosened fluffed up his straw bed and slipped noiselessly to the ground beneath. He stole his way into the pig pen and captured a piglet and was able to keep him quiet by wrapping a piece of his torn clothing around his snout; he also wallowed in the mud and slop until he was sure that he and the pig reeked the same. Next he made his way through the cane fields until he was close to the swamps. He ran alongside the swamp water for about a mile and then he waded across a pond while holding the piglet above his head. When he was on the other side, he let the piglet go, still with the rags around its snout, and he left another piece of his torn clothing which he hope smelled exactly like the pig, and went back into the water. He then set on a course which he hoped was due north and he hoped that the pig would go otherwise. When all the activity around the captive’s quarters settled down that night, the pale man who was guarding the yard again peeped in on him and saw a bundle he believed to be Ben so he did not check closer. Therefore Ben had a good head start when the dawn came and it was discovered that he was not there. The bloodhounds were led to sniff some of Ben’s clothes and blankets and they then headed straight for the pig pen and there they wandered confusedly but picked up no scent of Ben; but leaving the sty, someone spotted Ben’s tracks and set the dogs to that trail. And so they were on the trail on the runaway. There were seven whites and two Africans and more would the hunt when word got around to the other ranches. The dogs led them to the path alongside the swamp to the point where Ben waded across and they were stumped until someone spotted where Ben came out on the other side and the hunting party waded across and found the piece of torn clothing. They gave it to the dogs to sniff and again the party had a trail to follow.

The piglet led the hunting party on such a hap-hazard journey that when they discovered the piglet and figured out that they had been duped, Ben was well on his way to freedom. Ben never stopped running or swimming. Sometimes he didn’t know which he was doing. He dove into ponds and swamps where gators’ marble eyes glared. And when he was out of the water, he hurdled snakes that seemed frozen in their coils by the spectacle of him running. When he made it out of the swamps and into the forest he kept running. He ran past lions and panthers and other creatures, some he had never seen before, some large, some small, and all seemed to be mesmerized by the vision of this African running through the forest. Ben ran until he was exhausted then rested and then ran some more. When he was sure he could not hear the dogs barking in the distant, he began to ease his running slightly. He eventually settled in a forest not far from a ranch he did not know and he decided he would live in the forest for a while and try to figure his next move. Since he did not want to leave any evidence of his habitation for others who might this way, Ben found a cave on a ledge hidden among some huge rocks in the forest. He chased all the small animals and snakes away and fashioned a platform from limbs, leaves and vines which became his bed. He was very careful not to include any poisonous plants in his bed and he ate berries, herbs, fruit and nuts that he gathered in the forest; the altitude of his cave home also served to his advantage and he used rocks, logs and saplings to conceal the entrance. However whenever Ben wandered from his cave to survey his surroundings or gather food, which was often, he was sure to cover his tracks. He had learned of these wiles from the old ones and he was very grateful for their knowledge. He missed his homeland of Alkebulan very much but he dared not think of that, because he must learn how much danger he was in here, and how he could remove himself from it. Once or twice some whites ed directly under him but they were only hunting animals and seemed to have no knowledge of a runaway in the area so he figured that he was well concealed. Ben also had heard of a place called Canada where he could be free, and he knew it was to the north but he didn’t know how far so he decided he would stay near the ranch for a while, and see if he could garner any information, but he didn’t know if he would trust anyone black or white.

As time ed Ben started to slip onto the ranch some nights to get food and one night while he was gathering peaches from the orchard he happened upon another captive. The orchard was a ways from the main area of the ranch and Ben felt reasonably safe here however he was careful not to make any noise as he gathered fruit from the low hanging branches, but he was alarmed when he ran into the captive stooping and gathering fruit from the ground “What you doing here?” The captive asked in a quiet tone. He was quite surprised to see Old Ben. Ben was so shocked to see the other captive that he did not say anything. The other looked at Ben quizzically and said again more quietly. “What you doing here? You trying to get us all in trouble?” Ben noticed that the captive was speaking in a hushed tone and that told him that he did not want to be found out either. “I am just trying to get some food.” Ben answered also quietly. “I mean, where you from? How you get here?” the captive asked rapidly. “You ain’t from here!” “I come from down that way,” Ben said pointing. “Down below the swamps.” “You is a running nigger!” The captive said nervously. “You will bring us trouble.” “I …,” Ben started to protest but he was cut off by the captive. “Shhh! We better be quiet and you better get out of here before we get caught.” With that warning Ben hastily and quietly slipped back into the forest with his fruit. A few nights later Ben encountered the same captive under the peach trees and learned that his name was Hojo; he tried to get information such as how far Canada was but Hojo did not know. However Ben needed information about what was near here and he kept pestering Hojo, but Hojo who dare not be caught out of his shack at night with a runaway was trying to figure ways to keep Ben away from the orchard and himself.

Hojo did not want to be caught out of his shack gathering fruit in the middle of the night especially with a runaway, which would surely bring severe punishment. He visited the orchards at night to gather fruit to eat and make wine which was a taboo for captives and that was one reason he wished Ben would stay away. However Ben was so bent on getting to Canada that each time he encountered Hojo he continued to seek information. He asked about other ranches and the depth of the forest and also was there a town near. Hojo did not know these things and was hoping that Ben would just leave the ranch. “Only white folks and maybe some house niggers knows that.” Hojo told him one night. “But iffen I ask white folks dey is gonna kill me because dey think that I or someone else is gonna run, and if I could get a chance to ask a house nigger, dey would shorely tell on me too.” “Are you sure there is no one you can ask?” Ben still prodded sincerely as he pushed the low hanging branches from his face. He knew he was pressing Hojo but he was desperate. He didn’t know how much longer he could live in the cave undetected and Hojo was really getting very nervous about meeting Ben on the ranch at night and he wished for a way to end these meetings. Hojo finally said while walking in a squat still picking the best fruit from those that had fallen to the ground.” Well there is a white man who lives down near the other side of the forest who does not have slaves. He just has a little house and he works on the ranch with us field niggers. Maybe he can help you?” “Will he not turn me in to the others?” Ben asked now standing closer so that he could see into Hojo’s eyes who was still picking peaches from the ground. “I don’t know.” Hojo replied looking up at him. “But he always says that the Massa is wrong to have slaves and that he thinks all men should be free.” He then added anxiously. “I can tell you how to get to his home if you want to go there.” When Hojo said this he was not sure he could trust this white man but since he did always speak against slavery whenever he and Hojo were out of earshot of any of the guards, and he had never known a white man to do that, and if he did help Ben; maybe Ben will go away. However Ben did not trust any white man but he was in a dilemma he knew he could not stay in his cave home forever and he had heard that there were some

whites who did help the captives to escape. He could strike out on his own, but he did not know much about what to expect when he left the forest. So he decided to trust a white man who spoke the words of freedom because he thought that this was his best chance to learn the things he needed to know. After that decision, Ben crept up to the house one night which was at least a mile from the ranch and set in the midst of the forest. It was not much better than the slave quarters but it did have another room but from the outside it very much resembled the captive shacks. The land all around it had been cleared but nothing was growing there but tree stumps, grass and weeds. So Ben, hidden by the shadow that the house cast from the light of the moon, sneaked just outside the front door of the shack which sat there in the middle of the clearing and called the name Hojo had told him. “Hey Bonnie.” He called quietly. Hojo had said Mr. Bonnie but Ben knew if he said Mr. Bonnie he would have known it was an African calling him. “Pssst, hey Bonnie.” He called again. “What? Who’s there?” Bonnie answered very suspiciously. “My name is Charles.” Ben said trying as hard as he could to sound white while still whispering. “Hojo sent me.” Bonnie relaxed when he heard Hojo’s name. He had known Hojo a long time and considered him a good nigger, so everything must be alright, he thought. But he was completely shocked when he went outside and saw Ben standing there however he walked right up to him and asked very much affronted. “What in the world are you doing here nigger?” Ben could see he was quite excited and surprised and tried right away to calm him down. “Now I don’t want to cause you any trouble.” He said hurriedly and backing off. “Hojo sent me to see you. He said you may be able to help me.” “Come on back here away from the house I don’t want my wife to see you.” He said to Ben when Ben mentioned Hojo again and the two men starting walking through the grass and stumps toward the forest whose edge was about fifty feet or so in back of his ramshackle house. What is it that you want?” Bonnie asked scornfully as he walked with Ben and kept looking behind him at his house as they walked.

“Hojo told me you thought all men should be free?” Ben said as he walked and eyed Bonnie for any signs of betrayal. “And I need some information and Hojo said that you might be able to help me?” “Yes it is true that I think all men should be free.” Bonnie answered without flinching. “But there is laws that say how I got to treat niggers.” Ben still winced every time he was called nigger, but he was in a risky situation so he ignored Bonnie’s use of the word. “Yes.” He said. “But if there is no one here but us and you think the law is unjust, then helping me is fair because although you break a law of white men; you are upholding what you believe in.” Ben answered. “How do I know no one knows you are here? My wife knows you are here.” Bonnie said cynically as he walked faster as if he craved the cover of the forest. “But she does not know I am African. She has not seen me.” Ben answered him. “Well, tell me just what it is you want me to help you with.” Bonnie said not so scornfully this time as they reached the edge of the forest and he seemed to relax somewhat. “I need to know how far it is to Canada and I need a chart so that I can avoid the villages and ranches. You see, I need to travel unseen.” Ben was more hesitant now because he did not have the trust that he had when Hojo first told him about Bonnie, now that he had practically told a white man that he was a runaway. When Bonnie heard Canada and unseen he knew he was dealing with a runaway and this started him to thinking; maybe there was reward or something; or at the very least he could win favor with white men of higher standing and that could make his life a little less miserable. But he also realized that Hojo would think less of him and tell the other slaves that he worked the fields with and they would all shun him; but the thought of winning favor with whites or gaining a reward overwhelmed any thoughts of friendship with slaves. He rationalized that they could do nothing for him and he knew they would not lift a hand to harm him because to do so would mean that they were not fit to even be slaves and would be murdered. “I’ll see if I can get that for you but it might take a couple of days, so I’ll tell you what, you meet me in two days about this time right here so my wife won’t get a

look at you.” Bonnie said, looking very sternly at him and taking both his shoulders in his hands as if to reassure him but also letting him know that it was a hard position for him to put a white man in. “You are putting me in a very dangerous position.” He reproved Ben. “Yes, I know.” Ben said still studying the pale man and wondering if he had made a mistake in trusting him. “But I promise not to be seen and no one will know I am visiting you.” He said before disappearing back into the forest. That night Ben dreamed that he was surrounded by pale men with snarling dogs that slobbered and strained against their reins to get at him. The men all had whips and they lashed him from every direction. And then when his flesh was torn and bloody, they unleashed the dogs. Ben awoke with a jolt and knew he had been betrayed. He hurried from his lofty perch and commence running but he could already hear the dogs barking. His legs were no match for those of dogs and horses and he was soon caught and surrounded by the pale men with their horses and dogs. Some started to lash him and he felt the bloody sting of raw leather on his flesh, but then someone reminded them that Ben was the property of someone else and the lashing stopped. Ben was taken back to the ranch where he had met Hojo and put in chains to await the arrival of the McCabe hands that would come to take him back; but while there he witnessed the lashing of Hojo and the salting of his wounds. That night Hojo’s cries and prayers could be heard throughout the ranch but no one dared to pour the water on his wounds that he prayed for. Ben never knew how long Hojo stayed chained to the whipping post with his wounds salted because that next afternoon two captives and a pale man came for him. An Iron collar was placed around his neck and his hands were bound. A rope was tied to the length of chain which was connected to the collar and Ben was walked, ran and dragged all the way back to the McCabe ranch. Ben never knew when he arrived back at the McCabe ranch because he was so spent–he was dragged the last mile or so. There was no punishment right away because the judge wanted Ben to be fully aware when the lashing was istered and so he was chained to a post in his shack and fed and nursed back to health.

In a few days when the Massa felt he was strong enough, he ordered Tom who was the predecessor to Black Bob to take him to the whipping post and thrash Ben with all the other captives looking on. He even ordered the captives from the big house to observe this spectacle. This act of bringing the captives from the big house out to watch meant that Ben was going to receive a very special punishment. Ben was chained to the whipping post but not so that his back could be lashed but just so he could not run away, but could use his arms to try and block some of the lashes. Tom lashed out at Ben with almost all his might for he knew that to show any sign of leniency could mean the lash for himself. Again and again the raw leather of the lash bit into the black flesh of Ben’s back, arms, legs and face while he tried to cower away but the chain held him there until he was a gooey mesh of blood and flesh. And with each stroke the other captives watching cringed with just as much pain as Ben for they knew that there was no assistance they could offer him and maybe the ache they felt could somehow lessen Ben’s agony. And then when it seemed that Ben had received the worse punishment that could possibly be meted out to a person, the Massa called a halt to the lashing and stepped forward with a sharpened axe and with one swift motion chopped off the front of Ben’s right foot. And while the captives gasped, choked and upchucked at this ghastly sight, he fed Ben’s foot to his dogs. But Ben, who would never run again and who would always walk with a limp and pain, never became a slave in his mind; and he never stopped looking for ways to help others to escape.

CHAPTER VII

Jadur

G lory sat at the bare wooden table in the shack peeling and slicing peaches before she dropped them into the wooden bowl. Sweat dripped from her brow and her white blouse was rimmed with perspiration around her neck and under her arms. Her hair was tied in a white scarf with a few shiny black plaits sneaking from the bottom of the rag that was also soaked with sweat. Glory was quite beautiful and although her current predicament did not lend itself to showing off her attributes, she was lovely nevertheless. Her skin was like a light chocolate and her eyes also reflected this hue and if she would have an occasion of mirth they would sparkle and smile at you. Her nose which was perfectly shaped with a rounded tip was in perfect proportion to the rest of her features. Her mouth was full lips which were just a tinge darker than her complexion and she had the high cheekbones of the Hindu people. She was about five feet five inches tall and her figure was in perfect proportion to her height—fully developed and magnificently formed. Glory did not think of herself as beautiful often, although she did have a small mirror she kept on the hidden side of her bed that she sometimes used but her drab surroundings and situation kept her from utilizing it often. Her shack like all the shacks of the captives consisted of one room with a black iron pot hanging over fire place in the back wall which served as both heat and a cooking source. There were a few pots and pans which hung on the stone chimney above the fireplace but the rest of the walls were just plain wooden slabs except for one shelf about shoulder high on one wall where she kept small tins and jars of herbs and spices, flour and other cooking products and the few dishes she was allowed. There was just one door made of wooden slabs connected by other wooden planks nailed across it to hold it together but there were no windows. Although she and Old Ben’s shacks were different from the other shacks; both had tin roofs which slanted backwards like the other shacks, but there was no porches and the each had a stone for use as a step.

The floor was also wooden planks although she had a small rug that was discarded from the big house placed next to her bed, which was a discarded mattress from the big house which she stuffed with straw and cotton. This mattress and rug along with the dishes, some preserves and the wooden table and chair, which none of the other captives had were the luxuries allowed Glory. Tonight Glory was making peach Jams and preserves most of which would be used in the big house but the judge allowed her to keep a few jars which she shared with old Ben. The heat was almost unbearable with the hotness of summer and the fire and iron pot cooking the peaches. She had the door open to try and alleviate the warmth but there were only swamp breezes—hot and wet. As she sat perspiring, and peeling peaches, thoughts of her mother and how she came to be in this situation wandered into her mind. Her Mother was born in a place called India a land of elephants and tigers and many beautiful places and people. There were small villages and large ones with many beautiful houses and merchants’ markets with colorful tents built close together. There were many different foods to eat and clothes to wear, and rugs and vases and other utensils. Glory’s grandmother told Glory’s mother about how things were before the Europeans came and Glory’s mother, Jadur, related it to her. The Europeans brought with them new weapons, new people and new gods and new diseases but at first the people resisted, however the invaders with their weapons overran and burned whole villages and towns and murdered whole families who had lived on the land for many years. Their greed to exact as much wealth as possible from the land caused much suffering such as famines and epidemics. Then the people rebelled by staging sit downs and boycotts but they were murdered also. And so after millions of deaths, murders and much destruction, the Europeans in the name of Christianity ravaged the land and the culture of these Hindu Indians: they came and found a paradise for themselves and turned it into a hell for the natives. Soon they were building large farms and houses to live in, and had most of the natives working for them. They grew and exported such crops as cotton, cane, tea and all sorts of herbs for medicines. But although the Europeans were now in charge of the land, the natives were the workers of the crops and barely received any compensation for their labor.

Later when the English had established rule in this part of the world Glory’s grandmother and grandfather went to work in one of the farmhouses. The farm was owned by a lord Cunningham since it had been pilfered from the original people, and it was very profitable and Glory’s grandfather and grandmother were servants in the house, and that is where Glory’s mother, Jadur, was born. As Jadur grew she did not have very many chores except those that her mother assigned her and since the Cunningham’s had a daughter about the same age as Jadur, she usually just kept company with the child. She wore the same clothes and ate the same food and she was also educated along with her and went just about everywhere the Cunningham’s went. In fact although she did not know it, her duty was to be a companion to the child and since Jadur never lived in the time before the English came, she was usually content with her life. Then one day things started to change. Jadur could not discern just what it was but there was a change in lord Cunningham’s demeanor. It was just vaguely at first but then her education along with the child’s was stopped. Not long after that she and the Cunningham’s took a trip to England without her parents. There the weather was cold and Jadur thought everything was drab, and she longed to return to her homeland and lord Cunningham assured her she would and when people came and started moving things out of the dreary house Jadur thought that she was returning to India, but this time she boarded a ship to the new world. This journey was long and cold and the cargo ship had no accommodations except a small quarter just beneath the main deck. Jadur spent most of her time on the ship’s deck marveling at the many ropes and riggings and longing for her parents, but when they came to port, Jadur’s heart gladdened to see the land that was just as beautiful as that of her homeland and she could feel the warmth. At first there was just a small house with a couple of rooms, but already a larger house was being built by the many Africans she saw here. Within a few months a grand house set here in the middle of the forest and the furniture and many of the painting from England were brought to the new house. The house had many rooms and had a stairway that curved up to the second floor where more rooms were added. The house was painted white with a black roof and had windows

with black shutters. From the outside you could see columnar poles that extended all the way to the roof. Finally more land was cleared and many grass shelters with pointed roofs and shacks with slanted roofs built at the edge of the clearing. At first Jadur was very excited and she asked when her parents were arriving but when told that her parents would not be coming she was confused and lord Cunningham explained the new world to her. Since her skin was brown, she would be considered a slave by others–but since she had been in their household since she was a baby, she would never be a slave. But if he treated her as he had in the past, then the other slaves would expect special favors also. He also tried to explain the laws of the new world but Jadur was still very young, about fourteen, and although she did not grasp the full meaning of his explanation, she became quite depressed to learn that her parents were not coming; and she could not understand how she could be taken from her parents and she began to cry. Lord Cunningham tried to communicate to her that they had had to move from England and were not allowed to return to India, and therefore he could not bring her parents over; but Jadur did not understand any of this and she was disheartened most of the time as she drudged through her tasks of cleaning the house and doing the washing and cooking. Soon other servants were brought into the house and Jadur’s burden was lightened but her spirits were not lifted; she was a very unhappy young woman. Amonte lived in one of the huts and he usually brought firewood to the house. He tried every day to cheer-up Jadur and soon they were chatting and Jadur’s gloominess lessened. This eventually turned into a courtship and Jadur’s heart did gladden very much. She told Lord Cunningham that she wanted to marry, but he was very much against it. “You can’t marry a slave,” He said. “His life is not his own.” “Neither is mine.” Replied Jadur. “Why with you telling me what I can do, can’t you see that? You have taken me from my parents and now you forbid me to marry. Why do you set yourself up as my God?” Lord Cunningham frowned and was quite insulted by this young brown Indian woman questioning his authority and his impunity to do what he wished with the lives of his slaves, but he held back from asserting his full authority as lord and master of her soul and body and tried to rationalize. “Your children will not be

your children because when they are the children of slaves that makes them the property of the master. Can’t you see what a mistake that would be?” Jadur did not understand the full meaning of being a slave in the new world; she did not know that Africans, Indians and others were treated as less than human by the captors but she continued to present her argument in rational . “But you are his owner; you could free Amonte. You do not need him so badly since you have so many servants.’’ She said. Lord Cunningham tried to explain to Jadur that there would be no place for them to go as freed slaves. “You see.” He said. “You will be captured and enslaved by others because there is no white man who will respect the rights of niggers to be free and even if I give you and him papers there will be many who will not respect that.” Jadur was somewhat taken aback by this remark for she had never heard lord Cunningham refer to her as a nigger before but it now dawned on her that in this new world she was just like all the other dark skinned people who had no rights whatsoever. “Then if I am a nigger then treat me like you do the rest. Allow me to have a nigger wedding so that I may have something besides the toil of cleaning up behind you and your family day after day.” Lord Cunningham had no answer to this and to end the situation he decided to sell Amonte. He shouted at her. “I will sell Amonte!” “Then sell me also!” She shouted back. Lord Cunningham was quite perturbed by Jadur’s insolent behavior but he decided to let her find out for herself just what it was like to be the property of another. Therefore he did not sell Amonte right away. He acquiesced and let Jadur and Amonte marry performing the rituals himself. He informed her that their marriage would only be recognized by other captives and had no meaning whatsoever under white man’s law. This never bothered Jadur, she was reasonably happy for the first time in years as she and Amonte set up house in his hut. She didn’t really set up house because there was little to be done in the shelter and besides she still had plenty of chores in the big house, but she did spend nights in the shelter with Amonte. Three months later, Lord Cunningham made good on his threat to sell Amonte

and Jadur was heartbroken and begged him to sell her too; and he promised to sell her to the same buyer when he returned. That buyer returned in about three weeks and Jadur was sold to him. Jadur was very happy to be going to Amonte as she boarded the ship with the rest of the captives. However this trip was quite unlike the one which brought her to this tropical island. Here she was treated just like the other captives and chained and pushed into the hold of the ship. However this was the first time that Jadur had been treated as a slave and she still did not realize the full brunt of the situation she was in as she settled in the dank and dark hold with chains on her ankles among another fifty or so captives. Nevertheless although this hold was dark and dank, it was much less crowded than the one Larobe and Maura would later come on, and this trip was only a day or so long. When they reached the mainland, she expected to be taken to the ranch where Amonte was waiting for her but instead she was taken to a forest lean-to just like the one Maura and Larobe would occupy much later. She was here for some hours until some men came to take her to the auction platform. As the other men started their bids, Jadur realized that she had been sold to a middle man and now she was being sold again. She reared against the auctioneer but was quickly seized by two massive captives who were here just for this purpose. Her ankles were still chained and now her hands were chained too and she was hauled from the stage but she was sold to Judge McCabe nonetheless. Her hope plummeted with this knowledge and she drifted into a deep despair and never realized when she was led to the ranch behind the horse and wagon. At first Jadur tried to find Amonte among the captives on the McCabe ranch, but she eventually realized that he too was probably sold to a middle man and was sold again. Jadur was assigned a shack and she was unchained because no one expected her to run because of her reputation of being a domesticated nigger although she was watched at first. She was later assigned to work the orchards along with some other captives and went about her tasks aimlessly. Not long after that she noticed her stomach was growing and she felt movement and she was happy again. Now she would have someone to share her life with

although it was the life of a servant. Jadur never thought of herself as a slave nor captive because she had not been captured but stolen when she was a child. However she still worked the orchards right up until her time and when the pain was so great, she collapsed right in the orchard and Glory was born. When the judge learned Jadur was expecting he too was elated, for he had gotten two slaves for the price of one. He assigned Maybelle and Blanche to look after the young mother but he was somewhat disappointed when a girl was born. When Jadur was back in her shack and presented with a baby girl by Blanche she cried. “Oh glory!” Because she did not want a young man: She had learned that young men would not be allowed to be with their mother after they had reached a certain age, but she believed that a girl would be allowed to stay with her. In the case of the young men, the captors didn’t want them to be close to their families in case they had to breed them. In some instances it had been known that some young men had been blindfolded and made to breed with their mothers but this produced too many ill-formed children. The captors laughed about this and call the young men mother fuckers and they sold the children by the dozens thus indicating that they were not worth much because of their condition and they called this playing the dozens. This was the fate of many young men until it proved unprofitable but many backwards children had already been born by this process. However Glory was named and welcomed to the McCabe ranch: She was taught by her mother about her ancestors, including her father, and all the other wisdom and knowledge that she had gained. She told her about her people in India and she taught her all she could of Amonte and the people of Alkebulan. She also taught her about herbs and healing and cooking and all womanly things. In fact over the years, Jadur just poured all she knew into Glory including the education she had received when she was a companion and her remembrances of the her religion. Although she did miss others such as Amonte and her parents, she put her soul into her Glory and the toil of slavery never got her down as long as she had Glory, and although her life was not her own, Judge McCabe could not prevent her from loving Glory. Sometimes she thought of Amonte and her parents whom she had not seen for so long, but since coming to the new world she had learned

that a captive had no choices about her life. So although she had other longing, her Glory was with her and she taught Glory all the things she knew, especially how to love. Jadur settled into her role as servant and mother and did the most reasonable things she could under the circumstances. She and Glory lived in the shack behind the garden next to Old Ben and as Glory grew she went everywhere with her mother even into the orchards. But although Jadur was happy to have her companionship, as Glory grew older she wished for a different life for her daughter. She made up her mind that she would speak to the judge even though she knew she would be considered disrespectful and might bring some form of punishment for herself, she would do it for her Glory. The judge refused to speak to her at first because it would have been considered to be beneath a white man of his status to answer a nigger woman who spoke to him first but he did talk to her later on. He told her that she may get favors from him if she did favors for him. Jadur did not understand the implications of this proposition and treated it as if he had agreed to consider a way out for her Glory. Glory was about thirteen years old and was just coming into womanhood, when the judge started coming down to Jadur’s shack. At first he tried talking to her to make her see that she was his property and that he showed her great favor by letting her and her daughter work the orchards instead sending them to the fields. He wanted her in turn to do sexual favors for him but Jadur refused. This caused the judge to lose his temper; the thought of a slave refusing him anything was not to be tolerated. He had Sam Bronson remove Glory from the shack. “If you don’t do as I say, I will let Sam have his way with that little pickininny of yours!” He shouted! It was as if lighting struck her and was burning away everything inside her when she heard a threat against her Glory, and she leapt at the judge shouting and beating his chest with both fists. “You beast, you beast,” Is all she could say. The judge stepped to the side and cracked her in the Jaw with his fist. When she fell to the floor he kicked her in her side until blood gushed out of her mouth and nose. He then reached down and grabbed her by her hair and jerked her head back and spat into her face and said. “You goddamn nigger bitch you are my property bought and paid for and that little wench of yours is too. Not yours but mine and I will do whatever I want

with either of you. You had better get that through that nappy head of yours and you better never raise a hand to me again.” With this he dropped her head back into the blood and walked out the shack. Jadur never heard these words. She lay on the wooden floor choking on her blood which was seeping through her mouth and nose. Later Glory came into the shack and saw her mother lying in a pool of blood on the floor. She screamed at first and asked who did this, but she already knew. She went to work right away. Grabbing some rags from a basket and using the water from the pail on the wooden table, she cleaned her mother as best she could, all the while weeping and praying, for she had learned to pray to the Lord Vishnu from her mother. As Glory sat on the floor with her mother’s head in her lap she dabbed the wet cold rags to her mother’s face and eyes, and Jadur began to regain consciousness. Glory was much relieved when she saw her mother’s eyes open. She let out a deep sigh and hugged her. “Oh mother, oh mother let’s get away from here, oh please mother oh please mother she cried!” as she embraced her mother’s bloody head in her lap but her mother was in too much pain to say anything. Eventually Glory helped her to the bed and retrieved herbs from tins and jars she and her mother always kept around. She started a fire and heated some water and made teas for her mother to drink. She also made salves to rub on her bruises and she talked to her tenderly as she sat beside the bed and tended her. “Oh mother.” She said. “I’m going to take care of you. Don’t you worry none; I will always stay with you. You will see. I will find a place for us to go. Oh mother I love you so much. Please don’t hurt mother, please don’t hurt.” These soothing words were like a lullaby to Jadur and she drifted off to sleep.

CHAPTER VIII

Glory

T his was the first of many visits judge McCabe made to Jadur’s shack. Each time Jadur refused his advances and demands and each time he became more enraged. His beating became more and more fierce and when Jadur had succumbed to his terror, he then forced himself upon her. Each time that the judge came down to Jadur’s shack he would have Sam take Glory away. When Glory returned she would again nurse her mother back to health, but she could see that her mother was losing both her physical and mental health. This worried Glory to no end and she would always promise her mother that she would get her away but she had no means. Jadur’s condition got worse and worse until she could barely recognize Glory when she and Glory were alone in the shack, she just babbled about her parents and her homeland, never even recognizing Glory. Glory was heartbroken and for all intent and purpose, also alone. Then one evening when Sam and the judge arrived and Sam started to take her away, Glory cried out. “No, no, don’t beat her anymore please, please take me instead!” She pleaded. Sam continued to drag her away screaming with tears streaming from her eyes but the judge stopped him. “Alright little wench you think you are grown enough to assume the duties of your mammy?” He asked grinning. “Yes, oh yes, oh please don’t hurt her anymore!” She begged. “Well Sam, Take the other one and leave the little wench to me.” The judge said. With that Sam let go of Glory and took Jadur by the hand and she meekly followed him out the door. “What shall I do with this one?” Sam asked?

“’Take care of her,” the judge said winking at Sam. And then he added. “But don’t beat her.” That night Glory started what would be many nights of enduring the judge’s advances; she dared not refuse for fear of what would happen to her mother. When the judge left she would do the things her mother taught her to keep his seed from fertilizing and then she would go to retrieve her mother who she would inevitably find wandering among the shacks on the other side of the big house. All the other captives knew Jadur and knew what was going on at her shack and they would invite her into their shacks but she would refuse and just wander along muttering until Glory came to get her. There was not any fight left in Jadur now and Sam would take her to one of the barns and have his way with her while the judge was with Glory. This went on for months until Jadur’s condition became so bad that even Sam had no use for her. Each time Glory brought her mother back into the shack she would cry and pray to Vishnu and question why He had left her mother. But she would eventually answer her own question, for her mother had taught her that faith only left those who gave faith up. And then she would talk to her mother. “Lord Vishnu will deliver us dear mother, I know He will if we just have faith. mother how you taught me that no matter how bleak things looked, the Lord will never forsake us as long as we that it is He Who is within us and that we are Him.” Glory would go on repeating the tenets of her faith to her mother for hours and this would bring her back to a state where she could deal with her own life and not give in to the demons which had captured her mother. The worse Jadur’s condition became, the more the judge knew he should get rid of her but no one would purchase a slave in such condition. He figured that her prattling was beginning to make the other captives think of their homeland and wonder why they were so ill-treated and he did not want a rebellion. He decided to have Sam and some others take her to the deepest part of the swamps and leave her there. He told Glory and all the others that she had been sold. At first Glory could not believe that her mother was gone and would not be coming back and she wanted to rail at the judge and make him tell what he had done with her, but she realized that that would only cause him to harm her. So she did the only thing she knew that let her have any power over the situation:

she prayed. She called Krishna, another personification of the all-powerful Vishnu. “Oh Lord Krishna, the kindest warmest and most wonderful friend of Arjuna and of all persons, please take care of my mother and watch over her and restore her spirit to her. Please awaken in her the never-ending entity which dwells in us all so that she will realize that there is no harm can come to her as long as You, kindest of all of Vishnu’s, manifestations is constantly with her.” Glory’s prayers kept her from going insane and she was able to endure the judge over the years, and now as she thought about what Old Ben had said about Larobe and the big black Sambo, she somehow knew that change would come into her life very soon. One day later she was ing the woodshed where the firewood was piled high with her basket of fruit on her head, and she happened upon Larobe. “Hey boy.” She said. Larobe flinched spilling the wood he had stacked in his arms. Startled, he didn’t want to answer her. He wanted to run to the safety of the big house. He was ing what Maybelle had told him about yard niggers and field niggers, but she was so beautiful. Her creamy chocolate skin shone in the sunlight with traces of her dark hair barely visible around the edges of her white scarf and the smile on her face was so contagious that his eyes caught it and his whole being was infected. He was spellbound. “Hey.” He said. This was the first time he had spoken to her and she did not want to lose him but she could see the apprehension in his eyes. She continued to smile at him as she said, “Now don’t you be afraid and go believing all them things Maybelle has told you about me and the others. I will not harm you and no one else out here will. That is just something the whites teach to the house servants so that we are kept apart.” “But if I am caught talking to you won’t they make me a field nigger and won’t them others hate me because I was a house nigger, and won’t they do all sort of terrible things to me?” He asked trembling. “Hush boy.” She said still smiling and settling her basket in her arms. “Don’t you know that no captive does anything unless whites tell them to do it? And if one was to harm you, he would be harming the judge’s property and then he

would have to suffer the punishment of the judge for that.” “But if the judge caught me talking to you, won’t he punish me?” He asked. “He will not because I have already spoken to him about you.” She said. “But we need to talk so I am going to tell the judge how much I like you. I have a way with him and I know it will be alright.” She answered. She then asked. “Is that big black Sambo your father?” Larobe knew he was not but because he was eager to hear about Maura, “Yes,” slipped from his lips. By now Maybelle was standing in the back door looking out on this scene. Before she could call to him, Larobe spied her and hurried restacking the wood in his arms and headed for the big house. Glory looked up at Maybelle and smiled but Maybelle just stared however Glory walked off knowing that Maybelle would only tell him more stories; because she knew that no matter whether Maybelle believed the stories she told, she knew Glory did not wish harm to come to Larobe. A spark was beginning to ignite deep within Glory; she did not know just what was going to change but she could feel it happening. That night in her shack, she hummed while preparing the fruit and when the judge came she did not let his presence enter into her mind. And when he left she prayed to Vishnu and thanked him for the strength to endure all the adversity in her life. Then she prayed to His Personification, Krishna, and thanked Him for the kindness he had shown to her and Jadur. And then she ended her prayer as always: “For I am you and You are me and We are One.”

CHAPTER IX

Maura

M aura was sleeping when Ben tapped on his shack wall; he had spent today as he did most during the cane season. He cut cane from sun-up to sun-down from Monday thru Sunday and when he got back to his shack; he would sit on the dilapidated porch and watch the goings-on in the front of the shacks. He watched the captives prepare food and go through their jiving before turning in for the night and someone would always give him food from what was prepared. Afterwards he would retire until sunrise and then start another day just as the other one. The captives ate lots of stews made from vegetables and some sort of scrap from hogs like a piece of fat or skin and every now and then there would be a pig’s foot or a pig’s tail in someone’s stew if the judge was feeling particularly favorable toward them. Also while in the fields, sometimes one of the captives would capture a rabbit or some other small animal and this would be added to the stew. They ate a bread made from corn meal and cooked over the open fire in a pan with hog fat and they were also allowed some of the fruit that had started to rot from the orchards. On those evenings while the captives prepared their meals, there was much talk in the yard but it was usually just chatter and jokes about each other or how hard or easy their time was on another ranch, and it was certain to include endearing remarks about the judge and Massa Sam. However there was never any serious talk about running away because they were never sure if one of the guards was lurking close around or whether an informer was in their midst. So these captives were always careful to make it appear as if they were quite happy here with never a thought of how their life could be better. However mistrust among the captives was encouraged by the rule that loyalty to the Massa was rewarded and solidarity among themselves was punished which spread the notion of every man for himself. Therefore even when it seemed there

were no captors around, those who harbored thoughts of running away or ill will toward their captors dare not speak of it to anyone for fear of being exposed by one of their fellow captives. However most of the captives were trustworthy; this was not the problem: the problem was that they did not trust each other, therefore there was hardly ever any serious talk among them in the yards or in the shacks. It was for sure that everyone knew the story of Uncle Tom because it was told to every captive from the time he was very young. The lie had been started by the captors but now even the captives told it to their young. It said that once an uprising had been planned by captives on this very ranch. (It didn’t matter which ranch one was on, the story was always about the times on this ranch.) However when the night of the planned attack came, the captors were lying in wait and as the captives neared the big house they were all shot and killed by the captors, except one. And when the massacre was over, the children of the captors ran to this one captive shouting, “We love you Uncle Tom,” because it was he who had warned the whites of the planned attack. This story along with many dastardly deeds such as lashings, chopping off limbs, running down runaways with horses and forced breeding with each other’s wife, all enforced or performed by fellow captives was meant to cause much distrust among the captives. But although they were forced to do these things to each other and would have gladly not participated if they had a choice, it did what it was designed to do: created mistrust among those who most needed trust among themselves in order to ever have any hope of gaining their freedom. However some trust was also kept in the community by their own rules of respect for each other and Maura was the pillar of this. Although the whites allowed what they called nigger weddings, whenever they wanted to match a pair of captives for breeding, they would choose the pair they wanted to mate regardless of the matrimonial status of the pair in the captive community. Since Maura was very tall and muscular; he had been paired with many wives. However, whenever he was paired with the wife of another he would not mate with her. They would put on a good show for the captors and overseers before entering the wife’s shack; and once inside, they would continue to pretend to mate but out of respect for the others, Maura would not. However when the men returned to the shack and their wives would tell them what happened, at first they were disbelieving but after so many wives told of

Maura’s uprightness, they began to respect and trust Maura. Of course when the men were convinced of their wives’ story, their wife still had to become pregnant; and so some harmony and trust was created in the community? Therefore his respect for their married status endeared Maura to the others and they were very careful not to let their secret out because it would endanger them all for the Judge to know this. An act such as this was disobedience by all and all would be punished, therefore this one secret of the captives that the Massa was not privy to was a unifying force that produced touch of solidarity among them. However the family was of no concern to the judge but he did let the young children live within the family structure because it was the easiest thing to do, The family unit functioned like this for a while but inevitably some parents and children were sold to different ranches and farms which caused very sorrowful souls and shattered families. Although the practice of breeding sons and mothers had not proved profitable still there were many cousins and maybe even siblings who were forced bred? In the case of the young men, the judge didn’t want them to have family ties when it became time to breed so they were ordered out of the family shack around eleven or twelve years old. However mothers in order to stay close to their children prepared all their meals outside so that all could eat together, and so most of the captives were aware of some family ties. Since most of the families shared with each other, Maura also participated in this sharing; he was very good at capturing the small animals and birds that nested in the fields, and he readily shared these but he sired no children and had no close kin; however his respectability made him kin to all–they all bragged that he was their kin. However the many children in the community went to work in the fields along with their parents when they were very young. But the young men had to leave their parents shack around eleven years of age and their work was now with the rest of the field hands. Even those girls who were not sold were not allowed to stay with their parents beyond thirteen or fourteen years of age. Many of the young men lived in one of the barns or stables or camped outside their mothers’ shack. The girls were forced to live in group shacks or their own shacks, because the judge wanted them to breed with the young men who lived

in the barns and stables, or he had special young girls that he visited. There was also some in-breeding in this process too, but the casualty babies were not so many but this was the fate of many young men and women and many ailing children were born by this process. Tonight the rapping on the boards right at his head woke Maura and he sat up with a jolt but did not make any noise. This was something he learned as a captive: that a noise in the night could be could be anything and it could be quite disastrous. It could be a lynch mob or a lashing or any number of things that were utterly dreadful to the captive. Therefore he eased off his straw bed and crawled to the door. He positioned himself just beside the door so just in case the door opened suddenly, he could race right out. As he settled himself beside the door and listened he heard a voice in a very light whisper just outside the door. “Sambo, Sambo, I need to talk to you.” Maura didn’t know who this was and he asked very cautiously. ‘’Who are you?” “It is I, Old Ben.” The voice whispered. Now Maura had seen Old Ben limping around the vegetable garden and around the other side of the big house, and of course he knew the story of old Ben’s foot: the captors made sure that everyone knew. “What do you want old man?” Maura replied in a whisper. “I need to talk to you.” Old Ben continued whispering. He had crawled closer to the door now. “If you want to regain your freedom; we need to talk.” Maura heard the word freedom coming from another captive and realized someone else on the ranch was thinking about liberation. He knew Old Ben had been a runaway so seeds of trust started to slowly manifest in his mind and he began to get excited and his next words did not come in a whisper. “But …” He said. “Shhh.” Old Ben cut him off and continued to whisper when Maura shut up. “Now listen, right where you lay your head when you sleep, I want you to stick a straw or weed through the floorboards. I will come around from time to time and speak to you about running away from here.” And then he was gone just as quietly as he had come; Maura wanted to peep out

just to be sure he had heard what he heard and to be sure that it was Old Ben, but he dared not risk opening his door because it might draw some attention from one of the guards so he crawled back to his bed but now he could not sleep. He didn’t know what old Ben had in mind but he was willing to hear anyone who spoke of freedom. He lay awake thinking of the possibilities of escaping; it was overwhelming to finally have someone else speak of running away and his mind was running wild, where would he go, and what would he do? He was extremely hyped by this encounter because it was a gleam of hope; but Maura knew that he could not show his new found optimism and that he had to calm himself before sunrise so he prayed to Romokoko for peace and calmness and gratitude for sending Old Ben.

CHAPTER X

Maura And Old Ben

T he next evening when he came in from the fields he looked toward the big house for Old Ben and he saw him shuffling about around the woodpile but Old Ben never looked up, just kept on chopping wood. As Maura went to his usual place, he realized many things about the situation he and the other captives were in. He thought about how the terrible treatment that the children received when they were insolent toward the Massa put much fear into their mothers; and he realized how this caused mothers to teach their children from the time when they are very young to be docile and never belligerent or disobedient. And he thought about the way the captives who worked the fields were kept from socializing in any way with those who worked in the big house or around the yard and how the stories they told caused distrust. And worst of all he understood about the countless generations born who knew no other way except the rules of the master and would gladly inform the Massa of any dissension or rebellion among the captives; not because they were disloyal but because they thought that they were doing the right thing. All of these things made it easier for the captors to control the captives and this training by the mothers served to make many believe that they were inferior and needed to be controlled by the Massa. But even if the mothers did not believe they were lesser, for want of protection for their children, most mothers did everything they could to insure that their children were docile and obedient including daily reminders and beatings with switches when they thought it necessary. Furthermore the threat of unbearable torture caused most of the captives to obey all the rules, and although some did not give in to the inferior complex, their state of helplessness left them feeling very inadequate. He also thought of the many s of captives who were tied between two horses and ripped apart or lashed to their end or were hung from trees. These

narratives were told with great sorrow and weeping and although many had not witnessed such; there were at least one or two captives on most ranches who had seen such torture. However these methods of inferior indoctrination did cause some solidarity among captives because they felt pity for each other, but the threat of torture and the agony of the actual ordeal was so devastating that most just obeyed the captors, overseers, and mothers, and hoped that they could live their lives without further suffering. And as he thought about these things he realized that he had been trained with the harshest treatment and he wondered about Larobe. Did he learn to be ive on his own or did he receive the handling that Maura had? He presumed that in these years that they had been on the McCabe ranch that they each had been trained by the cruelest means because neither had the protection of a terrified mother. However dissension among captive families was amplified by one tactic more than any other because it relegated the men to a lesser role and caused embarrassment between the couple. That is if there was anything captives needed from the judge such as medicine for a child or a couple of nails to stop a leak; in order to have even the remotest chance of receiving it, the woman would have to be the one to ask the Massa. However although he could ignore or punish any such talk, if he granted the need, he always extracted some seemingly voluntary act of the woman for her husband to witness. This could be touching or maybe just a dance or some other embarrassing act such as raising her skirt, but it was always for certain that the husband would be apprised of this act as punishment for offending the Massa. However In his position the man was only a bystander in these matters between his wife and the master and this realization was the death of their marriage because of the shame they felt. The woman was very ashamed for the embarrassing act she had to perform and the man who lived as her husband was humbled by the master because he knew that he could do nothing to protect his wife, and the wife also knew this, and this shame that they felt was a barrier to their feeling as if they were truly man and wife. This practice acted as a punishment and further proof of their inadequacy. However although most families asked for nothing knowing that they would

have to degrade themselves in order to attain it; there were some who were in a dire need and the demeaning of the couple caused feelings of humiliation in the man and woman that could not be repaired. It also acted as punishment for an insult to the Massa because it was the custom of white men that it was offensive if a black person initiated a conversation with them Maura sat on the raggedy porch every evening watching the goings-on in the front of the shacks and listening to the stories of other ranches and masters, and pondering his plight and the others. When he considered the situation, he vowed that he would not be duped by this devious scheme and he also realized that when the others saw what the captors were doing to them they would find the solution to their misery. That night as he slept, Old Ben once again paid him a visit. This time the rapping came precisely below his head. “Psst, Sambo,” Old Ben whispered. “If you can hear me, tap twice on the floor?” Maura rolled over in his straw bed and leaned next to the straw he has placed between the boards and said. “My name is Maura, and if you …” “Shhh,” Old Ben shushed. “We don’t have time to waste. You must listen very carefully.” Old Ben was lying on his back beneath Maura’s shack to avoid being seen if anyone happened along and his mouth was only inches from the boards of the floor. “Now, if you want to escape you must have a plan. I will tell you of the land of the swamps and some beyond but you must listen to the others and try to discern what is true and what is not. You must also listen to ones in the field who have run and to ones who come from other places to learn everything you can about what is beyond this ranch. You must also pay attention to the whites and learn all you can about how they hunt runaways and about the different farms and if there are any whites who will help us. However you must never let on to anyone, black or white that you are planning to run away.” Maura was listening very fixedly while Old Ben instructed him but then there was silence. Maura called. “Hey, hey.” But Old Ben had gone and Maura laid back into his straw bed with a new outlook: there may be others after all. As months ed, Old Ben visited again and again; each time with more advice on how to escape and different tricks to use: like coming out of the water into trees and making his way in the trees as far as he could before descending. He

told of other guiles like how to double back and how to plant evidence in running water to make it seem you were in places that you were not. He explained that most of these tricks were intended to confuse the dogs that would be used to hunt him, and allow him time to put space between himself and the hunting party. “You must never slow down while using these actions because the success of an escape depends on steady progress in leaving the hunters farther and farther behind, and you must never trust a white man unless he has already proven his loyalty.” Old Ben whispered through the floorboards one night. Maura had many questions each time Old Ben visited him and he asked them in hasty speech. “Where is there to go? Is there any help out there? How will I know when I have run far enough?” His tone was always a low monotone as he lay there in his straw bed nervously whispering to the floor just a few centimeters from his lips knowing that he and Ben were embarking on a very dangerous mission. Old Ben also knew the perilousness of their undertaking as he whispered back to the floor from lying on his back beneath the shack “Okay, okay.” These things will be told to you as best I can, but you have to listen to others to find out more, but you must also be very careful when prodding others so that you do not raise their suspicion.” He warned. After many visits when old Ben had exhausted all his knowledge of the area and tricks to use, he thought it was time to mention Glory. “No, no, no.” Maura whispered very emphatically through the crack in the floor. He was all the way out of his bed now and on his knees almost kissing the boards. “How can I run with a woman holding me back?” “She is not going to hold you back. She will be a help to you.” Ben answered from his position under the shack. There was barely enough room for him to move his head as he lay upon his back in the black soil, his face nearly touching the floor above and though he still spoke in whispers he managed to emphasize the situation so that Maura could feel his emotion. “She is in dire need she had been punished worse than you or I and besides two or three will always have a better chance than one when running.” “How is that?” Maura asked more inclined now that Old Ben had mentioned her

punishment as he ed the woman on the ship but he was still on his knees. “Two heads are more capable of ing than one, four eyes see more than two and four ears hear more.” Old Ben went on trying to convince Maura to take Glory along. “Yes, but four feet make more tracks and two mouths make more noise.” Maura replied still not convinced. “True, true,” Old Ben said. “I can see your point quite clearly, but if this woman does not get a chance to run, I’m afraid she will end up like her mother. I’m sure you have seen the one who walked and mumbled; that one is her mother whom the judge caused much anguish until she could take no more. And anyway if you plan to take that boy of yours, you will need someone’s help. Furthermore, she is the only other person I know who has enough nerve to try to escape right now.” Old Ben was really trying his best to persuade Maura to take Glory along. Maura was at first surprised by the mention of his son and then he realized old Ben was talking about Larobe. He didn’t know why he referred to Larobe as his boy but that was not important. He had promised the lad years ago on the boat that he could stay with him and he was not about to break that promise now. “Oh!” He said, excited but still whispering. “How is Larobe?” “Well, he never talks to me, but I think Glory has made some headway.” Ben whispered back. “You know the way them ones in the big house tell stories about yard niggers and field niggers, I think he is afraid to talk to me.” Old Ben used the word nigger only when describing objectively what he knew others to say. He would never refer to himself or any other captive as nigger subjectively unless there was some advantage for doing it. Maura was particularly interested in Larobe and he asked. “Does he me, does he know I am still here? I try to spot him sometimes but I never see him around the big house.” “He is okay, Glory is trying to make him ready to run but she has to be very careful not to reveal her plan to him for fear he might unintentionally give us all away.” Old Ben answered. Maura knew now that he would take Glory with him; how could he leave her if

she was helping Larobe; besides he knew the story of her mother and he knew that the judge now used her in the way that he did her mother. “Tell her to me to the boy, and let him know that I am going to take him away from this evil place. And also tell her to tell him that I said that he must speak to no one about what he and Glory have to say to each other.” This session between Old Ben and Maura was continuing longer than Old Ben planned and he knew that he must return to his shack before he was missed so he bade Maura so long and was again on his way back to his shack. He turned on his stomach and slid to the edge of the shack careful to check for anyone ing before exiting. After that he crawled straight on his belly dragging his feet behind him in order not to be spotted when ing the other shacks. Then, when he felt he was far enough from the others, he silently crawled on his knees to his shack and eased the door open and crawled inside. Once there, he brushed the debris away from his clothes as best he could and collapsed into his straw bed until sunrise.

CHAPTER XI

Black Bob

T heir shack which was just like all the rest was situated at the far end of the row of shacks and closest to the big house and facing toward the two rows of shacks so that he could see all the others shacks and the big house. The mattress that was sitting on some planks that he had balanced on some wooden crates and a wooden table and chair that sat near the fireplace was some of the perks of being the overseer. But although their shack was just like all the others; its strategic location allowed him to watch all the other shacks, and these discarded items from the big house and some scraps of meat were inducements for Black Bob to do his job well. “Lawdy, Lawdy, Lawdy! That nigger is gonna run shore as the sun comes up in the morning and sets in the evening!” Black Bob declared as he awoke in the middle of the night and sat up with cold sweat drenching his back. “Bob, what is wrong, wake up!” Liza said waking up very excitedly and sitting up beside him. “Who is gonna run, what are you talking about?” “I am woke, woman.” Bob answered firmly. “You go back to sleep and forget what I said.” “No, no, no, who is gonna run, what are you talking about?” She asked her excitement railing in her voice. “Look I don’t want to burden you with this; the less you know about somebody running, the better off you is.” Bob answered her still decisively. “No, no, no, tell me who is gonna run and how you know it. Don’t you know how much trouble that can bring us?” She said trying to persuade him while rubbing his soaking back as the two sat up in their makeshift bed.

“Woman, it ain’t gonna bring you no trouble because you don’t know nothing about it.” Bob said forcefully. “Well if you know somebody is gonna run, then you better tell Massa then it be out of our hands.” She answered still gently rubbing his back. Bob swung his feet around to the floor; the mattress was raised high enough on the planks so that his rangy body would not be so cramped when he sat up. “That’s your answer to everything: tell Massa, let him take care of it. Well, I don’t have to tell Massa. I can just go on like I don’t know and let Massa find out on his own.” He said now lowering his head into his hands and looking unhappily down at the floor. She sat up beside him on the side of the bed and continued to rub his wet back and said very gently now. “But Massa thinks you always knows everything niggers, and Lord knows if he thinks you knows about a nigger who is gonna run and didn’t tell him; there ain’t no telling what he will do to you?” Then she paused her rubbing and glanced into his face and said rather sternly and loudly. “Anyway how you know somebody is gonna run?” Bob leapt to his feet at the loudness of her voice. “Shh, Liza, now don’t talk so loud like dat, cause you don’t know if some of dem guards are hanging around or if some of dem others might hear you.” He then said much quieter now while watching the door. “But I done told you, the less you know, the better off you is.” “But when we got married, we promise we was in this together: You being the overseer and all, we knowed problems would come and we said we would make decisions together.” His wife answered more whispery now while still sitting on the bed. Bob was aware of her tendency to try to protect him but he usually listened to his wife and weighed the things she said anyway because he knew that if he talked it over with her, he probably would come to a rational decision; although her real motive was his protection. All her children had been taken away and now all she had was Bob, and if he was shielding a nigger who was going to run, he might also be taken from her. When the Judge flogged and sold Ned, she tried and tried to get him to change

his mind until she was bashed unconscious but she was not able to protect her child nor herself from the judge’s wrath. Soon after that her other two sons were sold and Liza vowed that she would not have any more children, but the judge threatened her with paired breeding like the others who were forced to breed to supply more captives and revenue for the ranch. She then relented and had one daughter who was taken into the big house when she was a baby but she died in a few years and was never told that Liza was her mother. And now she was in tears as she begged Bob to tell her what he knew because she was afraid that he would be taken from her too. “Okay, okay.” Bob said again sitting on the side of the bed with his head in his hands. Then he turned to her and said very quietly, “I done seen dat Old Ben crawling from under Sambo’s shack at night and dat’s always a sign. You know Old Ben, he think it is his duty to help others run and dat Sambo always had dat look, and now he got dat look even wilder.” “Oh Bob, what is we gonna do? I’m scared, I’m scared Massa is gonna blame you and take you away from me if you don’t tell him.” Liza said letting all her fears come to the front as plump teardrops reluctantly wrung from her eyes. Bob put his arm around her shoulders and answered as soothingly as he could but since his nerves were also frayed his voice sort of cracked as he tried to whisper. “Don’t cry honey.” He cooed as best he could. “We’ll figure this out like we always do, but iffen we always tell Massa every time we know some nigger is gonna run, how we gonna ever find a place we can go. I don’t mean we, like me and you, because I think that I will always be an overseer over niggers and always whupping and lashing them for Massa, but if we tell everything to Massa, then none of us is ever gonna be free.” Liza knew this to be true but she was so afraid of what would happen to Bob if the master knew that he had known of a planned escape and didn’t tell him. And if something happened to Bob, worse would happen to her? “But, why must you be in the middle of this?” Liza asked. “Why must you be the overseer?” She cried. Bob did not answer right away because this remark hit him like a stab in the heart and he at first felt rage but then shame overcame him because he knew just why he was the overseer and he stood and kneeled in front of her and took her hands in his as she sat on the edge of their bed and in his softest voice said:

“I’m the overseer because my mother was a woman who thought she could protect her son. She thought that if she taught me to always obey the Massa, she could protect me and she taught me at a very early age to try to win favor with the Massa. She taught me it was safer to do white folk’s biddings than to be loyal to black folk. And I learned; I learned very well; and the few times when I was disobedient and I felt the fury of the Massa; there she was there bawling and crying and promising the Massa that I would never do it again. “And while growing up on this ranch knowing that there was no one who could protect me I became very obedient and I told the Massa certain things and he made me overseer and told me that it was much easier to be the one who did the beating than to get beat. I also learnt that little favors like a pigtail or a mattress and blankets were forthcoming if I kept the niggers in line and let the Massa know what the niggers were doing. “But I also know that no matter how much I avoided the lashing, the thrashing my mind received for beating and betraying others is much worse, because those wounds never heal, they just fester and gnaw at you and embitter you until you can’t even stand yourself. And now I can’t take it anymore, but I am the overseer and I can’t quit being the overseer but there are certain things I can decide not to tell the Massa even though I can’t quit being the overseer.” Liza listened to her husband but her fear of what would happen to them as a result of not telling the judge was greater than any heroic sense of shame or selfloathing or bitterness and she spoke adamantly. “Well if you are not going to tell Massa, then I will.” “Woman hush up.” He said firmly while standing again. “What would that do except let the Massa know that I knew somebody was gonna run and didn’t tell him. What do you think he would do then? No woman, this is my problem and I am the one to handle it.” “Then what are you gonna do? You have to tell him.” She pleaded. “Like I said,” He answered. “I will handle this myself. You just keep out of it and forget I said anything.” And then he laid back down and tried to sleep. In the morning Bob was up before everyone except Liza who was up and had prepared breakfast. Bob ate his mush with bits of pig flesh and placed a couple of ho-cakes: bread made from corn meal and flour, into a pouch and went

outside. It was his job to see that all the captives were up and ready for their daily tasks. Sam Bronson would come and lead those who were going to the cotton fields to their places and some of the others took each group to their designated areas of work. It was Bob’s job to lead those who were going to the cane fields and Sambo was in that group. Today as Bob led his group he was troubled, he was torn between protecting himself from the Massa’s wrath and loyalty to Sambo. That same morning there was no one to lead Liza to the orchards and she fretted the whole way and walked slower than usual. There were only a few women who worked the orchards, usually it was just her and Glory and a couple more young girls just coming of age, but Liza was very troubled as she walked among the fruit trees and did not notice anyone else. She was worried that Sambo would run and Bob would be blamed. As she made her way down through the apple and peach trees, she thought of what she and Bob had talked about last night but she knew that she dare not tell anyone. Liza’s face though still showing signs of beauty revealed the angst of a woman who had had her family ripped apart and was lined with remembrance that her life was not her own. She was small and petite and her skin was brown like the dark brown mud of the earth which gathered in bare spots near the woodshed after it had rained. Her eyes were also dark brown and she kept her dark hair which was semi-long in braids and wrapped in a scarf of typical African tradition as did most of the captive women on the McCabe ranch. She was only about five feet tall, and when she and Bob were together, there was a great contrast; he tall and black, she short and brown. She knew that her job in the orchards was not as grueling as those in the fields and it was an indulgence that she received for being the wife of the overseer; and that she had done nothing to earn it and it too just like the rest of her life, was at the whim of the judge. The work in the orchards was truly not back-breaking although long and tedious and hot but there was the shade of the trees. The fruit had to be separated for juicing, canning and preserving and there was also fruit for wines and liquors and then there was the fruit which was rotting which was used for feeding the captives and animals. Today as Liza languidly walked, she tred on the fallen fruit but paid this no mind; her attention was not on her work. “How you?” Liza heard Glory greet her as she neared the fig trees.

“Oh, I’m very well.” She answered. But Glory detected the worry in her voice. “Is there something wrong?” She asked. “No I’m fine,” She answered. Then sensing that Glory could tell that she was upset she added: “Maybe I’m feeling kinda poorly.” “Well, I have some herbs back at the shack if you need something.” Glory offered. “Oh I’ll be alright, it’s just something that comes with the dampness of the morning.” Liza answered. Glory could tell that something was bothering Liza but she did not pry. She bade her so long and went on to her business in the apple and peach orchards. Meanwhile after Bob had led his workers to the cane fields, he sat perched atop a black stallion with a rawhide whip and was in charge of their production and captivity. The whites thought that Bob presented a foreboding figure: such a big black on top of a horse with a rawhide whip would discourage any slave from running and persuade him to work extremely hard if he knew what was good for him? The captives also thought Bob an ominous figure astride his horse; they knew that he could certainly run them down and that he could see them easily from atop the horse. Therefore they dare not run or be lax in their duties because Bob, as the overseer, had to react viciously to any attempt to escape or avoidance of duty lest he be punished for neglecting his job. So it was understood between overseer and captives that they would respect Bob’s position and thus save themselves from feeling the lash and keep Bob from wielding it. But Bob was confounded as he paid particular attention to Sambo today; he thought he could see running in his face and his demeanor, he even seemed friendlier to Sam and the others today; but what really convinced him was that he had seen Old Ben slither from under Sambo’s shack time and time again. He wanted to ask Sambo his plan or talk to Old Ben but he dare not, because the more he let it be known that he knew that he was going to run, the greater the possibility that someone else would find out and tell Massa. This would not fare well for Bob and Liza, so he just watched Sambo and worried: he was very

perplexed and the dilemma was his alone.

CHAPTER XII

Old Ben

T hings were happening quite fast on the McCabe ranch Old Ben thought as the time neared for their getaway. Glory had made friends with Larobe and even had him sleeping over at her shack now and then and he had imparted all of his knowledge of escaping and of the land to her and Maura. He hoped that no one knew of their plan but once when he was crawling back to his shack, he thought he saw Bob peeking through the doorway of his shack, but since no one had said or done anything out of the ordinary, he considered all things ready to go. They had not set a date to escape yet but it would be a Saturday night because Sunday was the day when the captives were allowed to sleep an hour later, therefore it would take longer for them to be discovered missing. They hoped that the judge would have made his Friday night visit to Glory’s shack therefore she could have Larobe over. The captives were hoping and praying that all these things would work in their favor but even if they did not, they were going to have to go once they set a date. Glory had quite a task keeping Larobe’s excitement down but she warned him over and over again not to tell anybody, not Blanche, not Maybelle, not anyone. She hoped that his new found excitement would be attributed to his newly acquired friendship with her and the celebration that she and he had planned. Tonight she sat on a basket just outside the door of old Ben’s shack and bathed his half foot in a tin bucket of herbs while he sat in the doorway with his legs outside. Old Ben’s could see anyone approaching but Glory’s back was to the big house. She asked Old Ben without turning around. “Are we ready?” “Well,” said Old Ben quietly. “We are going to have to make a go of it sometime so I think the time has come.” Of course old Ben was not going to run but since he participated in the planning, they always referred to the venture’s participants as we.

“Listen,” Glory said. “I’ll tell the judge I’m going to make something special for Larobe like a birthday since he never had one and I’ll try to be very enticing and convincing but not to seem too insistent as to arouse suspicion. That will also be a reason for him to come out the night before. I’ll tell him how much I’m looking forward to Larobe’s birthday since I don’t have children of my own and maybe he will be enticed to come out the night before because he thinks that I am ready to have his child. He has told me that he wants me to have his children.” She paused and then added very solemnly. “Maybe I can pull it off.” “You have to pull it off,” Old Ben replied. “But I want you to understand that you must have everything ready just in case. The wine with the herbs to make him sleep, the loose boards under your bed, this all must be done the night before in case the old bastard gets the itch to come and see you again the next night. You do understand this?” “Yes I understand,” Glory replied. “But I also know that you may be blamed once we are gone. No one will ever believe that you did not know that we were going to run away.” “You let me worry about that when the time comes,” Old Ben said. “Right now, we must concentrate on getting you and the others as far away from here as quick possible.” He continued. “I want you to all that I told you about the land, about other ranches and about covering your tracks. I’ve told Maura all the same things because the more you both know, the better off you are.” Old Ben could see down to the yards in front of the shacks and could see the fires burning, but he could not make out any of the people he saw; he knew tonight would be his last trip to Maura’s shack and he himself was beginning to feel the excitement. While he was looking down to the shacks, Glory asked. “Do you think anyone on the Davidson ranch will be of any help?” “Steer clear of the Davidson ranch,” Ben said sternly. “Hojo will be older if he is still there and you will only make him more nervous than he already is. But if you get to Bonnie’s after daybreak and he has already gone, it will be all day before he gets back, so check to see if he has a horse grazing nearby. If you can take it without being seen by his wife it will speed your getaway.” “Why won’t you come with us?” Glory asked earnestly. “You won’t hold us

back.” “Now if I do that, who is gonna be here when the next runner come along. No maam, gal, I am gonna stay right here and pretend nothing ever happened and I don’t ever want to see any of you back here.” Old Ben said bluntly. Glory finished bathing his foot and dried it with some clean rags and then she said good bye and headed to her shack which was only a few yards away; she would pray tonight to Lord Vishnu and especially His personification, Krishna, her friend. She would ask Krishna to go with them every step of the way just as he did with Arjuna. Then she would ask Vishnu to please keep her mother strong and safe. Glory never forgot her mother in her prayers and tonight was no exception. She would also ask Vishnu to protect her and Larobe and Maura from whatever danger lurked beyond the ranch. She would thank Him for ever being her guide and then she would end her prayer as always: “For You are me and I am You and We are the life that reside in all things and We are One.” Old Ben retired to his shack but not for long. He would later that night crawl down to Maura’s shack and go over the plans once more and set the date with Maura. Black Bob had widened a crack in the board of his wall and tonight he watched as a shadowy figure crawled from the trees and under the shack occupied by Sambo and he worried more and more. Larobe lay on a pallet wide awake. He slept in a little room that was separated from the women with cardboard in the attic just across from the larger room where Blanche, Mamie and Maybelle slept. He was terribly excited and he was glad he did not sleep in the room with the women anymore. It was hard enough keeping his secret but if he was in the room with the women he might have blurted something out; and Glory had warned him that if he ever told anyone, they could not leave and he very much wanted to leave here but his thoughts of freedom kept him awake. Maura listened intently to old Ben tonight; he was more than ready to make his move but he knew that he, as well as the others, must conceal their excitement if their flight was to be a success. Liza had also taken to peeping through the crack that Bob had made and she fretted and worried. It had been six months since Bob awakened that night and everyone who was aware that Maura was going to run grew tenser with each day, but each recognized that the project must be kept hidden if all who knew were to escape the savagery of the Judge.

CHAPTER XIII

Larobe

O n the date set for their escape Larobe was extremely excited; the captives of the house knew that he had never had a birthday and they attributed his eagerness to the plans Glory had made for his birthday celebration and they were not at all aware of the escape intended. They all except Blanche were quite critical and wary of Glory’s celebration and warned him about associating with field niggers. He was filling the wood box on that day in the kitchen when Maybelle lectured him. She talked as she sauntered back to stove peeking into pots and stirring. “Boy I done told you to stop going out to that field nigger’s shack. She can’t bring you nothing but no-good.” Maybelle said to him angrily as she wiped her hands on a dish towel and slung it across her shoulder. “Anyway I don’t know why you couldn’t ask me to make you a birthday celebration. I coulda asked the Massa and if you ain’t been cantankerous he woulda let me. But naw, you had to go and ask a field nigger. I tell you, nothing good is gonna happen to you messing around with field niggers and yard niggers.” “Aw Maybelle,” he answered as he unloaded the firewood from his arms into the wood box behind the stove. “Glory is a very nice person. She is no different from you and she never says anything bad about you. She just says that you never was a field person and the white people in the big house have taught you to be suspicious of all black people who don’t work in the house.” “Oh, hush your mouth boy, you don’t know nothing yet. You keep on hanging out with them, after a while you will be just like them. You will be saying bad things about the Massa and everybody in the big house. Why they will even have you thinking that you can run away?” Maybelle said scolding him. This last statement stopped Larobe in his tracks as he was placing wood in the wood box and he looked up at Maybelle with his mouth gaping. “Close your

mouth boy,” Maybelle said. “What’s wrong with you? Did she tell you could run away?” She whispered this last question. “No, No. I, I never knew you could run away from here.” Larobe stammered hurriedly still frozen with some of the wood still in his arms. She then said to him quite sternly but quietly with both hands on her hips and bending toward him. “You just hush up boy and don’t you never talk about running away cause you can’t; and if you try or even talk about it you will be caught and whupped so bad, you will never forget it. They may even cut off your leg or foot like they did Old Ben.” Larobe thought about this as he finished unloading the wood from his arms, he did not want to be lashed or have his foot cut off or any of the other horrific things that he had heard about runaways. He too knew the story of Old Ben’s foot and Maybelle had filled him with many other tragic tales like the one about being torn apart by horses and many more; and they were all the result of some captive trying to run away. Maybelle noticed Larobe’s musing and mistook it for worry and said more soothingly. “Don’t you worry none about that boy. You just wait and I’ll tell the Massa that you want me to have a birthday celebration for you instead of that Glory. I’ll fix you a big cake and then we can celebrate up in my room.” “Oh no!” He said snapping from his thoughts. “I can’t disappoint Glory. She has already arranged it. But next time I want you to have it.” He said wondering if he had let on that he was plotting to run away. “I don’t want to do nothing that will get me lashed and sent out to the fields so after tonight I am going to stay away from her. I like it here!” He lied. “Now that’s a smart boy,” she answered. “You go ahead and be nice to that Glory this time but I don’t want you hanging around her no more after today. I’m not saying she is not a nice person and all. I’m just saying you is a house nigger and us house niggers got it a whole lot better than them yard niggers and field niggers and you don’t want to lose them privileges.” “Yes’m,” he said meekly. And then he said while starting for the back door. “I better go out and get my work done so that I will be ready for my birthday tonight. I don’t want to miss it because I haven’t done my work.”

“How she know it’s your birthday anyway,” she called after him angrily again while following him to the door to the back patio. “We don’t know how old you are. All we know is you been here about six years,” she yelled as he went out the door. “Whew,” he said when he was out of her range; he knew he had come awfully close to letting the secret out, however the things Maybelle said weighed heavily on his young mind. He realized that since he had been on this ranch, he was not physically harmed except for a spanking now and then from Maybelle and that whipping he received that time he pushed Lee-lee and Maureen into the mud. Otherwise he had escaped the lash. But now he was going to run away and Maybelle said no one could run without being caught and he was terrified of what would happen if they were caught. But as he considered freedom: going home, his parents and his soon to become manhood and realized if he stayed here there was no chance of any of these things ever happening. There could be no learning, no rituals of manhood, no family and he would never see his parents again. He could have none of these things unless the master approved and he still could take them away even if he had once allowed them. He could never do anything except what the master approved of. No sir, he thought after considering these things; he must take his chances with Glory and Maura and make sure that they are never caught. Suddenly he heard Glory quietly calling him, shocking him out of his thoughts. “Hey boy, what you thinking about?” Larobe had begun to stack the wood that old Ben had chopped and he sprang from his stooping position by the woodpile; the wood spilling from his arms. He was startled to see her standing so close and his voice was too loud as he blurted, “Maybelle said we can’t get away, is that true?” “Hush boy,” Glory said glancing around discreetly and hushing him with her forefinger to her lips. “Someone might hear you.” When Larobe seemed to have calmed down she asked quietly. “Now what you done told Maybelle?” He spoke hurriedly and still too loudly. “Nothing, I didn’t tell her nothing, she just told me nobody can run away without getting caught. She said field niggers and yard niggers is always talking about running away but they always get caught and make things worse for all niggers.”

Glory again onished him to speak more quietly. “Shhh, You mustn’t talk so loud or you will give us away.” She told him as she moved closer to him and he was captivated by her radiant beauty and by her loveliness that reminded him of his mother. Then she said. “Now tell me very quietly, what did you say to her to make her say those things?” “I didn’t say nothing, really I didn’t,” he answered looking up at Glory with tears in his eyes that the thought of his mother brought. He knew he was being truthful but then he added. “She asked me if you had told me we could run away and it surprised me but I said no you did not, I really did.” “Okay, okay,” Glory replied very quietly still calming him down. “But when you go back into the house, I only want you to talk about your birthday. Regardless of what anyone else does, you just concentrate on your birthday celebration and everything will be fine. Don’t worry about what Maybelle says, there are certain things she has been taught and she doesn’t know that some captives escape from a ranch somewhere every day. So when you go on back into the house try your best to talk only of your birthday because we can’t let anyone know what we are going to do.” “But, but…,” he said but she shushed him up again. “No one can stop us if you don’t reveal to them what we are planning. You must not let their talk disturb you. I know that there are lots of people who ran and were not re-captured. Some are living in a place called Canada, some are living on islands in the sea not far from here and some made it all the way back to their ancestors land. So you are to pay no attention to what she says about running away; and do not say one word about what we are going to do.” Glory said all of this in a soothing reassuring tone as she wanted to convince him that Maybelle was wrong. “Yes’m,” he said finally breaking the spell of the remembrance of his mother and restacking the wood in his arms. When Glory thought that he was okay again she left him with a final warning. He then said to himself as he headed for the big house with the firewood stacked in his arms, “I won’t tell anybody anything,”

CHAPTER XIV

The Escape

T he night when old Ben gave the signal by ing his doorway with a lighted candle Maura was ready; he slid carefully through the space where the floorboards were removed, fell silently to the earth beneath and crawled very warily to the clump of woods behind the shacks. Black Bob was spying through the widened crack in his wall and his heart rate soared as he witnessed a long black figure wriggle from under Sambo’s shack and slink into the woods. In Glory’s shack she and Larobe were about to slip through the floor when they heard footsteps outside her door. She was just able to cover the space with the tattered mattress before the judge stepped inside in a drunken stagger. “Well, how are you and this young buck enjoying the celebration,” he slurred as he stumbled into the shack. “Hi, Massa we were not expecting you.” She said ignoring his question and glancing at him somewhat surprised and then warningly to Larobe. “I just thought I would stop to see how it was going.” He said falling and catching himself on the wooden table and flopping down in the single wooden chair. Larobe said nothing, just stood and stared but Glory said. “We were just finishing. I was about to send him back to the big house. You just sit there Massa while I send him on his way and I’ll get you a drink of that wine that you like so much.” She coaxed as she went to Larobe and stood behind him with her hands on his shoulders. “No, no, I’ve had enough to drink,” he protested as he righted himself in the chair and turned it around so that he was facing her. “You let that little nigger go back up there with Maybelle and them others because me and you have got

business to take care of.” He said while patting his lap. “Now you just wait a minute,” Glory giggled while smiling at him. “I have a special wine that I have been saving just for you. You must taste just a little. It will make our business better.” After Glory took her mother’s place she had learned that she had no way out of her promise and she had long ago taken to being rather friendly with the judge and thus avoided the beatings that her mother endured. However although she bore the Judge’s advances to avoid his savagery, there was no way that she could end the embarrassment and shame that resulted from this pretend relationship; until tonight. The judge smiled at this and said. “Oh alright then, but you gonna have some too?” “Sure I will,” she said and smiled and her smile had the just an enchanting effect on the judge as it did Larobe. “Just you wait right there until I send this one on his way.” Now she walked outside with Larobe letting the shabby door close behind her. When they were outside, she looked around to see if anyone else was around and said sternly and quietly to Larobe while pushing him down to the ground. “You crawl around to the back and wait for me, you understand?” “Yes’m,” he whispered humbly as he lay on the ground and started his creep. Glory glanced around again before going back the shack. “Well, Massa,” she said upon entering. “Now we is gonna have our party.” Then she started for the jars that she kept on the shelf and the judge reached out for her as she ed but she skipped past him and said. “Now, now, massa, I want you to have this wine. It will make you feel real good.” She reached on the shelf on the wall farthest from the fireplace and got a glass and jar of wine. She then strolled in her most seductive way to the judge smiling and kissed him on the cheek and sat on the table beside him. She poured only one glass of wine smiled at the judge again and said cheerfully as she ed it to him. “Oh Massa you are really going to like this.” The Judge smiled and said, “I like it already,” while raising the glass to his lips. Glory smiled and leaned back on the table taking the glass from his hand when

he finished his sip and pretended to drink from it. “Oh Massa,” she said, “we is gonna have a good time tonight.” She slid off the table and into his lap raising the glass to his lips again. This continued for a while; she on his lap pretending to drink while she loosened his clothing and drizzled all the liquid down his throat, but all the time she was thinking of her mother and how the judge abused her; and she also thought of the many years that she had suffered his violation of her. She didn’t really think of the cruelty and damage done to all the other captives like Maura did; she could not when her hatred for the judge’s brutality of her mother was so overwhelming and her situation was so horrendous; tonight her own liberation was most urgent and left no time for empathy with others. She continued to sit on his lap and dispense him the liquid while she had these thoughts, but when she knew that he had drank enough she stood up and leaned into his ear and whispered. “Die bastard!” The Judge was suddenly sober and he tried to speak as he rose from the chair and grabbed for her but he only grunted and grasped air as he tumbled to the floor with a crash. Glory quickly grabbed her cache of supplies, pulled the mattress back and slipped to the black earth beneath her shack. She didn’t bother to try to cover the hole because she knew the judge was not going to awaken nor did she worry if anyone heard the clatter: it did not matter after the deed that she had done, she had to go anyway, besides whenever he was discovered everyone would know that she was gone. She crept from beneath the shack, met Larobe and together they crawled into the woods in back of the shacks. She then took Larobe by the hand and ran as fast as she could to the appointed place to meet Maura. Black Bob was again peeping through his widened crack and as he witnessed two shadowy figures creep from Glory’s shack, he sighed with anguish: “Lawdy, Lawdy, Lawdy, trouble, trouble, trouble!”

CHAPTER XIV

Runaways

“W hat took you so long?” Maura asked in an angry hushed tone when Glory and Larobe came huffing and puffing to where he was waiting for them in the clump of woods behind the shacks. He had only agreed to take her along because she was bringing Larobe. “Just shut up and let’s get going.” She answered just as wrathful as he while catching her breath. This was the first time she had spoken to Maura but from her conversations with Old Ben; she knew why he had agreed to bring her along. He and Ben had argued long and grueling about the merits of bringing a woman along but in the end they had agreed that Glory had the best chance of getting Larobe out of the house. Larobe was very glad to see Maura and he ran to him and hugged him so tight and it almost brought tears to Maura’s eyes. “Come on, come on little man,” he said while pushing him away. “We have to get started.” And now they were runaways; a status that could bring the worst punishment upon them and even death. They would be hunted more fiercely than any animal and they were fair game for anyone who chose to in the hunt. They had no allies; there was no one they could trust; only themselves. But there was no turning back in any case; they had already broken all the rules of being a slave and if they were caught their punishment was certain. First they went to a pre-arranged place in the thickets where old Ben had caged a baby skunk in a makeshift cage of ropes and reeds. Here they shed their clothes and donned rugged pants and shirts which had been saturated with the odors from the animal. “Whew,” Glory said, “do we have to wear these?” “Yes, we have to wear them. Old Ben said they would confuse the dogs when we turn the animal loose and that will give us a good start,” Maura answered.

“Besides, the rugged clothes will ward off insects and other critters.” “I know that,” Glory said irritably. “I made them; I was just trying to make conversation.” “Now ain’t no time for conversation woman, we got running to do.” Maura shot back. Now that they were dressed they bundled their old clothes and set off toward the swamps. Glory carried the clothes along with her other bundle and Maura brought the caged skunk and the three moved at a steady pace keeping as quiet as they could as they moved through the thickly wooded clump of forest . Maura started out in front tugging Larobe but Glory soon ed them. When they reached the swamps, they waded across the first pond where they released the animal and went back into the water where there were snakes and gators but the runaways paid these no heed. This was another trick Old Ben had taught them: “Just act like you don’t even see them,” he said. Although Maura had to concentrate extremely hard to heed this advice and Larobe was quite frightened, Glory seemed to have no trouble at all following Old Ben’s instructions. However, the three of them knew they could not stop until they came to the end of the swamps and so they moved as fast as they could; the two males trying to keep up with Glory. Maura was looking after Larobe and was going along very well, but Glory seemed possessed; she ran faster and swam faster and egged the two males to hurry. When they made it to dry land they kept running until they came to a moving stream in the forest where they shed their reeking clothes and released them in the water, and donned more of the same rugged outfits but without the skunk odor this time; this was another of Old Ben’s tricks to confuse anyone who was hunting them. The cascading water would take their smelly clothes to places that they had not been. They then waded across and Glory led the way again. When they reached the other side they ran into the forest and collapsed on the soft ground beneath a willow whose hanging branches hid them. After a few minutes of resting, Glory was up and ready to go. “Let’s go!” She

rasped as she sprang to her feet, her breath still coming in heaves. “Whoa, whoa, hold on,” Maura said still sitting. “We got to have a chance to catch our breath.” “We don’t have time, we must get, started,” Glory said impatiently. “They may have discovered the judge by now.” “Discovered?” Maura said surprised. “What do you mean discovered?” “You know someone may have come by the shack and saw him. They may be looking for us.” “It is not even light yet,” Maura said getting up and pulling Larobe to his feet. But I guess the farther along we are, the better off we are because when they wake up the hunt will surely be on.” “Well what are we waiting for,” Glory said. “Let’s get started.” The animals scampered out of their way as the trio made an awesome sight cutting and smashing their way through the dark semi tropical forest. This time they moved through thick vegetation that tore at their skin. Maura had a machete but he wanted to use it as little as possible in order not to leave a trail. But he didn’t have to worry about that because Glory soon went him, literally smashing through the foliage with her body as if it was not even there. As the sun began to make its way up to their right, they were satisfied that they were headed north, but now as they traveled, the sweat from their bodies begin to mix in their clothes which still carried traces of the skunk odor and the runaways changed clothes again. They bathed themselves in the brook and donned their new clothes which were the same as the others. This time Maura took the discarded clothes up a tree as far as he could climb and hid them as best he could with branches and leaves. The clothes that they now wore was the last of the attire Glory had made from discarded cloths of many kinds including burlap and canvas and they hoped these outfits carried no trace of the skunk odor. As the three continued the plant life was still amply thick but they could see traces of where others had come this way. However the trio would only take a trail for a while then cross over to another trail never leaving signs that they had

ed between the trails. And as the sun climbed higher and higher, they were careful to keep it to their backs so they knew they were headed north although they were crisscrossing trails. They continued north being careful to leave only a false trail behind them and they all had in mind the white boy, Bonnie, and hoped he had gone. According to Old Ben, they would be there soon and he was no friend. After that would be the Davidson ranch and a few miles further, another ranch. But although they used these as guideposts along the way they would not go near the ranches but since Bonnie lived in the forest; they must be careful so as to not let him or his wife see them. After they got to Bonnie’s place they went deeper into the forest to be sure they were not seen but this was no hardship for them. They had food and herbs which Glory had packed; and they had a machete and the forest was abundant with streams and springs. They also had the will to endure much adversity to gain their freedom and Glory seemed to have the most resolve of all. They traveled in silence most of the time with only an occasional, “this way, or over there, or over here,” from Maura or Glory. And so with the thorns and branches cutting their skin and the sun baking their bodies and the insects stinging their whole being, this trio continued their quest for freedom with a determination that could only be expressed by those to whom freedom had been so viciously denied.

CHAPTER XVI

Black Bob

T hat Sunday morning the sun had hardly appeared over the horizon before Bob heard Sam Bronson calling out loudly and angrily. “Bob, get your black ass out here and I mean right now, and get the rest of them niggers out here so I can see who is missing!” Sam was sitting atop a large brown mare facing the doorway of Bob’s shack. He was in a total uproar and his face was contorted as he held a rifle in one hand while drawing back on the reins of the horse with the other. He also had a pistol strapped to his side. “I mean get your black ass out here now,” he bellowed! Bob ran out with no shirt and tugging his pants with one hand and at his brogan with the other and hopping on one foot that was already shod as he tried to dress himself and run at the same time. When he was just in front of the steed he asked frightfully, knowing that Sambo, Glory and Larobe were well on their way. “What’s wrong Massa, suh.” “We got runaways and they is also murderers; they kilt the judge and when we catch them you niggers is gonna see hangings and lashing like you never seen before.” Sam ranted. Bob was always aware that a plot was underfoot but he was not prepared for this news. “Oh lawdy, lawdy, don’t tell me some po nigger done kilt the judge, oh lawdy no,” he moaned. “Git all them niggers out dem shacks now and stop your contrived whining,” Sam roared again! “If I find out that you knew anything about this your black ass is mine!” “Get out here all you niggers, get out here!” Bob shouted as he ran through the yard; although he knew no one would be coming from Sambo’s shack, he shouted just the same when he ed it. In a few minutes all the captives were

out of their shacks and cubbyholes in the barns and stables half-dressed and trembling in the early morning coolness. They did not know why they had been summoned, but they knew that something was terribly wrong when Sam called for an assembly of all the captives so early on their hour of rest. When all the captives were assembled in the yard and standing in front of their shacks with their families, it was easy to see Maura was not here. “Just as I suspected,” Sam said and then shouted. “Bob you get the dogs. We is gonna find them niggers who done this to the judge!” Sam yelled this while dismounting and walking up to Maura’s shack and kicking the door open; but as he walked to a neat bundle under a tattered blanket to kick it, he knew that Black Sambo was not there; he already knew that Glory and Larobe had gone. By now four or five more of the white guards had rode over on horses as much wailings could be heard coming from the big house. Black Bob who had finished dressing had five bloodhounds on leashes ready to lead the hunt but he was very much aware or the grieving sounds. As the hunting party started out the weeping from the house seemed to intensify and the pitiful and mournful sounds served to spur the hunting party but it caused more trembling in Black Bob. However if Larobe and Maura were here, the wailing and moaning would have reminded them of their time on the ship which brought them to this new world. When a calamity such as this occurred the captors in order to reinforce the notion that no captive could run away or disobey any rule allowed no deviation from strict obedience to every order, even an order that was not heard or understood. Hence there would be many lashing for the slightest incident and even before the hunt was completed; these repercussions would begin, so soon the howling and moaning would begin in the fields. Sam Bronson led twelve white men and Black Bob on the hunt but there were six or seven guards left on the ranch to punish the captives. There was now an armed sentry at each end of the shacks at night and the captives were not allowed to gather in the yards. Each family had to prepare their meals inside the shacks with the doors closed and the sweltering heat gave no relief to tired bodies that had labored in fields of cane, cotton and tobacco from sun-up to sundown. Furthermore there was no chatter or singing in the fields: there was only toil and bellowing and constant wailing from those who had felt the lash of some watchman.

In the big house there was complete trust in the captives there and they became more attentive to the judge’s family and they too moaned and wept. These were genuine tears that they shed for the family and they were just as sorrowful as the others in the house, because they too dreaded the times that were coming. Without the judge whom they had gotten used to they knew not what was to be their fate. The hunting party got off to a bad start with all the participants having to dismount as they came to the marshy areas of the swamps and they became even more upset as the dogs became totally confused. But upon discovering the spot where the skunk was picked up; the dogs recognized the smell that they had picked up where the human scent dissipated and picked up that trail, however they again fell into disarray when they came to the spot where the captives loosed the skunk and waded into the water. Some picked up the animal trail but the others followed the captives trail to the water’s edge and then they would vice-versa and those who followed the animal would follow the human trail to the water and the others would pick up the animal trail. Sam recognized that the dogs were useless at this point and cursed old Ben. “There’s only one nigger who can confuse these dogs and I’m gonna deal with him when we get back,” he snorted. Black Bob re-harnessed the dogs and the hunting party continued their trek into the swamp but they knew they were losing valuable time. As they led their horses through the marshy land, Sam begin to question Bob. “You black sonavabitch, did you know these niggers were going to run?” He barked. “No suh, Massa, I didn’t know nothing. Iffen I had known, I sho would had told you Massa Sam. I know that running niggers just makes it bad for all us coons, suh.” Bob answered looking pleadingly up at Sam who was still on his horse. “Well, you just that cause we is gonna catch these niggers and we is gonna show all yall niggers what happens when yall harms a white man. There is gonna be hell to pay for all of yall. And if I find out that you knew anything about this, then woe unto your black ass,” Sam warned. “No suh, Massa, no suh, I didn’t have nothing to do with these niggers running, no suh, I sho didn’t.” Bob pleaded while dancing from one foot to the other and clasping his hands in a prayerful mode and looking pitiably at Sam.

The marsh was getting softer and the weight of the horses was too much so some in the party had to lead the horses around the swamps while the rest continued the hunt, and this caused the hunting party to fall further behind in their pursuit. However regardless of the time being wasted by the hunting party: a white man had been killed by blacks and there would be no turning back until the guilty ones were apprehended. Bob was torn between two feelings: he was elated that the hunting party was having trouble because this meant that the captives were getting away; but he was also frightened and concerned. He knew that each time a captive made a successful escape it brought gladness to the rest because it meant that there was hope that one could run away, but he also knew he would ister many lashing for the slightest incident and Sam or one of the others would lash him if he did not perform his duties up to their standards. He continued as a member of the hunting party with Sam Bronson right at his heels and he knew he had to track these runaways with all his knowledge and ability. He could not for one moment let the others suspect that he was not tracking in earnest because this would bring unbearable punishment upon himself, still he hoped that he would not catch up to them. His dilemma broadened as the sun made its way across the sky: the trail was non-existent; there were no signs to indicate the direction of the runaways and the dogs could discern no trace which raised his hope that he would not find them; but if he did not find a trail soon, he was afraid Sam would accuse him of slacking and this would bring a terrible lashing upon himself. And so Bob used all his tracking skills in his effort to find a trail regardless of his hope of failure, but these captives had left no signs other than the ones that confused the hunting party. Finally after finding no trace in the swamps, Sam decided they should circumvent the swamps and re-group at the north end of the swamp with the horses and dogs and try from there. But this also did not give them a trail to follow and so Sam decided they should cross the stream and start from there. They continued off into the forest, and although the dogs could not discern a trail, the hunting party headed on anyway. As they moved downstream to find a place shallow enough for the horses to cross, Bob noticed clothing caught on some rocks. He fished these from the stream and gave the dogs a sniff and the

dogs re-crossed the stream and headed back the way they had come so Sam concluded that the dogs’ olfactory senses had been damaged and ordered Bob to re-harness them. However Sam decided to head due north because most runaways always headed north. After a few miles into the forest the dogs picked up a scent and the hunting party became excited. “Alright, we got something now Sam shouted excitedly. Now we gonna get these murdering niggers.” The dogs were almost yanking Bob’s arm from his frame trying to get at the scent they had picked up. “Got dammit nigger, let them dogs go!” Sam screamed. Dread came over Bob as he released the dogs, he knew that if these captives were recaptured so quickly, then aspirations of others would be dashed that much more. This was because although most captives were quite docile and obedient and pretended to be satisfied or resigned to their predicament, they still longed for freedom and were encouraged whenever a runaway was successful. Bob let the dogs go and ran along behind them, but soon they were leaving him behind and the men on the horses also went right past him as they followed the dogs. Bob was not on a horse and he could not keep pace with the others but he could hear the clamor of the dogs barking and the men yelling excitedly as he watched as they hurried further into the forest. As he ran along with his breathing becoming more and more labored; the feeling of revulsion overcame him more, because if they caught the runaways he would be the one to do the lashing. But he did not like lashing a runaway because the captors expected the lashing to be terribly severe. There was also a woman and child he would have to lash and this caused him even more distress. This foreboding weighed heavier and heavier on him as the noise ahead of him was becoming fainter and he slowed his pace; that Sambo didn’t know how much trouble he had caused, he thought. Bob followed the trail of the horses now barely running at all as his thoughts turned to his wife Liza and the others back at the ranch and how the escape would affect conditions for everyone else on the ranch? Sam would now be in charge and there was bound to be changes. He knew how Sam and many of the guards leered at some of the wives and other women including Liza and the young girls but the judge had kept them in line. Now there would be no one to stop them

He had heard of these times before: marriages would now be disallowed and dissolved and the guards allowed to take any woman they desired from among the captives? Even the young girls who had not come into their womanhood would not be safe from these pedophilic predators. Also more breeding by the captives would now be ordered and more selling of family , and it was for certain that these three runaways would be hanged after he had lashed them, but as he agonized more and more about the troubles ahead, he could hear the barking of the dogs getting louder. Bob knew that the dogs had reached the object of their senses by the excitement in their yapping and he knew he was getting closer to the hunting party. He pursued the barking of the dogs until he could hear the voices of the men. As he came close enough to see what was going on, he saw that the dogs were yapping and excited as they tried to climb the trunk of a towering tree and the men were all looking up with puzzlement: they could see nothing in the tree except what looked like an animal lair. “Alright,” Sam shouted. “We are going to shoot it down, whatever it is.” As the men raised their rifles and began blasting away at the branches and leaves, Bob turned his head. Although he had seen many atrocities done to his people and had participated in many, he did not want to see a man, woman and child shot full of holes. As the blasting continued, suddenly a clump fell down through the branches and the dogs went straight for it. “Bob get them dogs back and let’s see what we got here.” Sam yelled at Bob. Bob quickly ran to the bundle shooing the dogs with a stick and then trying to reharness them. Meanwhile one of the men in the party quickly dismounted and went to inspect the bundle which had fallen. As he bent over to get a closer look, he recoiled holding his nose. “Must be a damn skunk’s nest?” He mumbled as he withdrew whimpering. “Bob get over there and see what it is!” Sam yelled. “Yes suh,” Bob answered, hurrying over and frowning as he approached. He pulled the clump apart and discovered the discarded clothes of the runaways. Bob breathed a sigh of relief because he knew the runaways had bought a few more precious moments but Sam cursed old Ben again; “That sonoavabitch is

gonna pay for this!”

CHAPTER XVII

The Runaways

T onight the runaways traveled deep into the forest and rested as the stars shone above them pointing their way to Canada and freedom. They traveled by the sun during the day and by the stars at night and although they did not know exactly where they were, they were certain that they were headed north. They were also confident that they had not been spotted by anyone and they were pleased that they did not hear the dogs barking. So as they sat close together to fight the chill of the night in a small clearing well hidden in the murky forest and rested against some fallen trees, they talked about their situation. Maura was the first to speak and he said unbelievingly as he lay against the log with his hands beneath his head. “I have never seen a woman with such resolve as you. You run as if you never tire; you swim faster than I and you seem almost trancelike but you speak very little?” He paused and then added questionably. “Your strength is very irable, but tell me, how such a little one can have such power?” Glory sat up and looked across at him and answered solemnly and slowly as Larobe who was between them snuggled closer to her. “When life has taught you that there is no one that can help you, and you have to endure whatever it is that someone else decides is your fate, and then you have a chance at freedom; little obstacles such as forests and streams are not that hard to conquer.” Maura was still quite impressed but he had thoughts of what was ahead for them except running: “This is our third night out and I have not heard the dogs so that means that we still have a goodly lead on our pursuers. Therefore my mind says that it is time for me to use it more. I must not put all my effort into running as I did when we first escaped. I must now begin to think about where I will go; about how I will present myself if we come upon others. These things slow my body down. But nothing seems to slow you down?”

“You must not slow down,” Glory said very much agitated. “You must have no confidence that we are free of our captors. We must continue to run as if they are at our heels because they will never give up now that they have discovered the judge.” He sat up like her now and questioned her more intently. “Why do you speak of discovering the judge? He awakened on his own and called the others together. You did give him enough to sleep through the night, didn’t you?” “Yes, I did,” she answered. “Then,” said Maura as he started to lean back again. “If we have enough lead on them and they can find no trace of us; they will give up their hunt because they cannot stay away from the ranch but for a while.” “They will never give up!” Glory said. Her voice was urgent now, “We must continue as we have been. There is no freedom for us until we get to a place called Canada!” Maura questioned her again while still relaxing against the fallen trees. “Surely you don’t think they will follow us that far? I have heard that Canada is a long way and they will have to get back to tend the ranch? We are but three workers and it is such a big ranch?” Glory could see that he did not understand the trouble they were in and she knew she had to tell him. “The judge is not going to wake up,” She blurted out. “He is dead!” This shocked Maura and he looked at Glory with amazement and sat up again. “You, you killed him? Why? Did you think it was necessary?” He asked quite disturbed. “Yes it was necessary, it was very necessary.” She said and explained to him. “It was necessary for what he did to my mother and for what he did to me. And it was needed for what he would do to the next young girl who happens to be on his ranch.” She looked into Maura’s eyes as she told him her reasons and saw that he was surprised but she continued. “It was vital for all these things and I’m glad to be the one who killed him.” And then her emotions overcame her and the tears flooded her cheeks flowing in splashes that seem to have no end.

Maura said nothing; he put his arms around her and rocked her in his arms and when he was able to speak he realized the source of her extraordinary ability. He also grasped that she must be living with a terrible crisis. “Don’t worry,” he said. “We will get out of this place; we will find a place for us. The three of us will pull together and we will be free,” he said emphatically but soothingly still rocking her in his arms. Larobe had said nothing during this conversation between Maura and Glory, but he had heard every word. He became very frightened and now that they were quiet he asked:” Does this mean that they will come and get us and we will have to go back to the ranch? Does it mean that I will be lashed and I will become a field nigger? What will happen to us?” He asked. He was in almost in tears also. Maura hugged him and Glory tighter. “Don’t worry little man,” He said. “No one will come and take us anywhere.” Now as he sat with his arms around Glory and Larobe, he realized how long it has been since he was in a position to make a decision about his life or someone else’s life, and really think that he had the ability to carry out a plan as a free man. But as he soothed Glory in his arms with Larobe between them, he understood that he must make these decisions now because he had inherited a family and he must protect that family. Then the three of them drifted off to sleep while huddled together and gradually lay back against the fallen tree because they had not slept since their escape. As they succumbed to their tiredness, Glory whispered a prayer to Vishnu. “Dear Lord, I will not be afraid because I know that you, O wisest of all Lord, is the very life that flows through me. But please do not let the little one be frightened and help the strong one to understand that our quest for freedom does not end here and give him the strength to persevere over all odds. And then she ended her prayer with a plea for her mother. “And please O Lord send your Self Krishna to cheer my mother and keep her safe.” That morning everyone moved with that same urgency that Glory had as they arose at the crack of dawn gathering food and herbs and getting ready to continue their trek. They all knew that they could not be caught because the punishment would surely be death: maybe not for Larobe but he too certainly would sustain a terrible punishment.

When they had gathered all that they would, they were off again and this time although Glory was still pressing on with much resolve, Maura was running with the knowledge that the judge had been killed and he easily out distanced Glory but they both had to slow down for Larobe and Maura sometimes kept him astride his back. And although Maura thought that they were moving at full speed before, they now travelled at a greater pace. The terrain was beginning to be somewhat hilly now and the runaways thought that they could find more shelter in the hills, however when they reached the hills they kept up a steady pace until about midday and then they came to rest near a stream. It was well hidden in a thickly forested area and halfway up a hill. When they had refreshed themselves and had eaten and were sitting around on some large water washed rocks by the stream, Maura said to Glory. “Just where do you plan on going and how will we know when we are there?” “Canada,” Glory answered quickly. “But I don’t know how we will know when we are there. I guess we will just have to figure that out when we get there. There will be some kind of signs, I hope.” She added. “Well from what Old Ben says we still have many miles to go. There are many rivers and mountains and cities we have to get through,” Maura said as he stood and made ready to leave again. He wanted to leave no signs that anyone had ed this way. Glory also stood and began eliminating signs of their stay as did Larobe. When they were sure that they had removed all signs of their visit to this stream, they left. And so this unlikely trio went trudging into the mountains with some worry of what was ahead but with much anxiety about what was behind them. However whatever the obstacles in store for them; they were sure that they would overcome them because their lives depended on it.

CHAPTER XVIII

The Hunting Party

S ince the incident at the tree the dogs had not been able to pick up a scent, but Sam Bronson rode with a fury and Bob fretted frantically; they both hunted the runaways with due diligence and were sure of catching them but each with a different mindset. Sam drove the men and the horses with an angry purpose: no nigger with a woman and child were going to out run him and his horses and ruin his reputation. Black Bob had no horse and so he ran along behind the others, sometimes as much as a mile or more. He was useless to this party right now but his time would come, when they caught up to the runaways and he had to ister the lashings which he dread. Though it was now into the fourth day of the hunt, Sam knew he could not turn back because this was his big chance to raise his worth in the eyes of Melanie and Mrs. McCabe and he was not going to blow it. He figured with the judge being murdered they were counting on him and no self-respecting foreman would let his killers get away, especially when it was niggers who were the murderers. When he caught them he would be praised as one who knew how to handle niggers and therefore counted on to run things, and if he played his cards just right he might be able to court Melanie and maybe, in time, marry right on into the family. No sir, these niggers were not going to get away and ruin his chances of becoming a landowner. Of course Bob still lagged behind and did not get as much rest as the others because by the time he caught up to them, they were ready to take off again and he dragged on regretting the outcome. And although he secretly wished that the runners would somehow get away he was confident that they would be captured and therefore his spirit was crushed as well as his vigor. It would be his duty to flog and punish the runners before they were hanged and this was his trepidation. There were still no signs of the runaways and the new recruits picked up along the way were not as determined as Sam and most of them went back after a day’s

search but Sam’s quest to be a landowner drove him onward. They had stopped at the Davidson ranch and a little further along, the Johnson place and recruited a few more men until they numbered about twenty or more whites on horseback. But although the others carried the same hatred for the captives as Sam, they had no real gain in this hunt except to have some fun and prove their prowess as nigger hunters. They spread out and were able to cover more trails, but as the day wore on and they found no signs of the runaways, most of them returned to their respective ranches; however after resting a few hours, the original party pushed on into the night. Yet unbeknown to the hunting party, they were gaining on the runaways, because although the hills were not really mountains yet, going uphill in the rough terrain slowed the runaways down. And since the rocks and shrubs zapped their energy going uphill, they rested earlier and more often; but the hunting party continued well into the night before they rested. When the hunt was well into the fifth day and they still had not picked up a trail, Sam decided to try the dogs again. Instead of waiting for Bob and the dogs to catch up, he decided to ride back to Bob. He still had a piece of the clothing and he gave the dogs another sniff and Bob turned them loose. This time the dogs wandered in three directions and then came back to where they started from and Sam was bewildered. “I can’t figure these dogs,” Sam said. “It’s as if something has taken their sense of smell from them.” This trick worked Old Ben said because once the dogs’ senses were saturated with the skunk odor they could smell nothing else. Still Sam was relentless in his pursuit. “I’m going to keep the dogs up front just in case they regain their sense of smell,” he said. So the party rode on with them stopping now and then to give the dogs another sniff of the runaways clothing but the dogs could point to no other trail. Along about the seventh or eighth day of the hunt, the hunting party was becoming discouraged and had stopped on top of one of the smaller hills and Sam, while he pondered the aptness of his search, was lying with his head propped against a tree just watching the birds flying over one of the distant hills. He watched as first some birds would fly from their perch and would quickly alight again. He watched for some time as this process was repeated over and over going up the side of the mountain. Suddenly, it struck him and he jumped to his feet. “Hell,” he cried. “That’s it. There they are!”

“What, where?” The others cried as they arose excitedly. “What are you talking about?” “There on the side of that mountain, see how the birds are moving; first alighting and then taking off again.” He said pointing. “They are probably ground birds and something is moving up the side of that mountain and disturbing them,” Sam explained. “Mount up, get your rifles, get the dogs, we’ve got them now!” He shouted. Now the pursuit was frantic, a target was in sight and the hunting party intended to catch up to them today. As they came to the foot of the mountain where the birds were spotted the dogs miraculously picked up the scent and set to barking and running like crazy. And although the horses could not traverse the hill as quickly as the dogs, they were faster than the human runaways and now it was just a matter of time before they would catch up to them. When the runaways could hear the faint barking of the dogs, they tried to move faster up the hill; Maura was the stronger and he moved ahead of the others. He would then turn and wait with his hand out stretched for Glory and Larobe. As the yapping grew louder he let them go ahead of him as he brought up the rear–if they were going to be caught, he was going to make certain that it was he who was caught first. As they scrambled up the side of the mountain as fast as they could, they could hear the dogs getting closer and closer “Run!” He prodded sometimes pushing the other from behind. “If we make it over the top we may have a chance to beat them down the other side!” He yelled. But no matter how much they ran and how much he prodded, they could hear the dogs getting nearer. “We are not going to make it,” Glory cried. “It’s no use!” “Don’t give up!” Maura shouted. “Just keep moving!” Eight days of freedom was just enough to make Maura realize he was not ever going to be a slave again. He didn’t know exactly how he was going to fight when they caught up to him; but he knew he was not going to give up and be dragged back to the ranch behind the horses. As they neared the top he too knew that they were going to be caught, and he instructed the others to climb into the trees and wait until the hunters had ed and then descend from the trees and work their way quietly back down the

mountain the way they had come. He then took a piece of clothing from each of their persons ahead to a cave which was well hidden and threw it in. He figured he, Glory and Larobe working their way back down was not something the hunting party expected, and he may be able to gain an advantage if he was able to isolate one of the riders and eliminate him and also capture his guns. Then maybe he could eliminate two or three before the rest of them realized it. And even if he was killed maybe he could cause enough delay that Glory and Larobe could get away; but all of this depended on the dogs leading the hunters to the cave where he threw the rags and some of the hunters lagging behind. When the dogs came to the spot where Maura deviated to go to the cave, and the others ascended into the trees they followed his trail straight toward the cave, but all the runaways were now in the trees silently waiting to make their way back down the side of the mountain which they had just traversed. This time Maura made sure that Glory and Larobe were ahead of him so that he would be closest to the hunters after they had ed. The plan seemed to be working as the hunters hurriedly ed beneath them as they waited to climb down, but then Larobe slipped and tumbled to the ground with a crash. The crush of his body into the underbrush shocked the hunting party and they abruptly turned and saw Larobe dazed and scared as he eyed them helplessly from his position lying among the thorns and thistles of the scrub vegetation on the forest floor. “Well,” said Sam. “Smart niggers ain’t they.” They then started for him when Maura and Glory both leaped from their perches and immediately went to Larobe’s side. “Aha,” said Sam. “And brave too,” as he and the men begin to surround the runaways with their mounts. Maura stood bent forward with machete in one hand and the other extended trying to eye them all at once as he sought to shelter the others from the hunting party. He slowly moved around Glory and Larobe as the men of the hunting party grew closer. He tried to watch each one as he circled Glory and Larobe and the hunters surrounded them all. He knew he was certainly not going to give up to these captors As the hunting party slowly closed in on the runaways, suddenly the men began

to lurch forward and spill from their horses, and as they crumbled to the ground the runaways could see the many arrows and spears imbedded in their backs and necks and heads. Some others had secretely encircled the hunting party as they surrounded the runaways and now as the hunting party fell silently to their deaths the others began to make themselves visible. Maura still held his machete in readiness as their brown rescuers alighted from trees and from behind cover. Then one spoke, “You may lower your weapon; we wish you no harm; we wish you peace.”

CHAPTER XIX

Black Bob

B lack bob had lagged behind the hunting party, but when he heard the clamor of the dogs, he knew that they were close to their prey and he now ran as fast as he could in order to be there when the hunted were caught. He knew that Sam would insist that he be there and it would even bring some kind of punishment if he was not there, but because he was so far behind; it was some time before he arrived. When he burst upon the scene panting and gasping and screeching to a halt, he was not prepared for the spectacle before him. Twelve bloody white men lay on the forest floor; each one had already drawn his last breath while the canopy of the forest swaying in gentle breezes cast eerie wavy shadows that looked like spirits hovering just above them. The dogs’ sniffing the bodies and their long mournful howls only added to the surrealness of this situation. This eerie scene was so consuming and he stared and gawked at first but the reality of it all overwhelmed him because he understood that he was in trouble that he could not get out of. He turned and started to run in the direction from whence he had come; there was no tiredness in him now–only fear. As he ran with the small scrubs slapping his body his thoughts also raced. What would he do? Could he go back to the ranch? If he did, what would he say? Who would believe him whatever he said? “Oh, Lawdy,” he moaned as he sprinted through the scrappy forest. “Why was I born to this life?” He finally came to rest near a stream deep in the forest and let the cooling water run over his hands; washed his face and drank some from his hands; this cooled him some but it did not stop his panic and fear. The judge was dead, Massa Sam and all of the others were dead, he was alone in the forest, and for the first time in his life, he was free; but this freedom was an uneasy one because he knew he would be hunted and killed and he began to run again.

Now as he ran his thoughts turn to Liza, what would happen to her if he didn’t return; what would happen to her if he did return? But he knew that he could not return to the ranch with all the white men dead, and he and the runaways still alive; because there would be nothing he could say that would persuade the captors that he was not part of the conspiracy and therefore Liza too. No, No, he thought, she is safer if I don’t return. But he could see nothing but trouble ahead for himself because he knew that when the dead hunting party was discovered, his part in the killings would be presumed, so he dare not go back to the ranch. And though he knew Liza might suffer much anguish and rebuke when he did not return, yet she would suffer even more if he did return, because they would both be accused as part of the plot to escape and they both would receive the same punishment as the runaways. He was being rational he told himself, these were the thoughts of a sane man, but he couldn’t help but feel that insanity was fast overtaking him as he ran. But there was nowhere for him to go; he and the runaways would be hunted until they were found and hung. He had no doubt about this, and this was his insanity: because he knew he was going to be hunted and killed, why run from the inevitable–but run he did until there were no thoughts in his mind. He ran everyday into the forest until he came to the swamps. He then ran and swam paying no attention to the snakes and gators; in fact he knew now that the insanity had overcome him and he was going to run forever–he was not ever going to stop. He ran until his lungs were on fire and he gasped and wheezed for a cooling breath to extinguish the fire in his chest as his mind changed the world around him. The water that he swam in became a puddle of oozing mud he could barely move his arms in. And the snakes and gators he ed barely moved when he ed them by and his feet seem to be stuck in a quickening quagmire. And yet, he ran on and on, deeper and deeper into the swamp, until he fell on his face upon the wet mossy ground totally exhausted. And now his chest became flooded with cooling waters and he knew he was dead as his mind became totally blank and it could play no more tricks on him: but it did. As he drifted into nothingness; he saw a small black figure approach and take a seat beside him on the ground. Maybe now that he was dead the angel was coming to watch over him or maybe the devil was coming to claim his soul.

Either way there was nothing he could do for he thought himself dead.

But the death he thought he now possessed did not bring peace, but brought only fitful dreams that were without mercy or pity. He dreamed of his childhood when he felt the lash whenever he did anything that was perceived as insolent or he protested the Massa’s visits to his mother’s shack. He saw her tears and felt her distress as she pleaded for his life and begged the Massa not to sell her son away but they were not all his dreams. He also dreamed of his youth where he saw the lashings and mutilation of many who dared to run and heard their anguished cries and the mournful whimpers of their loved ones. And he dreamt the dreams of his manhood when it was he who wielded the lash and caused the sorrowful howls of ones he loved. But all the while he dreamed he could hear the soft humming of one who seemed to know peace, and he strove to float away on these chords of peaceful bliss, but these dreams were in no way soothing and he agonized as the dreams crushed his soul.

CHAPTER XX

A New Home

T he runaways were taken to a village of grass huts and animal skin tepees with a common ground amid them not far from the site where they were rescued by the Tuleg people. The whites called them Seminoles and savages among other things but these beautiful brown people with their hair in braids or locks swaying regally were the Indians the runaways had heard of (a few were really Africans) and they were saviors to these three. However there was much activity here now as the people prepared to move further into the mountains: it was much too dangerous to stay here with the rescue spot so close to their homes. Some of the men of the village were dressed in cotton pants of dark colors such as black and brown which came to their ankle and colorful shirts of plaid or checkered or some other pattern, most of which had no sleeves and were more like vests. Some of the women wore loose dresses or gowns of brilliant colors and designs which hung below their knees and too were sleeveless. However some of their garments were made from animal skins like the buckskin pants and shirts that most of the men wore and the buckskin dresses some of the women wore. Many of the buckskin garments had tassels on the sides and sleeves and all wore shoes fashioned from animal skins which were decorated in brilliant beads. The children were dressed similar to their parents and these kind brown people were resplendent in their dress and the runaways in their frazzled clothes made a stark contrast but they were welcomed. Maura tall and black stood out among them especially with his rugged clothes torn and muddied. He was also taller than all and his and Larobe’s dark skin shone brilliantly among them. Glory who was small and petite and brown was not as distinct except for her clothes yet they were received just as the other Africans here. As they rested after bathing and eating and receiving new buckskin clothes and shoes like those of the Tulegs, the runaways and Mnekke who was also dressed in buckskins, and whose dark braids framed his brown face, sat on a blanket in

front of Mnekke’s tepee and Mnekke spoke. “We have not been able to stay in one place for long since the pale ones came because the pale ones either wish us to become as them or be moved to another part of the land or be killed. So you see we would have to move anyway; and now with the killing site being so close to our village, we must move right away. For although we did send out a party to bury their dead, they will find them and then they will look for us.” He continued. “We have no doubt that, others will come and they will bring death and destruction so we will dismantle everything here so that it will seem that we were never here. Yet there is always the possibility that we will leave signs so we will also leave behind a detail to watch and notice if the pale ones are able to discern which way we traveled. It was such a group that spied those who were hunting you.” He explained. Maura spoke next, and he begin to describe their situation. “You see we were captives on the pale ones ranch …” Mnekke raised his hand to stop Maura and said. “There is no need to explain, for we have seen many of your people who have escaped from the pale ones. Some we have helped and some we could not help but all we could help we did, and others we made welcome to our families as we do you.” Maura thought that such an open invitation was very gracious, but he wanted to know more about these generous people because he was still in a strange land and was quite curious about how this situation came to be, and about the way of life in this land away from the ranches of the pale ones. “Just how do you come to be here and how do the pale ones come to be here?” He asked. Mnekke smiled and answered. “The old ones say that we came with the land and some say the Tulegs came across the water and settled here. We have been here for many seasons and there were many of us, before the pale ones came. Some of our people dwelled on many islands and some inhabited the land that is to the south of here. We used to sail the waters and visit with other of our people and the old ones say that we even visited your land and your people visited us here but now we are hunted and cut off from our people. “Many have also left this land and have gone west toward the sunset and others have been forced to walk all the way there. They say that there are many

children of the sun who dwell on the land there but we Tulegs chose to stay on this land. But the times are changing and we will not be able to survive here because more pales ones come every day and unless we with others or others us we will be eliminated.” “But what about the pales ones; where did they come from?” Maura inquired. Mnekke smiled again for he was not a bitter man. He answered Maura’s questions quite pleasantly. “The old ones again tell us of their coming. They say that they came on huge boats. They first came to the islands and always spoke of peace but many of them became sick and weak and we helped them to overcome their sickness. It was not long after that more came and we put aside land for them. After many seasons when they became strong and had many people, they began to make war upon us and inflict us with their diseases. They also kidnapped our women and children and trained and raised them in the pale man’s ways and even sent some to their land across the sea to be as they say civilized. And now we are reduced to a few who must run and hide and become fugitives in our own land.” There was now just a tinge of bitterness that had crept into his voice. Glory had listened intently to Mnekke’s words and she now asked, “But is there no place we can go to be safe? I see children here; you have families, is there a place you can raise your families and not worry about the wrath of the pale ones?” With still just a touch of bitterness, Mnekke answered her. “They say that there are places in the west toward the setting sun and there are also lands to the north where the pale ones have also conquered the people but they say there is an inkling of peace there for both our people. However many have gone west and some have returned to say that there is a measure of peace there too, but the signs are the same there as they once were here and soon we will all be chased from the fertile land there too. In the north too they say that there is the peace of a conquered people, however you must be warned that if you travel north, the weather turns cold and one must wear many clothes but if you travel west there are many weathers.” “We have planned to travel north to a place called Canada, do you know of this place?” Glory asked.

“I know of this place it is the land of the Iroquois and the Cree; although there is some peace there, do not take my warning about the weather lightly,” Mnekke answered. “I have seen the garments that are worn there and it is also said that for a season everything is covered with snow or ice and it is difficult to survive during this winter season.” “Just where is this land toward the setting sun?” Maura asked as the description of Canada did not seem inviting to him. “It is far to the west; across many mountains and wide streams and even deserts is what those who have returned tell us. However we have many brethren there such as The Sioux, The Arapaho, The Chiricahua, The Pueblo and The Lakota. There are also Cherokee and Tulegs and others there who have made this forced walk by the pale ones. But if you decide to go either way, we will help you with your travel or you may travel with us,” Mnekke answered. “But now we must get ready to leave this place.” As they arose the very shelters were being dismantled and stacked on platforms resembling rafts to be hauled away behind the horses. Chickens were caged and other food supplies were gathered and loaded on the horses as they made ready to vacate this land. The Tulegs had also stripped the ones they had killed of their belonging including some clothes, shoes and weapons and these too were loaded on the horses. However the Tulegs did not confiscate the blankets of the pale ones because of the old ones stories of how the pale ones had sickened their ancestors with diseased blankets so they buried them with their owners. Now because the horses were so heavy laden, their tracks ran deep so a detail of men, women and children followed this caravan erasing all tracks and traces of their movement. Still another unit was dispatched in front of the caravan to watch for more pale ones as they began their trek. The elders and small children were in the center of this procession and there is where Glory and Maura were. The horses and horsemen were in front and behind and details were behind the horses to both erase any trace of their movement and to protect their families. Except for Mnekke and the runaway’s conversation the Tulegs and runaways now moved silently through the mountainside forest erasing all their tracks Although Larobe had found a niche with the younger men and he now traveled

with them helping to eliminate their tracks, Glory and Maura walked with the elders and Mnekke, who told them of warnings and prophecies about the whites which were not heeded. He also told of raids by the whites where whole families including women and children were massacred. As he talked of these events, the bitterness edged into his voice and he became sure that he would go west, because there might be a chance to defeat the pale ones in that territory. As they rode and walked to their new homes, Mnekke also listened to the runaways as they told of their harsh treatment on the ranches and of memories before capture. They told of the breeding of humans for sale; they told of the beatings, hangings and mutilations. Maura also talked of his journey from Cush and of his homeland. He described the cities he had never visited and those he had. He told of the many animals both large and small. Glory also told stories which her mother had related to her. She spoke of the many silks and cloths and music and foods and the large elephants, but she also spoke of the many slaughters by the whites and she told of her mother’s trials. The runaways were glad to be allowed to talk of these things since they had been denied this right for so long and the stories just poured out of them. And so as these conversations continued between them, the three of them realized that these people, the pale ones, had been prophesized by the old seers and wise ones of each of their lands, but of the three lands from which they hail, none took heed to these warnings. Furthermore although in the olden times they had been made welcome in each other’s land by the original dwellers, they were now despised, hunted and murdered by those who came to claim the land as their own. Consequently each of their lands was now dominated by these pale beings, and the original people now became fugitives, criminals and tresers in their own home, and each also in the land of the other.

CHAPTER XXI

Black Bob And Jadur

T he sweet humming seemed to be a thousand miles away yet he could hear it clearly and the soft place where his head lay enclosed in cool feathers left him with a dreamy feeling. It was as if he was floating above the clouds. In fact he was floating above all other creatures. He could see birds nesting in trees and large and small animals running to and fro on the forest floor. Everything was clear to him: He had always been free except once his wing was broken and his mother nursed him back to health. She sang sweet lullabies to him like the one he heard now which had put him to sleep just before he became an eagle. But now he was an eagle and he was free as he soared above all other creatures but there was a storm brewing and he had to fly back to his family because they would need him to protect them from the wind and rain. However the storm was approaching fast and while he tried to out race it, it reached him now and as his feathers became wet, he bore even harder; he was determined to make it back to his family. But just as the cliff where his nest was came into view, a strong gust of wind overturned it and he saw his mate and chicks tumbling toward the rocky crags. With all his strength now, he pierced through the storm, but he was too late, and his family was too weak, and he watched their limp bodies bounce off the cliffs and then lifelessly descend to the choppy icy waters of the ocean below. He dove into the dark waters but there was no sign of them. He plunged again and again until he himself was gasping for air. And now he threw off the hand that was dousing his face with drenched rags and he awakened. Black Bob stared at the face that smiled at him; it was a familiar face but it was not his mother nor was it his wife, Liza. He didn’t know where he was or who she was and he worried awfully because he didn’t know what had become of him and he asked in a raspy whisper. “Who are you?”

The brown crinkly face with white hair spilling all around it answered “We must get you well.” Bob tried to move but he found his head throbbed and his legs and arms ached. “What done happened to me, where am I?” He asked the brown face. “Shhh”. “You must sleep. Here, drink some of this,” she said raising a cup of warm liquid to his lips. Bob swallowed the warm liquid; it was soothing and soon he was dreaming again. Now he was a lion, he prowled the forest in search of his lost family, however everywhere he went, all the other lions turned from him, not from fear, but because they did not want to associate with him. He saw families who had lost some of their and they blamed him. There were others who blamed him for broken limbs and those who were starving also blamed him. And so he roamed searching for his family but he received no help from those he encountered and he wandered with no end. Bob awoke again some days later. His head didn’t throb as much but he was still sore and that brown face with the tumbling hair was still there. “Who are you?” He asked. “Now do you feel better?” She asked. “Yes’m, yes’m I do,” Bob said. “But who are you?” “I am Jadur I used to live on your ranch.” “Then I is dead and you is dead,” Bob said shakily. “You hush up sir,” Jadur said sternly. “I am not dead and you are dead only if you want to be.” “But, but, they say you went mad and the Massa had you kilt. I know I heard that,” Bob said still shaking. “Are you given to believing all that you hear and not what you see, and do you not believe that which is before your eyes?” She asked. However Jadur had aged amazingly and her once glistening ebony hair was now as white as snow and her

once beautiful face was now lined with fret and dread. “I, I, I saw you myself,” Bob answered now shivering. “I saw how you walked around the ranch rambling and I saw dem take you away and dey say dey kilt you so how can you be here now unless you are the ghost who lives in the swamps?” “I am here because I refused to give up.” Jadur answered very calmly because she did not want to upset him. “When I was on the ranch I could only do what the judge allowed me and I was mad at him for what he did to me and my daughter, and I was mad at all the men around me who allowed him, and I was mad at myself for letting my child to be in such a predicament. Therefore I roamed the ranch intent on showing everybody what he had done to me and blaming myself and all the men for not delivering my child from his clutches. But when they brought me here and left me I realized that I was now free. I began to regain my faith and pride here amongst the insects, animals and plants of the swamp and I decided that I would survive to see my child delivered from that place. And so I am here.” Bob shook his head as if to shake the vision of the woman from his mind. He blinked again and again but she did not go away. “How can this be, where are we, do you know what done happened?” He asked incredulously, the words rushing from his mouth? “Whoa slow down!” She said. “I have seen a man, a woman and a child racing through the swamps and I saw you and a band of white ones hunting them, but then I saw the hunters turn back. Do you know who they were?” She answered. Bob sat up now; he realized he was in a shelter: a very small shelter. It was raised upon some logs and situated on a fallen tree above the swamp pool; the floor was tin and was covered with grass. The walls were cardboard and paper covered with grass and mud. There was a small opening for egress and ingress, but unless one was looking for it, it was unnoticeable among the background of the swamps. He was seated upon a bed of straw covered with cloth and the woman was just outside standing on one of the fallen logs handing him more liquid. He didn’t know how long he had been here. He started to wobble as he sat all the way up. “I am alright, no, I don’t want to sleep.” He said he said, pushing it away as she

extended a steaming tin cup toward him. . “No, no, this is not for sleep. It will give you strength,” she said. Then she asked him as he took the cup from her hand: “Do you know those people I saw?” “Yes’m,” he said slowly. “Yes’m I do.” He sat silently for a while studying her, then he said. “Them ones you seen running wuz that big black Sambo, your Glory and that little pickininny from up at the big house. They don kilt the Massa and run off.” He was shaking again now. Jadur became excited now. “What happened, how did it happen, did they get away?” It was she who asked the questions in rapid order now. “I don’t know,” he answered. “But, oh Lawdy, when me and Massa Sam went to track them with the dogs, we, we never found them.” Bob was still shaking and Jadur could tell there was something wrong but she wanted to hear about her daughter so still she prodded. “Tell me what happened. Why were you running so hard as to almost kill yourself? What did you see?” “Oh Lawdy maam, oh Lawdy, Lawdy,” was all he could say. Bob seemed to be going back into a trance so Jadur stopped her questioning. “Here,” she said. “Drink some more of this soup, it will build your strength.” Bob drank some more of the soup but Jadur could see that she had lost him for now so she let him rest now and would try again later to find out what had happened to Glory. Jadur left the shelter and went a little ways away to ponder her situation; she had become accustomed to living in the swamp and was not bothered by the wetness nor the animals and insects. She found a spot near the shelter; climbed across a fallen tree hanging above one of the swamp pools and reclined and contemplated just how she would get any information from Bob. She hoped he would get past whatever it was that made him run in order for him to regain his senses and tell her of her daughter. As she sat she ed when she was first brought here to this swamp; she did not resist Sam and the others. They sat her on a horse to begin the trip, but as soon as they were beyond the ranch, she was taken off the horse; her hands were

tied and they were tied by a rope to the saddle of the horse. She was made to run as the horse trotted. She sometimes fell and was dragged. She could hear the men laughing and now and then one of them would steer his horse right up to her as if he was going to trample her but she was beyond fear: she just endured whatever humiliation they offered. When they reached the swamps, they dismounted and drug her by her feet deeper into the swamps. Just before dark when they were deep in the swamps, they tied the rope to a tree and one or two of the men beat and kicked her about her head and body but she never felt their abuse she had already ed the point of feeling pain by this time. They then left her there in a heap in the mucky water. When they had gone and she regained consciousness, at first she became afraid and developed a feeling of dread as she surveyed her surroundings. The deep swamp was a frightful place with the moon light barley penetrating below low hanging mossy tree branches and casting eerie shadows and short glistens of light across misty swamp pools. She also felt the eyes of creatures she had never known or seen watching her and she could hear the ones who barely made swishing sounds as they swam the greenish murky waters. But just as it seemed there was no hope and she started to succumb to panic, a voice from deep within spoke to her. “You are free, Jadur,” It said. “Now you are free.” She picked herself from the mud and slime of the swamp and used her teeth to untie her hands and listened intently, but all was silent except for the quiet rustling of the swamp animals and the strange squishy sounds of those in the water. However she was very cold and wet and sore and she knew she must get out of the water so she found a sturdy tree and climbed it, shooing away the snakes and other animals who might want to make this tree their home, and she slept there and gave thanks to Vishnu for freeing her. In the morning, though still sore, she began to gather herbs for food and medicine and she tried to start a fire by rubbing sticks together but they were too wet. She ate some herbs and applied others to her wounds. She knew she had to become well enough to make a trip to the edge of the swamps to gather dry wood. As her wounds healed and she began to travel to the border of the swamps where she gathered wood, rags, metal, herbs, fruits and anything she could use for

clothes, food or shelter. She was very careful not to be seen by anyone, and when she had all that she could carry, she returned to the swamps. She constructed her shelter in a thick but low tree that had caught another tree that had fallen across it, and added more stand-up logs for . She used the leaves and vines and low hanging limbs to camouflage her shelter so that it was hidden. As time ed, she met others who were running away. Some would spend time in her shelter but never for long. Some had run with too much baggage such as extra clothes or blankets or other necessisities and would leave them with her. She was able to get matches, tin cups and other essentials as the runaways had to unburden themselves. There were also those who came who were in need of these things and she shared with them. Most all tried to persuade her to leave with them but she would not leave until she could free her child. She also saw the whites who hunted these runaways but she hid inside her shelter, or when she was discovered, she played the raging fool, and they were always content to believe she was senseless and could not answer their queries, because most of these hunters had heard about the crazy nigger that McCabe released in the swamps. The captives on the nearby and distant ranches had also heard about her and some had seen her when she made her trips to the swamp’s edge, but she appeared to be a ghost to them and they said that she was the ghost of the swamp and they dare not go into her territory. Therefore she was left alone to abide in the swamps among the creatures and plants that prefer the wetness. Now from Bob she learned that Glory had left the ranch and that meant that she could leave the swamps, but first she must find out what has happened to Glory: where she has gone. As she reflected on her plight, she begin to fall asleep, but before she dozed she prayed that her friend Krishna would visit Bob and restore his courage so that he may tell her what he had seen. But Jadur hardly slept that night because she was captured by thoughts of her Glory and she was at the shelter early that morning. “How are you feeling today?” She asked peeping through the entrance when he awoke. Bob was startled that she was still there but he answered. “Very well maam, how is you?” Jadur was glad he was coherent but she did not press right away. “I’m fine,” she answered. “Here, have some more of this soup, It will build your strength.” She

offered. Bob took the tin cup from her hand and said. “Thank you maam.” He then looked around at his surroundings as he sat up and said. “I really wasn’t dreaming; this place is here and you are here.” “Yes,” she answered. “But are you better today?” “Yes’m, I think so, but you got to get out of here. Dey is gonna come for us,” he said rather calmly. “When dey see what happened to Massa Sam and them, they is sho to come for us.” “Sure, sure,” Jadur said trying not to upset Bob. “But who is going to come for us and what happened to Sam?” “Maam, I is sho you don’t want to know, you just might break your neck trying to get outta here.” He said becoming excited again. “Listen,” she said sternly now. “I am not going anywhere unless I know why I am going. So tell me why must I be afraid and leave this place?” “Well, mam, I don’t know iffen I can tell you jes like it wuz, Bob said as he sat in the small shelter still kind of shiveringly. “But me and Massa Sam and them others wuz tracking your child and the others when I heard dem dogs making a lot of noise. I knowed they had found something so I ran to catch up to dem. But while I was running, dem dogs started to make more noise. Then all of a sudden they wuz quiet. Now I knowed something wuz wrong, cause dem dogs don’t just git quiet unless something is wrong.” Jadur was excited now and very anxious to hear the rest, but Bob had slowed his speech and was speaking just above a whisper but she dare not stop him. “When I catches up to them,” Bob continued rasping. “Lo and behold, I seen a sight like I ain’t never seen before. There was Massa Sam and them others laid out on the ground and blood everywhere and them dogs just sniffing and licking it as it oozed. I tell you maam, they wuz all dead. I don’t know who kilt them, but they wuz all dead,” he said louder becoming excited again. Jadur had become quite excited herself and she almost shouted. “But what about Glory, what about my child?”

Hearing her shout Bob became sullen again and answered quietly. “Maam, I didn’t see your child or none of dem other runaways. I just saw what I saw maam. They wuz all dead and I know when dem white folk find them, dey is gonna think that I was in on it and oh Lawdy, oh Lawdy me!” He said shaking again now. Jadur did not want to lose him again and so she said what she could to calm him. “No they won’t, Bob, they won’t blame you.” Yet she also knew that whether they blamed him or not, they would surely punish him and even put him to death if they could find no one else to punish for this carnage. She also knew that Bob was right about her too: they would surely punish her if she and Bob were found together. Jadur realized that she must leave the swamps and must become a fugitive on the run from these parts. Although she had no part in the deaths which occurred, she was only a colored woman and was in proximity to him that would be blamed for what had happened, therefore, she too was guilty in white man’s law. She said soothingly to Bob, “We must go from here. We must go quietly and rationally, we must make a plan, but we must go from here.” “No maam,” he said and it surprised her. “I can’t go from here yet. I got to stay right here until I finds Liza. Iffen I finds her, then I can go.” “But you said yourself that we have to leave here. Don’t you think they will find you here?” She asked in disbelief. “Maam,” he said still quietly. “Dey say you is dead and you is a ghost that lives in the swamps. I don’t know iffen you are dead or not, maam, I don’t even know if I am dead, but most people, dey is scared to come into these swamps, so I think I am more safe here right now than anywhere else.” He continued even more quietly now. “I have a wife on Massa’s ranch, that’s all I have.” “I have hurt many people for Massa: I have whupped them and beat them. I have even dragged screaming chillum away from their crying mammies for Massa to sell. I have no friends and no one likes me, but Liza, she stuck with me and I can’t leave her. I’m gonna stay here in this swamp and maybe someday I will be brave enough to go back to Liza on the ranch, but I don’t know iffen I ought to right now cause it might bring harm to her. So I’m just gonna stay here and be the ghost that you wuz until I decide what I’m gonna do.”

Jadur listened to Bob but she had made up her mind to leave. She would teach him some things about the swamp and herbs and she would leave much of the objects she had managed to collect, but she would leave. As she prepared to embark on another sojourn, she thought of Vishnu and how he had answered her prayers and more: She was a free woman, her daughter was delivered from her circumstances and He had sent Bob to tell her, and he had given Bob the courage to stand up for his wife and the wisdom to realize the impropriety of his life. Yes, her prayers had been answered and beyond and she was feeling better than she had for a long while as she prepared for her sojourn to find her child and she thanked Vishnu.

CHAPTER XXII

Preparation For War

A fter many days of travel the Tulegs, with careful consideration for water supply and protection chose a new site for their village. Once the site was designated, trees were cut to clear the land, build barriers, and shelters, and families decided on their plots and went about reassembling their huts. There was much doings here and everyone who was able, even children, helped to build the new community. In a few days a new village appeared with people, shelters, and animals which looked just as the other one and seemed to have been there for much longer than it had been. Mnekke and some of the others helped the runaways construct a shelter which was a rectangler hut of grass and leaves and animal skins with a wooden frame. The floor was covered with grass and animal skins. They made beds of straw and blankets and they stored their belongings which consisted of their extra clothing, and blankets. There was not room in the shelter for anything except sleeping so all activity was conducted outside. However the runaways knew that their location was not permanent, because at any moment there could be trouble and everyone would have to leave. The men spent their days either scouting or hunting or teaching the tactics of war and learning to read and write; those males around Larobe’s age were beginning to learn to use the javelin, knives, bows, and guns also had to learn to read and write. The women spent their days cooking, tending animals, and gardens, and children, and also learning to read and write. The children spent their days according to their ages: those very young were carried on their mother’s backs in carriers made of cloth or animal skin, others learned to tend the animals and the gardens, while still others learned to cook and all except the very young learned to write and read. Everything was organized in this community and everyone had responsibilities according to their gender, age and ability. Glory was very eager to teach all to read and write the language and most were

keen to learn. The Tulegs as well as the Africans were well aware how much the whites depended on the written word and they wanted to be as proficient in the language as possible. Of course there were others in the village who knew how to read and write but they seldom used this ability, therefore their skills and mechanics were quite rusty. However Glory stressed the importance of reading and writing until most were eager to learn especially the children. Many of the men did duty as lookouts and they carried pistols or rifles in addition to bow and arrows. Maura had never fired a gun or used a bow before but he learned very fast and very well and did his duty as lookout also. Evenings were spent much like those on the McCabe ranch where many families gathered outside the shelters and shared food and chatted among themselves but the conversations were quite different from those on the ranch. Whereas on the ranch all were careful not to arouse any suspicion by only speaking small talk and jive; all chatter here although militant was with the safety of their children in mind. Yet even though there was much concern for their children’s safety, all knew that they did not want to live under the rule and domain of the whites. And since no one was fearful that their conversations would be overheard by enemies, they planned war tactics and child protection strategy openly and they spoke freely. Although he seemed to be rather a young man Mnekke was one of the elders and the elders always had first opportunity to speak, and they voiced in unison their desire to remove the pale ones from their land; their only disagreement was how to remove the whites. Some wanted to attack all whites any time they were encountered while others knew that they would have to be much more tactful than that. Either way there were bound to be encounters sometimes which would bring death to both sides but if the encounters and deaths could be kept to a minimum it might not bring the armies.. However acquiring goods without encounters was quite fruitful in gaining supplies and weapons, but it did nothing to make the pale ones leave, yet if they killed families it would surely bring more pale ones or armies. Therefore they determined that although they knew that either way there were going to be encounters which led to deaths, less was better than more. While the men spoke of war, the women’s main concern was the safety of the children; an all-out war was sure to leave many Tulegs dead including children

because the pale ones had superior weapons, and when the armies came before, many children were kidnapped and the massacres were innumerable and particularly dreadful. There had been instances where pregnant women had their bellies slit while hanging by their hands from trees and their babies which fell from them were used to kick around as in a game of foot ball. Although these women had not experienced these slaughters they were very distressed by these atrocities and worried about the survival of their offspring. The elders decided that the filching of goods instead of committing mass murder will allow more time for them to arm themselves and it will also reduce the number of tragedies on both sides. This was the solution they worked out because they were already out—manned and out-gunned. However when Mnekke thought of the atrocities of the whites even he became very harsh and felt the urge for revenge, but since he was one of the elders, he had to keep a rational mind and not let anger overtake him. Tonight as the activity in the village was underway, the elders had called a council while the young men were sitting in a circle near the shelter where the council was held and discussing how to get rid of the whites. Tannay, an African Tuleg whose hair hung in locks about his face and down his back spoke first. “Because there are too many pale ones for us to face straightaway and their weapons are many more than ours I say we attack whenever we can and move on, never setting up camp but living from hand to mouth from supplies and food that we obtain and the food of the forest. If we are relentless, the pale ones will tire of our attacks and leave.” He reasoned. “But,” said another whose name was Irrecce. “We have many women and children among us and we know of their massacres. What shall we do with our families? Could they survive a life such as you recommend?” “There must be a place where we could leave the women and children safely while we raid the ranches and outposts of the pale ones,” said another whose name the runaways did not know. “Look,” said another. “We have been reduced to small numbers and we know that each time we fought fiercely and took a little of the land back the pale ones only brought in more armies until they had us out numbered. So somehow we must find a way to increase our numbers or we have to always make certain that they lose many more warriors than we do in each battle and maybe then we will

see their end. The banter continued between the young men until Lilek who was sitting not far away listening came over to their positions and spoke up. She was a beautiful young woman whose hair hung in one large braid down her back. She had a small infant in her arms and one strapped to her back. “You men always speak as if all decisions should be yours. You never ask our opinion as the elders do. So tell me, how do you know what is best for women and children when you never consult us in your talk?” She asked. They all stopped talking and looked up at Lilek standing just outside their circle. Then Tannay spoke. “So please tell us oh wise one of the female gender, how shall we get rid of the pale ones.” They all laughed except the women and children who were sitting where Lilek had been and Lilek spoke again. “I say children, both male and female should be taught the skills of warriors as soon as they have the strength, and the younger children should be taught to tend the old and infirmed. This would give us twice as many warriors or at least more than we have now because women shall become fighters and it would relieve some of the caregivers to become warriors.” Just as she finished speaking, the elders emerged from the shelter where their meeting was held. “Well spoken Lilek,” Mnekke said. “Those are truly wise words and we will take them under consideration at our next council which will be soon.” All the young men turned in the direction of Mnekke’s voice now and they watched as the rest of the elder council emerged from the shelter and all sat on their blankets just in front of them except Mnekke who remained standing. “We shall all gather here now to discuss the decisions of the conference.” Mnekke proclaimed loudly. After this announcement, one could hear the word being ed to others throughout the village and everyone started to gather near the elders and took their seats on their blankets or animal skins. Of course the sentries who were in place constantly remained on their post but the message was ed to them also. Mnekke who was still standing spoke again when they had all gathered. “We have decided it is best for us if we our brothers and sisters and present a

unified effort against the pale ones. Therefore we will send messengers north to the Mohawk, the Delaware, the Mohican and the Irocco. We will also send south to the Cherokee, Choctaw and Alabamis, and west to the Chiricahua, the Arapaho, the Black Feet, the Sioux, the Pawnee, the Ute, the Pueblo and all other children of the sun whom we can . We know there have been some differences in the past between some of our brethren, but with such an urgent task as now beset us; we believe we can set aside our differences for a later day.” He paused, then continued. “If there is anyone here not in agreement with this decision, please, let him or her speak now?” After this there was quite a bit of conversation among the listeners and runners were even dispatched to the sentries again in order that everyone might have a chance to speak but after a time of discussion and no dissent was heard, Mnekke spoke again. “There has been ample time for dissent and we have heard none, therefore we shall set our plan in motion. Among you for the next two days you shall discuss and decide who is the most capable of making the s we have described, and recommend them to the council. The council will then decide from those whom you have chosen. However be forewarned, with so many being sent on this mission, those of us who remain must be that much more vigilant in our efforts for safety and protection.” Mnekke continued to speak. “Now with this task before us we must start to get ready. We will not use rifles and pistols for hunting in order to save ammunition. Those still learning to shoot will only be taught in words and holding of the weapons. The teacher must explain the recoil and aim very carefully because they will not be able to experience it. And as I said, the council will take the suggestion of Lilek under consideration and will make a recommendation in a short while. As for now this assembly has ended and we shall return to our regular duties and our new duties, but although our plan has now been activated, we are still open to any suggestions of how we can best prepare for this war.” He ended. There was now more bustling as the people begin to return to their meals, conversations and other responsibilities and there seemed to be a lively spirit that dwelt in the people. It showed itself in sparkling eyes and vibrant voices as they interacted with each other. This spirit was very contagious and affected everyone in the village including the runaways. And thus the spirits of a people were miraculously lifted and their countenance and manner became that of the beautiful proud people they once were before distress in the form of these pale

ones plagued them.

CHAPTER XXIII

The Decision

B efore they retired that night, Mnekke also spoke to Glory and Maura. “Our invitation remains open to you; you may continue to dwell with us or you may choose to travel with one of our messengers to other parts of the land or you may leave on your own. The choice is yours, but we will not fault you regardless of your choice. We only wish you well and may the Spirit of creation forever remain with you.” He spoke kindly. “Thank you for your most gracious invitation,” Maura answered. “We shall discuss and think over our choice and give you an answer before the messengers are sent.” Glory assured him. After Mnekke left them they retired into their shelter; tomorrow would be another day of teaching, learning and preparing, but now that the plan for war was in motion, they needed to carefully decide if they were going to in the battle or travel elsewhere. That night when the three of them lay down on their straw beds, Maura and Larobe on one side of the shelter and Glory on the other; they discussed their plans. “Well what do you think of the Tuleg’s plan?” Maura asked as he lay on his side with his head propped up with his hand and Larobe lying just behind him. “I don’t know,” she answered as she reposed on her side in a likewise position while facing them across the shelter. “But Mnekke said that there was once many Tulegs, but now their numbers have been reduced to a few villages. So what of the others? Have their numbers been reduced also? And what of the whites, how many are they? These are the answers that I need before I decide how to fight this war.” Maura answered still reposing on his bed. “I don’t know the answers to those

questions either, but this war has been going on for many generations and we have not solved the problem. However, I think that if we and the Tulegs and their brothers become united against the whites, maybe we will start winning this war.” “We?” Glory said a little surprised. “So you have already decided to cast your lot with the Tulegs?” “Yes, I think so,” Maura answered still laying on his side. “I think this is our best chance. Since this land was occupied by the Tulegs and their brethren before the whites came, they know of the land and I think that our chances will be good if there are many of the others and they decide to us.” “But the whites have such terrible weapons; it will be war like we have never seen.” Glory said while adjusting her position on the straw bed. “Yes, you are so right,” Maura said as he sat up. “But the war started long ago. It started when the whites came to Cush and maimed, killed, kidnapped and bought and sold humans, and when they came to India with their massacres, and to this land with their genocide and murder; they started the war. And now we must face this enemy, though he is difficult and dreadful, we shall not rest until we drive him back to from whence he came.” “That is quite a quest,” Glory answered while sitting up also. “But I am not questioning the nobleness of a war against the whites; I am questioning the capabilities of the Tuleg and their brethren. No sir,” she said steadfastly. “I am not questioning the correctness of a war; I am just asking what is wise and prudent in such a war. “And what of our people; whose side will they fight on? There are those such as Black Bob who will do the bidding of the whites to save his own skin, and others who will fight for the whites because they do not know any better. And still others, if they refuse to do the biddings of the whites, will they be killed? And will children be murdered to prevent their growing up and becoming warriors?” Maura pondered what Glory had just said. He knew that on the McCabe ranch there were many Cushnites who would not fight in this war unless they fought on the side of the whites because they were loyal to the whites. There were others who thought of the Tuleg and their brothers as savages, and some who even thought that he was a troublemaker.

Yes, there were many captives who would fight for the whites for many different reasons, but most of all there were those who had families and wanted to keep them together and away from harm. Even he had become protective of Glory and Larobe so how much more would they worry about their own born of their flesh? Yes sir, just as the lady said; this was no easy quest. He pondered these things before he spoke. “Yes maam,” he said. “What you say is very worthy of thought but when I was shanghaied to this new world, I became a soldier in this war. And I have long thought of maiming and murdering those who had me work in fields of sun day after day with iron biting and burning my neck and ankles and the salt from my sweat burning my wounds and eyes that I could not stop even to wipe. I have also often thought of killing those men who would take a child from his family to wallow for days in the bowels of a ship filled with excretion, misery and disease. But then these are not the thoughts of a soldier but desires for revenge, and I know this war that has been forced upon me cannot be won with anger and vengeance.” He hesitated for a moment then solemnly added with such emotion that it calmed his voice and he earnestly said to her as he looked into her eyes. “And I have also thought of he who would drive a woman insane with beatings and force, and then take the child of that one for his mistress as if it was his right. I have similarly thought of the hangings, mutilations, lashings and the complete thrashing of the dignity of our people and I have concluded that yes, I must fight this war until I win, or I am dead. Either way it is better than the abuse I will receive from these pale ones if I am ever to live under their rule again.” When he finished he sat trembling and Glory was very much moved by his declaration but her maternal wisdom still held to a belief that avoidance of horror was a better choice if you could accomplish your mission otherwise. Furthermore, she never thought of herself as a mistress, but merely another captive who was forced to do the biddings of the captors. However she realized that she could never go back to being used by one like the judge and she too would rather die than face that possibility. She again spoke. “You are correct, there are many reasons for you to be angry, just as there are many reasons for Mnekke and me, but we must not act out of anger alone; we must also use caution and sound judgment. Our decision must be based not only on our belief of the rightness of what we are doing, but we must also believe that

we can achieve our goal. Because to fight, no matter how righteous, is extremely foolish if there are no means that could bring about the result that is sought; or if there is no belief that it can be accomplished.” Maura spoke again. “Again you have spoken wisely woman but I have given much thought to our circumstance in this place and I will fight until death now that I am free and I will try not to let revenge be my desire. But it is a natural thing that creeps into my mind and I try to block it out, but I need to solve this urge for payback to truly become a soldier. “Yet I question why the great and wise Lord has sent these ones to have dominion over us, but even as I ask Him, I understand that regardless whether I know the reasons or not why we are in such a situation, it is for me to struggle mightily against that which is oppressing me.” Maura said emphatically. They were both siting up in bed facing each other now. He continued. “But I know that I will overcome and we will overcome these pale ones. That is why I say I say I will fight with the Tulegs. You see, just as I have heard your prayers to the glorious Lord Vishnu, I too have prayed to the great Romokoko: It is He Whom I ask to help us prevail over our enemy and I believe He will not fail us.” And then he changed his tone and became more quiet and humble. “Oh yes,” he said. I am one who believes that one’s life is a prayer and that all thanks and praise which are due to Romokoko is given by the way we live our lives, and this determines our good fortune. I believe also that one whose conduct is not correct creates his own bad fortune. However, although I try to live life in a worthy manner, still there must be something lacking in my ways or the great Lord is testing me as he did Job to see if I can keep my faith when circumstances are really trying.” Glory was listening fixedly now, she had not known a man to speak of faith with such conviction, and this Romokoko, He seemed so like Vishnu. Could this be but another manifestation? But of course, the one Lord was One and He could become anything or anyone. And just as He had become Krishna and rode with Arjuna in his chariot and instructed him in the ways of yoga in the days of old, so could He become Romokoko. “You are a man of great faith,” she said. “And your stance is quite irable, but

your decision to fight and your decisions in fighting must also contain logic, because although Vishnu loves those who are faithful, he also abhors ones who are fools.” Maura laughed aloud at this remark and replied. “Is there no end to your wisdom?” And then he laughed some more. “Why are you laughing,” she asked. “Are you making fun of me?” She said angrily? “No, no,” he answered hurriedly still smiling. “I just think that you are quite a wise woman but you have such maternal instinct that wants to avoid the pain of war, and you will find many wise ways to express your instincts.” “So you think I am thinking of excuses just so I may lessen the chances of pain,” she said heatedly. “Well let me assure you sir that I have endured as much pain as any man and I am in no way afraid for myself. I am only thinking cautiously because I crave the survival of our progeny. If all of us are wiped out and our children are killed and captured; what chance have we ever to become those commendable souls that you so eloquently speak of. “When we are being trained in the ways of others with no knowledge of our original ways, then all hope of us ever becoming the servants of the Lord will be lost. No sir, that is not the way and I am not speaking out of fear. I only want to know that I have a chance of achieving my goal before I embark on a quest; because although it is courageous to fight, it is also wise to be sensible.” He spoke hurriedly now and became quite sincere. “I am truly sorry if I have offended you with my laughter,” Maura apologized. “I was only laughing at the marvelous way that you put things. Please forgive me for I was not being frivolous, I was merely thinking that a woman’s instinct reflects the differences of our gender, but I am sure you know that as well as I.” She too smiled then and said. “You are quite expressive in replying to me, sir, and as long as you are earnest, I can accept your reasoning and apology; and I do not mean to take offense where none was intended. So, I too, ask you to accept my apology.” She replied. He then said. “No apology is necessary and I shall give what you have said much thought and I will try to be courteous and respectful in my s to you, but

now I will try to sleep, but please feel free to speak any thoughts which you think I should hear.” After he accepted her apology, the room was silent for a time as they both reclined in their straw beds and Larobe who had been lying beside Maura listening the whole while spoke. “Does this mean we do not have to go back to the ranch?” They both laughed and answered. “Yes, it does mean we do not have to go back to the ranch!” And they all chuckled themselves to sleep.

CHAPTER XXIV

Black Bob

T he weather was somewhat colder but not cold and Black Bob sat in his cubby hole; he had held up here more than six months now and there was only one thing that gave him any desire to live and it was Liza. He needed to see her, to see if she was alright. And although each time he thought of going to see her fear gripped him like a dying man trying to hold on to his last breath, he finally decided that he was going to the McCabe ranch to see her. While thinking about his trip to the ranch he climbed out of the perch which Jadur had erected just above the swamp pool and ambled to the bank of the pond on the old logs that had fallen across and provided a bridge to his new home. He gathered some herbs and had one muskrat his traps which he skinned and added to his stewpot. As he cooked his meal in the metal pot that Jadur had left near the small pit where his fire now glowed, he could not stop thinking about Liza but he waited until nightfall before he left for the ranch. Night time in the swamp is an eerie place: The soft crinkling noise of the nocturnal animals such as rats, raccoons and opossums as they skulk through damp brush looking for any dead or near dead prey plays creepily on the mind. Then there are the snakes and gators which prey on these who slither through the water and brush more quietly. But most fearsome of all are the big cats that make even less noise. The sounds of the predators and prey as they walk, crawl, slither and swim about may not be recognized by those not accustomed to the swamp, but Black Bob had been here for a while now and he was familiar with every sound: From the frogs that croaked to the deadly cottonmouths that barely made a sound as they slithered through the wet marsh or the big cats who made no noise at all but emitted a presence that was unmistakable fearsome. He was grateful that the shelter which Jadur had provided was far enough above the swamp so that he was reasonably safe from most of these predators and his constant torch

controlled the big cats. Jadur had left him a supply of matches which he guarded jealously, but since Bob knew that no humans were coming to this part of the swamp unless they were runaways and their pursuers, he kept a torch burning nearby which he could douse at the sound of humans. However tonight when he made his trip near the ranch he would have to extinguish his torch also. Bob crept through the damp swamp and thick forest using the torch to frighten away any animals he encountered, but as he got closer to the outer limits of the ranch, he snuffed his torch and trekked the rest of the way in darkness. When he neared the edge of the forest, he dropped to his knees and began crawling; he knew he was putting his self in peril of the cottonmouths but even they were less dangerous than the overseers and guards. With an escape so recently the guards would be extremely vigilant but he knew the regular posts of the guards and slinked his way toward his old shack. Finally he dropped to his belly when he got closer to the ranch. As he scuttled on his belly behind the shacks where Glory and Old Ben slept he prayed that no one was peeking but as he ed Old Ben’s shack he thought he felt a pair of wary eyes spying him, but it was too late to turn back. He continued sliding on his belly until he slid beneath the first shack and flopped onto his back and now his heart thumped so loud that he worried that he might awaken the occupant if there was one above him. His old shack was closest to the big house and he lay there thinking how he would get to it. He would have to negotiate about twenty yards crawling beneath other shacks in and out of cover and then skim on his belly another thirty or forty yards without any cover. This was the most dangerous trek yet. He took a deep breath rolled over on his stomach and crawled from beneath the lean-to. When he was between the shacks near the end shack he saw movement in the yard about thirty yards in back of the big house. When he slipped back under the shack he could see what he assumed was a dog house and maybe the movement was a dog which could be a problem. His heart was racing and his breathing was becoming shallow now as he lay there on his stomach contemplating his next move all the while watching for the dog. The night was cloudy and dark and Bob could barely distinguish a figure

perched on the ground just outside the dog house until billowing clouds suddenly parted and allowed the pale yellow moon to give him a glimpse of what was there. What he saw wounded and saddened his whole being and disheartened his soul. However his vision was mercifully veiled by the tears which welled in his eyes when he saw his wife, Liza, chained to a stake with only a dog house for shelter. He lay there on his back now with his face only inches from the wooden floor breathing sporadically; he wanted to go to her and he almost cried out to her, but he knew the danger in that. There was no way he could expose himself now and not make it worse for Liza, but he knew he must find a way to rescue her. He knew that her predicament was his fault and this made his pain more agonizing and her rescue even more imperative. As he creeped on his belly back to the other side of the shacks and made his way back into the forest and to the swamp, two old, but wise eyes watched his retreat. Old Ben could not believe that this one had come for his wife, but if he came this time, he would come back. When he reached his abode in the swamp, Bob was beside himself with anxiety but he knew he had to rescue Liza because it would not be enough for him to be captured or killed trying to rescue her because that would only lead to more punishment for her? Maybe he could someone on the ranch to help him: But who?–Who would be willing to help him: he who had wrenched babies from mother’s arms to be sold; he who had beaten mothers and fathers and sons and daughters alike at the command of whites; and he who had dragged wives from their shacks for the master’s pleasure while their husbands watched? As he worried in his small shelter above the swamp, he didn’t notice when the small curtain was moved aside and a pistol clasped in a black hand had intruded. “Get up out of there, Buck!” A husky feminine voice commanded. Bob was shocked out of his musing when he heard this and saw the pistol pointed at him. “Oh Lawdy, Lawdy!” He moaned. “I said come out here, didn’t I?” The voice said again firmly. Bob stepped down from his perch onto the fallen logs and could not believe his eyes. He saw a tall black woman in men’s clothes. “What are you doing here in this swamp?” She asked.

“I’s hiding,” He answered nervously. “I is hiding from dem at the ranch.” “What you hiding for, what have you done?” The tall black woman asked still severely. “I is hiding because dey think I is the cause of Massa Sam and dem others being dead.” Bob answered. “What are you talking about, man, are you crazy or something?” She now asked quizzically squinting at him to get a better look at him in the dark. “No maam, I ain’t crazy; I ain’t crazy at all. But there is some things be happening around here ever since dat big black Sambo come and now me and Liza is in a heap of trouble.” Bob said hurriedly and worriedly staring at her and the pistol. “Look you sure are if you don’t slow down and tell me what you are talking about because I ain’t got no time for no crazy man. I could just as well shoot you or go off and leave you here, but you better tell me what you are talking about because I can’t leave no crazy man around who has seen me.” She said still pointing the gun at him. “Naw maam, you don’t have to shoot me.” He said raising his hands as if to shield himself. “You see, dat Sambo and his pickininny done run off with the Judge’s mistress and we run after dem. Dey wuz on horses and they left me behind but then I heard the dogs and I ran to catch up. But when I got there dey was all killed, Massa Sam and all dem others, but not Sambo and the pickininny and the woman. So I knowed I was in for trouble and I started running cause I know if somebody find me there and dey is all dead den I might as well be dead too.” “Whoa, whoa!” She said slowing him down again while still pointing the pistol at him. “Who are you talking about? Is there a farm near here?” “Yes’m, it’s the McCabe ranch. Dat’s where dey run from and dat’s where I came from.” Bob said nodding with his hands still raised. She finally got the whole story from him and lowered her weapon. “Look,” She said. “They call me Moses. Have you heard about me?”

“Yes’m,” He nodded. “I think all niggers have heard about you.” “Well, in that case you know I can’t have nobody around talking about they seen me.” “No maam, I don’t talk to nobody. Nobody knows I is here. I just stay in dis here swamp.” “Now I am gonna tell you this, Buck. You know what I do since you have heard of me. So I tell you I am going down to the Cunningham ranch to get some captives and we are going to back this way on our way to Canada. You can come along if you want to, but you gonna have to do just as I say.” She said sternly. “No maam,” He answered shaking his head. “I got to git Liza!” “Now what you talking about?” She asked. “Liza is my wife and dey is punishing her cause dey think I ran away. She is tied behind the big house like a dog, but I can’t go without her cause it’s my fault. No maam.” He said still shaking his head. This one didn’t look like the noble type to her but after many trips in and out of forests she was not surprised by anything. “Now I’ll tell you this,” Moses said. “In five days we will be back. You can come with us but we ain’t gonna have no time to waste.” “Yes’m.” He said nodding again. “I want to leave this here swamp but I got to get Liza first.” “I am leaving now.” She said still looking at him and not seeing the nobleness. She kept her eyes on him as she backed away on the log bridge. “ in five days.” She said as she turned and disappeared into the swamp. Bob knew that he had just a few days in which to rescue Liza but he had no idea how he would accomplish this so the next night he made his second forage into the farm territory. When he slid under Glory’s shack he was terrified because he didn’t know if he had been spotted on his last trip. As he lay there worrying and contemplating his dilemma he felt those eyes watching him and when he heard: “Shhh,” he jerked defensively and his head knocked against the beam beneath

the floor above. “Shhh, It’s me.” Old Ben whispered placing his face very near to Bob’s in the darkness under the shack. They both waited to see if Bob’s head butt against the floor had awakened anyone. When they were sure they were not discovered Old Ben whispered. “Don’t talk just listen.” Old Ben had been waiting for him. He was not certain that Bob was coming back but he had been around long enough to know that certain situations could be the last straw for a captive regardless of how he had lived his life before; and he figured Liza’s punishment was that breaking point for Bob. Old Ben was also an expert at speaking in whispers as it was a necessity of his purpose here and when he spoke to Bob there was no animosity in his voice as Bob had feared. “Look, I know what you came for but you can’t get to her right now. They have an iron collar around her neck which is fastened to a chain. They won’t let anyone talk to her but I will get word to her. I will also get something for her to cut the chain from her neck but it will take a few nights. But you can’t keep coming here every night; it’s much too dangerous. And the next time you come, come to my shack; now you can talk,” He whispered. “I, I…” Bob started too loudly. “Shh,” Ben whispered. “You must whisper and don’t try to explain why you are here; just tell me your plan.” Bob was quieter this time. He didn’t try to articulate any details. “In four days a lady said we could run for Canada. I need to get Liza away from here by then. Oh Lawd, will you help me.” “That’s what I just told you?” Old Ben said rather sternly then he continued. “Look, we’ll have the collar cut by then. You just make sure you get here on that night and I will be waiting.” “Oh Lawd, you sho you gon help me, Black Bob, the overseer?” Bob asked disbelievingly. Old Ben didn’t answer this time; just kept on whispering. “Don’t you worry about that just you make sure that you aren’t seen because when they discover that Liza is gone there is going to be nothing that I can do; it will all be on you.” He paused then asked still whispering. “Now do you have any old clothes or

rags?” “I sho do, I got …” Bob started again too loud for Ben. “Shh. Just you listen.” Old Ben cautioned, then he continued. “I want you to stuff those clothes with grass or something and make them look as much like a woman as you can and you come back in three days bring it with you. Now when you get here, Liza will crawl over to you. You will leave the dummy with me and I will put the dummy in Liza’s place. “They don’t check on Liza at night so when I substitute the dummy for her they may not notice the difference until morning but if you hear me holler, that means I have been discovered, then you and Liza run as fast as you can, but if you don’t hear me yell, you just keep on sneaking like you been doing. But they surely will notice in the morning so you and that lady better be long gone before then!” Old Ben warned. “I will ….” Bob started again getting very excited. “Shh, now don’t you go getting excited; we don’t want to be caught before we rescue Liza.” Old Ben scolded. “Now you better get out of here.” Old Ben then watched as Black Bob crawled from the shack, stole back into the forest and disappeared. Old Ben prided himself on being able to help any captive escape and now he was getting the chance to help even an overseer. Old Ben’s duties kept him close to Liza and he also had access to tools such as saws, axes and files and his shack was directly behind the big house about fifty or sixty feet behind Liza. He cut the wood for the big house, tended the garden and generally did the yard work around the house, He was also the one who brought her food so it was not unusual to see him say a few words to her now and then. On this day when he ed Liza he faked a trip and fell scattering the wood he was carrying and causing the axe to strike hard on the chain. He hurriedly started to gather the wood as he looked around to see if anyone noticed him. One of the guards who happened to be ing on his way to the big house looked his way but he laughed and kept on going however Liza knew it was no accident. Liza didn’t quite understand what was going on but she knew that she had detected movement beneath the shacks a couple of times and now Old Ben had

deliberately whacked the chain with his axe. She stared at him as he picked up his burden and himself and ambled on toward the big house, but he never gave her a clue; just nodded as always and said. “I’ll see you when I bring your food.” When he was gone she quietly moved over to look at the chain and saw that a link had been loosened. “Oh Lord,” She prayed silently. “Are You coming to deliver me?” Liza had been chained like this since the discovery of the bodies of Sam and the others; she heard talk of Bob running with the others but she didn’t believe it, but she never had time to worry about it. Two whites had burst into her shack; one knocked her down and they both grabbed and dragged to the whipping post her nearly tearing out her hair. They had all the other captives gather around, even the ones from the big house and they had George the new African overseer whip her until she lost consciousness. After that, she was chained to a dog house behind the big house with a small length of metal chain that hardly allowed her to stand. When she came to, one of the women from one of the shacks was washing and cleaning the deep gashes in her back. That night that same lady brought her some salve and bandages but she never came back. For days and weeks she agonized with the sores on her back and thighs and just as she was beginning to heal and realize the immense dreadful position she was in, the ultimate humiliation was heaped upon her. Two of the bigger field hands were made to cohabit with her while the other hands and the white guards watched. After this from time to time, one of the white overseers would stop by in the dark and have his way with her but she soon started babbling like Jadur and they left her alone. Her life became the most miserable of all the captives. She was treated as a dog. She was fed from a pan which was placed on the ground and she was prey to any of the white overseers who happened to want to relieve his sexual frustration. She cried daily and nightly; it seemed that there was never a time when she wasn’t crying-except when she prayed. She prayed that her life would end; she prayed to be rescued; she prayed for the death of those who did this to her; and she prayed that Bob was safe. It had seemed that all her prayers were in vain until now when Old Ben had

deliberately struck her chain and she had seen the movement under the shacks. “Oh Lord!” She prayed now. “Is this the beginning of my salvation?” Liza was fed only once a day, like a dog. Sometimes her meal was only scraps: hardly any food at all, but sometimes Maybelle would sneak a piece of meat or some fresh vegetables beneath the scraps. Old Ben brought her slop near her every day and set it on the ground. This was the order he had: always set the pan on the ground like you would a dog. However today was not normal and she knew that something was going on and she knew that Old Ben knew what it was. As Old Ben squatted beside her to place her food he whispered. “I have seen Bob.” Her eyes lit up but he reproved her with his eyes. As she took the pan of food and crawled toward the dog house with it because the chain around her neck did not allow her to stand, he continued. “He is coming for you and I am going to leave this file here when I leave. You watch and see how I pry on this chain and you do like I do at night when no one can see you. You must get it off in three days because that’s when Bob is coming.” As he started to get up, he stumbled over the chain. He then took the piece of metal and pried the loosened link on the chain and then left the metal rod there almost buried in the dirt. He picked himself up still stumbling so that he would draw all attention to himself and went to attend his other duties. Liza had watched as Old Ben had placed the metal in the link that he had struck with the axe and pulled on it and although it was only for a second she got the gist of what she must do, but she could hardly believe what she had heard and seen. Bob was alive and was coming for her and old Ben had brought her means of escape. Oh, the lord had heard her prayer. She wanted to ask about Bob: Where was he? Is he alright? But Old Ben had gone and she knew that she could not act in anyway different than usual so she continued to mope along. She drooped her head and shoulders and sat with her back against the dog house and no one could see the exhilaration which coursed through her. But if her eyes, the windows to her soul, could be seen by anyone, they would see desire, hope, pride and love pushing aside tombstones that had long trapped them in graves born of despair. And they would be afraid because they would realize that anything or anyone who tried to stand against this frail woman would surely be

trampled. The next day when Old Ben came by with her meal she was still excited. “I am about to burst open.” Liza told him in whispers. “I don’t know if I can contain myself but I will because I surely want to leave here, and don’t worry, I will get this chain off. I will run with my Bob wherever he goes. You don’t have to worry cause when I start running, I will not be caught.” And then she said, “How did my Bob look? Was he well? Where has he been?” Her excitement was starting to bubble over. “Whoa, whoa.” Ben scolded. “Don’t you go getting excited.” After she had calmed down he continued. “He is well and I am sure he will tell you all about himself. You must get that chain off.” Then he got up from his squat and headed back to the garden. As he limped back he knew he could not visit her anymore; it might draw suspicion if he talked to her too long because to everyone else she merely babbled or remained silent, but if he kept visiting he was afraid her eagerness would reveal their secret. As he walked away Liza said slowly and quietly to him, but mostly to herself. “Don’t you worry, Old Ben, I am going to get this chain off and nobody will know. Nobody is going to know–Liza is going to get away from here.” Meanwhile Bob was busy–he gathered clothes and rags that Jadur had left him and gathered grasses and branches, mostly wet ones, to construct his dummy and he talked to himself as he worked. “Oh Lawdy,” He said. “I got to get this dummy ready, Lawdy, Lawdy, Lawdy, I sho hope Old Ben can get that chain offen Liza. I hope he don’t tell none of dem that he seen me. Oh Lawdy, what would Liza do then?” He fretted and fretted more but still he was not deterred from his mission. Soon it was time; Ben told him to show up well after dark so about 10 or 11 o’clock Bob grabbed his dummy and started for the ranch. Moses had not come yet and he hoped he and Liza were back before she arrived. He moved stealthily through the swamps and forest and when he crawled beneath the shack Old Ben was there. “I’ve been here for a while,” He said. It seems that everyone has retired and the guards are probably asleep too so it’s time to go.” Old Ben took the dummy from Bob and signaled to Liza and she skulked on her

belly toward the two men. The sky was overcast and the darkness hid her dark form from all who would see but she was quite unlike Bob in that her nerves were steel. Her eyes darted about as she covered the twenty or thirty yards to the shack; once she thought she saw a crack in the back door and another time she thought she detected movement in the distance from one of the guards, but she crawled steadily. Old Ben waited until she was nearly upon them before he started with the dummy. He said to Bob before he left, “Now don’t you two go having no reunion until you are far away from here.” And then he crawled over and and affixed the chain to the dummy and placed it in the place where Liza had slept (Liza had refused to sleep in the dog house unless in inclement weather). When he returned to the shack they were long gone. When Liza reached the shack she and Bob crawled into an embrace but it only lasted a second. Both were excited at the sight of each other; however there was no time to waste. Within seconds they were crawling toward the forest and then on their feet running for dear life. They were headed for Bob’s cubby hole; he didn’t know where else to go. They ran with their breaths coming in gasps; Bob clutching the file and hack saw blade old Ben had given him in one hand and Liza’s hand in the other as he pulled her along; and she holding on to the three foot length of chain that swung from the collar around her neck with her other hand. The brush of the forest slapped and tore at their faces and bodies but they hardly acknowledged this small impediment. Bob was praying that Moses would be there and Liza was praying that Bob would not be caught. They ran so purposely that they did not see the steely eyes watching them through the swamp foliage. “Whoa!” A husky voice rang out. “Stop here this minute!” Bob recognized this voice and gradually came to a halt as fast as he could with Liza right on his heels. They had ed the others and now turned to face them. Here was Moses with a shorter brown woman and they both were dressed entirely in black including the scarf on her head and Moses hat. Liza looked at Bob and he reassured her that this was the woman he had told her about. “Come, I got clothes for you both; put these on a rub some of this oil on you, it will deter some of the animals we’ll encounter along the way.” Moses said handing them clothing similar to her and Mandy’s and a small jar of oil. “You

take these over to your hideout and change there and leave both sets of old clothes there. We’ll be right here when you come back.” When Bob and Liza returned, Moses then addressed all three of them. “You three have got to trust me and do as I say; I have done this many times and I am still free. I also have this pistol and I will not hesitate to use it if one of you is causing danger to the rest by not following orders. There are some fences we have to cross and I intend to cross them safely.” Then she looked at the other woman and said roughly. “Mandy, I told Latham I would get you there and I intend to keep my word.” Then she said to Bob and Liza. “You two I have invited along because of your situation and I have sympathy for those in your position, therefore you are my responsibility and I don’t take my yoke lightly, but you all got to trust that I know what I am doing, now let’s get going.” All the while Moses talked Bob had been removing the chain and collar from Liza’s neck and after disposing them in the swamp pool they started their trek.

CHAPTER XXV

Larobe

T his morning he was out of the shelter before either Glory or Maura and he raced down to the training grounds; he wanted to be the first to arrive but Tannay was already there with two other young warriors and he greeted Larobe in his native language. “Greeting tall one may your day be pleasant and thriving and I trust your evening was peaceful,” Larobe was learning the language but he had not mastered it yet and he could only answer in one word: “Watahay.” There were many young ones to be trained but when he arrived at the training site there were only two: Umonka and Notany and they were just as anxious as Larobe. When the others greeted him they referred to him as tall one because he had grown much in his time here and he was taller that the rest of the young warriors. While they sat on the forest floor talking the rest of the young ones arrived for their training and Tannay asked, for silence and began the session with a prayer. “Oh Great creating Spirit, please open your heart to these young ones and open their eyes that they may see their path to warriors. Help them when they falter and give them strength when they are weak. And give them the wisdom to use the skills that they learn in harmony with nature, and give me the knowledge to guide them in a rightful course .” When he completed his prayer, he explained to the young ones. “Everything we do must be in accord with the natural order of things and although you are preparing to be warriors and very soon we will be fighting a war every day, this war will be in accordance with nature because we are the rightful inhabitants of this land. Therefore learn very well how to use your

weapons but also learn the ways of nature, for we will not always be at war and we must continue to live on the land so that the land will give back to us. And though we may have to kill many in this war, not to kill to be cruel but to kill to obtain your rightful place.” The class then broke into three groups; Larobe’s group was with Tannay and he taught them many things. He taught them that they should always pray to the creating Spirit for guidance in all that they do whether in war or peace. He taught them what herbs fruits and berries were good and which were poisonous. He told them to respect the experienced warriors but to question that which they did not understand or believe. He also taught them to respect the elders, women, their peers and themselves. And after teaching them how to care for their bodies with exercises and food, he then taught them the use of the weapons. This was really exciting part to the young ones and Larobe, at last they were getting the training they craved and as they advanced, Larobe excelled in all weaponry. He learned to throw the lance, shoot the bow, use a knife, shoot a gun, and hand to hand combat. Of course they were not allowed to fire rifles but he just knew that he would do well once they began firing. They also learned to ride horses and how to use the horse as a weapon and a shield. The horse training was the most exciting to the young ones as they tried to master riding on one side of the horse so that they could not be seen from the other side. Their day was quite long and all the young ones were quite exhausted when they returned to the village one evening but this did not stop their chatter. Larobe, Umonka and Notany flopped down on the grass in front of the runaways’ shelter and sat there in a triangle facing each other with their legs folded in front of them and Larobe was the first to speak. “I can out shoot both of you and I heaved the lance farther, and when …” “Cut it out, man.” Notany cut him off. “You could barely lift the lance, let alone throw it.” Both the Tulegs fell over with laughter at his remark. They were speaking English now but Larobe had learned more of the Tuleg’s language as Notany and Umonka had to constantly explain things to him during training. “Man I thought you were going to kill yourself when Tannay handed you the knife.” Umonka added and they both laughed again.

“Oh you guys are just envious because I’m so good,” Larobe said. “Yeah, you’re good alright, good at falling down,” Notany said, and they all laughed and fell over again. “Well,” said Maura, approaching the three lads, “I see you three barely had anything to do today, judging by the chatter you now keep up,” he said smiling. “No, no, no,” they answered in unison. “We had much to do, we are men and warriors today.” “And I was best of all,” said Larobe. “Oh no, he wasn’t,” the others answered.” Then they all looked at each other and laughed. Maura looked at the three and said. “While it is important what you did today, it is equally important what you do tomorrow, and without the proper rest and nutrition, your tomorrow will not be as successful as today.” They looked at each other in puzzlement and then Umonka asked, “What does that mean?” “It means that you must eat and rest well in order to be at your best tomorrow.” Maura replied. The boys understood this and said good-bye to Larobe and Maura and each headed toward his shelter. “Well,” said Maura. “I had a hard day and am in need of food and rest too.” As he finished speaking, Glory appeared. “I am also in need of rest and nutriment,” she said as she came closer. “Well I guess we had better get started preparing our meal,” Maura said. With this, they each started for their chores. Larobe went to fetch wood to start a fire. Maura grabbed a pail and went to get water for washing and cooking, and Glory went into the garden to gather herbs and vegetables. When they all returned, they started the fire, washed up and began to prepare their meal.

The runaways prepared their meals together although Maura knew little about cooking, but since they had to live together Glory was insistence on his learning. “Fill the pot about half way with water and sprinkle a those herbs in it and set it over the fire,” she said to Maura. Their cooking was done over an open fire with a metal pot that hung over it on a metal rod mounted on two y-shaped sticks. Sometimes when the pot did not heat up adequately they would insert rocks or stones into the fire and set the pot directly on the fire. There were other families returning now and starting their meals and although each family cooked their own meals they still shared with each other. Maura noticed that most of the men took no part in the cooking and asked Glory as he sprinkled the herbs into the pot: “Why do I always help with the meals when I see the other men taking no part with their family meals?” “Because we are not a family,” she answered. “Circumstances just happen to put us in a position to function like one.” She said as she continued to prepare the vegetables in a wooden bowl atop a tree stump that they used both for a table and a seat. “Well if we are to truly function as a family, it seems to me we should act as the other families do.” He replied as he started back toward her. “You just want to get out of doing your share of the preparing. But if you want to eat you are going to do your share. Besides, when you are on your own by yourself, you will need to know how to prepare your food.” She said as she lifted the bowl and held it in the crook of one arm while she continued to stir with the other and walked toward the fire. “Yes, I know, and I appreciate you teaching me, but I’ve been thinking lately.” He said as he turned and watched her walk away. “Oh, and just what have you been thinking?” She asked as she emptied the bowl contents into the pot? “You see,” he stammered, “I believe that I am growing more attracted to you the more I stay around you and …” “Hush,” she said quickly, ri from her position leaning over the pot and

cutting him off. “You are just thinking conveniently because I am there in the same room with you night after night …” “Now you are not letting me finish my thoughts,” he said cutting her off as he took a seat beside Larobe who was sitting on a blanket just in front of the shelter. “I know it may seem that way to you and I am not asking you to make up your mind right away, but I really am attracted to you. I like the way you have so much confidence in yourself and I like the strength you have both spiritually and mentally. And I like the way you have with children and other people. I have been with you for a while now and I really like you.” She let him go on for a little while and then she cut him off again. “I don’t really know what you are saying?” She said while walking over to them still holding the bowl in the crook of her arm. “Are you asking me to be your wife or are you asking me to pretend we are a family. I want to be sure what you are asking before I answer. And you don’t have to answer right away because I want you to be sure just what it is you want and expect before you commit yourself one way or the other. “But I will only say,” she continued. “I will not put aside all my wants to please and attain the wants of a man. But let me stop here because I don’t know just what you are asking of me and I don’t want to be too presumptuous and embarrass myself.” “No, no, no.” He said looking up from his seat beside Larobe. “But I have never had a wife before or lived with a woman until now but it seems so natural for us to be here together but I don’t know exactly what I would expect in a wife or a woman because I don’t know what I am going to do. I don’t know how long this war is going to last, and I just don’t know what is going to happen but whatever happens I want you close to me. And since fate has brought us together, maybe it is the will of your Vishnu.” He added hoping very much to win her favor with this mention of her Deity. “Well will you just come out and say what you want of me, not what you want in a woman or wife but do you want me to be your wife or woman and what do you expect?” She demanded. “I have already said what I am not going to do but I have not said what I am going to do. Anyway I don’t know if I can be a wife, especially after what happened with the judge.” She turned away embarrassed and headed for the pot atop the fire again.

He noticed how she turned from him when she uttered these last words and he started to get up but he did not go to her because he too was embarrassed but he managed to stammer: “I could never hold that against you; you were under circumstances beyond your control. We, we, could forget that I’m sure.” “Well?” She asked composed again now and turning to look at him. “Are you asking me to be your wife or what?” “Yes, yes I am,” he said, “but you don’t have to answer right way.” “I’ll tell you what we should do,” she said. “You think about it for a while. Think about it and think about what you will expect from me and I will think about what I will expect from you. Then if we still feel that fate has put us together we will discuss it then. Right now I think we should finish our meal and start to get ready for tomorrow.” Everyone was silent for a few seconds and Larobe who had learned very well not to interrupt conversation then asked: “May I speak now?” “Yes you may,” they both answered. “I think we should all stay together until we can find our way back home to our families. And I think we should even stay together after that. I have grown very fond of both of you and I think that until we find our way back home we should be a family.” Yes,” said Maura, “I think circumstances have made us a family and I too think we should stay together.” “I’ll go along with that,” said Glory. “But it’s just a couple of things that I am not certain of just yet.” “Well what is it?” Asked Maura. “You both have families who are in Cush and you want to return there, well what is going to happen to me then. I have no family in Cush. My father and mother are probably both in this land or dead, I don’t know which. Am I to return to Cush with you and never know the fate of my parents? And on the other hand,” she continued. “If I am to become your wife, I don’t want you to go and leave me here but I don’t want to leave until I know what has become of my mother.”

Maura thought about this for a couple of seconds and then said: “I think that that time is still a ways in the future, but when that time comes, I promise we will try to locate your mother before we embark on a journey back to Cush.” “Listen,” Glory said. “A hasty look will not do. I intend to know what happened to my mother before I leave this land.” “I understand,” Maura replied earnestly. “And I promise we will leave no stone unturned in our search. And only when you are satisfied that we have found her or have done all we could, then and only then shall we embark on a trip to Alkebulan.” She stopped stirring the vegetables in the pot and stood and faced him now and said. “You must understand, what you say sounds very good to me. But tell me, if we find her and she is still as she was when the judge sent her away, would you be willing to take her with us and even go to India if that is what she wants?” Glory asked. Maura did not hesitate. “As I said before, that is still in the future, but sure, if it comes to that, I will be agreeable to seeing that she returns to India. And if you want to return there also, I will not be so agreeable but if that is what you want, then I will not hold you back, but it’s all in the future. What is immediate is that we have to get ready for war.” She then said. “I will think about all you have said for a while and I will give you an answer in a reasonable time. I am still not sure about this war thing, but maybe it is the best way to find my mother because if we go north, then to return here could be just as hazardous as our leaving is.” “Okay, that is a fair answer but there is one thing,” he said. “And what is that?” She asked firmly. “If you do decide to become my wife, will I still have to cook?” Glory laughed at this and said. “That is another thing I will have to think about.” The three completed preparing and eating their meal and Glory and Larobe retired to the shelter while Maura went to visit and talk with some of the other Tulegs about war strategy and about the messengers. He conversed with

Mnekke, Tannay and some of the other elders. It would soon be time to send the messengers and there was to be another discussion very soon to decide on the suggestion of Lilek. Of course Maura was not a part of the council but they did discuss this informally when they met and talked about their future. When their conversation ended, Maura walked back to his shelter, he was energized by his conversations with the elders and his dialogue with Glory; he was sure that they would win the war and he was sure she would become his wife.

CHAPTER XXVI

The Storm

T he next day the tiny village awoke to a storm of gargantuan proportions as the wind howled and waved sheets of rain through the opening in the shelters. The inhabitants struggled to close the gaps but the wind was mightier. One by one the shelters begin to give in to the wind and the families clung to each other, poles, trees, rocks and whatever they could that was not being tossed about by the storm. Most prayed but some cursed the spirits, however, all survived because the wind died as suddenly as it was born. And now as the rain still pounded the village turning the yards into a muddy marsh, they set out to recover weapons and belongings that the wind had scattered about. However, in spite of the fierceness of the gale, it was only an omen for the storm to come. When the wind had subsided and the families were retrieving their belongings, they heard a clamoring of noise which they thought was more thunder, but their sentries had been distracted by the storm and they fell one by one as an army of pale men with blazing rifles descended upon them. When the Tulegs realized that the noise they heard was gunfire and hoof beats in the sloshing mud and not thunder, they activated a plan they had for such an occasion, but because all was in disarray and the raiding party was so near, the plan could not be executed, so they all hurried toward the area where they had stored their belonging that they had recovered. And from there they watched as an army of whites came thundering toward them through the pouring rain which dripped from their hats and beards and so distorted their snarling faces until it seemed like grotesque demons atop ferocious beasts were roaring upon them. It was total war now, and every able-bodied person was going to have to fight for survival. Maura looked around for Glory and Larobe, but he only spied Glory who was behind him. He dropped all the articles he was gathering except his weapon. Glory had stopped gathering too and was backing toward the rocks and trees where they had stored their belongings. They all retreated to this area as

each steeled for the coming battle that was now hurling down on them and they silently prayed for the strength to defeat this formidable enemy. Although the storm had sent the village into chaos, they were aware enough to stack the weapons and other articles in a strategic location and now men women and children, the old and the infirmed all gathered here where the weapons were stacked. There were huge rocks to one side and trees to the other. They had also gathered some of the logs which were strewn about and had prepared a mini fortress. Most of the villagers were ed for within the fortress but Larobe had still not been located. Now as the villagers waited for the assault to reach them, Maura called out for him, “Larobe!” He shouted. “Larobe!” There was no answer and he started to leave the fortress but just then the pale men let go a volley of bullets in a blazing rage and Maura scrambled back into the safety of the mini-fortress. The pale men were shooting into the shelters and bullets were ricocheting all around but most of the villagers were in the mini fort where the weapons were stored. The villagers tried to insulate the children and infirmed with debris within the fortress and Mnekke told everyone to hold their fire until they were closer. The raiders had expected to find the village intact, and all the people scattered about attending to their daily tasks, or within their shelters, but the storm had changed that and all the warriors and others who would have been tending other duties or within the tents were in the fortress because of the storm. When the whites realized that the shelters were empty they were surprised but they had started their attack now; there would be no retreat. The villagers crouched in their cover waiting for Mnekke to give the signal and when he did, a flurry or arrows and lances filled the sky and cast an even darker cloud than the one which brought the first storm and instead of rain it showered blood. Because the pale men were surprised and in the open many of the projectiles found their marks, and they fell from their mounts into the mud which filled the yards of the village and it turned a dark sinister shade of red and oozed toward the makeshift fort in an ominous symbol of the blood which had been shed in Africa, India and America in order to murder and enslave the ancestors of those who now fought here for their survival.

The battle raged now with casualties on both sides. The raiders fell into the gory red mud and some of the villagers who were hit by gunfire as they rose to deliver their weapons toppled back into the fort and became cover for the children and the old and the infirmed, who were not taking part in the battle. The remaining whites scrambled as quickly as they could to find refuge from the barrage of arrows and lances that continued to target them in droves and the villagers scurried to the fortress. The raiders found cover behind trees, logs and debris of the village; however, many of their guns began to misfire as the rain continued to saturate them. The villagers noticed how sparse the gunfire became and some begin to creep out of the fortress and attack the pale men whose weapons became useless except as clubs. They now had the advantage and they attacked the raiders in hand to hand combat with daggers and spears and as they drove their weapons into the bodies of the raiders, the spirits boomed thunder that mercifully drowned the cries of dying men. As the tide of battle turned in favor of the villagers, Maura’s thoughts again turned to Larobe and he called out for him continually as he made his way crawling through a gruesome sea of mud and dying men. As he traveled further from the village, one of the raiders spotted him and followed him. Maura was now standing and racing from tree to tree as he came to the outer parameters of the village but he was careful to keep himself covered although he did not know he was being followed. But as he darted across a clearing, the raider who was following him took careful aim and was squeezing the trigger when Larobe appeared out of the woods and heaved a lance in his direction. Just as he leaped aside, his rifle fired but the spear was enough to mar his aim and Maura ran toward Larobe as he heard the report of a rifle behind him. Larobe’s lance was not true to its mark but it caused the raider to react enough so that the rifle shot was not accurate and Maura ran into the woods where Larobe was standing: dove and brought him to the ground just as the rifle reported again. Again the shot was wide of the mark and Maura dragged Larobe behind a tree for cover. Now it was a faceoff: the raider was not sixty feet from him across a small clearing in the forest with a gun and hidden behind huge rocks; Maura armed with bow and arrow and knife, was hidden in the woods. He said to Larobe in a

whisper. “You stay here hidden in the forest and stay close to the ground. When you hear my call, I want you to answer and I want you to move around the opposite way that I am moving but stay behind cover and answer each time you hear my call.” Larobe nodded and Maura begin to skulk in a circle in order to come up behind the raider. As he slinked, he kept his elbows and belly on the ground and he could see the raider peeping from his hideout trying to spy where he was. As he circled, he used an owl call which the Tulegs used to signal each other. When the raider heard this call he turned abruptly pointing his rifle in front of him, but Larobe answered this call and he again swung around. Now Maura moved closer still circling and called again. Larobe moved in the opposite direction and answered. The runaways kept this up for a while with the raider turning and worrying with each sound as Maura drew closer and closer. It sounded as if a flock of owls were slowly surrounding him, yet he knew it was the villagers–but he didn’t know how many. He begin to fire his gun with each call but the bullets were circulating and echoing among the trees and rocks while the runaways were lying close to the ground so that his shots were just random shots that added to the confusion that Maura and Larobe were making with their calls. Soon his ammunition was exhausted and he stood terrified and jittery: Cold drops of sweat indistinguishable from the raindrops were gushing from his brow and beneath his drenched clothing as he tried to survey everywhere at once with each slight movement he detected. Now the silence was even more unnerving than the owl calls of Maura and Larobe. That is when Maura struck with a shrill howl that froze the raider in his tracks as he dug a ten-inch steel blade into his rib cage. Now as Maura removed his knife from the raider’s chest, the deed he had just done found its way uneasily into his conscience. He had done what he never knew he could: to kill up close was very different from firing a rifle or an arrow from a distance but he had done what had to be done and he told himself that this was the way of war. Now as he made his way back to Larobe he noticed that the rain had stopped and the skies were beginning to clear and he reflected on his action as they carefully

made their way back to the village. However the sun was shining now and showing the gruesome results of war, but the clean-up had already begun and he had no time to dwell on his feat. While a gravesite was being scouted for the villagers by some, others gathered the bodies of the raiders for a mass grave; still others went back to their gathering of the articles which had been tossed by the storm and they now also collected the weapons and belongings of the raiders. However although the Tulegs also collected the supplies of the raiders, they buried the blankets in the mass grave with the raiders ing the stories the old ones told of how whole villages were wiped out when the whites gave them gifts of diseased blankets. The villagers only lost eleven of their own including the four sentries who were surprised by the raiders, while they had killed all the raiders, about thirty five in all. Ten of the Tulegs had been shot including the sentries and another elder had suffocated when one of those who was shot fell into the fortress on top of him but not one of the raiders was alive. Tannay and some of the others found a suitable place for the burial and they were now taking the dead villagers away. They would bury them in a cave amongst a clump of trees where the whites were not likely to disturb them. However, no matter how careful they were in cleaning the village of this battle and their inhabitance of it, they were sure that the whites would find the grave of the raiders sooner or later. Therefore this process would be done quickly and they would make other plans right away and leave this part of the land.

CHAPTER XXVII

Old Ben

M aybelle ran through the house screaming. “O Lawdy, Lawdy, Liza don gone!” Miz McCabe, Liza ain’t here, she done gone!” “What in the world are you screaming about gal?” Mrs. McCabe screamed back at her when she met her in the upstairs hallway. “Well,” Maybelle said breathlessly. “When I opened up the back door this morning and seen her, I thought she was looking mighty poorly. So, I started out to see and Lawd have mercy, Liza ain’t there. Just some old clothes stuffed wit straw and Liza ain’t there, shon nuff, Miz McCabe, just some old rags and straw.” “You just hush now, and calm down, we’ll see what happened just you run down to Mr. Watson’s cabin and tell him to come here immediately. You think you can do that can’t you?” Miz McCabe asked coarsely. “Yessum I sho kin.” Maybelle answered her as she starting backing away and then turned and hurried down the stairs. Watson was the new foreman at the ranch since the judge and Sam were dead. After seeing Mrs. McCabe, he walked down to the shack once occupied by Bob and Liza, where George the new captive overseer now slept. “George!” He called as he banged on the door. “You get your black ass out here and gather all them niggers up right out heah right now, y’heah.” “Yessuh, George called. “I’m coming right now.” George hurried out shoeless and shirtless, he was every bit as large as Bob and he went directly to work banging on the doors of the others captives. “Alright, you niggers better get out here right now; Massa Watson wants everybody right now!”

Right away the yard began to fill with captives in various stages of dress. Today was Sunday and Mrs. McCabe had taken to letting the slaves have the first few hours of daylight off on Sunday in order that they might pray to Jesus that He may make their lives more useful. When they were all assembled including Old Ben, Watson took a count and Liza was the only one missing. “Well, I’m telling you niggers,” he said after the count. That Liza has left heah. Now I know she was touched in the head, and she was treated real bad. So, I kin kinda see why she run! But the rest of you niggers better listen cause if you helped her, I’m gonna let you know right now, there will be hell to pay.” He continued. “Now Miz McCabe lets you niggers have a few hours off on Sunday. Now that treating you real good, almost like you wuz folks. But now this heah Liza don run, she just might take away that privilege.” By this time, the rest of the white guards had arrived, seven of them and all carried rifles. “Now you niggers go ahead and get ready to work now. You don already used up your hour.” Watson called. Old Ben started limping back toward his shack, but Watson stopped him. “You, old nigger, c’mere!” He shouted. Old Ben shuffled over and stopped just in front of him. “Yassah,” he said. “What do you know about this heah Liza, I seen you talking to her.” Watson said in his gruffest voice. “Old Ben removed the beat up hat from his balding head and held it in his hand across his heart and gave Watson his most earnest look. “Nawsuh, I don’t know nothing bout no nigger running suh, I learned my lesson a long time ago when Massa cut off my foot. I sho aint gon have nothing to do with no running nigger.” “I tell you boy,” He scowled at Ben. “If I finds that you had anything to do wit this heah, we gon cut the other half of your foot off.” “Nawsuh,” old Ben said pitifully with his head bowed and his hat still over his chest. “Old Ben sho wants his half of foot suh, I was dead asleep all night. Don’t know nothing bout Liza. I just feeds her and say hi, that’s all. Old Ben sho aint gon help no nigger run.”

Watson seemed satisfied with this, but he issued one last warning, “Just like I said, it gon be hell to pay boy, if any of yall helping some nigger run.” He then started toward the big house. Old Ben turned and limped away. It didn’t matter that he had grinned and played meek and afraid; it didn’t matter that the others might lose a few hours privilege, and he would even give up his foot if it would help someone to escape. He was happy; two more captives were on their way to freedom. Yeah, he would tend the gardens and cut the wood and perform whatever task he was told to do, and play the shuffling lazy good for nothing nigger, but tonight, he would smoke his pipe and drink his homemade wine. It was his celebration for another job well done. When Watson returned to the big house, Mrs. McCabe decided not to send anyone to look for Liza. “The crazy thing probably ran off into the swamp and got eaten by a gator or panther,” She said. Then she thought and asked. “But how did she make that dummy and break that chain, just how crazy was she? Then she brushed it off. “Ain’t no use going after her It don’t matter, she was no use anyway and tetched in the head. The only purpose she served was to show the others what happens when your man, runs.” However she would still suspect Old Ben until it was learned later that Moses had been down on the Cunningham farm and made off with a wench. “Well, these things happen from time to time.” She sighed.

CHAPTER XXVIII

Westward Trek

W hat loomed ahead for the runaways and their rescuers was an odious task. They now knew that they must vacate this area; not just the immediate area, but that they must move miles away or stay and be killed or live as Tannay had suggested. After much consideration, they broke up into separate groups and headed in several directions. Most of the elderly and families went north because they had heard that there was more peace there between the whites and natives, but those who were still preparing for war went west and south. Some went west then south, some went to the sea in order to travel south, but the runaways along with Mnekke and five other warriors journeyed west. These were not easy journeys. As they traveled days turned to weeks and weeks to months while they crossed mountains, forests and streams all with one purpose in mind: to with others of their kind in order to rid their land of this bane of pale men. They first headed north with the elderly and families then veered due west in order to confuse anyone who might trail them. The nine travelers took two horses packed with their belongings which consisted of extra clothes, a few cooking utensils, food, weapons and ammunition, and of course, Glory’s books. They kept to the untraveled paths except when it was impossible to cross a mountain or stream that way and they also stayed clear of all towns and villages and when they camped and they posted sentries. But the terrain changed as they traveled farther west. When they were in the mountains, the forest was thick with trees and saplings and it was easy to hide, but as they came down the other side into the flatter areas, there were many sparsely grown areas, and it became harder to keep out of sight. They were even spotted once or twice by some families or others, but no one tried to capture them or run them down: either because it was too many of them or not enough of the others. Once they came upon a band of Mohawks who were relocating as they were and

for the same reasons and they decided to travel together but to remain in two groups because they figured that two small groups would attract less attention than one large one. Therefore the two stayed separated by about a quarter mile but with the drum they could warn each other. After many days of crossings swamps, mountains, plains and streams, their eyes beheld the great divide: a river so wide that they could barely see the other side. But on that other side lived many warriors: the Arapaho, the Shoshone, the Cherokowa, the Pawnee, the Comanche, the Cheyenne, the Sioux and Lakota. Also there were many other of their brethren here such as the Blackfoot, the Ute, the Pueblo, and the Hopi. There were also Cherokee, Mohawks and others who had been forced here on death marches and there were even Tulegs. Then to the south there were the Maya, the Aztecs the Mexicali, the Apolonese, the Incas, the Waharisi and others. Therefore here, in the west and south, they thought there would be enough force to cleanse the land of this pale curse but first they had to cross this great river. What the Tulegs did not know was that the whites had overrun and conquered many in the west and south; these natives also had welcomed the whites with open arms and had been betrayed. The Maya, Aztec, Incas and Mexcali were almost completely annihilated. They too had been victims of diseases wrapped in gift blankets. In the north in addition to the sicknesses, the Northern tribes’ bison had been slaughtered in order to starve them. Furthermore many men, women and children had been massacred or captured while warriors and hunters were away from the villages; and many children were sent miles away from their homes to go to Indian school. And although many warriors here were living just as Tannay had suggested, there were many who were restricted to only a certain portion of the land on so-called reservations. However since the south was the warmest and richest land it had been settled earliest and many of the natives in the south had been dominated so long that they now claimed kin to the pale ones. Consequently many of them here only had a faint notion of their true history and culture and many believe that the whites are really their ancestors; however the Waharisi could not be fooled. However other whole cultures and civilizations have been devastated for the precious metals they contained, and sometimes whole populations of an area were murdered. The gold and other gems and beautiful women were what the whites craved and their carnage reached from sea to sea, and from warm climes

in the tropics to the tip of the land in the south. Now the two groups came together. It would take much resolve to cross this river. “I think we should camp here but a little way into the forest and start to build vessels to cross the river,” Mnekke said. “I agree,” answered Aurora who was part of the second group. The two groups now worked together and built rafts because they would take less time to construct. They fell some trees and gathered other logs and used ropes to bind them; they also used the smaller logs to tie the larger ones through holes that they bored with knives. They built four rafts with two bigger than the others and they fashioned long poles and oars to propel them on the river. Maura, Mnekke, and three of the other warriors manned the first raft and they tied a rope to a strong tree and pushed off into the murky water with long poles. The water near the bank was rather calm but as they paid out the rope and drifted farther out in the river, the current became rough and the river deeper. They then drove two of the poles into the river bottom and secured the line from the tree to these poles and raft to keep the raft from drifting away. When they had made all the progress they could and the raft was rocking upon the choppy water the second raft was then fastened to the anchored poles and they helped to hold the first raft from drifting further downstream. The crew had also fashioned oars and now that the river was too deep for the poles, they tried to use the oars but this only took them a short way before they begin to drift downstream. They had thought that they would be able to go farther but they had underestimated the current. Another decision had to be made now: would they return to shore to fashion a different type of vessel or would one of them try to swim the rest of the way. “I will swim the rest of the way,” one of the other warriors spoke up. “The current is awfully strong,” Mnekke said. “If you find that it is too strong we will haul you back. But if you do make it to the other side, find a strong tree on which to tie the rope. “I will make it.” The warrior assured them as he dove into the furious river with the rope around his waist.

As he emerged from his dive, he was already being swept downstream. Maura started to tug of the rope but Mnekke stopped him. “Let see if he can gain some progress before we haul him back to the raft.” The warrior struggled with all his might against the river and Maura and Mnekke held the rope very tightly and paid it out very slowly. Finally he started to make just a little progress but the current took that progress after a few strokes. The warrior was still drifting downstream and his progress seemed nil, but as long as Mnekke could see the braids on his head and his arms stroking the water, he paid out the rope. Now the waves were getting larger and the raft rocked haphazardly with the lapping of the water and for a few seconds, the warrior disappeared and Maura started to reel him in. But then they spotted his braids and arms and realized that he was now purposefully ducking his head in order to better propel himself in the water. After what seemed like an eternity with the warrior drifting farther and farther downstream, they began to see his progress. He had made it past the main current and was now swimming toward the bank. Mnekke and Maura let out a sigh of relief when they saw he was going to make it across. Now the work to bring the rest across began. After the first rope was secured, a second rope was carried over using the first rope to guide them across. Now after the ropes were secured the remaining warriors went to work using those ropes to guide the other rafts across. This was done until all the rafts carrying them and their supplies had crossed over, even the horses crossed over on the rafts.

CHAPTER XXIX

Others

J ust as the last raft with horses and supplies was guided across a band of pale men made it down to the bank of the river and fired some shots but their aim was not true and all made it safely across. This determined party now crossed into a new territory; none of them had ever been on this side of the great river and they didn’t know what to expect. As they traveled through mountains and forest farther and farther west, the forest became more scarce as they descended until they came into great fields of grass; some of it as tall as they were and even as tall as the horses. However they always traveled with someone in the lead and another lookout bringing up the rear as the others nudged along between the lookouts, but now they would have to be even more careful because their only cover was grass and they could only see the person behind them not the whole party. Although the humans could easily hide in the tall grass, it was not so with the horses so whenever they came to clearings or shorter grass, they moved quickly and quietly away. After about a day’s journey through the grasses, they spotted some hills on the northern horizon and they decided to head straight for them. The hills would make better cover and protection should they be discovered by the pale ones but still there were much grassy plains to be navigated so they fudged carefully and purposefully ahead on hands and knees. Maura was now at the head of the party because it was his turn to be the forward scout and when he detected movement in the grass ahead he silently signaled with raised hands. Each person then signaled the one behind him to stop. Maura then circled noiselessly on his belly in the grass toward the spot where he had detected movement clutching his dagger in his right hand. He kept his eyes piercingly on that spot. When he closed in he stopped and lay quietly watching

for any movement until suddenly he felt hands and bodies grappling and binding him to the ground and wrenching his weapon away. When Maura could see them he saw that there were three, but he was relieved to see that they were brown men not unlike those he had lived with since his rescue from the pale ones. They did not make a sound but gestured him to be quiet. They stayed low in the grass soundlessly for a while to determine if anyone had detected them. After a few moments they beckoned for him to move as they did on their bellies. Maura started to protest, but with hand signals, they assured him that the rest of his party had also been encountered and that they would all move to another location. When they had proceeded about fifty yards from the place they waited a few minutes before they rose again and made their way through the grass toward the hills. They finally came to some forest just before the hills where there were other brown men and horses and they completed their journey into the hills on mounts. When they had trekked for a few days they came to a village which sat in a small ravine. This village was also hurriedly put together just as the one was which had been destroyed on that stormy day, the shelters were both conical and rectangular and mostly of brown animal skin with very few that had patterns of black or white, and it was hidden by the hills and forest that surrounded it. The newcomers were welcomed and the situation was explained to them by chief Immeintunka or Black Cloud as the pale ones called him. He raised his hand in peace as he stood in front of his tipi which was black and white and brown and a bit larger than the others and spoke to them while they stood before him. “We are Lakota and we are few and on the run here, but we are fighting as we run.” He said. “The Chiricahua, Comanche, Arapaho and Sioux are still many but many of their villages and cities have been annihilated and they too fight on the run as we do, therefore we live from day to day never knowing when we will have to move again. “Many of us have given up and became prisoners on what the pale ones calls reservations but some are on the run but still fighting. There is really nowhere for us to run to, so mostly we run in circles, but we try to keep the pale ones confused as to how many we are.”

He continued. “There have been others such as you who came to us including the Cherokee, Crow, Creek and the Pawnee but there has been much war and our weapons are inferior and we are still outnumbered and all the while more and more pale ones are coming. “They seem to be coming from all sides. They have murdered and plundered in the north, south, east and west. However we are trying to mass together but it seems they have a means of cutting us off from each other so we fight mostly in small bands. “We know they have captured many of our people; and some of our people fight with them, or at least they scout for them telling them of our habits and ways. The empire of the Maya and Incas have been destroyed and plundered many seasons ago. The Pueblo have been murdered and conquered. There is even war in the great frozen lands of the north and we know of the destruction in the east. There is no place in our own land that is safe for us to raise our families, our crops or even to hunt, and the pale ones hunt us as if we are prey. We have a great scourge on our land but we know the Great Spirit will not abandon us so we fight.” He paused then said. “Now tell us why have you come with such a small band?” Mnekke spoke up, “We are also on the run and we came for you to us in this war against the pale ones, but after what we have just heard, we see that it is we who must you in this war.” “You are welcome to us here but we have many obstacles to overcome,” Immeintunka replied. “It is at this time we are trying to figure how to win this war since our weapons are inferior and they outnumber us and have some of our own against us, therefore we must figure a way for us to gain an advantage. We are still appealing to the wisdom of the Great Creating Spirit for help and we will fight as long as we have spirit and breath to fight with, but right now we are changing our tactics but we have not come to the final plan yet.” He then turned to Maura and said, “If you want to stay with us you are welcome but if you want to take a part in this war; I think I know of a better way for you to fight.” “How is that?” Maura asked. “Some of your people live free by themselves and although some fight with the

pale ones, there are those who work among the pale ones but still they are a great information source for us. We have those among us who can write the language and we will provide you with freedom papers, and if you decide to help us while you live among them we will be grateful. We have provided papers for others and have many allies amongst your people; so if you want to have an impact in this war, I suggest that you live by yourselves and listen for any information that might help us.” “This is well,” Maura answered. “Surely I would like to help in this war and I will work with all my effort but I do not speak for this woman and young man.” Then Glory spoke. “I too will do my part to help in this war and I think it is a great idea to live free but not too close to the pale ones, but maybe work among them to garner information. But we have written our own papers of freedom.” She then turned to Larobe and asked, “What do you think?” “I am yet very young,” he answered. “And I am not fully aware of all that has taken place but I do my capture and trip to this land, and I too am already in this war. However I think I can be of more use if I stay here with the Lakota and become a warrior. Therefore, if they will have me, I will stay with this party.” “You all have spoken very well,” Immeintunka replied. “And we will gladly accept another warrior.” Then to Glory and Maura he said. “However I insist that you let us make your papers of freedom so that it will be written by a different hand because I know that the pale ones will scrutinize you greatly. However you may dictate the words but the hand writing should be different from that of your own. Also, we have many of the pale ones tools and utensils that we have acquired and we will help you build a shelter not too far from one of their settlements and we will supply you with food and supplies to get started. “You may stay here with us until you are ready to move and we will tell you what is happening and the kind of information we will need. And , when you go to live free and work among the pale ones, you must never ever give them any hint that you know us. And since we will always be a band on the move, by no means should you try to us unless it is urgent but we will you from time to time to learn what you have learned from the pale

ones.” And then he said to the other warriors, “My brothers you are welcome to live with us but I must warn you, we are a people at war and there is a hierarchy of rules and rulers that must be followed. However if you stay with us, you will be taught the ways of this war, but of course you are free to go on your own, however, regardless of your choice, you must watch out for traitors as well as the pale ones. “Mneeke and the others quickly huddled to talk it over and then Mneeke spoke. “We came west to find our brothers that they may with us in a war against the pale ones. But instead we find you are already fighting this war, therefore we find it both practical and honorable that we should link with you in the war that we came to ask you to us in.” “Then it is settled,” Immeintunka said. “We shall eat and rest and tomorrow shall be a day of learning for all of us: we will teach you our ways and we will also learn from you. There is no time to waste. There are many things that we have to do when we are on the run that we wouldn’t do otherwise. Tomorrow is another day that the creating Spirit sends that we must use in a pleasing and beneficial way.” And then Immeintunka ended with, “Always our strength is our unity”. When the meeting ended the newcomers were shown places among the others. After they ate and then rested, there was still much activity in camp for the people were forever vigilant and the newcomers helped as the men erected teepees just for them.

CHAPTER XXX

Maura And Glory

T he Lakota helped Maura and Glory construct a one room shack situated about two miles from the nearest town in a little grove but within a reasonable distance to the hills. It was only one room of logs and wood with a tin roof and wooden floor set just above the ground on some stones. The back wall was a stone fireplace that they used for cooking. They had lived here for about six months now and had started a small garden but they were getting anxious to get started with their new life of spying. Maura was standing outside about ten or fifteen feet from the shack over a fire heating metal with tongs the Lakota had given him. In fact they gave them the tongs, an anvil, a hammer, horse shoes, and other metal with which to practice his craft and other supplies including two horses. The Lakota had taught him the blacksmith craft and Maura was a quick study. He would try to get a job in the stable so that he would know whenever someone new was in town and also get a chance to inspect the wagons that came through because the Lakota said this knowledge could be helpful in this war. Glory was standing inside tending her cooking by the stone fireplace within the shack and she was talking to Maura through the window which was just a square hole right now which they covered with boards at night. Although this was just a temporary shack, they had decided to put windows all around to use as lookouts. Of course they were quite small–about one square foot. In the six months or so that they had lived here they had seen no one except one of the Lakota who visited them now and then. “Now that we are here, when do we make with the outside world?” Glory asked Maura as she leaned her head in the makeshift window while her food cooked on the stone fireplace they had built in the back wall of the shack.

“I’ve got to get this blacksmith thing down good enough.” Maura answered as he stood outside about ten feet away practicing the black smith work that one of the Lakota had taught him. “You have been at that work since we have been here. When do you think you will be ready?” “Ready or not by tomorrow I think I might go into the settlement to check things out then.” “Well, you had better be careful; you know, you don’t really like being docile too well and we don’t know how these white ones are going to react to us living out here alone.” “Yeah, yeah, I’ll be careful but I’m just hoping that they don’t push me.” “Well, when you do go into the settlement, I think I should go with you and try to find work too.” Glory spoke again. He smiled when she said this because he didn’t really want to leave her alone but he did not know what to expect the first day, so he wished to go alone to check out the attitudes of the whites. Anyway he didn’t plan to be gone long. “I think it is a good idea for you to seek work because four eyes can see more than two and four ears can hear more than two and you will not be far from me, but maybe I should go alone at first to test the mood of the town.” Maura answered. “I don’t think so because you haven’t had much social interaction with the white ones and you may not respond to their liking. But with me by your side, I can maybe guide you or cover some of your mistakes.” She paused and pouted. “Besides I am afraid to stay here alone.” “Yeah, it would have been better if Larobe was here but it was his choice to stay with the Lakota.” Maura answered seeming to get lost in thoughts about Larobe . “So do I go with you or by myself?” Gloria interrupted his musing. This surprised him somewhat but he was not about to let his future wife travel into town among whites alone and he said a little reluctantly. “I suppose it is better to go together, but we must have our story together.”

“You must have it together–I have it already.” She said. “We were set free by Master Simmons when he died. He gave us horses and supplies and told us to head west because he didn’t like the north. He said we would receive better treatment in the west. Our wagon broke down and we lost most of our supplies but we managed to save our horses. When we noticed we were near this town we gathered some boards and logs and built this shack.” “I got it, I got it,” he cut her off; I just wanted to make sure.” Then he continued the story. “We saw a few Indians, we must be sure to call the Tuleg and Lakota Indians when speaking to the whites. They were headed south as far as we could tell. We need supplies and we have a few dollars and we are willing to work for them.” He completed his recital. “Yes, you seem to have it, but we can’t be too careful. We must be certain to say the same thing in case we are separated.” He could only see Glory’s head through the small window; she had been cooking over the fireplace in the back of the shack and it was hot in the shack but to him she looked quite beautiful with a couple of plaits hanging loosely from beneath her white scarf and a few beads of sweat on her forehead and this distracted him. “Hey woman,” he called. “When are we going to become married?” Glory smiled and said. “It will happen in time, I think, but we just started out.” Then she added. “Of course we must tell everybody we are man and wife, but I need to know what we are going to do before I commit myself to a man. I still want to find my mother and I just don’t know what else?” She ended kind of flustered. “But woman, I have been without a woman for a long time. I did not participate in the breeding because I did not want to have a woman just to have her. I want a woman I can hold and say sweet things to and make plans with and you are such a desirable woman I can barely contain myself.” Maura said sweetly with a smile. “You had better contain yourself,” she answered defiantly. “I have been the property of someone for so long and I cherish this freedom. I will not tolerate someone dictating to me. I will never be dominated by anyone ever again!” She finished very adamantly. “But I do not want to dominate you, woman, I only want to adore you,” he said

as pleasantly as he could. “Besides, I am getting older and I want children and I want my children to have a strong mother.” “Hah,” she said. “I am definitely not ready to have children.” She answered with a tinge of anger. “What would I do with children, what would we do when we don’t even know what we are going to do? No!” She said. “We had better learn about this land and people and if we are to be man and wife we will know in due time.” She ended the conversation and went back to her cooking. Maura took the metal from the fire and placed it on the anvil he had set on an upturned log and began to beat it with the hammer. He was very sure he wanted Glory for his wife and he wanted children and he continued talking although she had went back to her cooking. “You always have answers that seem reasonable.” He said. “But we may never really be settled. In fact, I think we will always be on the move one way or the other. We will never have a life where we can just settle down to a family life here unless we defeat the whites, and there are everyday things that you and I must do that may prove dangerous and we may not survive too long, however, with children, our lives will continue when we on.” It was warm in the summer and her cooking only added to the heat but she could still hear him while she stirred her pot and she said rather loudly as she walked back to the hole in the wall and wiped her brow with the back of her hand. “I am not ready for marriage and children, I know you are a good man, but I have never been in a position to make decisions for myself, and now, that I am, I want to make the correct ones.” Maura was growing impatient with Glory’s answers and his frustration was showing in the way he beat the heated metal but he was going to have to try another tactic. He was not very skillful at this courting thing, especially from so close. He ed how back in his village, a woman was already promised to him; all he had to do was come up with the dowry that her family required and so he said to Glory. “Back home you would have already been promised and you would have nothing to say about it.” This angered Glory and she shot back with venom. “Well this is not back home and I am not promised to anyone. The facts are that we are both on the run and we need each other so let’s try to keep that in mind and layoff this marriage talk.”

Maura started to apologize for his remarks then thought better of it. Maybe it was better to let her stay angry for a while; that way, maybe, he could keep his desire for her in check. He continued to pound the metal without saying a word. That night, after they had eaten and each had lain down to rest: she on a feather mattress on one side of the shack and he on the other side on a straw mattress, he felt that Glory was still angry, but he was not going to let a woman’s anger stymie his courting and Maura again started a conversation. “If the war is as awesome as Immeintunka says, then there is a chance that we will never find peace and a chance to settle down; and since you still want to find your mother; that is another reason we will not settle down and a reason for us to stay together. But I am sure we must still go on with our daily tasks although we will be trying to find your mother and spying for the Lakota, but while we do go on, how long am I to wait to have a wife.” “You don’t have to wait at all,” she answered coolly. “If you find someone willing, then by all means, have yourself a wife. But as for me, I am not ready to be anyone’s wife.” She paused letting her words sink in and then added. “Now I think we should talk about what we shall do tomorrow when we go into the settlement. You know this is our first venture into the white ones way of life on our own and we must be very careful how we act and what we say.” Maura sensed that this was Glory’s final words on marriage for a while, and though he did not want to, he decided to give it a rest for now; and she was right: they should concentrate on tomorrow. “I think we should go to a general supply station and try to get ordinary supplies and food. And maybe we could ask if help is needed. But I surely hope that there is work available in the stable.” He said changing the subject. “That sounds good and you do have the story together, but I am really worried about you interacting with the white ones. According to the judge, you never showed the proper respect for whites.” She laughed slightly when she said this. “I think I can handle it.” He answered not smiling. “Now that I am free my continued freedom depends on it. Back then I was already denied my freedom so sometimes I was not the good old nigger.” “Still,” she said. “We must be very careful and show humbleness to begin with. You know you just can’t go in there ready to kill up everyone; we are sure to be

out numbered.” Glory was very worried that Maura would do something to cause the white ones to be upset and she said now to appease him. “Maybe after we have been around for a while and they get used to us, things will be different.” “I know, I know,” he said hurriedly and agitated. “But there is just so much a man can take and …” “Listen to yourself!” She cut him off. “Why do you think old Ben risked his life for us? So you could go and get us killed the first chance you get. No, no, no, we must think of old Ben and others like him. There must be others on other farms. We must remain free long enough to find out some things; long enough to meet others; long enough to have a chance in this war.” Maura heard her and he knew, once again, she was right but he didn’t say anything and they both drifted off to sleep.

CHAPTER XXXI

Jadur

T hat white hot ball hung over her head, or was it a cold ball of ice: whichever, it followed her and she tried to which. It seemed that when she started out it was a brilliant hot white ball, but now, she had been out here so long she didn’t know if the sun was hot or cold. She tried to how she got here, and all she could see all around her were men, women and children walking, stumbling, falling and being dragged and that white ball over her head and she could not recall anything but the present. But she refused to fall by the wayside because she saw those who did and were scalped for the bounty their hair would bring. After that, they lay there with flies and insects covering the wounds on their head where their hair and skin had been ripped from their skulls. Her feet hurt and she had running sores on her arms legs and torso, but still she walked and walked on and on under that white ball until nightfall when she was allowed to rest and eat whatever she had access to, or if she could make it over to the campfire she would be served some of the swill that the captors prepared for them. Jadur had been on this trail for so long that she had forgotten that when she left Black Bob in the swamp she had set out to find Glory after learning that she had not been killed. When Bob told her of how the hunting party had been killed she knew that it was the natives who had saved her daughter and so she left the swamps heading in the direction from which he had come. At first she avoided all with any humans but she soon realized that she would have to make herself known if she was to learn anything about her daughter Keeping to the forest, she still avoided whites but now she purposely looked for natives. As she ed through the forest she sometimes came across trails which she would follow for a while and then move back to the untraveled routes where

there were more scrubs and wild vines because if she were to meet someone she wanted to see them before they saw her. It was beginning to be dark and she had not seen a soul so she decided to rest for a while and this is when she had her first encounter. It came when two young men approached her while she rested on the forest floor with her back against a thick and sturdy tree. At first she was startled but their demeanor was not threatening and so she tried to communicate with them. She pointed to herself and said. “I am Jadur. I am alone. I mean you no harm.” She spoke slowly. “I am Sonar and this is Hotep. We have been following you. Why are you in the forest alone?” One of the young men answered in English. Jadur was relieved that he spoke English and she relaxed before she said. “I am searching for my daughter. She and a man and a child were traveling in the forest when they were overtaken by whites but they were rescued by some of your people.” “We have not seen them but we have seen evidence that the whites have been here. In fact the pale ones have been through much of this part of the forest. They have come with guns and soldiers. They are seizing all people of the villages and taking them away. Maybe, your daughter has been captured by them.” The other young man said. “What do you mean, seizing people, what is happening,” Jadur asked nervously? “As far as we can tell,” Sonar said. “The whites have come and are destroying villages. They are murdering the men and elderly, and are capturing the women and children. We have seen burned out villages and the dead with their hair peeled from their head left lying about for scavengers to devour.” “And they are taking the survivors away to a central camp,” added Hotep. “Have you seen this camp? Are there Africans and other people there besides your people?” She asked. “We have seen this camp,” Hotep spoke up. “There are others there but I do not know if your daughter is there.”

“Where is this camp?” Jadur asked intently now. “How do I get there?” “The camp is to the west. It lies in a flat valley at the base of those far hills. There is a river that runs nearby. You must change your direction and head that way. Sonar said pointing west. “But,” added Hotep, “be forewarned. There is much cruel treatment there for the captured, for we have seen and smelled much death there.” Jadur thanked the two men and after resting and eating with them, she started out in the direction that they instructed but she did not know what to expect, but her intent was to find her daughter. During her travel through the forest, she had only encountered these two, and from their stories, she was not likely to meet many more people unless it was the army of white raiders who seemed to be on a mission to rid this land of it natural human inhabitants. Now, Jadur was even more careful as she traveled through the forest, however she decided to represent herself as native if she encountered any whites. She thought it more dangerous as a Cushnite than one of the brown natives if she was captured so she decided to disguise herself as one of the natives and although her skin was darker than most of the natives, her long silken hair would lend to this disguise. She also rubbed red clay onto her face and tied a band of cloth around her plaits. She reasoned that if she was discovered by whites, she would more likely be carried to the camp if they thought she was a native; whereas, if they thought she was a Cushnite, they might sell her off to one of the farms. As she made her way toward the valley, she prayed to Vishnu that her daughter would be all right, and she also prayed for the others who had saved her daughter. She then asked Vishnu for insight and strength so that she may recognize danger and sustain herself. She bore her way through thick forest with thorns tearing at her long-sleeved cotton dress and skin; she crossed small and not so small streams and as she fought her way through one particular thick clump of vegetation, she came upon a village being annihilated by the white raiders. She hid herself in a thicket of wild blackberry plants, and with the thorns pricking her face, her blood mixed with the sweat running down her cheeks into her mouth and she tasted her own

blood as she watched the horrible scene unfold before her. She saw the pale men riding on horses shooting indiscriminately; she saw small children, women and men, both elderly and young, being trampled as they fell to the ground from their gunshot wounds. Shelters were set afire and children, women and the elderly ran from these shelters with their clothing ablaze and welcomed the gunfire that would put them out of their fiery misery. The men tried to fight back but they were overwhelmed by the number of pale ones and by the superiority of their weapons and so the massacre raged on an on until there were only a few women and children left alive among the bleeding and burning and dying bodies that lay strewn about the village. These were quickly tied about their waists and hands with ropes behind the pale ones horses, and led from the scene bleeding, whimpering and moaning. Jadur crouched in the thicket; she now also tasted her tears which mixed with her sweat and blood. She wanted to cry out at this atrocity. She wanted to wail. She wanted to flail herself in hopes that she could somehow ease the pain of those she had just witnessed being slaughtered. She wanted to cry out to her Lord and ask why. She did none of these things; but remained with her face buried in her hands tasting the salty bitterness of her blood, sweat and tears, until she lost consciousness. And when she raised her head and started into the village she had become a young girl in India, and this was a story that her grandmother had told her. She was now inside that story and she wandered in that village among the dead until she found an elderly woman who looked as if she was sleeping and sat down beside her and lay her head in her lap and slept. When she awoke, Jadur surveyed the carnage about her and was overwhelmed and she ran from the village haphazardly, stumbling and falling over bodies and picking herself up and continuing to run. She ran and ran until she ed Black Bob and she abruptly stopped; she knew she was getting close to insanity because she had witnessed it in Black Bob. She then fell forward and buried her face in the earth and prayed. But her prayer was full of thanks and praise because she was grateful that Vishnu had allowed her to become a child and sent the old lady to cradle her head. She ed laying her head in the old lady’s lap and knew that Vishnu, who

is everywhere, was even in that old massacred woman and had held her head and helped her to sleep. She then got her bearing together again and started toward the place where the sun sets. She was careful not to the village again, for she did not know if she could withstand another encounter with such carnage. She came upon the white’s camp after about five days of tromping through the forest, hiding from raiders, and escaping from wild animals. But even after experiencing the raid of the native village, she was not prepared for what she saw: What she saw was emaciated bodies of women and children locked into pens like hogs in mud. The pens were of barbed wire and there were many cuts and scrapes upon the feeble bodies. Others were tied to poles or trees; some were being lashed with whips while others had ropes around their necks so tight that they were gasping for breath. Pregnant women were hung from trees by their arms as their babies were sliced from their wombs. All the while others were being dragged and beaten into camp. The armed whites, who were many, seemed to be enjoying their situation, and Jadur could hear their loud guffaws of laughter amidst the whimpers and moans of the captured. While she was totally engrossed and repulsed by the scene before her, she felt a hard thud to the back of her head and she fell forward as the scene faded from her mind. When she awoke, she was inside one of the pens. She was lying in the mud, drenched from her hair all the way through her clothes to her bare feet. There were many others, mostly children, from just past infancy to just about puberty, all standing and trampling over her trying to reach, for someone, anyone through the barbed wire, which pierced their gaunt arms. As they moved about some tripped but they got right up still reaching out to the outside. This was truly a pit of cruel insane savagery and Jadur knew as soon as she awakened that she must not give in to it. Eventually, the camp moved and all the captured who were not killed or had not died were forced to tramp from this camp. After many days of walking and seeing women and children fall by the wayside and their hair mercilessly removed from their now skinless skulls, Jadur had reached a stage of not knowing or ing anything. She just put one foot in front of the other until nightfall and then rest. And at sunrise she marched, not knowing where she was going, not knowing why, but knowing she had to keep

alive. And so she walked; her purpose forgotten except for keeping alive as this profane caravan inched across the country, leaving behind a trail of blood, tears, death, depravity and decadence that could not be cleansed by the torrential rains that sometimes fell upon them giving a bit of relief to the captives.

CHAPTER XXXII

The Journey

A s they began to now pace through the swamp, Moses continued talking. “The oil I gave you is for the dogs too in case someone gets on our trail, besides deterring animals it will change your body odor and I hope it will render the dogs useless. That why I had you to leave the clothes at the swamp, in case they follow you from the farm, the dogs will lead them there and that will buy us some time. The black clothes are because we will travel at night until we reach the others who are going to help us. “This will be a long hard journey and I don’t intend to be caught and I am not going to let any of you put this party in danger. As long as you are clear on these points we should be able to get along without me using this pistol. If you have any questions ask them while we are moving. I am shutting up now because we must keep going.” There were not many questions for Moses as these four made their way in a northeasterly path. Mandy, whose husband had ran two years ago and promised that he would come back for her, was elated to be going to him and this mostly filled her thoughts. Bob and Liza had much to say to each other and the more Liza told of her ordeal, the more Bob apologized. And the more Bob told of his sojourn the more Liza sympathized. And so it went with them both following Moses and Mandy. They trekked through forests and swamps and through hills and valleys and after some days there were always prearranged places to spend the daylight hours: in somebody’s hayloft, in cellars which no one knew about, and in cave and caverns. Many times there was food and clothing stashed in these hideouts. Each time they changed clothes they rubbed themselves in the oil provided by Moses and left their old clothing behind to be disposed of by others. Once or twice during the night they thought they heard the sound of dogs barking but it was probably just someone hunting raccoons or opossums so they continued to

journey in the darkness. Moses knew everywhere to go and at the precise time. When they neared travelers at night, she sensed it before they came too close and they hid well in advance. When there would be trouble in a certain place, she knew beforehand and avoided it. It was as if she could see ahead what was in store for them. Therefore their travel was made easier for all these things that she foresaw. But little did the others know that there were many helpers along this way and they left signs and messages for Moses but Moses saw no need to let on to the others at this time about the helpers who forewarned her. After a while the captives also began to meet these helpers and they learned that there were many people, even white ones, who were pleased to help them. When they now stayed in cellars and haylofts the helpers made sure they were not discovered. Once, some field hands staged a fight so that they could unnoticed. However, Moses warned them that soon they would come to places where they would have to depend on their own resourcefulness: these places she named as Hangers Town, Chester and Philadelphia where there would be many slave-catchers. As they reposed in a hayloft one night Moses said to them, “Hangers Town is in a place called Maryland and the slave hunters there are notorious for hanging runaways. That’s how it got its name. Not too much farther up the trail is a place called Chester, it is in Pennsylvania, and there are many bounty hunters there by the name of Cannons. They do not hang captives because they are interested in the money they receive for turning them in but they will beat you until you are near your last breath. Also a while further is a place called Philadelphia; it is a large city in Pennsylvania; and although we have many friends there, there are also many bounty hunters.” She continued. “You must not trust anyone unless I say so. This is true of both coloreds and whites. Many of them will turn you in and even though slavery is no more there, they will still hold you until the Cannons or others come to take you away.” With these warnings, these four now embarked on the most perilous part of their journey because now they would have to travel in daylight; sometimes in plain view.

CHAPTER XXXIII

Maura & Glory

“I don’t know …, I don’t know?” Maura said thinking aloud. “This interacting with whites on my own might present a problem. I mean, what do they think; they can just say anything to us and we just say yes suh. A man can’t live like this.” Maura and Glory were back at the shack now sitting across from each other on their makeshift beds; getting a job had been a real ordeal and quite upsetting to him. Glory tried to calm him down by speaking soothingly; she knew how it felt to be humiliated. In fact she had suffered the ultimate humiliation over and over for years at the hands of a white man. “That’s the way it is, Maura; they are not going to respect us as people. We have to keep our purpose in mind and realize there are certain things we have to do until we can reach our ultimate goal.” “Yeah, I understand that, but it’s a matter of how much degrading can I take before I’m at my limit. I know we want to reach our goals of finding your mother, going back to Cush, and running the captors from this land and it is all that I think about to keep me humble, but just hearing stuff like, where you from boy, whose nigger was you and what can a nigger like you do, or let’s take a look at your nigger wench; it drives me to want to grab his fat neck and choke until the words come spilling from his mouth and fall to the floor where I can stomp on them, never to hear them again.” Maura answered, still very upset. “I know, I know,” Glory reassured him. “But what are we going to do? If you lose control and do violence to one of them, the whole settlement will come after us and will surely kill you and maybe me too. Then what good would that do?” She continued and asked. “When we were on the farm, they called you names and did things to you; how did you manage then?” “Back on the farm there were always armed guards and I was chained at first. But later, when I was not chained, they mostly only spoke to me to tell me to do

something, and my own mind was set on getting away so I only heard what they told me to do not the insults. I also knew the armed guards were right there, so I managed even though I felt the lash sometimes.” Maura said calming down somewhat. “Well that’s what you have to do here. Just hear what they tell you to do. Don’t hear the other. Don’t you see that we still have to get away?” She pleaded. “What you say is well and good, but now that I am on my own, I don’t have chains on me. There are no armed guards and my mind reacts to things differently.” He said. “Oh, the armed guards and chains are still there.” She answered. “Every one of those whites who you see watching us are guards, and the chains are there–the chains are in our mind. The guards are waiting for us to do something which threatens them but because your mind is free, it wants to scream out at the indignities heaped upon us, but somewhere in there, there is that part which knows before it lashes out; it had better check the circumstances. It has to check the place it is in. It has to check who and how many are present, and it has to check our self to see if we have the means to back up what we say. Oh yes, brother,” she said ionately. “The guards and chains are there, we just have to adjust to a different kind of guard and chain.” Then she tried to change his mood somewhat. “But maybe when we start work, things will get better. They might get to know us; things might work themselves out and their insults and criticism might dissipate. Anyway I see you still have the old dialect in tack. For a minute I thought we were back on the farm.” She laughed to try to mellow his mood. Maura noticed this smile and realized he had not seen her smile for a while. He answered her ignoring her remark about his slave talk. “I truly hope so,” he said, “but I wanted to work in the stables, but that old …” Glory cut him off. “Boss Madison,” she said, “You got to get used to calling him that.” “Yeah, alright, okay.” Maura said but he refused to say Boss Madison unless he was talking directly to him or to one of the other whites. He was also told he must address all the whites who came into the saloon or hotel as Mister or Miss. And then he continued incredulously. “He said I got to work myself up to the

stables. I got to start out in the saloon–sweeping, cleaning, washing dishes, emptying slop buckets—or anything else he or Madison orders me to do to prove I want to work and is not just a lazy nigger. “If I could get to the stables, I could be alone and I wouldn’t have to put up with their constant insults and commands.” He paused again looked at her and then added sincerely. “I’m going to try to get through this; I will ask Romokoko for the strength.” Glory had not heard him invoke his Deity for a while but she knew he was having trouble coping with the situation and she knew she would have to help him through this. That morning had started out just fine as they had only saddled one of the horses because they did not want to appear too “uppity” when they went into town, Glory said. They both rode sometimes and they both walked sometimes, but when they came to the settlement Glory was on the horse and Maura was walking, leading the horse. The settlement was only one street laid out in a flat dusty part of the valley. The street was rather wide–enough for two wagons to each other with plenty space in between and there was enough space to drive a wagon between each building. There was a saloon–hotel right in the center which was the only building of two stories; there was a general store directly across and the rest of the street was filled with one story buildings with signs that indicated a real estate office, an assayer office, a furniture store that made furniture and coffins. There was also a doctor’s office, a restaurant, a bank, a gun shop, a Chinese laundry and a large rather shabby reddish barn that had a livery sign at the north end of the street. The businesses lined both sides of the dusty street and were built from clapboard lumber; and all were in need of repair and painting and they appeared to be mostly abandoned. There were about ten or twelve one or two room shacks scattered about at the south end of the street–not in any particular order with a few walnut or sycamore trees standing about but the drabness of the treeless main street dominated the town. There were also railings made from logs in front of each of the businesses for tethering the horses and Maura and Glory both noticed that the general store, the

livery and the hotel all bore the name: Madison. They went straight to the merchandise store; tied their horse to the railing and went in and Glory reached for Maura’s hand as they entered. Inside there was a pale woman talking to the clerk behind the counter. They walked waist-high shelves in the floor which were stocked with buckets, pans, shoes, boots, cloth, food, blankets, clothing and other merchandise. There were also shelves behind the counter which were stocked just as the other shelves were. The clerk who was bigger than Maura wore no hat and his brown hair was tousled above his square face. He was dressed in a plaid shirt and rough pants and he said with a snarl. “Well, what do you niggers want?” “We want to get some supplies,” Glory spoke up before Maura could. When Glory said this the pale woman covered her mouth with her hand, mumbled something unintelligible and bolted from the store. The clerk spoke again this time shouting. “Yall just can’t come busting in here running customers away. Who do yall niggers think yall is?” He paused as if he was waiting for an answer. When none was forthcoming, he said more calmy, “Yall niggers ain’t from around here, I know. Where’d yall come from? Come over here and let me see you.” He said beckoning with hand for them to come closer. Glory tugged at Maura’s hand and inched closer to the counter and said. “We have just gotten to this part of the country. We come from back east. Our massa set us free and told us to head west cause yall would treat us better, suh. That’s why we come here.” “Hold on, hold on,” the clerk cut her off then stared at Maura. “Now, what’s wrong with your mouth, boy, your wench always talk fer you?” Glory squeezed Maura’s hand and he mumbled, “no suh.” “Well, speak up then, boy.” Maura reluctantly repeated what Glory had said and added. “We have a little money, suh, and we can do work.” Ignoring Maura’s answer the clerk asked still snarling. “You niggers got papers?

There ain’t no posters on you, is it?” “Naw suh, no posters, suh, and yes suh, we have papers,” Maura said reaching for the papers. “Just you hold on boy, I don’t want to see them, Boss Madison will want to see them.” Then he said slowly to no one in particular. “Mighty strange yall just showing up like this.” Then to them he said rather quickly. “How much money yall got and where’d you git it?” Glory spoke up again. “Massa Simmons gave us money and …” “Hush up wench,” the clerk angrily cut her off. Then to Maura he said harshly. “Boy I don tole you I don want your wench doing all the talking. So speak up, I ain’t gon tell you no mo.” Glory squeezed Maura’s hand again and he finished the story. He told him the whole story about the wagon and their shack they had built. They then bought some supplies such as flour, beans, salt and rope and the clerk also sold them cotton sacks, but when Maura mentioned work, he sent them over to the saloon to see Boss Madison. As they left the store and walked to the horse which they secured most of their supplies on, Glory was still holding Maura’s hand; the clerk followed them to the door and watched as they completed their task of securing their supplies and walked hand in hand down the street. Glory said quietly to Maura as she held his hand. “You are doing fine, but try to relax a little more. I could see and feel the tenseness in you when he insulted you. We have to sell our story and make them believe it.” Maura was fuming too much to speak; he just mumbled something as he walked with some of the supplies in a sack in one hand and Glory’s hand in the other. When they came to the swinging doors at the saloon, they paused, looked at each other and both took a deep breath and went in. There were seven or eight large round tables with wooden ribbed back chairs spaced about the floor. Only one or two of the tables were occupied with two or three dirty looking white men dressed in plaid flannel shirts, rugged pants and brogan shoes; a few wore boots with rather high heels. Straight ahead was a bar with shelves behind it filled with

glasses of different shapes and sizes where eight or nine similar dressed other dirty pale men stood, either holding glasses or drinking from them or with them setting on the bar in front of them. The Bar was about twenty or twenty-five feet long and there was a door behind it. When they first entered, there was a murmur of noise which quickly dwindled when the dirty looking white men saw them. Maura and Glory looked for an opening at the bar and headed straight for it. “Well, what the hell!” The bartender who was tall and slim with disheveled brownish gray hair and was dressed as the others and was just as dirty said. “What do yall think yall is doing, just coming up in here like you own the place? Where do yall think yall is going?” He said in total surprise. Maura spoke first this time. “We wuz over at the store and the man told us to come over here and see massa Madison about work, suh.” “Well I’ll be damn,” the bartender said. “The sonavabitch talks.” They all laughed at this. And then he said, “lissen, boy, you take yo black ass back out that dor, and you take that nigger wench and go round to the back dor like proper niggers, you unnerstand!” He said this while pointing his finger and ri from his stool behind the bar. The others did not laugh this time, but gave Maura and Glory such dirty looks that if looks could kill, they would have died before they took their first steps toward the exit. Maura started to protest but Glory squeezed and tugged at his hand and said. “Yes, suh, massa suh, we sho will,” as she backed away pulling Maura with her. She led Maura from the room almost dragging him. When they were outside, Glory knew that Maura was having a hard time keeping up the facade so she tried to encourage him by speaking positive about his actions instead of telling him what he was doing wrong. She said to him as they began to make their way to the back. “You did real well, but I could feel you getting ready to blow it. Now,” she sighed and took another deep breath. “Now we got to go to the back.” “Yes I’m sure of it but this is getting to be a bit much.” He answered. “But you do know that we have to keep up this act until we know where we are and know something about this place so you can’t just blow it all right away?”

She said with pleading eyes and then asked sweetly. “Are you ready?” Maura stopped and breathed again then said, “Let me stop and get my mind ready for this.” He took another deep breath and looked at Glory and said. “We have to finish this now, don’t we?” “Yes, we do,” she answered still beseechingly. As they went to the door in the back of the saloon they ed stairs which led to the hotel rooms upstairs. They knocked on the door which was slabs of oak held together by other slabs in the shape of a zee. They waited about ten minutes before the bartender came to the door and Glory was glad because she thought the extra time gave Maura time to get ready for the situation. “Yeah, what do you niggers want?” The bartender said as he opened the door. Maura repeated what he had told him inside about the storekeeper sending them to see Madison. The bartender said nothing but gave them one last disgusting look and closed the door. While they waited Maura was becoming frustrated again but he and Glory was alone and she calmed him with her smile and honeycombed voice. In about another ten minutes, the door opened again. This time the one who opened it was a rather short man with a stomach that protruded in front of him. He wore a dark suit with a vest, a white shirt and a thin tie like a shoelace around his fat neck. He wore a dark wide brim hat with a white band above his round fat face which was rather pink and he had no moustache above his top lip which looked to Maura as if he had no lips at all: kind of like the gorillas that he had seen. He was about a foot shorter than Maura but his girth was much greater than Maura’s lean physique. He had a nasty smirk on his face like he was performing a task he did not want to do and he spoke in gruffy twangy voice. “Clem tell me yall is looking for work. Is that why yall come around bothering decent people?” He asked. Maura started to say again about the storekeeper, but Madison cut him off. “Yeah, yeah, I just want to know if you niggers got papers?” He said reaching his fat little hand out. Maura felt inside the front of his shirt and ed him the papers the Lakota had written for them. Madison took them and looked them over. “Well,” he said after a few seconds. “They seem to be all right.” But then he added. “You niggers sure

you ain’t no runaways, is you?” “Naw, suh,” Maura spoke. “Massa Simmons made them papers for us and told us to head west.” “Well I’m gonna have to keep them a few days and …” But Maura cut him off piteously. “I don’t mean to be bold and cut you off, suh, but we need them papers. If someone wuz to come by our shack and we don’t have them, ain’t no telling what they might do, suh. They just might try to take us and sell us or put us in slavery.” Maura knew it was an effrontery to cut off a white man who was talking to you, but he needed those papers as an only chance of staving off any bounty hunters who might come by his shack. “I shon nough beg your pardon suh for speaking up when you wuz talking,” he continued in the humble slave dialect. Madison began to turn red and said rather loudly while raising his hand as if to backhand Maura. “Boy, you is mighty bold cutting off a white man who is talking to you. I got a good mind to teach you some manners right now.” “Please, massa suh, I is so sorry to be so bold but we needs them papers. Why we wouldn’t know what to do.” Maura continued to plead. Madison relented. “All right, boy, you can have the damn papers. Now tell me, what can you do?” “Suh, I is a real good blacksmith, and Massa Simmons said I was good with horses, just like I was one of them.” He had learned very well from Bob. “Boy, we don’t need no blacksmith.” Madison said angrily. He paused then added. “But you are lucky. That fool nigger we had working here at the saloon and hotel went and got his self killed. So if you can sweep, wash dishes, empty slop buckets and serve people, we can use you around here.” “Yes, suh, massa suh. I can do them things.” Maura figured that the saloon and hotel was another center of activity in town, so he would still be in a position to see new people and hear things that might be useful to the Lakota and himself. However he was still untrusting of how he

could handle the treatment he would receive here. He was contemplating these things when he heard Madison say. “Come here wench, let me see what you look like. Open your mouth.” He peered into her mouth while turning her head with his hand. He then said slowly while motioning with his hand in a circular manner. “Lift your skirt and turn around.” Maura almost jumped out of his skin and Glory could feel him tightening. She squeezed his hand and let it go and quickly said to Madison in a lilting manner. “Massa, I can do lots of things. I can cook and clean, I can lift things and I can work in a store.” She said this while smiling and very gracefully pirouetting and lifting her skirt almost to her knees. She was using this masquerade to distract Madison and hoped that he hadn’t noticed the change in Maura’s expression. Madison smiled. He didn’t notice Maura at all. “Well wench,” he said. “I need a maid to work the hotel rooms. If you can make beds and clean rooms and cook, I can use you. Now I ain’t gonna pay you much but you both can eat a meal here each day. Now mind you I said one meal and you niggers will be working under Clem and yall will do whatever he tells you to do.” And then he added almost as an afterthought. “And don’t call me Massa call me Boss Madison.” Before he slammed the door in their faces he added. “Be here at sunrise tomorrow.” He left them standing there with Maura still fuming and Glory reaching for his hand and smiling trying to keep Madison from seeing the change in Maura because his face clearly would have betrayed their pretense because it was that of an angry enraged teeth gnashing warrior. She was glad that Madison had slammed the door without taking a last look at Maura. Maura slowly cooled as they went back to their shack but when they got there he immediately got his guns and went out for practice. Glory thought he was going to head for town at first but he reassured her he was only going to practice. He shot both his pistols and his rifle for only a short while. He knew he should conserve ammunition. Next he started a fire and practiced his blacksmith skills. He finally chilled enough until he was able to return to normal and hold a conversation with Glory. He questioned her about her actions in front of Madison. “Well,” she retorted icily. “If I had not distracted him, he might have taken one

look at you and had us both shot on the spot. Just what is it with you? Don’t you realize that we must keep these people placated? We are in danger here.” She was fuming now. To think he was questioning her motives. She strutted into the shack and started to slam the door but she ed how Madison slammed the door in their faces, and just closed it. Later when he entered the shack, he apologized to her and thanked her for looking out for their well-being when he became distracted. She accepted and as they ate their evening meal, Maura’s mind once again turned amorous. “Well, the one good thing,” he said. “It was awfully nice when you were holding my hand. I could get used to it.” “Well, don’t,” she shot back across the plain small wooden table they, had constructed by nailing boards to a tree stump. They had not made any chairs but used two upturned logs for seats. “I still am not ready to be anyone’s wife.” As she said this, she realized she was softening toward him. She knew he needed help in dealing with his emotions concerning the pale ones and she was the only one who could provide that help. She also knew that he was a purposeful man and had convictions, but she was still not ready to be a wife. “Let’s just rest and get ready to get through that first day at the hotel tomorrow,” she said softly. “After we get adjusted, maybe we can begin to talk about our personal lives.” This was the first time Maura had detected that she was willing to talk about them having a family life together and it made him smile. It was his first smile in a long while. Maybe with a woman to hold after a long day of humiliation, he would deal with his situation a little better. He thought about saying this to her, but decided he had better not. Just be calm and bring up things here and there and maybe she would soon come around. They finished their meal and cleaned their dishes and starting getting ready for bed. He had lain down and was drifting off to sleep when he heard her say. “It’s been a long time since I have heard you calI on Romokoko. Now I’m not nagging,” she assured him. “I just don’t want you to become so filled with hate from the way they treat us, that you forget our purpose.” He heard her words but did not answer but he silently intoned his prayer: “Oh Great Romokoko, my praise cannot begin to describe Your greatness and my thanks are quite humble beside the blessings You have given me but I pray that

You will accept them. And I pray that You will give me strength to accept the insults that are sure to be heaped upon me in the coming days. Help me to keep You and my purpose constantly on my mind and guide me in all situations so that I may act and react in a practical manner. Praising You and thanking You for all Your blessing; Your humble servant.” Glory smiled though she did not hear this prayer. She knew he had heard her and he would pray soundlessly. She then prayed a silent prayer to Vishnu for all the same things; and as always, she prayed for the safety of her mother. She again thought as she drifted to sleep, surely Romokoko was a manifestation of Vishnu.

CHAPTER XXXIV

At Work

T he next morning, both Glory and Maura awoke before sunrise; there was not much banter between them as they hurriedly got ready for their first day on the on the job. They ate cold ho-cakes left over from the previous night meal and were out of the shack in minutes. They still traveled with only one horse. After an hour or so after they started their journey, there came a sudden downpour as they reached the scarcely vegetated terrain that led to the settlement, and their walking became harder and harder as the rain turned the soil to mud as they got closer to the settlement. As they continued their trek through the terrain that now had hardly any vegetation, Glory eventually dismounted and also walked in the mud because it was also becoming more difficult for the horse to walk. They had not been in this arid climate long enough to know this was an unusual occurrence, so they did not place any significance or omens on this storm. Now they walked mostly in silence as the rain whipped their faces and drenched their clothes. The mud was sometimes up to their ankles but still they trudged on. Glory skirt had to be lifted to avoid the mud; she looked at Maura and grinned now and then, but although he thought she looked quite beautiful with the rain streaking down her face and a few strands of hair finding their way from beneath her scarf, he neither smiled nor acknowledged her glance; his mind was on the day ahead. When they finally reached the bar and hotel they were both drenched and a muddy mess but they ed to go to the rear door and knocked and Clem the barkeep answered. “Well if it ain’t the two niggers right on time too.” He said. “Well don’t just stand there, clean that mud offa you and come on in here.” Then smiling a devilish smirk after they had entered he barked. “Now after yall get the mud off yall, I want you boy to start cleaning up this place. Git all of them bottles and glasses offa them tables and bring’m on back here in the back

and wash them. But don’t take too much time cause I want you to come out front and start sweeping the place out. I’ll tell you what else to do as the day goes on, you just be here where I can get you when I want you, you heah that boy?” “Yassuh,” Maura grudgingly answered. “You missy, you gon cook up some breakfast and then on up the stairs and start cleaning out them rooms. Ain’t nobody slept but in a few of them beds but there is plenty dust in all of them. Now that one down at the end is where Boss Madison is sleeping and don’t you go in there, y’heah.” “Yassuh, massa Clem.” Glory answered rather melodiously, she was already working her charm. She never knew when it would be needed and with Maura around she figured she would need all her guile to keep them both alive. Maura was surprised by Glory’s sweetened voice; he was almost gaping at her when he realized Clem was speaking to him again. “Boy there’s a well about fifty feet out back and there’s some buckets ovah there. That’s what you will use to clean them dishes and glasses, then theres a mop and bucket in the shed out back, you gon need that plenty today wit all this heah rain and mud. “Yassuh,” Maura answered again and he finished cleaning the mud from his shoes and set them aside and went back into the mud barefooted, he had already rolled his pant legs, as he slushed his way to the well and shed. The first day on the job for Maura was uneventful except for each time a customer came in he had to stop whatever he was doing in order to clean up the mud that they had tramped in, and he had to empty the slop buckets but not many customers came in. However Maura could hear those that did commenting to Clem about the new nigger Madison had hired and Clem would answer that he had a new wench working upstairs also. Yet although Maura hated cleaning up after each customer, and emptying the slop buckets, the insults was the worse of the job he figured. Glory also came downstairs to cook a midday meal and it was Maura’s job to carry a serving to Stilly who worked in the stable down at the end of the street and was the only other African in town. He hoped this would be a blessing but he was wise to the ways of some Africans who thought themselves inferior and servile to the whites.

He and Stilly didn’t talk much that first day: just exchanged pleasantries and names. Of course Stilly was surprised and pleased that another African was in town and he said so. Maura hurried back to the barroom as he had been told by Clem, but on the way back he noticed a small light skinned man peering through a window from the place with Chinese laundry written above its door. Maura had not seen a Chinese before and he wondered if this could be someone he could talk to also. He was pondering his approach to Stilly and the Chinese as he wandered back into the back door of the barroom. “Boy, where in the hell you been? There’s mud all over that floor over there and them tables is filled with glasses. You got to take that food to Stilly and get yourself back here. You ain’t got time to lollygag boy, you got to earn your keep.” Clem shouted as soon as he was in the back door. “Yassuh, massa Clem suh,” Maura answered hurriedly and he busied himself cleaning the tables and floor. He was thinking to himself that he did not know how long he could keep up this apologetic pretense. Glory’s day was also mostly uneventful. Boss Madison had yelled at her to hurry and clean his room when he arose and she had smiled at him as she hurried past him into the room. During the day she had cleaned about three or four of the dusty rooms and she had reminded Maura to keep up his penitent act when he came to empty the slop buckets and again when he came to deliver the food to Stilly, yet she, herself, was not very relaxed that first day. There were only about four rooms which needed the beds made but as Clem had said: there was plenty of dust and she also cooked. The food she prepared was cabbage and some salted meat and cornbread. This was not a hard job but she did not like the way Clem eyed her when she was in the little kitchen. In fact he could hardly stay out of the kitchen when she was there, however she knew that she must be wary of both Clem and Madison. On the way home just after dark they did not say much to each other, but Maura did tell her about Stilly and the Chinese man. Glory told him about Clem as they both sat astride the horse, she behind him with her arms around his waist. They rode most of the way in silence. When they arrived back at the shack, Maura busied himself starting a fire and Glory prepared some left over beans and bread for them to eat.

“Well what was he like,” she asked speaking of Stilly as they settled around their one board table to eat. Maura was staring into the small fireplace thinking about the ride home with Glory’s arms around his waist and her body pressed against his back. “Huh, oh yeah, well I didn’t say much to him. I figure I better go slowly at first to try to find out what he thinks and knows about this settlement and its people.” “That’s a good approach because we must be very careful who we put our trust in. How about the other man? Do you think you will get a chance to speak to him?” She asked. “I’m not sure but he sure seemed interested in me. Maybe after we have been here for a while we’ll get to know each other. By the way, just how long do you think we shall be here?” Glory thought for a moment. “I don’t know, I figure while we are here we will learn all we can about this land and people, and then maybe when we think we know enough about the land and how to get along among the people, then we can think about stepping out on our own mission. However we did promise the Lakota people we would gather all the information we can about the movement and plans of the whites so we should keep our ears open in the meantime.” “Yeah, I’ll listen to learn all I can about this land and how far we are from the sea. I have heard that there is a sea on both sides of this land and they both can be sailed back to Cush. However,” he quickly added. “I do intend to help you find your mother before we embark on a journey to Cush.” “Well,” Glory said with sarcasm. “I’m glad you did that I also have a mission to complete.” Then she added coyly, “Who is this we you speak of embarking on a journey to Cush?” “I, I, I just thought.” Maura stammered, “We would. I mean if you want to, your mother and you and I …” “There is no need to get flustered.” Glory assured him waving him off. “That time is a long way off right now. Let’s just get some rest and get ready for another day.” With this, they began to prepare their beds. “Don’t you think we should move

our beds closer just in case someone walks in on us and wonders why man and wife sleep so far apart?” Maura asked slyly. “No one is going to walk in on us and we will have plenty of time to talk about this husband and wife thing. Right now we both need rest.” She answered still shyly. Maura then rinsed out the plates they had eaten from and Glory blew out the lamp and they retired each to his own bed.

CHAPTER XXXV

Stilly

T he next few weeks were very much like the first except that it seldom rained; however Stilly had become a talker and Maura a very good listener. One day when Maura was at the stable, he showed him the two pistols he kept hidden in a hole beneath a bale of hay and told him of the knife and pistol he kept hidden in the forest. This was all so new to Maura to have another African trust him after such a short while In time Maura began to take his lunch with him when he went to the stable in order to have more time with Stilly. The two men would meet in the shabby red barn amidst the heady odor of the one or two horses there in the stalls and the dusty smell of the straw which was strewn all around and perch upon bales of hay and set another between them. Stilly reminded Maura very much of Old Ben and Black Bob because he would always look around and lower his voice and lean toward him before he said anything to him. Maura soon picked up this habit and the two would sit and eat, each looking over his shoulder and lowering his voice and leaning whenever they spoke to each other. Stilly was a tall thin dark brown man with gray hair all around the bald spot in the front middle of his head. He did not have a moustache and his eyes were piercing brown. Maura began to look to him as he had some of the elders in his home village. In time Stilly also told him about many of the men who came to town and rode out in a few days; he warned him never to leave Glory alone at the shack. He took his wide brim straw hat with the sweaty band from his head and held it over his heart and lean forward and whispered after looking over his shoulder: “Don’t you never trust nary one of these peckerwoods. Especially them that ride in and out of town. If they catch your woman alone out there, they will surely have their way with her, and may even kill her. So you better never leave her alone even if she is feeling bad cause you never know when they will be coming

to town. “Some of them are the ones that killed George; who is the one who worked the barroom before you came. He had a woman too and they killed her too after having their way with her. So you be real careful what you say and do and keep a good eye on your woman.” Maura thanked him for all of his information and advice and then asked him: “Do you know how far we are from the sea? You see, I want to go there,” He did not tell him why. “Well, I don’t really know, but there is plenty desert between here and the sea so if you travel you will need to know someone who knows more than me about desert travel. Maybe some of the Indians can help you.” Maura had not told him about the Lakota and that he was gathering information for them and that he and Glory were not husband and wife. “Well I better be getting back before old Clem gets upset.” Both men then rose each looking over their shoulder as they bade each other good day. One day when Maura was returning from lunch with Stilly the little light skinned man came outside to greet him. “Hi ya, my name is Yueng Ling, I am pleased to meet you.” He said. “Hi yourself,” Maura answered. “My name is Maura. “He did not bother to use the last name of Simmons. “You please to stop by and eat with me sometime.” Yueng Ling offered bowing slightly at the waist. “Me and my wife, we are very lonely for someone to talk to.” Maura was surprised by the blunt invitation but he answered accepting the offer. “I will ask my wife but I am sure she will accept.” He longed for all the information he could get from any source and he knew nothing about this little man or what this little man knew. Yueng Ling was about five feet five inches tall and was a small built man and his hair was shiny and black and all pulled back with one long plait that hung down the back of his head; his world needed variety also. He and his pregnant wife were the only Chinese in this town of whites and he longed for the company of

others who would not ridicule them. He hadn’t known what else to say to Maura but he was glad he had invited him and that he had accepted. That night Maura told Glory about Stilly and Yueng Ling. “He invited us, I am sure, to eat to eat with him. I don’t know if you think so but I figure we should take him up on it soon, there may be something he can tell us.” “I think you are correct, but are you sure you can trust Stilly? How much have you told him ?” She asked. “I have not told him that we know the Lakotas, and I only gave him the regular story being freed by our master.” He answered. “That is good. But there is something else that is going on with Clem. He is beginning to brush up against me whenever I am in the kitchen. I am afraid he is going to try something soon. I don’t know what I should do?” She confessed to him. “It is not often that you are not sure of yourself,” Maura smiled. “But why don’t you tell him Madison says to back off or that you are promised to Madison or something like that. That should make him stop. He doesn’t seem to be too eager to cross Madison.” “That sounds good, but what if he asks Madison, then what shall I do?” She asked. “I don’t think he will. I’ve been watching those two very closely and it seems that Madison keeps most of his business to himself and a couple of others who come in from time to time and he hardly treats Clem better that he does us. I think he will surely back off because Madison has really got him cowed.” He said, proud that he could answer her dilemma. “Well, I thank you for that information and advice,” Glory smiled at him as she answered. “I see you have been quite busy.” “Still,” said Maura, “I want you to carry a pistol with you always. Maybe I could strap it to your thigh so that it would be completely concealed.” Maura offered.

“Now, there you go getting fresh just when we are serious about something, but I suppose all men all like that,” Glory teased. “But still, I am grateful for the advice, but surely I can conceal the weapon myself.” She laughed. Maura noticed that Glory smiled and laughed more often when they were alone since they had started their jobs and he figured that it was only a matter of time before she agreed to be his wife and he smiled to himself. As he lay there he decided that he would take a pistol for Stilly to hide in the stable and he would carry one strapped beneath his clothes and then he drifted off to sleep. He slept that night with a smile on his face.

CHAPTER XXXVI

Yueng Ling, Deadeye, Pecos &Trouble

O ne day when he was returning from the stable, a sudden storm arose and as he was hurrying to get out of it when Yueng Ling rushed out to him. “Tonight, you not ride home in storm, you stay with us, you eat with us, yes?” He asked. “Yes,” Maura answered as he gazed at the little man with the long plait standing there bowing in the pouring rain. However he knew that it probably would not be raining when he was ready to leave for his shack but he figured it was time that he talked to the little man as he hurried down the street to the barroom. “Boy what the hell were you and that chink gabbing about out thar in that thar rain?” He heard Clem holler as soon and he entered the back door? “Ain’t I don tol you about lollygagging. Hell I might have to tell Boss Madison about you if you don’t mind what I says to you.” “Naw suh, Massa Clem, yall don’t have to tell Boss Madison. He just said he had a leak and wanted to know if I could fix it for him, suh. I didn’t mean to lollygag, naw suh.” He said in his best plantation dialect. “Well, you just don’t have time to go yakking in the street with everyone you meet, you understand that, boy.” Clem scolded him. “Yassuh, I sho do,” Maura answered. “Now you git on in thar and git to gitting that mud up, y’hear,” Clem shouted at him again! Maura figured he had been apologetic enough so he did not answer; he just walked over to the corner and collected the broom and mop and bucket and proceeded into the barroom. The barroom was fuller than usual this day. It was crowded with about fifteen men standing at the bar drinking and most of the

twelve or so tables were also filled with drinkers and gamblers. Madison and his two out-of-town cronies were seated at one of the corner tables and Maura quickly mopped his way close enough to hear their conversation. “Next Tuesday we’ll be hauling six crates of rifles and two cases of dynamite up to Fort Smith,” he heard one of the men say. “You have your men meet us same as before and we’ll blame it on the redskins same as before.” Madison shot a glance toward Maura and he kept right on mopping while backing away from their table never noticing Madison’s look. He was now too far away to hear the conversation, but he eased himself back into earshot by mopping around to the other side of the table. “They’ll be there,” was all he heard Madison say. Maura avoided Madison’s eyes and moved quickly away turning his back on the table of the three men as if he was disinterested in them. Madison looked his way again but was certain that Maura was not listening to their conversation. Suddenly the barroom fell silent and Maura looked up from his mopping to see five Cushnites enter; they were dressed as no other Africans he had seen. The one in front was tall and lean. He was coal black and wore a black patch over his left eye; his hair hung from beneath his dusty hat in matted locks and he wore two guns holstered around his waist and carried a rifle in his hand across his body. Maura could not tell the color of their clothes because they were covered with dust but they all wore two pistols holstered around their waists. The one with the patch also carried bulging saddle bags straddled across his shoulder. These men strutted over to the bar and the whites at that end fell over each other getting out of their way. No sooner than Clem had set up bottles and glasses in front of them, then six others burst through the swinging doors. These men were led by a man of lighter skin whose clothes were immaculate although his companions were just as dusty as the others. He wore a vest of brown and white fur and a spotless white wide brim hat, brown leather chaps over brown pants and highly decorated cowboy boots with colored patterns. All these men also wore two guns holstered around their waist. They swaggered to the opposite end of the bar where those whites who were standing there also fumbled their glasses and bottles getting out of their way. Clem speedily made his way to this end to set them up too.

None of the whites had made a sound since these men had arrived and Maura stood leaning on his mop with his mouth gaping. He had never seen Cushnites so brazen. “Hey Pecos,” called the one with the patch to the one in the white hat. “What did you hear about George?” “I heard some low down stinking peckerwoods killed him and raped and killed his wife. What did you hear Amigo?” He called back. “I heard the same thing, friend. You don’t reckon one of these sorry sons of bitches did it now, do you?” The one with the patch said. “Naw, not these bastards, they look as if they would piss all over themselves at the sight of blood or pussy.” Pecos answered. All the Africans laughed loudly at this exchange. Maura continued to gape at these men who continued their conversation in the hope that some of the whites would confront them but all the whites remained frozen and silent. The men finished their drinks and the ones with the one with the patch started backing toward the door. “Hey, Deadeye, what you got in those bags?” Pecos yelled. “Three heads and two hearts,” Deadeye yelled back. “The last peckerwood I killed didn’t have no heart.” He continued laughing. “I’m gonna eat these hearts, you want these heads?” “Naw, man, I don’t eat no white meat.” Pecos answered. With this they all burst into laughter again and backed out of the door. Maura was still standing dumbfounded when he heard Clem yell. “Boy stop standing over there with your finger up your ass and git over here and clean this mess up. And don’t wash them glasses; just throw them out with the trash.” The whole barroom laughed at this and Madison and his cronies walked over to the swinging door to make sure that the Africans left town. Maura went over to the bar but his gait now seemed to have a bit of swagger in it; he could hardly believe what he had just witnessed. A few more whites drifted over to the doors and looked down the street and then

made their way back to the bar and continued talking but now their conversation was all about the niggers who had just left. After they had all voiced their opinions about what should be done about them, everything was back to normal except Maura: he had heard conversations between Madison’s and his two two cronies; he had talked to Yueng ling and he had witnessed the most remarkable thing he had ever seen in America and it gave him a new sense of pride. Glory had seen none of this; she was upstairs the whole time but Maura really had things to tell her and could hardly wait until it was time for them to leave. He continued to clean the barroom for it was plenty dirty with the storm causing all the mud and extra traffic; however he did not throw out the glasses as Clem had ordered, but put them away to later take home with him. That evening when they had left the hotel and were walking toward the stable Maura spoke first. “Yueng Ling invited us to eat with him tonight and I accepted. I’m sorry I didn’t check with you first but it was raining at the time and I …” “It’s okay,” she cut him off. “I don’t mind. I am very tired tonight there was lots of extra work and cooking with all the people in town.” She then stopped and looked at him bewildered: “Do you know why all the extra people were here?” “I heard that there is a cattle drive ing about three miles south of town, I suppose many of them came into town from there.” Maura answered, and then he said: “I’ll stop in and let Stilly know that we will be picking up the horse later on and then we’ll stop in at Yueng Ling’s place.” Maura said as he continued in his habit of looking over his shoulder whenever he spoke. They continued to walk down the muddy street. The rain had stopped but the mud in the street was especially deep because of all the extra traffic in town. They came to the stable and Maura went in and spoke to Stilly while Glory waited outside. It was for sure that Clem was watching as Maura and Glory was very aware of his spying every evening when they walked to the stable to get their horse. When Maura came out of the stable he could see Clem still spying them and he spoke to Glory again. “When we get to Yueng Ling’s place, I must go to the back of the place first because Clem saw us speaking today and I told him it was a leak in the roof that we were discussing.” As they walked back down the street, Glory thought she detected more bounce in

Maura’s step and his head seemed to be held higher although he still leaned toward her and peered around whenever he spoke to her. However she didn’t want his pride to get in the way of their mission and she spoke to him: “Did something happen else today? You seem as if you are bubbling over with something?” She asked. Maura immediately looked around and onished her to lower her voice with his look then said in a very low voice. “I shall tell you about it later when we are out of the street.” They walked the rest of the short way to Yueng Ling’s in silence. When they arrived, Glory started cleaning the mud from her ankle high boots while Maura knocked at the door. It wasn’t long before the little Chinese man was opening it. “Ah good evening,” he beamed, the smile on his face stretching from cheek to cheek. “Please to come in, come in,” he bowed and motioned with one hand while the other was held at his waist. “Just a minute,” Maura said. “We need to clean the mud from our boots and I will to look at your roof.” Yueng Ling looked askance at this suggestion and Maura explained his reason. He then went around to the back of the store. When Glory had finished cleaning her boots, Yueng Ling asked her to shed them and after she had done so, he led her through the front of his store. After they ed the counter which ran the distance of the room except for a small opening at one end, they walked through a maze of ironing tables containing laundry in various stages until they came to a small kitchen. He closed the door which led to the store and unbolted the back door and then introduced his wife who was obviously pregnant and sitting at a small table. “This is my wife Kaaye Ling, we are expecting our first child,” he said. His face still beaming. Glory spoke first. “Hi I’m Glory, I am very pleased to meet you, then she added. “You are so very beautiful.” “Oh thank you very much. You are most kind and also beautiful,” Kaaye Ling offered standing and bowing. She was a very small woman with a hairdo much like her husband’s. Her face also beamed with a smile and her eyes though small, shone with the spark of the new life which was growing within.

Maura then spoke as he entered through the back door: “I am Maura; I am also pleased to meet you.” “And I you,” Kaaye Ling answered and bowed again. “My husband has spoken of you often.” Yueng Ling then said to Glory. “Please sit down,” he said gesturing with his hand. “We will eat and we will talk. Talk is good.” Maura shed his brogans and he and Glory sat at the small table with Kaaye Ling while Yueng Ling placed their meal of rice and vegetables and thin bread on the table. Plates had already been placed on the table and after Yueng Ling said a prayer the four of them commenced to eat their meal. The food was quite tasty and both Maura and Glory said so. They ate mostly in silence and afterwards Glory and Maura got up to help clear the table. “No, no, Please sit, you are guests. I will clear the table,” Yueng Ling chided them. And then he said. “Please to tell me where you come from?” As he began to clear the table Glory and Maura sort of acknowledged each other with their looks and then Maura related the same story that they had told to Madison. “How do you come to be here?” He asked when he finished. “We come from a place called California but before that we came from China which is across the sea. My family and Kaaye family came to work on a ship. But I did not want to work on the boat. At first, I tried but it was not for me. My father said I should and that I would have no means to a family. Kaaye family said that I could not see her if I did not work on the ship so Kaaye and I leave California. At first her father find her and take her back but we left again. “But each time we leave her father find us so we know we have to go far away. So we catch ride with coaches and wagons until her father no longer find us. So then we drifted from place to place doing different jobs until we came to here. Here we saw doctor’s office and hotel and we saw lots of dirty people in and out of town so we know that they need laundry, so we opened the laundry and that’s why we are here.” Maura listened intently; he had almost forgotten his excitement about today’s events. He was particularly interested in California, China and the sea. “California,” he said pondering. “How far is it, and is the seacoast there?”

“It is very far,” said Yueng Ling. “Kaaye and I must move very far so her family would not find us but there is the sea there. The sea stretches across to the other side of the world to China the place where we come and from there to Africa and India. See I will get a map.” He got up and went into the laundry room. Glory had heard about China, a place across the mountains from her mother’s homeland. She asked Kaaye Ling, “Have you heard of the land across the mountains from China?” “I have.” She answered. “But it is called land of the Buddha. It is where the Buddah comes from, he crossed the mountains from India to China so they say it is also the land of our brothers and sisters.” Now Yueng Ling returned with a map. He spread it on the table and pointed out the western coast of California, the Pacific Ocean, and China and beyond. When Maura and Glory saw this they looked at each other with much curiosity. Here was a map showing their homelands that lie across an ocean. “Are there many ships which cross this ocean and do they take engers?” Maura asked. “There are some ships that are sailed by whites but they will not it other than whites as engers but there are some others who will smuggle others with the cargo. There are also a few Chinese ships that will take all engers and they will also hide those who do not wish to be found out. I know such a ship.” Yueng Ling said. Maura’s interest was really peaked now. “How does one get to California?” he asked. Yueng Ling left and returned with another map of the western North America. He spread it on the table on top of the other map. “We are here,” he said, “in a place called Oklahoma territory. You may follow the river north into the mountains. Then when you cross the mountains you may then follow the river south into California. When you reach California you must then go north to a place called San Francisco. After you reach here you will go to the place where ships are docked and find Captain Mutang.” He said this while tracing the route with his finger on the map. He then added still tracing with his finger. “You may also follow a course due west which is somewhat shorter but there is much desert to cross.” By now it started to rain again and Kaaye said. “Surely you cannot leave in the

storm, you must stay with us tonight?” “Please?” Yueng Ling chimed in. “We will make bed here on the floor.” “Thank you very much,” Glory answered. “I am too tired for that journey after such a lovely meal.” “I am also,” Maura added. “We shall move the table and prepare a bed of blankets for you,” she said. “My husband will you please get the blankets. We will move the table.” “Don’t you dare!” Glory commanded. “Maura and I will move the table, you just take care of yourself.” They all stood and Maura and Glory moved the chairs and tables to one side of the room. Yueng Ling returned with the blankets. They all said good night and Yueng and Kaaye Ling retired to the next room. Maura took half of the blankets and started to make a bed near the table. “Just what do you think you are doing,” Glory asked very quietly? “Why would a husband and wife make two beds?” Maura smiled and then added his blankets to Glory’s bed. Maura took off his shirt and undid his pistol he had strapped to the small of his back before he lay down. Glory stripped down to her underclothes which were a full slip and knee length bloomers. She undid the pistol that was strapped to her thigh between the slip and bloomers and lay down. As she lay there on her side with her back to him she whispered to him, “Now don’t you go getting any ideas; this is only out of necessity.” “Oh, I always have ideas,” he said and lay with his back to her. “But I do understand and I shall be the perfect kitten although there is such a beautiful woman lying beside me.” Maura lay thinking of the maps Yueng Ling had shown him and what he said about the Chinese captain, and he was wondering if he could really make that trip to California. He had come this far. Why not? He was about to speak to Glory about it when she turned onto her back suddenly and asked him. “Did something happen at the barroom to day?”

Now it all came back to him and he turned over to his back and related the events to her in whispers but barely concealing his excitement. As she listened to the story of Deadeye and Pecos and their men, she realized why he seemed to walk taller today so she whispered to him. “Now don’t you go getting any funny ideas.” But he never heard her; he was wondering how those men came to be who they were. They both drifted off to sleep after that and when he awoke near dawn, Glory’s head was lying on his chest He smiled and tried to ease her head from his chest but she was awakened. They arose and begin to dress, when they realized that there was warm food on the stove and a pitcher of water and bowl with towels draped across the chairs. Maura peeped into the store and Yueng Ling was already at work. “This man can certainly move quietly,” he said to Glory. “That could really come in handy sometime.” They ate a small amount of food hurriedly; spoke to Yueng Ling momentarily and were back into the muddy street on their way to the hotel and barroom. Maura was excited because he was sure he would learn more about the Africans from Stilly today when they ate their meal together. Glory was also excited to learn that there were Cushnites who were in charge of their own destiny. As they trudged on both of their minds were completely occupied and they almost ed the hotel but the sight of it snapped them back to reality. The morning ed very slowly for Maura because he was anxiously awaiting meal time so that he could speak to Stilly. His mind was preoccupied so that he did not notice that Madison’s two cronies were in the barroom. If he had he would have heard them say how some Indians had robbed their men of their clothes, money and guns. It was now mealtime and for the first time, he hardly noticed Glory when he went into the kitchen to pick up the meals. “Hey, hey, what’s your hurry.” Glory called as he was heading to the back door. He looked around and lowered his voice before he whispered. “Oh, I’m sorry but I want to spend time with Stilly so that he can tell me about those men.” “Well, you just be careful and watch yourself and don’t go getting any ideas.” She had also lowered her voice. When he reached the stable, before he had given Stilly his meal he was already

looking over his shoulder and asking about “those men.” “Well, I tell you,” Stilly said pulling up the hay bales and sitting down. “That is Deadeye Dick and Pecos Pete; they ride all over this western country. They both run gangs and they prey on the whites who is outlaws. Whatever them outlaws steal or take, Deadeye and Pete takes from them. The lawmen out here are mostly scared to try to arrest them and they hope some of the outlaws will kill them. “Are there others?” Maura asked. “They are not the first ones and they are not the only ones but they must be very careful because the whites are always looking to get an advantage. I don’t mean the town people; they mostly is afraid to do anything but the white outlaws sometimes mass up in one big gang and go looking for them. But although Deadeye and Pecos are two gangs, they are always close by each other and whenever the whites try to ambush one they come together and trap them. Sometimes there are others too and they all meet up at one time or another and help each other.” Maura was mesmerized by this fascinating story. Questions were popping into his mind. He didn’t know which to ask first. “Where did they come from? How did they get started? When …” “Hold on, hold on,” Stilly cautioned him, looking around. “One question at a time.” And then he said. “Now they were mostly people like me and you who got tired of being bossed around and never getting a fair shake from the whites. Many of them have spent time in jail; some have escaped; some are runaway slaves but they are all tired of the white man’s ways.” Maura was so engrossed in this old man’s tales of treachery and circumstances that spawned gangs like those of Deadeye Dick and Pecos Pete that he forgot about the time and meanwhile back at the hotel, Glory was encountering a very troublesome situation. As she was leaving, Clem had pinned her against a wall and started to place his hands beneath her clothes and she told him that Madison had told her to let him know if he tried anything with her and he ended his unwanted touches. She then climbed the wooden stairs at the end of the building and opened the door into the hallway. There were five doors on each side of the dingy hallway which led to the guest

rooms. There had been more rooms to clean lately with all the extra people in town so she returned to her duties. Madison who usually was up by ten o’clock had not stirred and she had not cleaned his room today. There were a couple of other rooms which were still occupied and one which was right across from Madison’s which she had not cleaned although the guests had left. As she nervously made her way through the dimly lit corridor she felt somewhat relieved that Madison had not went downstairs. Therefore Clem could not ask about her assertion. She first went into the room that was second from the end and was not directly across from Madison’s room. As she was making the bed with her back to the door, Madison entered the room and grabbed her from behind cupping his hand over her breast. “Why don’t we just get on here in this bed you little brown wench and show me that you know how to treat a white man?” “Oh no, Boss Madison,” she said in an almost whisper as she pulled away from him. “I don’t want no white man. I am only for my husband.” He snarled at her then. “You black bitch, you are for me if I want you and I do.” He was between her and the door and had her cornered in the far end of the room. He approached and grabbed her by the throat slamming her head against the wall, “Now you are going to do what I tell you.” With her head throbbing, she was still thinking. “Wait wait, boss,” she cried very sweetly and pleadingly. “Please don’t tear my clothes, I don’t want my husband to know and please close the door so no one can hear us.” “Now, you are getting smart like a good little black wench,” he said as he turned to close the door. “You just lie on the bed there while I take off my clothes. I don’t want my husband to see me with tattered garments; he might get upset and there ain’t a thing he can do.” She cooed as she reached beneath her skirt. Madison sat on the bed and started to unbuckle his pants. “Now that’s a good little wench, nobody ever has to know.” When he looked up, he was looking at the barrel of a .44 caliber pistol. Right away he lost his control of his bowels and bladder and scrambled his fat self

across the bed to the floor. “Wench, please don’t shoot!” He begged as the room became inundated with the stench of his bowels. “I should shoot because I know you are not going to let me walk out of here if I let you go and at least I will have the satisfaction of knowing that you took no part in my murder.” Glory said shaking and holding the pistol with two hands. “Oh please, I swear there will be no reprisal. No harm will come to you.” He pleaded now with his face in his hand not looking at the weapon she held pointed at him. He made quite a pitiful sight: this sloppily dressed fat white man now red faced cowering in the corner, tears streaming from his eyes, snot running from his nose and knelling in a pile of his own feces and urine. Glory was contemplating her next move when suddenly the door burst open and three white men burst in. They were upon her before she could move. One grabbed the gun from her hand while another punched her in the face. She fell onto the bed. “What shall we do with her boss?” One of them asked. “Whatever you want,” Madison said gathering himself from the floor, kicking over the slop bucket and backing out of the door holding his behind. He didn’t want them to see how he had lost control of his bodily functions. With Madison gone, their attention turned to Glory. “Well you seem to have a lotta spirit. We’ll just see if we can channel it into a more peaceful mode,” the one who had punched her said. Glory was thinking of Maura now. “Please don’t tear my clothes.” She pleaded. She knew what they were going to do. She ed all too well the liberties Judge McCabe took with her and her mother. As the men snarling and drooling began to molest her and pull at her clothing she helped them to undress her as best she could. She was afraid of what would happen if Maura saw her with her clothing all ripped and torn. The men took turns with her but they were like animals; before one had finished his business another was pulling at him to get to her. It was like wolves in frenzy. They fought and struggled to be the next in line and all the while they were tearing her womb until the pain was unbearable and her blood ran like water but she did not scream or cry out, because through all of the pain she was still thinking of Maura.

And then she left. She was no longer in this hotel room but she was a little girl in a garden in her mother’s land and The Lord Vishnu in the person of Krishna came to play with her and he changed himself into many playmates. The garden was most beautiful with flowers of every hue and trees bearing many fruits and a golden river that reflected the warmth of the sun and she and her playmates gathered flowers and fruits and ate figs and dates and peaches and played with the eternal bliss of the Lord Krishna surrounding them. But there was a dark forest on the other side of the river and she saw her father standing there. He was tall and black and quite beautiful and she crossed the river to the other side but he ran away from her. She followed him into the forest and was frightened by a terrifying sight. Her father and many others were hanging by their necks from withered grotesque trees. The ropes they hung by were serpents that writhed and spat which caused the men to sway in this eerie forest of poison and blood. Glory was horrified and turned to re-cross the river but she was lost in the dark forest among the filth which the serpents spouted and she began to cry. The Lord Krishna heard her cries and came to her and carried her back to His garden and her playmates. The white men had finally left her and she was now back in the hotel bed. She was barely conscious when Clem came in and laid on top of her and did his business; and then Madison but she did not feel a thing. She had no more pain to give. After some time, she didn’t know how long, she was able to move. She was very weak but she managed to use the water in the bowl to clean herself. Her clothes were not too badly tattered and she managed to conceal the tears. After she cleaned herself, she then cleaned the room. She drank water and checked herself many times in the mirror and then laid on the bed and slept until she heard Maura call upstairs for her. She yelled to him that she was feeling ill and said. “Would you please go to the stable and get the horse and come back for me?” He left without answering. He had been excited all day especially since Stilly had told him the stories of the outlaw gangs. He walked with a swagger now, not intentionally, but because of his new found pride, it was natural. When he returned to the hotel Glory was waiting outside; she did not want to see

any of the men in the barroom. She didn’t know how many of them had assaulted her but she knew that Clem and Madison was two of them. Maura helped her aboard and led the horse away by his reins. After they were out of town he climbed aboard behind her this time with his arms around her holding the reins. He related all that Stilly had told him as she rode along in excruciating pain. When they arrived home he helped her from the horse and carried her inside. He asked what the matter was, but she just said it was female trouble. She told him which herbs to prepare for her. She drank these and fell asleep right away. He got into his bed still with the thoughts of today on his mind. However he did whisper a prayer to Romokoko. “Although I do not understand all the things which have befell me since I was captured, still, I thank you for showing me that all hope is not lost and I know that you will guide me even further into understanding.” He then fell asleep.

CHAPTER XXXVII

Fawn & The Scouting Party

“A iiiiiiiieeeeee!” The war cry pierced the ears of those three whites sitting around a campfire in a small clearing in the forest and they scrambled to find their weapons, but before they could gather them, this small scouting party was upon them. “All right, don’t move, don’t anybody move!” Larobe shouted as he sat aboard a chestnut stallion training a rifle on them while the other four scouts herded them all against the wagon that they had obviously driven there. ‘’Raise your hands and keep silent!” He ordered. Larobe remained aboard his horse while the other four with him quickly dismounted and began to search the wagon and gather the weapons of the white men. There were animal skins and cloth in the wagon but beneath these were rifles, ammunition and explosives. The weapons that the white men carried were added to those in the wagon, and the men were ordered to strip. The scouting party then confiscated the boots and clothes of the men. These too were loaded aboard the wagon and after trooping the men over to a tree and tying them there, the party shuttled off into the forest with the wagon and the two horses of the whites. “Why don’t we kill them?” Tanana asked. They would surely kill us if they were in our place?” “That is true.” Larobe answered. “But there are compelling reasons not to kill them. First, when their bodies are found, the whites will be that much more agitated. Soldiers will come and many other whites will come because of the fear that it would generate. We would draw more attention to ourselves when our purpose is to stay hidden.” The others agreed with Larobe but Tanana said, “I still think we should kill them if only for revenge.”

“You are entitled to an opinion and revenge may or may not make your heart rest easier, but I am leader of this party and the others agree with me so let’s get out of here.” Larobe said. The party started in one direction but quickly changed directions when they were sure that they out of the sight of the whites they unloaded the wagon and loaded their loot aboard the horses. They used branches tied behind the horses to wipe out their tracks. They also waded their horses in the small creek and changed direction again. Sometimes they split up and came back together after a distance. All of this was done in order that they did not leave a trail into their camp. This scouting party was Larobe, Tanana, and three other young men called Enema, Latosha and Wenko. These young men had trained together in the ways of hunters, warriors and scouts but the training Larobe received here was in addition to his training with the Tulegs, and he was such a zealot when it came to training that he was ahead of the rest in almost all aspects and he was chosen as the leader. Although most of the young men in the camp wanted to be warriors, hunters and scouts were also just as vital to the well-being of the camp and they were all trained in in all aspects of each discipline. This was so that they could be interchanged whenever there arose a need. When they returned to camp they presented their bounty to the elders and retired to a place near their wigwams. Word of this party’s conquest quickly spread throughout the camp and while these scouts sat talking of their adventure, many others stop by to congratulate them. They are most humble that their fellow men appreciate what they have done but Tanana still insists that they should have killed them. “You Enema, you lost your father, mother and a sister to the pale ones. Why would you not want to kill them?” He asked. “It is like this.” Enema said. “We are trying to gain an advantage and killing them may mean there are less pale ones. But if it causes them to send more men from other places, then, have we really gained an advantage?” Enema answered. “But,” countered Tanana. “If those that come would mean there are less in another place, could that not be an advantage’?”

Wenko then spoke: “We know that the pale ones came from across the sea, therefore those that we kill may cause more to come from across the sea which would clearly be a disadvantage. Therefore I still think we did the right thing.” Latosha next ed the conversation: “Not only do I agree with the reasoning of Wenko, but because I know that Larobe also has reason for revenge, but he does not act out of anger and he carefully thinks before he acts. Therefore I would subordinate my opinion to his opinion because I too have reason to want revenge on the pale ones, and I, acting on my own emotions, might act irrationally in certain situations.” “Look,” said Tanana. “We are a scouting party. Our mission is to seek out the enemy to determine what danger they are to us and gather information which could alleviate this danger. We are allowed to engage them and slay them only when we have a clear advantage. I say kill them each time and soon they will think it is not safe to invade our land where they have not yet settled.” Larobe then chimed in with wisdom that belied his age but it is what he had gathered from listening to Immientunka and other elders. “Revenge is a natural desire of many men and it can bring respite to the heart but many times it will only bring temporary relief and can cause you to falter in you main purpose. Because the act of revenge may cause those whom the reprisal was inflicted upon to want revenge, and they then commit other atrocities against other innocents for which you must again seek revenge, which can make you react in a circle of revenge and forget the main function of our war. So you see revenge has no place in war.” Tanana then spoke again. “You say revenge has no place in war but if revenge can put you into the mode of conduct where you have an advantage because you are so intent in your actions and the other is not then isn’t that a place for revenge in war?” Larobe spoke again. “That is true, revenge may put us in a mood to act with venegence more fiercely than our adversary but if we do not control our emotions it may also cause us to commit atrocities because we are being ruled by revenge instead of rationality; and that payback we exact is beyond the wrong that we received. Therefore we now have committed an injury against nature for which nature will exact retribution. Hence we now have the reprisal of nature and the retaliation of our enemy to deal with. However revenge may not be

necessary because the act for which we think we deserve revenge could have possibly happened because of acts we have committed at another time.” “Are you saying that the killing of Enema’s family is justified because of some act he committed before?” Tanana asked bewildered. “No, not at all.” Larobe Answered. “I am saying we do not know why certain things happen to us, but each time a tragedy befalls us we must always act rationally because if we do not, and act on our emotions only, we can make many mistakes.” This party stayed together every day. Enema and Tanana shared a small wigwam; Wenko and Latosha shared another and Larobe, the leader, had one of his own because as the leader he needed solitude. Their conversation continued with the banter reaching peaks and valleys and agreements and disagreements until darkness approached. The men had been waiting for their food to cook and now they partook of it and after they finished their meal they retired to their shelters. Larobe removed his shirt which was deer skin which slipped over his head and had sleeves to his elbow and then lay on his bed of straw and animal hide. Sleep did not come right away because he was too excited about the events of today but just as he was about to doze he detected movement in his shelter and he quickly sat up and reached for his knife which was always nearby “Shhh, it is I,” said a soft and innocent voice he recognized right away. “What, you mustn’t…” He started, but she shushed him. “Shh, you mustn’t make too much noise,” she whispered. “I know it is not allowed for a woman to enter an unmarried man’s shelter unaccompanied, but I have waited for you to approach me and you have not. So I have come because I have seen you watching me and though you are very busy being the leader of a scouting party, I am sure you could find time to come to me.” This was Fawn, the daughter of Imeintunka. Larobe had seen this beautiful one with the saucer-like eyes many times. He had started to approach her many times but had given in to his shyness each time. But now, here she was in his shelter breaking camp rules and he would be the one to pay because it is mandated in this war camp that an unmarried man must keep any woman from his shelter. If

not, he must immediately report her but he knew he was not going to report her. “You must leave,” he said. “I will be in much trouble and you will be shamed.” Again, she shushed him. “Shh,’ she said. And then she added. “You must go to my father and ask him to give me for your wife. You must do this before someone else asks for me.” Larobe was plenty nervous. He kept peeping out the opening by sliding his entry curtain just enough for his eyes to see into the rest of the camp. He knew that there were sentries posted and he was terrified that someone had seen her enter. “Please,” he pleaded. “You must leave without being seen, please, please go!” Their whole conversation was spoken in a whisper with him peeping out through the slit in the curtain. “Promise me you will go to my father and I will go,” she said. “Yes, yes I will. Please go,” he answered. She smiled and was gone as quickly as she had come and after she had gone, he nervously peeped outside; he was hoping no one saw her. After about twenty peeps, he was satisfied that maybe she wasn’t seen and he lay on his bed and thought about what had just happened and he realized that he had made a promise. Larobe had seen Fawn working among the plants with the others and he thought that she was the most beautiful girl he had ever seen. Her eyes were the reason for her name: they were doe-like. Her skin was the color of coffee lightened by cream like that he had made many times in the McCabe household. Her hair was braided in two plaits and hung about her head to just below her shoulders. Her nose was even and straight and her mouth was small and perpetually curved as if she was going to smile. And when she did smile, it seemed to Larobe that the sun dimmed. He would have approached her, he told himself, but deep inside he knew that his shyness had kept him away. As he lay upon his bed he thought of her more and more, and the more he thought of her, the better he felt. He finally fell asleep with thoughts of Fawn on his mind. He awoke just before daybreak with a smile on his face washed his face and

mouth from the small wooden bowl of water in his wigwam and went outside. Tanana and the others were just arising also. These men would take their breakfast from the fruits, nuts and vegetables from the store house near Imientunka’s shelter in the center of the camp. After they had fetched their breakfast and returned to their area of the camp, they sat to eat. “Did you hear strange noises around here last night?” Wenko asked Latosha. “Oh yes, I did, but I was too frightened to look out. I tried many times to move my curtain but I was frozen.” He answered. “What are you talking about?” Tanana asked unbelievingly. But they just laughed. Larobe shot them a nervous glance and they laughed some more. Larobe didn’t say anything and Enema and Tanana gave each other bewildered looks and shrugged. The five continued eating with Wenko and Latosha breaking into laughter now and then. While they were eating, a messenger came for Larobe from Immeintunka and as he scampered to the center of the camp to Immeintunka’s shelter he thought about Fawn; did he know? No, not likely, it was not unusual for a leader to be summoned after an achievement such as the one they had yesterday; still he worried. When he arrived at the shelter he was instructed to enter by the two sentries who stood outside the entrance. He came before the Chief who was seated as he lowered himself through the entranceway. “Greetings and peace chief Imeintunka.” Larobe greeted him bowing. Imeintunka remained sitting and ordered Larobe to sit also. “Greetings and peace to you, Larobe, you have done a superb job. For this you have earned a feather of the falcon. This will show all that you are not only brave but also wise. I am very pleased that you did not slay the pale ones. I know that you carefully weighed the consequences before you made your decision. I am proud that you have learned so well and I know that we chose well when we picked you to be the leader of your party.”

Larobe accepted the feather in two hands as Immeintunka handed it to him: “Thank you Chief Immeintunka. I strive to make all proud of me and when I can please our leader, I am honored.” “I am much pleased with your raid and with you. I anticipate many times such as these. And then he said. “You may leave now.” Larobe started to leave but before he turned he swallowed deeply and said. “May I speak to you about another matter?” “Please, by all means, speak what is on your mind.” Immeintunka said. “Well, I, I,” he stuttered but ing his promise he said. “I would like to ask for Fawn as my wife.” Imeintunka smiled. “Did the conniving one get to you?” Then he answered his own question. “Yes, yes, I am sure that she did. If there is anyone I know, it is my daughter. Listen, my son, we are in a war camp. Soon the women will be taken further into the hills to look after the little ones and the old ones. You will be busy with scouting and soon, you may become a member of the warrior parties. Life will be even more dangerous for you then. If you will wait awhile to see what some of the developments are and if they are favorable then you will have my blessings. But for now we all are in much danger. We could be attacked at any moment; even now, while we are speaking. So, my son, I implore you to re-think your request and ask me at another time.” And then he dismissed him again. Larobe thanked him again, bowed and backed out of the entrance. As he made his way back to his end of the camp, he thought about the wisdom of Immeintunka. “The conniving one,” he said to himself. Did He know about her venture into his wigwam? Probably not but he would see Fawn today and reiterate his order not to visit his shelter. His order? Who was he kidding; more like his plea? Oh for the wisdom of Immeintunka. Before returning to the other end of camp, he decided to take some time to think about the situation. He walked to a little cove just outside of camp and plopped down beside an old tree whose branches were bereft of leaves. He tried to imagine how life would be with a woman. He had never had a woman nor did he know what it meant, but he did know just thinking about her made him feel good.

He tried to imagine what life would be like with her but then Immeintunka’s words would invade his mind, and he knew that they were on target. There was a war going on; he was going to be a warrior someday; no one knew how long the war would last. Besides he didn’t know how to raise a family or even if he would ever have time to raise one. But he still could not get her off his mind so with these thoughts and feelings he decided he would seek permission to visit Maura– maybe he would have some answers? After pondering these thoughts for a while, he headed back to camp because the training sessions would begin shortly. The older instructors would do most of the psychological training, but he and others would demonstrate the use of weapons, the riding of horses and how to traverse forest and other land without detection. This war was more than he realized when he first decided to but what he knew now was that he was in this war from the day he was captured. In fact, Immeintunka’s speech to the trainees was that this war was inevitable, because it was global and had lasted for centuries and he was even in this war when he was born. That first day when they had completed their physical training, they all gathered in the center of camp and Imeintunka’s words reverberated throughout the camp. They taught Larobe all about this war and his situation. “Young ones,” he began. “We are gathered here because we are at a disadvantage in this war because we did not prepare when we heard the warnings, but because of this war many of us from so many nations are now here together. You see, while we were having skirmishes with each other, others exploited our situation by pitting one nation against the other until they had each nation at a disadvantage. Of course, this is not the only reason we face difficulties but it greatly contributes to this situation and now we have many here from many nations to try to take back our land. “But still this is not the beginning. The war started long, long ago. It started for us when the pale ones visited our land in the south. Although our brothers and sisters, the Incas and the Maya were willing to give gold and jewels and other items that the pale ones craved, this was not enough. And after our people helped them through sickness and other plagues and their ranks were strengthened, they killed, captured and plundered us; they even took many to their homes across the sea to be their slaves.

“As their numbers grew their atrocities increased and these acts were repeated with the Aztecs, the Tulegs and the Cocopah and all the while their strength was growing in the south we in the north paid no heed? The great seers had warned us about the pale ones but we continued in our own clashes until they were upon us. “Now we are engaged in this great battle and we are in great distress not only because of their weaponry, but because they now outnumber us because we did not band together sooner. However we will not give in to the pale ones, we will fight with all our strength, but we must be careful whom we trust. Because just as the pale ones invaded our land, they also invaded Egypt, Arabia, Ethiopia, Cush and the land of Buddah and they have recruited many among these to help them. “They have transported many of these to our land, and although some fight with us, many identify with the invaders. This is also true of many of our people. Therefore you must be very careful of the Cocopah, because they have been dominated for so long so that they now believe that the invaders are their ancestors. This is also true of many of the Aztecs and Incas. However, to the south, the Tulegs, the Ishkanani and others still wage war against the pale ones. And there are others, who although do not wage war, are willing to hide us and gather information. Even some among the Cocopah, but we must be very discerning whom we trust.” He ended with, “ these words as you fight this war, trust is a commodity we will give grudgingly, because if it is given too freely it can bring much harm to our cause. also that as we fight this conflict we are fighting for our land and families and there is no place for stupidity, selfishness or uncontrolled anger. Only cunning and wise decisions will win this war.” Larobe ed this speech almost word for word. It made him realize that this was his war and he returned to his area of the camp full of the spirit of man. The next day he took his place with the others as the instructors spoke to the young ones and as he took a seat on the ground beside them and listened to the instructors, he forgot about Fawn. They sat until it was time to teach the young ones the use of weapons and other disciplines. Each instructor had five to seven charges assigned to him and Larobe lost himself in his work. He loved teaching the young ones, however, when the sessions were over, his mind immediately

returned to Fawn. He decided to take a walk up by the gardens to get a glimpse of her and found her working with the others. He lurked at one end until he was sure she saw him. He then gestured for her to meet him at the cove just outside of camp that he had visited before. As he made his way to the designated area he could hear the giggles of the others as they spied him. “Did you speak to him?” She asked breathlessly as she arrived at the cove and sat beside him at the leafless tree. “Sure I did,” he answered sternly as if he was in charge of this meeting. “But he gave me no definite answer.” “What do you mean?” She asked surprised. “Did you ask for me as your wife?” “Well, I said to him that I wanted you for my wife, but he suggested that the time was not right.” He answered her. However by now the sound of her voice and the sight of her was enough to melt any pretense at his ability to control the situation and he could tell he was losing control of the negotiation but he still spoke sternly. “With us being at war and nothing being stable he said that we should wait. He also said the women and children were going to be moved further into the hills; therefore we would not live as man and wife or maybe not even see each other for long periods of time. Maybe when the war is past we will become mates.” “Maybe,” she cut in. “When the war is past? Who knows when the war will be past? He says himself that the war has been going on for many seasons and it just may continue for many more. Why can’t we be married now and I could stay with the war party; or you could visit me in the hills if I must go. You will need a respite from the war and I will remain you wife regardless of what comes.” “That is well.” He said thinking. “But you could become a widow before you had a chance to become a wife. Then although you are very young you would then have to accept a mate from those who had lost their wives and many of them will be older, and they would be allowed to choose you. That would not be fair to you.” “Don’t think like that,” she said frowning. “I won’t think like that and neither

should you. No one should talk of death when marriage is on their minds. Nothing will happen to you and having a wife will make you even more determined to return.” Larobe could see that her reasoning was going to win over his, so he tried another tactic but he didn’t know why he felt he had to please her; wasn’t it she who instigated this whole situation? Maybe he had looked at her in that certain way. But why was she in charge? “Look,” he said, regaining his sternness, “Maybe we should just layoff marriage talk for a while and concentrate on getting to know each other.” She seemed somewhat taken aback by his tone, but this only lasted a few seconds. “What is there to know?” She cooed. “I like you and want to be your wife. Don’t you like me?” “Why, yes, yes,” he stammered losing control of the situation to her again. “But, but…” “There is no but,” she cut him off. “Soon my father will send me away to the hills. You must go to him again. Do you want to lose me forever?” With those words he was hopelessly hooked. He who had never courted any woman was completely at the mercy of his feeling for her. Yet he knew Immeintunka was correct in his assessment of the situation, but he still wanted her. “I, I, will speak to him again,” he stumbled over his words. He was totally torn by this dilemma: The wise assessment of her father and the loveliness of this beautiful woman who sat gazing at him with doe-like eyes. “I must go now,” she said rising. As they rose, she rushed into his arms, encircled his neck with her arms and brought her lips to his. He felt the softness of her lips and felt her tongue gently pressing against his mouth. He opened his mouth slightly to receive her tongue and was immediately transformed into a mushy mass of humanity with only a beating heart and a feeling of intense pleasure. Then she released him and was gone. He stood very still for a while, not knowing whether to call after her or run the other way. These feeling he had never felt before and he had never known a kiss

before but now he was awakened to desire. He knew he was going to Immeintunka again.

CHAPTER XXXVIII

Danger

A fter many days and weeks they came to the next foothills where they camped in a small nook just outside the dense forest; behind some large boulders which was hidden by the wild berry vines growing all over the rocks and all around the small sapling trees and other wild grasses. There was a trail not far from their hiding place where wagon tracks were visible. This place was a niche that Moses had used before and she was familiar with the surroundings. They were just outside Hangers town and Moses spoke to them again. “I know this place and I have some friends here who will help us.” Then she said to Liza and Mandy handing them hats. “You will need these to hide those pretty face of yours.” She said this with a smile as she gave them old straw hats which were rather beat up but sufficient to hide most of their faces. This was the first time the runaways had seen her smile and it relaxed them somewhat. They had all changed clothes at the last stop and now they all wore clothing of the regular field hands with the women dressed the same as Bob. Moses continued talking: “I want you all to stay here and stay out of sight until I send some men by in a wagon and I want you to go with them. They may be white men or they may be colored. They will be familiar in town but I want you three to look like you belong here too. You will hear them before they get here; they will be singing about Moses and Egypt. “Now after you are on the wagon if someone stops you, don’t say any more than you have to. Bob, if they question you three, I want you to do the talking but they may decide they want to question each one of you. In that case here’s what to be said. You are going to the gin you don’t know why; you just know Massa Jamison told you to get in the wagon. The others on the wagon will know what to say. I will not be with you but I will meet you on the other side of town. It’s too dangerous for me to be seen because all the bounty hunters know my face so the four of us can’t go tracking across town by ourselves but I can make it

alone.” After this she left them. The three were alone now for the first time since they started their journey and as they huddled together in the small enclave among large stones behind a thick clump of sapling and thorny bushes such as wild blackberries. “I am sure glad you two came along.” Mandy said. “I would shore be scared here all by myself.” Bob and Liza answered in unison, “We are glad you are here cause we would be scared too.” Then Liza said, “I’m still scared.” They all laughed but not loud; it may have been the first time they had laughed since they started this trek. “Well anyway,” Bob said, “I am glad we all here together.” They then settled down to eat some of the food they had gotten at the last stopover and wait for the wagon. It wasn’t long after they started to eat that they heard voices not far away. As the voices got closer Mandy whispered. “Shh, hush yall. I don’t think they are the ones she sent cause I don’t hear no wagon and no singing.” And they lay their meal aside and slunk lower behind the bushes. Bob felt around noiselessly until he found a large branch. He could not striking anyone except when he was made to beat one of the captives, but he was a runaway now and he couldn’t afford to be caught. He quietly shooed the women further back into the brush and waited. The voices became louder and louder until they were right upon him. He gripped the branch tight in his hand and was about to raise up and strike when one of the said, “I don’t see any niggers around here, let’s get back to town. “Yes, you’re right,” The other answered. “But it sure would have been nice to see a few niggers swinging from trees tonight.” Then they both laughed and started back the way they had come. “Whew,” Bob said as he ed the women further back in the brush, “That was really close.” “Yeah,” said Mandy, “This is getting to be too much for me. I don’t know if I am going to make it. This is too scary.”

“Hold on now,” Liza said asserting herself. “We all came this far together and we are not going to let a couple of mean old peckerwoods keep up from getting our freedom. No maam, I’ll die first, but I’m sure if we just do as Moses says we’ll figure it out.” “That’s right,” Bob chimed in. “We is going to our freedom or we is going to die trying.” This was all new to these three; before they had Moses. But right now they were on their own. After they finished eating they were still huddled in the bushes trying to reassure Mandy when they heard something like singing. ‘Where is Moses in Egypt’s land Ol Pharaoh he got my people in slave bands “Hush,” Bob said as the singing got nearer. The song continued: ‘Moses was sent to find lost souls Who never knew the joy of heaven Poor, poor souls.’ “You think that’s them,” Liza asked. “It shore sound like Moses sent them,” Bob answered. Bob and Liza looked at Mandy who was very frightened. “Look,” Bob said. “This is our only chance and we got to take a chance. You go first cause we can’t leave you behind or dey will catch all of us.” “But what if it ain’t them, then what?” She asked shivering. “This is our only chance,” Liza said. “We have got to take it. I’ll go first then you come after me.” Liza slipped out the brush and ran along beside the wagon and jumped on. Bob and Mandy watched for a few seconds “Now it’s your turn,” He said

After Mandy ran out to the path and was helped aboard by Liza, Bob was plenty careful now. After living in the swamp and making this journey he had learned a lot about covering tracks. He brushed the places where they had huddled with some sprigs and wished he had some animal fur to scatter about but they had used all they had. Then as he made his way to the wagon he dragged a large branch with small limbs behind him to erase all their tracks before he hopped aboard. Once they were on the wagon the men kept right on singing; the wagon had high sideboards and was filled with cotton and was on its way to the gin. When they left Moses there were five men in the wagon but three had gotten off. If the wagon entered the town with more or less than the usual amount of men aboard, it might raise suspicions. Mandy was quite nervous and one of the men suggested that she lie down and cover herself in the cotton and if anyone stopped them they would say the she was not feeling well. Liza and Bob were settled near the inside walls facing each other; their bodies were also covered by the cotton up to their necks and their heads laid to the side as though they were sleeping so that no one could get a very good look at them. All of this was part of Moses plan; the singing and cover of the cotton: it had worked before. When the wagon rolled into town and down one of its main streets, those on the wagon grew quiet and hushed their singing. However most of the town was deserted as the wagon ambled past brick and wooden one and two story building with wooden porches and a fine oak or elm tree here and there hovering just above the tops of the buildings. The whites of Hangers Town didn’t take too kindly to a bunch of Africans singing so early in the morning in the midst of their town so the quietness of the occupants of the wagon exaggerated the noise the iron wheeled wagon made as it ed along the cobblestoned street. The gin was just the other side of the jail which was one of the brick building in town and near the end of town. The noise of the iron wagon wheels as they creaked over the stone and dirt street was the only sound that could be heard now. But just as they were coming to within a hundred yards or so of the gin, two white men holding rifles across their torsos approached. “You out mighty early with that cotton, Bubba, this is a mite early, even for you.” One said as they advanced. “Oh naw, Mister Law,” The driver answered. “Mister Curtis said he wanted me

to be heah when the gin opened so that I could hurry back with this heah wagon and these niggers.” “Well Mister Harris here tells me there is word of some runaway niggers ing through here.” He said while surveying the engers in the wagon. “You boys didn’t happen to see nothing like that on your way into town, did you?” He asked. “Naw suh, we is the only niggers that we seed this morning, suh.” The driver said laughing at his attempt at self-deprecating humor. The man with the rifle did not laugh but continued to question the two men. “They say it might be that nigger woman, Moses, coming through here. Yall ain’t seen nothing suspicious you say?” Mister Law asked. “Naw suh, we ain’t seen nothing at all suh. We heard that nigger, Moses, is scaid to come to Hangers Town cause she know what happens to niggers heah.” Bubba answered laughing again. The two men were still eying all the occupants of the wagon that they could see when Law asked; “Where o1 Bo is, didn’t he come this time?” “Yes, suh, he sho did, but I think he musta had too much to drink last night. He’s feeling real poorly, but he said it’s something he ate.” Bubba said still laughing. The two men then walked around the wagon inspecting what they thought to be all men aboard the wagon. “Just one minute Bubba, just so you ain’t lying to me, I’m going to get up there and inspect that cotton. Harris gimme that pitch fork on the back there.” Law then got aboard the wagon with the fork. He looked down at Mandy whose head was to one side with Moses’ hat pulled down over her eyes. “O Curtis don’t know how to treat you niggers.” He said. “If you niggers got drunk at my place I’d have you in the field before daybreak.” He then slightly pricked her with the pitchfork and then started thrusting the fork through the cotton with heaving strokes. When he was satisfied that no one was hiding there he got off the wagon and warned them: “If I find you niggers is lying about seeing that nigger Moses, we gon use one of you to take her place. Now git that wagon outta here!” “Yes suh, Mister Law, we is going. We ain’t seen nothing, suh and we ain’t heard

not one peep, no suh and we is sho going cause we don’t want to be swinging from no tree.” Bubba spoke sing-songly while all the time smiling his best grin as he lapped the strap against the horse and they rode off. The rest of the town was going to be awake soon and the runaways had to make it outside of town before then. Just as they ed the jail and came to an alley, the runaways slipped from the wagon and the other three men who has departed now reed the others on the wagon. As the runaways silently slipped back into the forest at the end of town, they again met up with Moses who led them to a cave which had been stocked with water and food. After eating they bedded down for the day as Moses stood watch for a few minutes before she left again. As they rested Bob reflected on their trip in the wagon and how the men behaved. To see them laughing and scratching while they referred to themselves and others as niggers because they wanted to please the white men reminded him of himself. He had for many years played the fool just to ward off punishment to himself, and he had witnessed many others practicing this same art, but these men denigrated themselves for him and Liza and Mandy while putting their selves in danger. This was a new experience for him. Mandy was asleep on some blankets near one wall of the cave while Bob looked up at Liza who sat on some blankets with her back against the other wall of the cave as he lay with his head in her lap. “Liza”, He said quietly, “Dem men cut the fool to save our lives, but wuz my life worth saving. I ain’t done nothing for nobody cepting white folks and dat’s because I was scaid not to do what dey told me to do. I feel like I ain’t got no right to put other folks in danger, Liza. I feel bad about it. It’s a strange feeling. I always felt bad about things I did, but this is worse. Dey wuz acting like me, but dey wuz keeping them men from harming us. What am I gonna do, Liza, what am I gonna do.” He said confused now. Liza leaned over and kissed his forehead. “Oh Bob,” She cooed, “Don’t fret, please don’t fret. You did things because you was made to-you had to. You was raised that way; your mother taught you to always please Massa. She wanted you alive, so she taught you to always please white folks so you wouldn’t be killed, and you learned what your Mama taught you. That’s what children do.” “But Liza,” He said. “When I was older and knowed what I did was wrong and

dat it hurt others, I still did it. I did things I knowed was wrong just to stay alive or keep from being punished. Wouldn’t I have been better off dead?” “Don’t talk like that Bob.” She said. Liza worried now because she didn’t want to lose him to imagined horrors that he conjured up for himself so she tried to calm him. “Only the Lord knows who should be dead and who should be alive, Bob. We just do things sometimes what we think is right because that is what we have to do right then; and sometimes they turn out to be wrong. But the Lord lets up live on and sometimes we find out that the wrong thing we did was just so we could learn something and grow better. “See,” She continued. “You came for me when you could have left with Moses or stayed there in the swamp. But you came for me, Bob; you risked your life to save me, don’t you see; maybe all them things that happen to me was because I never said you was wrong when I should have. So maybe the Lord let things happen to me but he saved you for when he knowed I couldn’t take no more and he sent you to get me. So you see you did something for me and the Lord.” “But I love you, Liza,” He said. “I didn’t know dey were going to punish you like dat, but I knowed I couldn’t run without seeing you again, and when I saw you tied like dat, I knowed I couldn’t leave you like dat cause it was my fault. But what have I done for other people like dem men did for us? When did I do dat, Liza? I never did. I only hurt people,” He moaned. “But that Sambo,” She said. “You told him things even though you had to beat him. You told him what to do so you wouldn’t have to beat him, you did that for him.” “But dat wuz for me because I knowed how bad Massa Sam would make me beat him, so I told him how to git along so I wouldn’t have to beat him so bad.” “Still it was for him, Bob,” She told him. “It help you but it help him too. If you don’t tell him and have to beat him all the time, he would never have had a chance to run and take Glory and that little one. So even though you don’t know it at the time, sometimes you do good.” “Well, maybe I did, but I can’t help thinking about those men who risked their lives for me.” She could sense him calming down so she tried to calm him further. “They did it

for us Bob-for Moses and Mandy and us. You see you did it for me, Moses did it for us and Mandy and they did it for Moses. The Lord works in mysterious ways Bob; it ain’t for us to figure out, we just do what we can.” Bob was calming down real well now, but he still had some questions. “You say sometimes we think we is doing bad but we is doing good and sometimes we think we is doing good but we is doing bad. How come dat be like dat?” He asked. She could feel the tenseness leaving him now and she felt better and said. “It’s like this Bob. A mama is always going to protect her babies; it don’t matter what kind of mama; it can be a lion or hen a sheep or a dog. Now you take your mama, she done seen just about everything. She done seen mamas tell their children to run and she done seen them brought back and hung or had their feet cut off or worse. Now she don’t want that for you, so she trains you to do everything that pleases white folks. Now she thinks she is doing good because she is keeping her child alive. But other folk see you grow up and be a mean overseer and they blame her and say she done bad. “And then folk see you beat folk and they think you did bad, but if you weren’t the overseer and somebody else was, then they might not tell Sambo what you told him and Sambo might be dead. But because you was the overseer and was the only one who could talk to him and because you told him how to get along with Massa Sam and them, he is still alive and running. “So you see it don’t matter what you do, some are going to think you did bad and some will think that you did good, but what matters is what you think when you do it. That’s what counts because later on you might think it was bad even though you meant it for good. But when you did it, you did it for the good it could bring. So sometimes we can’t figure what is right and wrong, we just do the best we can.” Bob looked up at her again and said, “I think I understand now. I think dem men had to do what dey did when dey did it, cause iffen dey don’t, dey would be in just as much trouble as us. It don’t matter if dey is saving our lives because dey is saving dey own lives because if they get caught helping us they will be in trouble too. But iffen we get free, then there is a chance that dey might get free too, so dey was doing what dey had to do. But iffen somebody else see them cutting the fool and think dey is doing wrong but dey is really doing good for us

and Moses and dey selves.” “That’s right Bob,” She said. “Now you get some sleep because Moses is going to come in here directly and it’s going to be time for us to go; but if she need to rest, I’ll do the watching while she sleeps.” Bob closed his eyes and rested while she rubbed his head as if to rub all the selfdoubt out of him. Soon they would both be sleep, but before she dozed, Liza vowed that she would never tell Bob about what those guards and bucks did to her; he was already upset about the scars on her back. That would just make him fret and blame himself–no she wanted her Bob–no use upsetting him more. When darkness fell, Moses re-entered the cave and surveyed the sleepers; never had she conducted such as these before. “All right,” She said, “Wake up! We got to get ready to go. Make sure you each have food and water and put them blankets back where you found them; the next party will need them. Everything that you are not going to take, hide it with the blankets, we are over one hurdle but it’s a long way to Chester.”

CHAPTER XXXIX

The Caravan

F rom Hangerstown to Philadelphia was almost due east straight across the mountains. Now to get to Canada, they could have gone due north but they knew not what awaited them. In Philadelphia Moses knew of many who would help and there was also help along the way. So as they made their way toward Philadelphia, they again hid in barns, cellars, caves and caverns. Each one was stocked with food and supplies or someone brought these things to them while they hid. All the time they were headed to Philadelphia but they had to through a place called Chester, Pennsylvania. Now Chester was a place to avoid if you were a runaway; it was rife with bounty hunters, lynchers, and an institution called the Cannon Detective Agency. The Bounty hunters were out to make money and the lynchers were there to teach a lesson to the runaways but the Agency, as it was referred to, was there for both. That is, they first punished all those they captured with beatings, branding or other torture before returning them to the ones who called themselves their masters. However, it was a place they had to through, because although all these obstacles were present and it was dangerous to try to , the surrounding countryside which had many farms was even more dangerous, besides here in Chester, Moses also had friends. “Now here is the plan,” She told them as they all sat on blankets and ate in a cave that had been well stocked with a lantern, food, clothes and blankets. “Because Philadelphia is above the Mason Dixon line and we have many friends there who will hide us, there are more hunters in Chester and they are more diligent than anywhere we’ve been, therefore, we must be extra careful. We ain’t gonna be able to hide under no hay or cotton, because they check everything very closely There’s only one chance we got. I got a friend here who is known for transporting runaways for the whites so instead of trying to hide you gonna march right through the center of town.

“Now don’t be scared.” She went on. “Because he gonna talk to you real bad, but he knows what he is doing. You see, sometimes he transports for whites, sometimes he transports for me. He acts the same all the time. Sometimes they lets him through, sometimes the Cannons will take the captives and transport them. But don’t you worry cause I’m going to be there waiting for whoever brings you.” Then she looked at Mandy and said, “Now, Mandy, I’m counting on you and Lathan is counting on you, so don’t lose your nerve now. We are almost there. Judas going to be here in the morning, so you rest tonight and I’ll see you on the other side of town.” And then she was gone again. After she was gone, Mandy said, “I can’t do it, I know I can’t, oh Lord.” “Now here, listen,” Liza said. “There ain’t gonna be nothing to it. You just keep walking with your head down just like you is the most pitiful thing in the world just like Moses said. That’s all you got to do.” “Yeah,” Bob added. “We gotta go through this here town iffen you wanna see Lathan. Now if you wanna go back to doing whatever it was you was doing, then you just go ahead and give yourself up. But then you still gotta go through the same thing, only then it will be for real.” “Now since you put it like that, I guess it is the same thing. I just hope I don’t do nothing to get us caught.” Mandy said. “Don’t you worry,” Liza said. “You just act like we is already caught, cause that’s what we gonna be. You just be already caught and we gonna be alright.” After settling Mandy down they all tried to rest, however Bob and Liza were just as nervous as Mandy, because they didn’t know exactly what to expect. Moses told them about the bounty hunters and the Cannons but they had no way of knowing the utter cruelty of these ones. For instance they knew nothing of the ones who they hung until they were just a breath or two from death and then released. Nor of the ones who were dragged from end to end of streets on the end of a rope being pulled by horses. They also knew nothing or the beatings, the branding and tarring and feathering, stretching, castration and other forms of torture that were used. No, they did not, but Moses did, but she did not wish to make them anymore apprehensive than they already were.

They tried to sleep but it was fleeting and their rest was full of worry and the next morning Judas was there just as the sun made its first peek into the forest; the whites named him that because of his job of transporting runaways. It didn’t bother him though, as long as he could help someone escape now and then. This morning he clamped the irons on these three. He used a chain with three clamps about three feet apart and each runaway was clamped by one ankle to the other. They also had both hands clamped together in irons which were connected by a length of chain to the chain around their ankles. Judas rode a horse in front of them with a length of chain which was connected from the saddle to the hand clamps of Bob who was the lead captive with Mandy in the middle. As far as anyone knew, Judas’s master was just as diligent about capturing runaways as anyone else although he had never been known to torture them. Now they were entering the center of town. It had rained the night before and most of the street was muddy but a portion had been paved with gray stones. After trampling through the mud, Judas knew not to trudge the runaways on the paved portion. He said to them very harshly, “Now you three marching with your heads down, mind you, you don’t step on none of them stones!” He did this for the benefit of anyone who might be in earshot; then he lowered his voice and said. “If anybody ask you anything, you just say nawsuh or yasuh or I don’t know.” If they ask where you from, just say the Bellows place. You got that, just nod your head if you do.” They all very slightly nodded and continued to tramp through the mud. They made a strange looking caravan: This smart looking well-dressed brown man on a horse leading this huge black man and two black women in tattered rags chained together down the main street of a Pennsylvania town. This was a larger town than any of the runaways had seen and it was hard to keep their heads down and not look at their surroundings. Here there were two, three and four story buildings with signs denoting construction companies, lawyers, doctors, mechanics, merchandise stores and other establishments lining both sides of the streets, and all very well kept with colorful signs. However, they could not help peeping up at the tallest buildings right in the middle of the block–the Cannon Building. It was still very early in the morning and there was not much activity in the

town, however, there was always something going on at the Cannon building. As they ed there were three white men dressed in suits; standing on the porch. There was another entering the building, yanking a black man on a chain who had an iron collar about his neck and shackles on his ankles. The black man tried to avoid the heavy wooden post that upheld the porch, but the chains on his ankles caused him to stumble and he was yanked into one of the posts, head first and fell to the porch on his face. The one doing the yanking just yanked on the chain more. As the black man tried to get up they could see his face now covered with blood and his back striped from a recent beating, but they showed no reaction just continued to walk with their heads bowed. “Hey Judas, wait up,” One of the white men called and the three of them walked over to him. “Well, well, well, what have you got here Judas?” One of them asked. “Just some runaway niggers, boss,” He answered. Mr. Davis told me to transport them to Mr. Sims up near the place where the two rivers meet. They caught them just the other side of the farm.” “You got them irons locked real good?” He asked, checking the shackles all the while. “Yassuh, I put them on and Mr. Davis checked them hisself.” He answered. “You know where these niggers from boy?” He now asked looking over Bob and the two women? “Yassuh, Mr. Davis said they was from Mr. Bellows over near Hangerstown,” Judas answered. “There any bounty on these niggers, boy?” He asked. “I don’t know about that, suh, I’s just delivering like Mr. Davis said for me to. I’m gonna meet Mr. Sims ….” “Yes, yes, you said that already.” He said, cutting him off. “Look here, I’m gonna take these three off your hands.” He said as he walked over to the horse and undid the chain. “Now you said around the place where the two rivers meet. Is that right boy?”

“Yassah, that’s right suh.” Judas answered showing no resistance; this had happened many times before; one of the white men would take the slaves just to see who they would meet on the other end. However most of the time there was a white man waiting for them but this time it would be Moses. “Now you just ride on back and tell your master that I’m gonna take them right on up there to Sims. You got that boy?” “Yassuh.” “Alright, now run along y’ hear.” “Yassuh,” He said riding off leaving the runaways in the hands of the three white men. He tried to give Bob a reassuring look before he left. After he left, one of the men in the suits said. “Wilbert check in the office to see if any of these niggers are listed in there.” Then to the runaways, “Ya’ll from Bellows’ place in Hangerstown, huh?” He asked, looking at Bob? Nobody said anything. “Boy can’t you talk, don’t you hear me talking to you?” “Yassuh,” Bob said, barely audible. “Well!” He shouted! Bob ed what Judas said about his answers and mumbled, “Yassuh,” again. The man then walked them over to the front of the Cannon building. Liza was watching Mandy very closely; she was praying that she would hold up. Bob was praying the same thing but he dared not look back at her. Mandy was also praying that she would make it. For although they knew not the ways of the Cannons, all these captives knew well the ways of the whites and knew that they could be terribly mistreated if they were found out. The man yanked on the chain as they shuffled over to the office. When the other man returned, he said something to the man who walked them over which the captives did not hear but the man then yanked on the chain and led them down to the stable. There he mounted a smooth tan stallion, connected

the chain to the saddle and stared out in a north easterly direction. “I should be back in a couple of hours,” He shouted to the others! “I’m gonna see what Sims knows about these niggers. Who knows, there still might still be a bounty on these three?” “All right,” One of them answered. “If Davis comes by I’ll tell him that you took them on up and you’ll only charge him for the transportation and the extra time he’ll get out of his nigger because you freed him from that chore.” They all laughed at this as the man rode off jerking the stumbling runaways behind him. The trip through the countryside was rough for the captives. Although they stayed mainly on a trail it was all they could do to keep from falling and being dragged. Also they did not have the use of their hands, so limbs and branches routinely smacked their faces and bodies on the less traveled portions of the trail. Bob’s wide body did offer a tad of protection for Mandy and Liza, but still all three received a thrashing of thorns, thistles and branches and after a few miles they were bruised and bloody and stinging with pain. The captives did not know what would happen next nor did they have time to worry. Their immediate task of staying on their feet and warding off the stinging branches and thorns with their forearms occupied their time. When they reached the place where the rivers met the man called out for Sims. “Hey Sims!” He yelled! He waited. When he received no answer, he called again. “Sims, where are you!” He still received no answer and he dismounted and began to look around. As he walked up on a clump of trees he heard a husky voice. “You just drop that pistol I know you got under that coat and don’t turn around,” Moses ordered. The man reached under his suit jacket for his gun but he did not drop it. He let it go limp in his hand, re-gripped it and turned toward the voice just in time to see a flash of fire and feel a horrendous burning in his torso. He fell to the ground, Mandy screamed and Moses slapped her face and she immediately shut up gasping and holding her face. “I’m sorry for that,” Moses said. “But we ain’t got time for screaming. We got to get out of here in case somebody heard that shot.” “What about him?” Liza said pointing at the man lying on the ground before

them. “We ain’t got time to worry about him either,” Moses answered.” We got to get to Philadelphia. I’ve got friends there. I’ll tell them about him, but he’ll probably be dead by then.” She answered. They tied the horse to a tree so that he would not tromp back into town; Moses unlocked the chains and they were off. They now moved hurriedly. They ran through the thickest of the forest without even a notice of the briars, thistles and thorns. Moses led them with a purpose now that they had never seen before, even in her. She knew this was a dangerous area, these few miles between Philadelphia and Chester. And she did not know if the shot she fired had been heard by others. The gunfire had been heard by some early morning hunters and they found the suit and loaded him onto his horse and one of them started back to town with him. The other three began to scour the forest. The captives did not take the time to cover their trail and the hunters picked it up but they started out carefully and slowly because they did not know who they were chasing, but they did know that they were armed. The hunters had no chance of catching them because of their cautious pace, and because once they began to reach the farm houses, there were others who would hide and shelter them and cover their trail. The hunters had to give up their search; they had heard of the Underground Railroad and now they were stymied by it’s working first hand. Moses had friends here and as they started to reach a series of farms, they shuttled the runaways by wagon from farm to farm until they reached the city of Philadelphia. Again they were hidden in cellars and barns and wagons. They walked and ran and snuck between building and houses. They moved through the city from section to section haphazardly, but always headed toward New Jersey. When they reached New Jersey by boat, again they hid and ran and walked and rode in wagons throughout the city until they were well out of the city and on their way to New York. In a few days the runaways were in New York and on their way to Canada. Moses thought: that’s two hurdles were down, one more to go.

CHAPTER XL

Freedom

T he refugees now traveled mostly by daylight as they went in wagons by horseback and by foot. They entered houses and ate from dishes, hid in barns and cellars and ate from their hands. They sometimes slept in beds and sometimes in haylofts or caves and because Moses had many friends the runaways began to relax somewhat as their made their way toward the Canadian border and saw the lush countryside grudgingly cede ground to their determined trek. Not many bounty hunters were here in upstate New York but there would be more as they neared the Canadian border. However the Canadians welcomed the American refugees at their border crossings but the bounty hunters were so abundant on the American side of the border that it was near impossible for a refugee to get through; therefore most crossed at unauthorized points. Many times there were no Canadian officials around when refugees crossed the border at the unofficial points and the hunters would follow the refugees into Canada, but when help came from those exiles on the other side of the border, the hunters had to cease their intrusion into sovereign land because the refugees were also armed. Moses had crossed over many times and she knew many of the habits of the bounty hunters, and many times she had previously slipped across and alerted those in the camps that new people were coming, but this time she had found no opening to do so. Therefore their last dash for the border would be without help from the other side so they needed to find one of the narrowest spots of the creek so they would not to be in the open for too long. Now that they neared the border, the refugees were again afoot and on their own and their only purpose was to find a place where they could cross the small stream that was the border. Sometimes there were makeshift crossings here in

the wilderness or canoes in hidden places that were made by those who helped the refugees, but most were destroyed when discovered by the hunters. Yet Moses and the refugees had to find a place where the stream was narrow and shallow enough so that they could cross quickly but there were also clearings that they had to cross in order to get to the stream so they kept to the densest part of the forest while contemplating their next move. The refugees tramped through the forest keeping a lookout for narrow and shallow water and also anything that might hinder them from their goal. Even though they were going to cross at an unauthorized place, there were still many bounty hunters about because there was a settlement of refugees nearby and the hunters knew that more would be coming. There was only one thing to do now and Moses spoke to the refugees. “Now we are very near,” She said as they all crouched in the thicket. “We are going to spread out about twenty yards apart and we will still move as quietly as possible. There have been trees marked by cuttings to spot the narrowest crossings, but the bounty hunters will cut slashes in the trees all around so that you won’t know the crossing, so you can’t always go by this. Then if all the trees are so marked what you do is pick a spot and you run–don’t look back–you just run. Someone may run to meet you; they may be colored or white and you will be safe, but if no one comes you just keep running. She continued. “Don’t be afraid, I have done this many times. Now let’s spread out, Mandy and I will go together and you and Liza will go together. Now , when you see a marker check the surrounding trees. If you find other markers all around, you must pick your own spot to run and you run straight ahead as fast as you can. Okay, let’s go!” Now as Bob and Liza crept through the thick growth as quietly as they could they spotted a white carrying a rifle not ten yards from them. They stopped and fell to their bellies behind some fairly thick brush and watched as he started toward them. Moses also saw him and she knew he must be nearing Bob and Liza. She also spotted another one about twenty yards further north in a clearing. The refugees were in a tight spot with the two hunters so near because they would have to cross this clearing regardless of the width to get to Canada. Moses could see that the hunter was going to discover the refugees.

She saw him point his weapon and heard him shout. “Alright come on out of there before I blow you out!” Bob and Liza didn’t know exactly what to do. They didn’t want to give up but they didn’t see an option. “Eeyuounaow!” Moses let go a bloodcurdling yell. The hunter turned his head and Bob pounced from his hiding place and hit the hunter harder with his fist than he had hit any captive. The hunter fell to the ground and Bob grabbed Liza’s hand and they were off, headed straight for the clearing. The other hunter saw these two and turned his rifle their way and Moses let out another yell and fired her pistol into the air. The hunter dove to the ground and looked in the direction of the scream. Moses grabbed Mandy’s hand and they headed for the clearing. When the hunter rose and turned toward Moses, Bob also screamed and the hunter dove to the ground again. Now the hunter was confused because whenever he trained his weapon on Bob and Liza, Moses would scream and fire her pistol; if he aimed at Moses and Mandy, Bob and Liza would scream. This would cause him to cower and turn in the direction of the noise, but with the screaming and the running and the pistol firing, he never got off a shot from his prone position there in the clearing. The other hunter recovered but was still disoriented and more hunters heard the shots and screams and came running but by this time Moses and the refugees were well of their way. They ed the clearing and now were back in the forest. They ed the markers but had no time to stop to see if they were genuine. They now ran through the forest pursued by six hunters. The forest afforded cover for them because the hunters were afraid to fire for fear they would shoot their own. Bob was nearly dragging Liza now, but she did not complain nor did she complain about the limbs and shrubs which whipped her constantly. Moses was also holding on to Mandy and encouraging her as they ran. “You can’t stop now, girl, you got to go on, only a few more yards to Lathan.” The refugees ran until suddenly they came to another clearing leading to the stream across which they could a see cabins and others running to meet them. They still didn’t look back as they splashed into the shallow water, but had they looked, they would have seen the dejection in the hunters because these others

were well-armed. As the others met them the refugees fell to the ground wet and exhausted. “We made it, we made it!” Moses screamed. “Thank the Lord!”

CHAPTER XLI

Maura

M aura did not sleep well that night he was worried about Glory; she had drifted right off to sleep with hardly a word and she was not stirring this morning. When he got up he started the herb pot warming and when he detected some movement from her he spoke to her as he stirred the medicines. “Well, how are you today, I have the medicines warm and ready do you want I to bring them over to you?” “Uhh,” she groaned, “I’ll be right with you.” He looked at her curiously and said. “You slept late this morning I didn’t know if you wanted to go today and I figured you needed rest so I didn’t bother to wake you.” “Oh I’ll be alright soon as I do a little tending and you give me a little privacy.” She said as she sat up in the bed. “Well I‘ll get the pony ready while you get ready.” He said as he went outside. When she arose from her bed, the pain flowed through her like boiling lava, but she continued with her routine. When she went to the slop buckets to relive herself, she was again gripped by excruciating pain, yet she continued to get ready for the day ahead although the pain never subsided. “Hey in there,” Maura called from outside after some minutes. “You about ready?” “Just a minute,” she called. She checked the slop bucket for blood and then her bed. She found none in either. “All right, she called. I’m ready but since we are later than usual we had better skip eating this morning. I’ll get something when we get there.” She said, putting the final touches to her clothes.

When he re-entered the shack he said as he made final preparations to leave. “Well, are you sure you want to go? We really don’t have to go today if you are not feeling like it. Because more sooner than later I should get word to the Lakota about things I have heard and today would be a good day for it, but I don’t know how, if we are not to them?” “I’m sure they will us soon.” Glory answered him, not sounding enthused about the possibility. She didn’t sound excited at all about his spying results and he questioned her, looking quizzically. “Well, you don’t sound as if you care one way or the other?” “It’s not that, it’s just that there will be other times, I’m sure.” She said hiding her grimacing from him. “Yeah, you’re right.” He answered satisfied that her illness had curved her enthusiasm. They then both left the shack. They still only rode one horse into town. They had erected a tiny coral for the other. Maura had already saddled the black mare which they always rode. He helped Glory aboard and he started out leading the horse with Glory aboard. “Are you sure you feel up to it today?” He asked. “Well, on most days, I don’t feel like it, but right now, this is what I must do.” She said. “You just let me know, because if you want to stay here, I will stay with you.” He paused as if he was thinking about something, then added. “Stilly said I should never leave you here alone. He told me about George and his wife and he said that no African can leave a woman alone out here because the whites will do anything they want to do to an African woman when they find her alone.” He continued to talk as they traveled along; he leading the horse with her aboard in great pain. “What do you think about the man with the boat that Yueng Ling told us about? Do you think–or rather, how long do you think before we can start a journey to California? Oh, I know we have to find your mother first. I’m just saying I still want to go home to Cush and….” As he led the horse, he talked on until he noticed that she was not responding. He turned just in time to catch her falling from the horse. “What, what’s the matter?” He said as he gently held her in his arms.

“I guess I can’t make it today.” She smiled up at him before she closed her eyes. They had not gone far from the shack and he gently carried her back to the shack. He rekindled the fire and began to reheat the herbs. “What are you doing?” Glory asked. ” I’m alright. Why don’t you go ahead?” He turned abruptly when he heard her and saw her sitting up in the bed. He did not think she would awaken so soon. “No, no, I can’t leave you,” He said concerned. “They can get along without us for one day.” He walked over to serve her herb tea from a tin cup, when he noticed blood seeping from her straw mattress to the bare wooden floor. “My goodness!” He exclaimed as he gawked at the blood. “Is there something else wrong, there is blood here?” “Ohh”, she cried. She started to say something else but the ride on the horse had intensified the pain and her soreness and all she could do was cry. “There, there,” he said reaching to encircle her in his arms as he sat beside her on the bed. “Whatever it is we will overcome it. What is it I must do?” She tried to talk, but the horse ride had caused her pain to return worse than the first day and all she could do was moan. He stood up and tried to uncover her so that he could see where the blood was coming from but she resisted. “I must see what is happening or you must tell me, or how am I to know what to do.” “No, no, you mustn’t “she managed as she succeeded in stopping him from uncovering the source of her hemorrhaging. “Oh, Oh, Oh,” he muttered. “Oh my, Oh my, Oh my, what is going on?” “Just shut up,” she managed, “and get me that towel out of that crate over there and give me some time alone.” He gave her the towel and left her alone for a few minutes after which he called from just outside the door. “Is everything all right in there?” She had managed to stop the bleeding and she replied. “Just a moment.”

When he returned he plied her with herbs that she instructed him in preparing and she began to relax a little but he was puzzled. He knew about women’s periods, but this was different, he knew that. She dozed and he worried. He was sitting by her side when she awakened and she did so in a fit. “No, no don’t tear my clothes. My husband will know, please don’t tear my clothes.” His head snapped around. He couldn’t believe what he was hearing but he now knew the origin of her pain. “Who was it?” He said shaking her by the shoulders. “Ohhh, “she cried, “please stop, please!” “I’m sorry, I’m so sorry,” he said now cradling her in his arms. “I’m so sorry. You have been hurt enough. Oh I am so sorry, I don’t want to hurt you.” He said cradling her in his arms and crying with his tears splashing into her hair. She cried also and her tears drenched his shoulder as she began to tell of her ordeal. “It started with Madison,” She said tearfully. “But then some others came in and Clem and I don’t know who or how many, but there is nothing you can do. You are only one person. There are too many of them. You mustn’t go after them. Say you won’t,” She cried. “Say you won’t go after them!” Maura grew sullen and quiet and gently laid her back down. He wiped his eyes and backed away. She saw a look adorn his face that she had never seen before. “What are you going to do, she asked? Oh, please don’t do anything foolish, please, please, please!” She begged. He looked at her lying there in her own blood, barely able to talk and a quiet storm erupted within him. He said quietly and steadily: “Freedom is what I have longed for since the day of my capture, but what is freedom if I cannot protect what is dear to me? What is freedom if I have to pretend I am still a slave in order to survive? If I cannot live freely and pursue those things which I need, then this is no freedom at all. And now to accept them doing their will with you says that I have no power and that I am not free, and that they can do anything to my woman and also to me. No, I tell you, there is nothing more that I can take and call myself a free man and there is nothing that you can say that can stop me from doing what I have to do.” He was still speaking quietly. “Today,” He said, “I will become free!”

She looked at him and saw the steel in his eyes. She knew there was no way that she could keep him from doing what he was going to do. “What are you going to do?” She asked anxiously. “I’m going to build a layette and I will take you to the Lakota.” “I don’t want to go to the Lakota. I want. ..” But before she could finish he cut her off now speaking firmly. “You have no choice. It is I who’s making the choices. When you are well, you can make the decisions, but for now, I am taking you to the Lakota. Now you rest while I get the layette ready.” He left her and went out to build the layette. He chopped two saplings and cut them to about twenty feet each. He also had boards left over from when they had built the shack that he used as well as many branches. When he finished, he fastened the layette with ropes to the bridle on black mare. The layette consisted of the twenty foot sapling and boards, used as the frame, and cross branches and boards built up so that the enger could lay in a slight slant. After that branches were added in the back to make it less slanted, and more branches and limbs were spread across in order to the weight of a human. When he was sure that it was durable and could Glory, he then gathered straw in order to cushion the ride. The finishing touch would be to transport her to the layette. This work took him some hours and all the while, he thought of his plan for going into town, but he also thought of the plight of Cushite women in the new world and in Alkebulan. He thought of Jadur and Glory and those who were used as sperm catchers by the whites, and he also thought of many women who were made to cohabit with their own kin in order to breed more slaves. He thought of the mothers who had children torn from their bosoms to be sold or given to others as gifts. And he wondered how many mothers, like Larobe’s had lost children without any clue of what happened to them. He also thought about many Africans who thought themselves inferior to the whites even when many of them were fathered by the Massa, and he realized that many of them had been changed forever. And he knew while he worked the barroom and the ranch that and did the biddings of the whites, he too was changed. However he always had freedom in mind and at no time did he

consider himself less than the whites, but he still sometimes felt that he was betraying his manhood each time he accepted the insults hurled at him, but tomorrow, all would be different. As he dwelled on these strange happenings in the new world, he knew that when he went into town, his revenge would be exacted, not only for Glory, but for George and his wife and all the other women including his mother of whom he had no knowledge for many years, and yet it would be for himself also. For himself, because he had not been able to protect his woman, and this last atrocity against Glory brought home to him the futility of his position and it disturbed him. But if only he had known what was in store for him in this new world, he would have surely died fighting regardless of the superior weapons against him. Instead he had endured the journey here; staying alive to become a tool of other men. And now that he was here he had failed his woman to the point that she could be used by these white men any way that they chose–but today he would began that fight for his freedom and his woman. When he finished his work, he reentered the shack to find her still sleeping. He restarted the fire and made up some meal and flour bread and gathered some vegetables and added them to the cooking pot and hung it beside the herb pot. She awakened when she heard him in the shack. “Hi,” She said smiling weakly. “I thought you had abandoned me.” “Oh, no!” He said seriously. “Oh, hush,” She said. “You know I’m only kidding.” He smiled then but it was really not jovial. “Well, don’t kid like that” He said. “You know I could never do that.” It was her time to be serious now. “You know when you take me to the Lakota, it will be our first separation since we left the McCabe ranch.” “Yes,” He said. “And it might be a long separation because after I leave town, I am not going to come directly to the Lakota because I don’t want to lead the other whites there.” He finished preparing their meal and brought it to her. “Where will you go?” She asked, as she began to consume her food.

“Oh, I won’t go far,” He said, as he sat beside her on the bed and began to eat. “I have learned many tricks from Old Ben, the Tulegs and the Lakota. I will mostly circle through the forest, but it will seem to them that I am headed straight South but I can’t afford to get too far away from my future wife; we’ve been attached so long I wouldn’t know what to do without her.” She smiled. “I’m really going to miss you,” She said. “You have been most kind to me and I do appreciate you.” It was late in the afternoon when they finished eating now and he said to her, “It’s time to get started. Can you stand up or shall I take you to your new lair?” “Of course I can stand,” She said. He helped her to her feet and while she stood balancing herself on the wall, he dragged the bed outside and mounted it on the layette. He then returned and very gingerly carried her out to the layette and covered her with blankets. He placed her with the top of her head in the same direction as the horse and started to lead the horse away. This time he headed straight for the hills and although the layette being dragged behind the horse was going to leave a trail, he would disguise it as best he could and later the Lakota would finish the job after he arrived. They traveled in silence on an old trail for about a mile until he heard a lone horse approaching. He quickly circled his horse deeper into the forest, unhitched him and then led him away from the layette. “I’m not leaving you,” He said to Glory. “But there is a rider coming our way please remain quiet as possible.” He quietly led the horse twenty or thirty yards, mounted the horse and rode him hard and noisily for another fifty yards in one direction, dismounted, tied the horse, sprinted another thirty yards in the direction he had left Glory, and dropped to his belly. All this was done to confuse the other rider. He now lay on his belly in the underbrush about thirty yards ahead of Glory listening for the sound of the rider, but heard nothing. It was now nearly dark in the forest and he peered as far as he could from his belly, but saw no one. He began to worry. Maybe the rider had seen him dismount and went straight to Glory. He began to crawl as fast as he could on his belly back to where he left her. He now moved swiftly through the scraggly shrubbery on his belly, and although his heart pounded within his chest and the blood throbbed in his temples threatening to burst the arteries, he knew he had to remain calm and low, because

if they had discovered Glory, the element of surprise would act as his best weapon. As he neared the spot where he left her, he detected movement in the undergrowth ahead approaching from the opposite direction. He speeded up his crawl. He had to reach her before the intruder. His thoughts were crushing him. Did she save herself only for him to leave her wounded and alone in the forest where she could be attacked? His mind raced as he slithered nearer and nearer. He was almost there and he hoped that he was ahead of the intruder. He had to be; he must get to her first. And then just as he arrived at the layette, he felt a body leap onto his back. He struggled to throw him off, but the body was stuck like glue. He rolled over on his back pinning the intruder to the ground. Yet the intruder did not relinquish his hold. He brought his elbow down as hard as he could and felt the hold loosed. He quickly extracted himself and reached into his boot for his knife. The intruder rolled over and rose to his feet with his knife in hand and the two squared off in the semi-dark forest. They circled each other and Maura thrust his knife and his arm was captured by the other. Before the intruder could lunge with his knife, Maura also captured his wrist, and as these two now stood face to face they recognized each other and glided into an embrace. Glory had been watching all the while and now she was puzzled. The men released each other and Maura Shouted. “It is Larobe!” “Is it really you?” She cried. “It is truly me!” He answered. “It is really good to see you!” Maura beamed. “But what are you doing here?” “It is good to see you two also; I was on my way to visit you but what are you two doing in the forest?” He asked. “We are going to the Lakota; Glory is not well and I have business elsewhere and we need someone to look after her while I am away. But why were you coming to see us?” Both men were now standing close to the layette and were almost speaking in whispers after their initial greetings were in shouts. Larobe leaned over and gave

Glory a peck on her forehead. “I was really coming to you for some advice. You see there is this girl, uh, woman and she is under my skin and I don’t know exactly how to handle it so I thought that maybe you could give me some advice.” Glory chuckled at this and said. “You came to the wrong man for that; this man doesn’t know anything about courting a woman.” “You hush now,” Maura said. “What do you mean,” she answered back. “You know it’s true. Anyway, with you two, it never fails—under the direst of circumstances you decide to have domestic conversations. I say let’s get started; you can tell me about this woman when we reach the camp.” “But…” Larobe started. “No buts,” She said. “Let’s go.” The two men looked at each other and shrugged. “That will have to do for now,” Maura said. “You take Glory to the Lakota; she will need some tending. I will get my horse and we can harness the layette to your horse and then I will be off.” Larobe started to connect the layette while Maura retrieved his horse. When Maura was ready to go Glory whispered to him: “You be careful please.” “I will,” he answered. “I have to return to you.” And then he was gone. When he returned to the shack, he loosened the floor board and got his sawed-off shotgun and shells which he kept in a leather sack beneath the shack floor. He checked his rifle and stuffed all the bullets into his buckskin bag. He laid out his holster with two pistols and checked to see that they were in firing order and laid out the small one he kept in the small of his back. He thought that he would stop at the stable and retrieve yet another pistol before he took care of business and then he lay down and waited for morning but he would not sleep much— tomorrow was his day of emancipation. He prayed: “Romokoko, My Creator Who floods my whole being I beg your help in striking against evil because I strike evil not only for my sake, but for You Who abhor all that is bad. I do not pray that you let me live but I pray that I

live long enough to rid the earth of those who railed against she who is a servant or Yours although she thinks Your name is Vishnu. This is all my prayer and I thank You for awakening the strength in me and I ask Your forgiveness for my weaknesses. Without You I am nothing and I give my life for Romokoko.” The next morning he arose early so that he could be in town even earlier than usual. His manner was hard. After he donned his buckskin pants, he pulled on his knee length buckskin boots preferred by the Lakota because they were quieter than his brogans. He buckled the two holster and pistols about his waist and tied a length of rope to his rifle and harnessed it around his shoulder. His knife now in a leather scabbard was draped around his neck and the other pistol he shoved into the buckskin pouch along with his shotgun and ammunition. He chose to wear his black wide-brim hat making sure that his locks hung beneath and framed his face. He was a one man army now, but he was not ready to leave Next he gathered his bow and quiver of arrows and lance from one corner of the shack. He went outside to the tiny corral and tied them to the appaloosa with a length of rope. He also tied his buckskin shirt and bag to his animal and he was now ready to begin his journey. He mounted the black mare and leading the appaloosa behind him, he headed straight into the forest. He found a well secluded spot and making sure there was grazing there; he tied the appaloosa to a tree and headed out—retracing his path and covering his tracks until he was back on the trail to the settlement he had blazed over time. He was now ready for war. When he had gone to pick up his meal yesterday Stilly had heard some talk about Glory and he knew trouble was coming. He stood outside the stable; he had a pair of binoculars, spyglasses he called them; and he trained them on the tall black figure riding alone toward the town. He could see the glint of the weapons he carried and he could see that he wore no shirt. He went into the stable and retrieved his own weapon. He thought about taking Maura’s too but decided against it; then he mounted his brown stallion and stole quietly out town. He had heard a smidgen of what had happened to Glory and he didn’t want to be here when Maura arrived nor after he had gone. Yueng Ling was up early also because he too had heard a bit about Glory’s ordeal and sensed that trouble was brewing. He saw Maura slip noiselessly into town and leave his horse just the other side of the gully in back of the hotel. He

could see that Maura carried weapons and he knew that he usually left his horse at the stable. Yueng Ling re-entered his home, awakened his wife and hurriedly packed some things that he knew he would need including his rifle and pistol. He quietly loaded their wagon in back of his home placing a mattress in the bed for his wife to lie on. He hitched two horses to the wagon and they too silently sneaked out of town. He too, knew from experience, that whenever there was trouble with an African, the whites would take their anger out on whichever person not of their race that was nearby. Maura spied Stilly leaving as he tied the black stallion just beyond the gully and out of sight and quickly traversed the one hundred or so yards to the stable and retrieved his last weapon. He didn’t want anyone to find it there after he had gone and blame Stilly for his behavior. He then trekked to the back door of the hotel and knocked as usual until he heard Clem stirring inside. “Boy, you a mite early ain’t you boy,” Clem grumbled. “Bout time you brought your black ass back to work. There’s plenty to do since you decided not to come in yesterday.” He unlatched the door not ever looking at Maura and started back to his cot in the corner. Maura entered while Clem’s back was toward him. He felt nothing from the insults of Clem. Maybe this is what freedom felt like, he thought. He could have pounced on him then but he wanted Clem to see death coming. “Hey Clem!” He called. Clem turned abruptly when he didn’t hear massa in front of his name. “You black bastard what the hell is wrong with you…” He stopped when he saw this scowling black man armed to the hilt descending upon him wearing Lakota boots and no shirt. He turned and tried to make it to his cot where his pistol hung but Maura was on him before he could take a step. He grabbed him about the neck from behind with his left arm and at the same time with his right hand he unsheathed his knife. The slash across Clem’s throat was swift, clean and true. “For Glory!” Maura whispered into his victim’s ear. These were the last words Clem heard as blood gushed from his throat and consciousness faded. Maura loosed Clem as he fell across the cot and grabbed him by his feet and lugged him out the back door with the blood spewing forth behind them. He kept his eyes peeled to the windows upstairs as he dragged him to the gully and

released his body and saw it tumble into the gully face down. He stood watching as the blood turned the transparent rill a ruddy crimson. But he only had a few seconds to ire his handiwork–this was only the beginning. Next he skulked to the stairs at one end of the building and noiselessly climbed the rickety steps and stealthily traveled the length of the hall—the Lakota boots served him well as he arrived at Madison’s room unheard. He used his knife to jimmy the door and now he stood over the bed where this fat tyrant lay snoring. He wanted Madison to see his death also. He first lit a lamp and then crept to the end of the bed where Madison’s head lay and positioned his face just inches from Madison’s. “Psst, Madison,” He whispered. He said it louder when Madison didn’t stir. “Hey Madison!” Madison awoke rubbing his eyes. “What, who is in here?” He said alarmed. He then recognized Maura’s glaring black face just inches from his own and before he could scream he heard Maura say welcome to death just before he felt Maura’s knife sink deep into his fat chest. Madison coughed and gagged and tried to roll over but Maura then slashed his throat and again sank the blade into his chest. “For Glory,” he whispered as he watched the fat man gush and gag and sputter and die. Some had come from another room Glory had told him so Maura checked each room as he snuck back down the hallway. He only found two men sleeping in the room next to Madison’s and he didn’t bother to wake them before he slit their throats. He stood and watched and the blood first gushed and then oozed from their necks. “Sleep well gents”, He said as he tiptoed from the room As he made his way back down the stairs he thought about his deeds. He wanted to be here when the bodies were discovered. He wanted to wait and open the bar and then blast them all in a barrage of gunfire when the place was crowded. He wanted to set fire to the rest of the town and pick them off one by one as they ran screaming from the fire. He would do none of these things. He had killed Glory’s attackers but he couldn’t be sure that he had got them all but he knew he could not kill the whole town. He felt vindicated somewhat and the adrenaline coursing through his body left him with a lofty feeling but did the killings change him; was he now a killer; had he enjoyed it? He thought, no, he did not enjoy the killing part but he did feel

good knowing they were dead. He slunk back into the forest and mounted his horse and started for the appaloosa. He would be far away when the bodies were discovered.

CHAPTER XLII

Jadur

J adur didn’t know how long she had walked but it didn’t matter anyway—all that concerned her was staying alive and she was alive as far as she could tell– her feet still bled, sweat still drenched her clothing and pain still wracked her entire body, but It was nightfall now and she would rest. She could hear the whites yelling orders but she didn’t even try to understand them. The routine was the same every day and night. So tonight she tried as she did every night to find the softest earth on which to rest her tired and sickly body. She settled on a spot near a scraggly shrub and drifted off to sleep as she did every night. She awoke the next morning not to the yells of those doing the herding but to the moans of the camp. She opened her eyes expecting to see the whites preparing the swill that they were usually fed, but instead she only saw the wretchedness of those like herself. She was quite bewildered as she surveyed her surroundings of suffering but with no one prodding her to arise from her earthen bed, she again dozed. When she awakened again, she rubbed her eyes and blinked until she grew accustomed to the sunlight and then got up and began to shuffle around although pain still wracked her body. She ambled to the edge of the camp, but still there were no whites. She held her hand to her forehand to shield her eyes and peered as far as she could—still no whites. She hauled herself the entire perimeter of the camp peering as far as she could—yet there was not a white in sight. She then surveyed the entire camp and though she beheld a spectacle like none she had witnessed before, there were still no whites. Although the camp where she was captured was void of any humane actions and full of treachery, this sight she now beheld was indescribably worse. Before the people were being beaten or were penned in, yet they had spirit. But here there was no need for beatings or cages and there were emaciated bodies everywhere in all positions–men women and children but mostly women. Some were

standing, some were lying across huge rocks, and others were stooping and bending and falling as they tried to walk. Some were only skeletons while others had swollen bellies and popping eyes. There was much moaning and weeping and the blood and tears mixing with the brown soil created muddy pools of sickness that some lay in who had no strength to extricate themselves. Jadur surveyed this scenario of human despair and gently dropped to her knees to pray. “O Lord Vishnu, I have prayed for you to deliver me, but as I behold those about me I don’t know whether I have been delivered from misery or to misery. My Lord I don’t know if I have the strength to absorb more than I have already, but if you still have reasons for my life, give me signs so that I may carry on, because, My Lord, I have no need for my life for my sake—only to do your biddings.” As she prayed an old lady appeared to her and said. “There is much grief here and there is much work to be done. We must save as many as we can especially the children.” Jadur looked up to see a tall willowy brown woman some years older than herself. “The creating Spirit has heard your prayer and I have also heard it. These dying people are the reasons you and I must carry on.” She said to Jadur. She then extended a steaming cup to Jadur. “Here I have herbs to make you better. First you must gain your strength before you can help the others.” “What?” Jadur said surprised looking up at her. “How did you come to be here? Were you on the journey?” Jadur asked weakly as she accepted the cup. “No, but I was once on a journey such as yours. There have been many such treks and many have died, but I and some other survivors have a camp not far from here. But now we must get you better so that we may work to save the others who are here.” “Where are we?” Jadur asked while sitting now and sipping from the steaming cup? “We are in the land of the Apache and the Lipan; the pale ones call it Oklahoma territory. Here there is much desert but just a little while to the north where our camp is, there is a stream and refuge from the sun.” As Jadur sipped the herbs she could feel her strength and sanity returning. The old lady then gave her some flat bread from a leather pouch. “Now eat this slowly,” she commanded. “I am going to see who here is capable of sitting or

walking and who needs help most urgent; we have to get busy or most will die.” She then left Jadur with the bread and the cup and a blanket to sit on and she began to circulate among the others. As she positioned herself on the blanket Jadur now noticed there was a fire in the middle of the camp, and she saw other women here who were tending the others. She closed her eyes and whispered, “Thank You Mighty Vishnu for this wonderful sign.” She then laid down on the blanket and dozed again. When she was fully awakened in a few days she saw that the women were still there tending to the others and she tried to walk over to the fire so that she too could minister to the others but found her feet were too blistered to walk anymore now that she was not forced to. She was then content to sit and watch as the others went about the task of coaxing the infirmed into drinking and eating their way back to health. They did not try to move the camp that first month but fed and cared for the ones who needed it. Some of the women would leave the camp and return with blankets, firewood and more herbs and food. The women kept a fire going throughout the night brewing herbs and cooking soups and bread and they continued their ministering to the others without end. As more time ed the children were the first to regain their strength and they became helpers of the women, but although much progress was made against the sicknesses, at each day’s end some had expired and there was still much moaning from the very ill. And even though there were some who regained their strength, there were many for whom the long arduous journey had been too much and they succumbed to their illnesses. However after another month of caring for the remnants, they were ready to return to the old lady’s camp. Jadur and the others did not try to bury all those who died but covered them as best they could with rocks and brush and dirt where they lay. They left them with the prayer that the elements of the earth was their friend and would shelter them from the ravaging animals of the desert. Then this caravan of nineteen old women, including Jadur and the women from the camp, thirteen girls, eight boys and two old men started the march to the camp of the women following their shadows. There were well over two hundred prisoners when this journey started but this was all the humanity that was left.

After about a day’s trudge they arrived at the camp where there were twenty or so other women, but most of the elderly and the very sick straightaway laid on the ground exhausted and the others hurried to tend them. The camp was located just beyond a small grove of forest and almost surrounded by large boulders and had about ten or twelve shelters made of branches, grass and mud, but with all the new people arriving there was need for more shelters. And since the children healed faster than the others, very soon they were just as energetic as ever; but because of their situation, there was no time for children’s play; and they were just as busy as the rest gathering materials for erecting teepees. Soon this camp began to take on the aspects of other makeshift camps except the ages of the inhabitants were disproportionate in that most of the women were older and the children were between five and eleven years old and there were but two old men. The old women taught the children and the children began to take care of them that were ill and take on the other duties of the camp. As time ed most regained much of their strength and began to build shelters, gather water and food, and make instruments for hunting and gardening. However, regardless of all the hardships and odd situations, this camp soon took on the atmosphere of people with a reason to live. A fire with a large pot cooking was perpetually kept, shelters were erected, gardens were started and hunting committees were organized. The old men, although they could not move about well, were able to teach the young ones about hunting and weapons and the old women who were able taught them about crafts, herbs and cooking. And so this camp carried on as if the world had never delivered to them the death so recently witnessed by those here. Jadur’s eyesight was somewhat blurred from long days in the sun, therefore she could not make out some objects in the distance but nearby her eyesight was as good as ever. And her feet had healed some but the constant walking had left them tough with hard balls of skin that caused her to limp; yet she carried on day by day istering to the others. One day while Jadur was outside the shelter for the infirmed hovering over a boiling pot of herbs over a small fire and forcing the steam from the brewing herbs to drift into the shelter, she detected movement in the distant. She squinted but still could not determine what was moving. She called to the others and they

all gathered near the edge of the camp. They watched tensely–not afraid for all fear had been erased from these survivors of the death march, but they were apprehensive because they knew not what their next adventure would be. Now the movement came closer and the collective heartbeat quickened as some were able to make out horses and men who dismounted and walked ahead of their animals. There were five men; four of them took to the rocks and completely hid themselves and their animals while the tall dark–skinned one walked straight into camp. “We come in peace!” He yelled as he came into the camp. “We greet you in peace!” The old women yelled in reply. As he entered the camp the children came out from their hiding behind the shelters and surrounded him. “We are from the Lakota. We did not know you were here. Where is your chief?” He asked. “I am chief! We are survivors of the death march.” One old lady answered trying to figure how this dark skinned one came to be here dressed as he was. “Where are your men?” He asked. “There are only two old men here.” She answered. “You mentioned the death march?” He queried. “What is the death march?” “We were brought here from the east by pale ones. We were made to walk for many days. Many perished and we are all that survived these marches.” She said still sizing him up. “You say marches. Were there more than one such march?” “Yes, I and some others are the remainder of other such marches and the children and the others came recently. We are of the Seminac, Cherokee, Choctaw, Tulegs, and Mohawks and others but we are all one people now.” Looking around he said. “You have ill ones here. Do you need our help?” “We will be grateful for your help. We have herbs but not all healing grasses grow here. We also have no animals and our supply of food is strained.” Then

she asked. “Where do you come from; do you have things that we need?” “We have a war camp not many days from here.” He said. And then while signaling the others to come forward, He said. “We are a scouting party. We will tell our Chief about you. Maybe you can our camp because it may not be safe for you here?” “We are not afraid; we pose no threat to anyone. We are only old women and children and two old men. There is no reason for anyone to harm us.” She said. “That is so,” he said. “But I am sure you have seen much treachery from the pales ones and we know that they have been known to massacre and scalp for money. Besides you have young ones who could become warriors or scouts in this war, but if you are captured instead, you all could become slaves for them. This is reason for you to be protected.” And then he said. “Would you agree to dwell within our camp if our chief so offers?” “This is a decision to be made by council so we will convene and decide. When will you return?” She asked. “We will tell him of you but it is a matter of council for us also and we will return as soon as possible if so allowed.” He answered. As the others entered the camp all eyes turned to them. These were strong young men on horses who carried rifles and bows and knives. They were dressed in tan leather pants and shirts and knee length boots of the same skin some with tassels. It was such a pleasure to see their own people armed and in charge of themselves; maybe there was a place for the survivors in their camp. Jadur’s eyes however did not leave this tall dark one who stood talking to the old lady. There was something vaguely familiar about him but she could not pinpoint the source of this familiarity, but somehow he reminded her of the McCabe ranch. As they rode out of camp, this tall dark one was Larobe and he could not help but see the old dark lady watching him. That old craggy face he did not recognize though it did seem to him that he had seen it before. And although he could not place it, somehow it reminded him of his past. Anyway he put it out of his mind and was glad he had something to report to Immientunka.

CHAPTER XLIII

Bob And Liza

A fterward they made the short trip to the camp and there was great jubilation as was the case in this camp anytime new refugees safely arrived; however it was not long-lasted and soon there was much activity here among the thirty or so families with many children as everybody seem to have a duty to perform. None of the new refugees had ever lived free before and it was all unique to them to see Africans thriving and taking care of their own. The camp was situated in a clearing with deep forest all around and consisted of about thirty log cabins with pointed roofs in a semi-circle with a wide space in the center. All these cabins had started as one room but had rooms added until there were two, three and even four rooms over time as families grew. The center cabin was facing the forest and the rest were facing the stream but there was one small shack that was near the stream which was used as a look-out for new refugees. From here the residents of the camp had been alerted to the gunfire from the other side of the border. Although some who came here moved to other locations, most of those who stayed did so because they wanted to help others. Lathan who had a two room cabin because he was anticipating Mandy’s arrival welcomed Bob and Liza until they could get one built. Later many of the men pitched in to help build Bob’s and Liza’s one room cabin which was completed within a week or so. As things settled down for Bob and Liza, Bob eventually added another room with a stone fireplace in the back wall that they used for cooking and heating. He also ed in many chores around the camp, but as he worked he gave a lot of thought to his life. He thought about the difference in the way he had lived in the past and how he now lived. Before he lived on the Judge’s ranch and his only concern was how well he could please the master, and yet now here was a whole community that was willing to help him get started in a new life, and he was building his own house.

He also thought about all the ones who put their lives in danger to free him. The ones who provided food, shelter, clothing, and transportation, and especially the men on the cotton wagon and Judas who led them down Main Street. One night as she stood near the stone fireplace in the rear of the cabin stirring the pot hanging over the fire with a long wooden spoon and he sat with both elbows on the small wooden table in what was now their kitchen he said. “Liza, I know my life ain’t been nothing to brag about, but there is something I gots to do.” “What is it, Bob?” She asked a little warily. She knew that when he said that he had to do something it might take some convincing if he was set on something foolish. “First I want you to know that I love you more than anything I know, but I kin see what I gots to do now.” He answered now looking up at her. “Bob what are you talking about?” She said as she stopped stirring. “Now don’t go gitting excited, I have thought about this over and over and I gots to do it.” “Will you quit stalling and tell me what you are talking about?” She asked now stirring her pot again. Then he blurted out. “I’s going with Moses when she comes back.” She stopped her stirring and turned and faced him now and asked concerned and surprised. “Oh Bob what do you mean?” “I wants to do something to try to make up for all the bad things I have done to poor nig …, I mean people,” He stammered turning toward her. “But how will I get along without you, what are you talking about, you can stay here and help to all the new people who come. I need you here with me.” She said as she started to walk toward him with the spoon still in her hands as he rose and took her in his arms. “Shhh,” He hushed very softly but he could see the tears welling in her eyes and he said in his most soothing tone as he began to kiss her tears away. “Don’t worry I have made arrangements with Lathan and Mandy and some of the others

who will look out for you. I will be back from time to time. You know I love you and I want you to wait for me but I will understand if you don’t want that but this is something that I gots to do. I know Moses and many others have risked dey lives to save the likes of me and The Lawd has spared me and I know what I must do. I am going wit Moses to help free others because I think this is the atonement I owe to the Lawd.” Liza backed away from his embrace, laid her long wooden spoon on the small table they had near the fireplace and wiped her hands on her apron then allowed Bob to take her hand and lead her to their bed in the next room which was a wooden frame which they had built and topped with a mattress which was given them by others. As they sat with Bob’s arms around her Bob said. “I don’t want you to take this anyway cepting I got to do something to atone for my life.” Liza was almost hysterical and near tears again and she said rationalizing. “There were many things we had to do in order to survive. All of that is behind us now, we can live here and help others who make it here. This is atonement. The Lord has seen fit to spare us in spite of our transgressions. He knows what’s in our hearts, Bob; He knows you are a good man.” “Now, now, Liza, Liza, listen,” He said as calmly as possible and enfolded her in his arms. “I have done things in my life, it don’t matter whether dey was done to make life easier for us, some of them were terrible and dey rides heavy on my mind. Now I would like for you to stay here if you will, but I ain’t gonna say that you have to, that’s up to you.” Liza was in shock as Bob rocked her in his arms as they sat on the wooden bed. She let the tears dry themselves as she enjoyed the tenderness of his warm embrace. She was thinking of their long life together and she truly loved Bob but she knew that he needed something to ease the trouble she had witnessed in his manner lately. When she was able to speak again she said. “Now don’t go thinking you gonna get rid of me that easy. I didn’t tramp all the way here just to be left by myself so you make sure you is going to help people and not just tromping off with another woman and you make sure you come back to me.” Bob started to protest. “Now that’s no way to look at it, I …” Now it was her turn to cut him off. “Oh hush,” She said. “Don’t worry, I ain’t

worried about that Moses cause she gonna do all she kin to git you back to me. Naw, you go ahead and when you get tired of tromping all over the place, you just come on back to Liza. I’ll be waiting for you.” They both laughed at this and fell back into each other’s arms there on their bed.

CHAPTER XLIV

Larobe

L arobe walked beside the layette; his last six months had been very exciting: his encounter with Maura and Glory was just the last breeze in this whirlwind. First they had captured the wagon and later discovered the survivors from the death march and his meetings with Immientunka and Fawn were also exhilarating, especially those with Fawn. Now as he walked beside Glory he reflected on his recent adventures. Earlier he was informed that others would be dispatched to move the people into the warring camp if they so chose. “Again you have proven your value as a scout,” Immeintunka congratulated him as Larobe stood before the chief who was seated on a pile of animal skins inside his shelter. “You make all proud who chose you as a leader.” “Thank you, sir.” Larobe answered and curtsied. “I am much humbled to receive such praise from one so honored as yourself.” Then he added. “But sir, before I take my leave there is the matter of Fawn. I have pale one’s money and hides to offer as a dowry.” He was speaking hurriedly and nervously now. “If we could be married and live apart, I would not hold her to the standards of a wife who shared my tipi. Nor would she hold me to all the standards of a husband. But I know she is the one for me ….” Immeintunka raised his right hand and cut him off. “When Lakota marry,” he proclaimed proudly. “All standards of marriage must be intact. If there is war and it dictates that husband and wife must live apart, they must each observe standards as if they live together or they will be banished from the group. This is the reason for my caution. “You see you are each young and this war could keep you separated for a long time or even forever and that would put too much strain on a young warrior or scout and even on a young maiden, because, over time, surely your interest in

another may peak and the vows to forsake all others may fall by the wayside. This is too much pressure on a young couple.” He then smiled at Larobe and added. “However I have had much experience in the ways of young ones in love and I know that words of wisdom are only a small obstacle to them. So you go to her, my son and you two talk over the things that I have said and in a season or so, if you still want to be married, then we shall see.” When he left Larobe was in high spirits. Immeintunka had not exactly said no: there was hope. But then he thought: Whoa, wait a minute, do I know what I am in for? Am I the one who wants to be married? I don’t really think that I am ready for this and has this woman tricked me into asking for what I don’t want? I must think about this while I still have a chance to get out of it and he became thoughtful. He was walking and thinking about his doubts when he ed the garden where she was working. He wondered if this was inadvertently or purposely but he forgot all his thoughts when he spied her at the far end of the garden. She also saw him and gestured for him to meet her at their regular meeting place in the cove. They met by the old tree and sat with their backs against it and after they settled in their usual spot, she asked excitedly about Immeintunka: “Did you talk to him today ?” “I did, and he said we should talk it over for a while between us, and be sure of what we want to do.” He said thinking he could control the situation with a stern voice. “Well did you tell him we were sure already?” She asked pleading with her doelike eyes. “Well, I, I.. I you see,” he stuttered. He had already lost his firmness. “Immeintunka makes sense. He … he .. he .. says that in a state of war, once the women’s camp is set, we may not see each other for long periods or maybe not at all. Yet we would be married and would have to respect the sanctity of our vows. Do you think we could do that?” “What are you talking about?” She asked incredibly. “Don’t you know that when

we are married, nothing can keep me from you? I’ll find you wherever you go–I need you. That is just what our vows will mean to me: that I will always find a way to be with you. Wouldn’t you do the same for me?” She asked enchantingly. “Of course.” He answered, plummeting into her eyes and leaving all sanity behind and taking her in his arms. “I want you more than I have ever wanted anything even more than freedom.” He said now with his arms around her. “You know when I look at you, I lose all rationale. I the wisdoms of your father, but they don’t apply. All that matters is that I’m with you.” “Then it is settled,” she said. “Go to him now, and tell him we have made our decision.” “I can’t go now,” he said. “We must wait the season out of respect for his advice.” Then he asked, “Do you feel as I do? When I’m holding you like this, there is nothing else in the world, no today, no tomorrow, no yesterday, no war, just right now. I want to hold you always and be with you.” “Yes, yes” she sighed and laid her head on his shoulder. “That is what I feel. That is how I know I must be with you, I must be your wife; I need you.” They kissed and were swept away: He losing all balance and time and drunk with the sheer magnificence of her love and beauty and tenderness. She engulfed in the strength and warmth and caring of this incredible man. They tumbled backwards and fell against the old tree, locked in each other’s embrace. Finally they parted with each gazing deeply at the other. “We mustn’t get carried away.” She said to him as she lay in his tender embrace beneath the old tree. “How can one not be entranced by one so lovely as you.” He answered as his lips claimed hers again. They kissed and embraced until they heard the sound of riders. They reluctantly released each other and sat up. “You know you are correct,” he said. “It will not be good to be seen like this by the whole camp.” They laughed, holding hands, each glad that they had each other. At first, they didn’t know who the riders were. But when Larobe heard the sound of children, he ed the camp they had discovered. He stood and helped her to her feet. “The new people are coming,” he said to her. “Let’s go and see them.” They ran out of the cove and over to a little hill with a rocky ledge just above the

entrance to the camp, and here they watched the procession of old women and old men and children surrounded by young warriors amble into the camp. The children mostly walked, ran, and skipped. Those women, who were able, rode horses two astride each and the other older infirmed women and men were hauled by layette. As he looked over this procession, Larobe felt much pride that his scouting party had discovered them. They had walked for seasons, they had endured hunger, fatigue, disease and even death of many friends and family without being able do anything at all to help those they loved. But now here were children who could become warriors, wives and caregivers and here were older women and men who could enhance this camp with their knowledge and experience and he was glad for them. As they stood on this Mesa overlooking this spectacle, their hands found each other’s and they stood, hand in hand as the sun settled behind them and silhouetted them against this glowing orange circle as they looked over this magnificent procession. And from across the camp, Tanana saw the children laughing, skipping and running past, and saw the women on horses and the young warriors escorting this procession with the setting sun casting a golden halo around the whole assemblage lighting their way; and he saw these two figures standing holding hands outlined by the blushing sunset and he too marveled at all these children of the sun. As they stood here, Larobe noticed the dark lady with the piercing eyes; she didn’t see him but he still felt that she was familiar although he still could not place her. “That lady there on the stretcher behind the pinto, the one behind, I feel as if I know her.” He said to Fawn. “That could be so.” She answered. “The death march sometimes cover many distances.” “Maybe.” He said, but then he forgot about her for a moment and thought of the immediate future. “Immeintunka has given me permission to visit Maura and Glory. I am going just as it gets dark. It will be wonderful for me to see them again.” He didn’t tell her he was going seeking romantic advice. “You must be very careful; there is much danger for one traveling alone at night.” She said. “I will for I must return to you.” He smiled and squeezed her hand tenderly.

“Don’t forget, I need you,” she called out as they separated, he to the corral and she the opposite way. Fawn had a smaller shelter just outside her father’s but she went to her father’s shelter. As he rode to Maura’s and Glory’s, he had Fawn on his mind but he knew that Immeintunka spoke with wisdom because he knew that the war could come to them very soon. Maybe like it did when they lived with the Tulegs back east. He hoped the women would be moved before then; how could he go on if something happened to Fawn? And that brought him to other thoughts. How did this happen? When did Fawn begin to occupy all his thoughts and when did he begin to like it; he was more confused than ever. He wanted her but he knew that it was wise to remain as he was. What would he do with a wife? Would he want to spend all his time with her? He did. And just holding her transported him to places he had never been. Oh, this woman and romance thing really had him mixed up. These were the thoughts he was thinking when he encountered Maura in the forest. Now he guided the stallion by the harness of the layette and while he was busy erasing his tracks and those of the horse and layette, he and Glory were very glad to see each other and they talked as they made their way to camp. She told him of the wagon of guns and ammunition and he relayed that it had already been captured and after that they told each other of their lives as they continued on toward camp. As he and Glory were nearing camp it was getting later and Glory begun to doze so when they arrived all was quiet and he went straight to Immientunka but the sentries outside stopped him. “I have an urgent situation for which I must see Immientunka.” He said to them. “Who is on the layette?” One asked as he walked around and peered at Glory. “This is what I must see him about. She is a friend who came here with me when I first came here.” Larobe answered. “Wait here,” the other said. He returned after a minute or so. “You may enter now,” he said to Larobe. “Even at night you are busy with affairs,” Imentunka said groggily sitting up in his bed of many blankets as Larobe entered.

“Begging your pardon for the intrusion, sir, but one of the friends who came to this camp with me is in need of us, she has been injured so I brought her here. I am seeking your permission to allow her to camp with the ones from the death march?” He asked humbly. “By no means shall she be with those.” He answered. “Put her in the shelter with Fawn and she can care for her; it will be her pleasure”. They both went outside and while Immeintunka went into his daughter’s shelter to awaken her, Larobe and the sentries untied Glory’s bed. When Immeintunka emerged, they took the bed and Glory who slept all the while inside, and when Larobe was leaving, he and Fawn stole a glance at each other and exchanged a smile.

CHAPTER XLV

Glory And Jadur

T he next morning Glory awoke to find this beautiful young woman hovering above her with a bowl of hot food. “Oh,” she said startled. “Where am I and what did I do to deserve such a beautiful nurse?” Fawn smiled. “You are most kind with your words,” she said. “I am Fawn and this is my shelter. Larobe brought you here last night and you are Glory.” Glory laughed. She still felt pain. “Yes I am Glory and you are Fawn then I must be in the Lakota camp. I am most grateful for the kindness of you and your people.” She said. “No, no, no, “Fawn smiled. “You are friend of Larobe; you are friend of Lakota. You are Larobe’s people, you are Lakota people and we are glad for you to be here. Now eat.” She said extending the bowl to Glory. Glory sat up in her bed and took the bowl from her hand. “Thank you, Larobe did talk about you, but I was groggy, but I am really ok now,” she said. “Hush, you are not ok. I have watched you for some time. You called for Maura and you moaned so you are in pain and I will care for you. Larobe and my father have entrusted you to my care and I shall take good care of you.” Fawn answered. “Okay, okay,” Glory smiled, feeling the pain again. “I may not be perfectly well, but I am well enough to get up and around. I must.” She added. “I hear what you say, but my eyes say different. You must rest awhile longer and I will get you some brewing tea, and then when you want to get up and go

outside, we shall go together.” Then she said pleadingly. “Because I am in charge of you, I cannot leave you alone because then I would be negligent in my duty and not worthy to be a caregiver and my father would not be pleased.” “Okay, you win,” Glory said smiling. “I would not want you to be chastised for forsaking your duty and I will stay here.” Fawn then left her to gather herbs which she knew would cause Glory to sleep. Meanwhile, on the other side of camp, men and women were busy building temporary shelters for those from the death camp. Jadur had awakened early and she and some Lakota women were busy caring for the others. “You mustn’t work yourself so go and have a seat. You are not strong enough yet, we will tend the sick you must take care of yourself.” One of the young women chastised her. “Go and get food then sit,” she said handing Jadur some blankets Jadur did as she was told. She was grateful to the Lakota and the Lord Vishnu. There were wooden bowls and soup and some cracked nuts there near the fire. Jadur helped herself to some of both, crumbled the nuts into her soup and went sat where she would not be in anyone’s way. As she ate, the tall dark one who found their camp came to mind and she felt as if he was somehow connected to her Glory. He did look quite familiar, but then she had traveled a long way for a long time? She could not be sure of anyone she had seen. She then began to wonder what did Glory look like? Had she changed? She would have to get her strength back in order to continue her search. She finished her food and a young woman was there to take her bowl and bring her more blankets. She was grateful. This was a vast improvement over the nights she spent on the death march with no blanket beneath her nor upon her. She folded one blanket upon the softest place, curled herself between the blankets and slept with Larobe and Glory still on her mind. Glory and Jadur both slept most of their first day here in the Lakota camp. One on one side of the camp and the other on the other side. Both dreamed of finding each other. Larobe came by in the early evening, but Glory was asleep. He and Fawn snuck a quick kiss and then he left. He did not want to be disrespectful to Immeintunka by hanging around the tipi of his unmarried daughter. “I will come back

tomorrow.” He whispered as they parted.

CHAPTER XLVI

Glory

G lory was in and out of consciousness most of her first two or three days or more here she didn’t know how long, but she wakened one morning when she was beginning to feel much better in the drab confinements of a small wigwam to the gorgeous face of Fawn and was startled. She sat up in her bed which was the mattress from her old shack and had been set opposite of fawn’s which was also a mattress set upon the floor of the tent. It was a very small shelter and there was barely any room between the beds; the ceiling which was pointed in the center barely accommodated the women if they stood at full stature and the floor was dry grass beneath dry animal skins. Both walls and ceiling were constructed of animal skin (leather or deerskin or both). There was a split at the front wall to allow ingress and egress. Glory looked across at Fawn and was stunned that her loveliness relieved the the drabness of this shelter. When she ed where she was, she swung her feet around and was sitting on the side of her bed with her feet in the small space between the beds; she was wearing a full length flannel night gown and she was reaching for her clothes while she still stared at Fawn. When she did this Fawn hurriedly sat up and smiled, she was fully dressed except for her leather head band and moccasins. She sat across from Glory with her feet beside Glory’s in the small space and said, “I am Fawn, your caregiver and I shall stay with you and tend to your needs.” Glory looked at Fawn and smiled and said, “Oh, I am Glory and I am alright.” She said this as she reached for her clothes which were stacked neatly at the foot of her bed. Glory would dress as fawn was except where Fawn wore a buckskin skirt that reached almost to her ankles, Glory wore buckskin pants that almost touched the ground. They both wore buckskin shirts but Fawn’s had red, yellow and white beads and tassels attached; Glory’s was plain. “I am fine,” she said. “And I can’t just lie around like I’m sick when I am not, now can I.” She said this as she tied the waist of her pants?

“No, I suppose not if you really feel alright, but still I am your caregiver and I must see that you are fine and must stay with you.” Fawn answered pleasantly. “Oh, I am sure that I am okay,” Glory said. Both women were dressed and standing now: Fawn in her buckskin ensemble with beads and tassels and Glory in her plain pants and shirt. Fawn had now donned her moccasins and tied her band around her two hanging braids; Glory too had moccasins on and had tied her hair with a satin scarf that let her plaits hang from beneath. “You know your time could probably be better spent doing something else.” She said. “So you should go to Immientunka and tell him I am better and able to take care of myself and when he sees me I am sure he will agree. However, I promise I will not wander far from this shelter and I will be here when you return.” She said earnestly as they went outside. When they walked outside, Immientunka was already standing there in his splendid beaded vest of many colors atop his buckskin shirt, and buckskin pants with short tassels attached to each of the outside seams, and beaded moccasins. His two braids hung to just behind his shoulders from beneath a multi colored band of beads. His stately brown face did not vary as he listened to them explain the situation to him and then he sent Fawn off to the other side of the camp. He and Glory were standing outside now and Glory could see that the new camp was arranged in a circle. As she looked around she saw that some of the shelters were conical and some were rectangular but they lacked any color except they where there were differences of the animal skin shades. However all of the shelters were very small and some even smaller than Fawn’s. But these were only temporary housing because this accumulated band of people had no need for permanent shelters because they had no place that they could call home. The area circled by the shelters was mostly dirt with some small patches of grass that had not been worn down by the human and horse traffic. Here there were several cooking areas with metal pots and clay bowls stacked around a fire pit with a large metal pot that hung on metal rods. This is where the cooking for the whole camp took place. Although there were some families still intact in this camp most were more fragmented than Immientunka and Fawn. Many here were orphans, widows and widowers. They were mostly the survivors of some massacre upon their original

village where they had lost most of their family ; and even though many were from different tribes, instead of many families here, there was simply one extended family. “Well,” he said to Glory. “It is good that you have come back to us at this time. We will soon be moving and we would not like our friends to be so far away from us. It would be good if you and Maura will come with us.” Glory had neglected her conversation with Immientunka while she surveyed her surroundings and now she answered him. “Thank you.” She said. “I appreciate the invitation and concern, but I am not certain of what to do right now. I don’t know where Maura is but I hope he returns before the camp is moved, then I could tell you what my plans are?” “Well, you think about it and if he does not return, I hope to see you later because you have decided to stay with us.” He then said as he walked off. “Since I have relieved Fawn of your care I must onish you to not stray far from the shelters or I will be neglectful.” Glory promised that she would not and watched this small brown man walk off (He was only small as compared to Maura but his wisdom was immense) and she knew he wanted her to stay but what could she do to aid in this war when Maura and finding her mother were always on her mind? She really wished for Maura because she knew that she would never go to work for the whites again, and if he doesn’t return how will she earn her way and even if they were to separate, at least she could decide one way or the other about her future. Hence her dilemma of searching for her mother alone or staying with the Lakota until Maura returned was a decision she had to make. Well, to dwell on Maura’s return would only bring worry which she could do nothing about so to relieve her anxiety, she decided she would walk around the camp and this would not only take her mind off Maura, but she would also get some exercise. While she walked, she gathered herbs she recognized among the wild grasses that grew in the areas behind the tipis that had not been worn down by the human and horse traffic; and she also went to the garden which was also behind the huts and had been cultivated to grow many vegetables including corn and cabbage. This garden with it flowering plants and ripened fruits and vegetables

was in abrupt contrast to the dreariness of the dwellings of the camp. Here there was greenness and blooms and colorful vegetables and fruits, and some of the beautiful women here both young and old with their long flowing braids wore cotton skirts and blouses of bright colors and zigzag patterns, thus adding themselves to the beauty of the garden. They were quite friendly to Glory and when she mentioned that she was going to prepare a meal they gave her vegetables. Nearly all the shelters here had short logs that had been turned upright or wooden chairs just outside the shelters and as she walked back toward the tipi of Fawn, she felt a wee nagging pain in her body and she was glad she hadn’t wandered far. Glory flopped down in one of the chairs and rested until her pain subsided and Maura came to mind again, but she pushed him aside since there was nothing she could do about it. And after resting for a while longer, she went to one of the fireplaces and took a couple of the bowls and then went to the front of Fawn’s tipi and sat and began to prepare the vegetables for cooking, but her thoughts again turned to Maura. This was the first time since they left the ranch that they were separated; and she missed him and hoped that he would come soon because she was really in a quandary about what she should do. She didn’t trust any white people enough to think that she could survive for long alone in their world but she was determined to find her mother. If Maura was with her at least they maybe could search without too much with the pale ones, but she knew that that was not the only reason that she wanted him back. When she realized that she actually longed for him, she said to herself, “Girl, you must not really be feeling well.” She smiled then and got on with her cooking. Later when Fawn had returned, they were sitting outside the tipi eating and conversing when Larobe came by. It was hard for Glory to believe that this tall black slender young man was the same shy boy who used to peek at her from the crack in the back door at the McCabe’s ranch. She, Fawn and he, chatted and chattered. They talked of what had transpired since they parted and they said what they would like to do and they spoke of Maura; but Glory could also see the gleam in their eyes when they looked at each other so she feigned felling ill and retired inside the hut.

In a few days Glory was again robust and the camp was moving further north into the hills to what was thought a safe place for the women and children and elderly so she had to decide what to do even if Maura had not returned. She was unsure if she should stay with the safe camp and wait for Maura or to go out on her own, because she knew had no chance of finding her mother in a camp but she was not sure that he would return. In the safe camp shelters would be erected and food and supplies would be stored along with weapons; and the scouts and warriors, including Immientunka, would then become roving parties with the camp as a base. She figured that she could live rather safely here but she would be restricted to such a small area when she had promised Vishnu that she would search the whole world for her mother if necessary. She continued to abide in the tent with Fawn since they would all be moving soon, there was no need for a shelter of her own, but her mother still occupied her mind. However Larobe continued to stop by every evening and one night as she lay inside the tipi, she heard Fawn and Larobe speaking of the new people. She heard him describe this dark brown lady who stared at him and she thought of Jadur, but never in her furthest thoughts did she think that her mother was just a few hundred feet away. Soon the day of moving arrived and there was much hustle and bustle afoot; supplies and food were being loaded onto layettes, shelters were being disassembled, children were playing, running and bawling; and what may have looked like chaos to a casual observer was truly organized labor. Each person had a job to do and the lives of all here might depend upon any of these jobs. Thus, when this dismantling was completed, there would be no trace that a camp was ever located here; the garden would be trampled under and the fire pits removed and all the shelters and utensils would be packed. Therefore there would be no indication of them ever being here and the children and others would quietly and orderly proceed to the next camp. Glory was troubled about going to the women’s camp; what of her mother and where was Maura when she needed him? Larobe had offered to take her into another town, but what could she do to protect herself when another situation such as the one with Madison arose? Besides how could she take him away from Fawn? She needed him. Who would protect Fawn if Larobe was off with her? At least she knew how to handle guns and Maura had packed a pistol and rifle with

her things, but how long could she last alone? However with or without Maura she would have to make up her mind soon for they had already started the move to the new camp. After much thought she decided that she would go it alone and bundled her things in blankets and changed from her moccasins to her knee-length buckskin boots, plaited her hair into two thick plaits, and let it hang about her head like the Lakota. She strapped her pistol and holster around her waist and affixed a strap to the rifle and draped it over her shoulder. With her hair banded and in just two thick plaits and she in her buckskins she more resembled a Lakota warrior than an African-Indian princess except for her womanly elegance. She was now ready for her sojourn. Because Maura had not returned Glory’s mood was solemn as she carried her things out to the pinto and tied them there when she was ready to leave. She had decided that she would travel to the camp with the others so that she would know where it was and then start out on her own but it was not with her usual vigorous attitude that she did these things. She mounted the spotted stallion and started to the procession. She turned for one last look back and then she saw him riding in a gallop atop the black mare; his locks flowing in the breeze while his hat strung around his neck and laid against the back of his head.; she recognized that wide grinning smile as he sped toward her. She turned the pinto and raced to meet him and when they neared each other, he leapt from his horse and ran to meet her and when he was beside her, she sprang from the horse into his arms. They fell to the ground embracing and rolling over from the impact of greeting each other, each smiling and grinning at the other. She never thought his return would be so emotional, but she felt loved, protected and betrayed all at once. She pounded his chest with both hands as they lay on the ground. “Where have you been?” She shouted as he grabbed both her hands? “Whoa, whoa,” he said, still smiling. “I never expected such a reception.” “Why did you leave me? Where am I to go? What am I to do?” She was almost hysterical now as she shouted these words. He folded her arms behind her and brought his lips to hers and kissed her. She kissed him back at first, and then broke away. “What are you doing, do you think

you can take advantage of me? She asked still not satisfied with his leaving her and staying so long?” “I didn’t know how else to shut you up.” He said. They were sitting on the ground now, his arms around her. Then she realized what had just happened and pulled away from him and looked him straight in the eye. “Oh, I am so sorry …. I didn’t mean assume that you had to come back for me…. but you see I didn’t know what to do or what I was going to do, but it was not your fault for not being here.” She hurriedly said and then she faltered and started to cry and fell back into his arms. “It’s okay,” he said as he enfolded her again. “It’s okay, I missed you too. I didn’t know what to do without you either.” He was soothing her now as he rubbed both hands up and down her back. “It’s okay now,” he assured her. Her crying didn’t last long and she backed away from him and stood up and he also got to his feet. “I am sorry.” She said. “But we had better get started or we’ll hold the others back.” She was very excited now though she never showed it but it reflexed in her glad eyes. “The women and children are going to a safe camp.” She said as she looked up into his face and they walked back to the horses hand in hand. “I don’t want to be in the camp and I was going to go out on my own and I didn’t know how I could make it alone. I didn’t mean to blame you.” She added. “Nothing is your fault, I’m sorry.” “It’s alright, I understand.” He said. “I have taken care of things and now I am ready to get on with our mission. I have become truly a free man and together we will overcome all.” “Uh huh,” she said slowly as she eyed him curiously. “We had better the others and we should tell Immientunka that we are going to move on. We can talk about ourselves along the way.” Glory said this realizing that he could go in leaps and bounds when it was talk of her being his wife. They mounted their steeds and rode to catch up to the others; Maura wanted to see those who had helped him when he first came here and Larobe, but as they rode, he knew things had changed now. He knew that Glory needed him and he needed her. Yeah, things had really changed. They rode along ing the others in order to catch up to Immeintunka who was

at the head of the procession but they both were smiling as they rode because they each felt the change in themselves. They knew that after he renewed his acquaintances, they would leave on their own again, but this time they were going to go east to find Jadur, and they will travel with a new understanding of what they mean to each other.

CHAPTER XLVII

Jadur

J adur is much better now and she is grateful for the Lakota and the care they have given her and the others but she is now able to take care of herself and help with the others. Eventually in the camp she was allowed by the young women to help tend the others, and she soon began to show them herbs and plants they had not known and many of those here are revived. Fawn’s duties now were to care for those from the death march. She and others cooked for them and cleaned and bathed them and their wounds. She saw the tremendous improvement in many when she followed Jadur’s directions and she was fascinated by this dark woman with silver hair. When they talked on the day that the camp was being dismantled they were packing away herbs outside one of the larger shelters where the sick and infirm people were. When she told her that Larobe had come from the east Jadur was excited and wanted to know how long since he came and she said. “I am very interested in him; how long since he came.” “He came from the east many seasons ago.” She told her. “Did others come with him?” Jadur asked excitedly and anxiously stopping her preparations. Fawn stopped too and looked at her not understanding the excitement that Jadur felt. “Yes they did. There were others who ed us and there was a man and woman who went to live among the pale ones.” She answered. “Where are they now; do you know?” She asked even more excitedly now? The camp was being disassembled and they were being urged by others to hurry now and after explaining that they could move no faster Fawn said to Jadur.

“The woman is here but I don’t know where the man has gone.” Jadur thought: could this really be, have I found my Glory? Could this be the end of my search? Would Vishnu be so kind? Then she looked to Fawn and asked. “Could you take me to her?” She could hardly contain herself now, and Fawn could see it in her eyes. “Why yes, I can, but why are you so interested?” she quizzed her. “If they are from …..” as she was speaking, Larobe rode up on his horse and she stopped. “You two hurry it up! Immientunka has already started the departure.” Larobe said glad that it was Jadur and Fawn who were lagging. Jadur looked up at him and said pleadingly: “The McCabe ranch, are you from the McCabe ranch?” He looked surprised. “Yes.” He said. “Yes I am.” When she saw the two riders ahead riding past the others Jadur dropped the bundle she had in her hand and started running as best she could. She stumbled and fell, but was back on her feet before Larobe and Fawn could get to her. As she came to her feet she tried to call to them, but they never heard her. She started to run and stumble behind them, but they never looked her way. She ran until she collapsed. Larobe looked at Fawn and they ran to catch up to her. When they caught up to her just as she was falling he asked Fawn. “Why did she ask about the McCabe ranch?” He was stunned. “I don’t know.” Fawn said shrugging her shoulders. “She was asking about you and Glory and then you came and she cried out ‘the McCabe ranch’ and commenced running.” They each held her beneath her arm and was leading her to a shady spot beside an old rumpled tree that still had a few leaves but she was still trying to call out, but her voice had grown weak and she could barely speak above a whisper. “Glory, my Glory, it is true, it is true, it is my Glory.” They walked her over to the tree and sat her down, but she was not one for sitting. She was still trying to

get up. “Hold on, hold on.” Larobe said while restraining her from getting back up. “What is it that you want?” “It is you.” She rasped and grabbed both his arms and looked him square in the face. “From the McCabe ranch. That is my Glory. I am Jadur.” Then it hit him, here was the one Glory was looking for. This was her mother. “Jadur,” he shouted. “Mother of Glory! Oh this is good! This is very good. I will get her for you if you will just not try to move!” He was almost shouting while still confining her. When she had calmed down and agreed to remain there he then said to Fawn. “You stay with her and I will get the others to place her on a layette.” He then mounted his horse and sped away but before he caught up to them, he was calling out, “Maura, Glory, wait up, wait up! I have news, I have news, it is Jadur; it is Jadur!” He shouted while still speeding toward them. Maura and Glory started to reign their mounts and Maura looked at him with surprise, but Glory turned her horse and rode straight for the tree where Jadur and Fawn were. When she arrived, she leapt from her horse, and ran to her mother and enfolded her in her arms while crying. “Mother, Mother, Oh Mother, Mother.” Jadur saw her and opened her arms. She too was crying. “Glory, Glory, my dearest Glory, I have found you.” Glory rushed into her arms and tears erupted in these two who had suffered more than most. They embraced there beneath the old tree and the years at the McCabe ranch, the years of separation, and all the indignities which each had suffered, washed over them. And as their tears mingled, it was as if mother and daughter were reed as one in a saline sea of pain and love.

CHAPTER XLVIII

Glory And Maura

N ow the hardest part of the trek began: before, these refugees from different nations had mostly camped in foothills, but now in order to find safety for their families, they made their way into the higher regions. Here the weather grew colder and since the ones from the death marches had ed them, they had more infirmed and they moved slower among the evergreen trees and saplings and steep uphills. The snow and ice which many had not experienced before begin to fall and accumulate making the way even more treacherous. Many times they had to dismount and many of the infirmed had to be carried by hand. The two old men died and were buried beneath the snow along with three of the old women. Hard times were prominent all about them as some of the children also became ill and also had to be carried. Still they trudged on looking for a safe place which could accommodate this band of grandmothers, grandfathers, mothers, fathers, children and warriors. Jadur lay on one of the layettes beneath blankets and leather hides as they trudged on through the snow and ice and Glory wrapped in a zigzag pattern brown and white blanket never left her side. They talked to each other almost constantly as she walked along beside her, however, they never mentioned the past atrocities committed against them–they only spoke of the future. They each had been driven by the need and desire to find each other but now that that search was over, they never mentioned what used to be as they sought a peaceful existence high in the black hills of Dakota. “It is good to have you here with me, mother, oh how I have prayed for this day,” Glory said oozing with the love only a lost and found daughter could have for a lost and found mother. “Yes I have missed you, but now I have you, it is good.” Jadur answered as she

lay on the layette. “But what are you to do now? What is to become of you?” “Hush now,” Glory smilingly said. “Now is not the time for plans. It is time for you to regain your health and then we will talk of our future.” “Yes,” Jadur said lovingly while looking up at Glory. “I shall get well and I will dwell with these people, but you are young and you should live your own life.” Then she dropped her head ever so slightly so that she was not looking at Glory and she seemed to be not looking at anything and her voice got very quiet and serious and she said; “Is there such a place in this land; is there a place here where you can determine your own life?” She then returned her smile to Glory and said. “You need that so that your children can be free.” “Mother I will stay where you stay, I will go where you go. You will be my life and my peace, and your freedom shall be my freedom.” Glory answered with all the dedication her heart could muster. “Hush child,” Jadur said as sternly as she could. “Jadur is an old woman; I have lived my life and I am going to finish my days without complaint. Vishnu has allowed me to rest my eyes upon you and I am grateful. I shall be content to live my life among these people doing whatever I can to better their lives. But you child, you should have a husband and children. If you can find a place in this world where you can raise them without fear they will be taken from you, you could teach them the things parents should teach children; not just how to be subservient in order to save their lives, but to do those things which are natural. “You know,” she continued more sunnily now. “Children need to play and dream and grow into adults who are free, self determined and creative and loving. And because I had to raise a child in captivity, I understand that need even more desperately and I know that you need to be free in order to raise a free child. Yes, this is how life should be and I want you to find that place and I will be happy knowing that you did.” “But mother I am free with you now and you are not yet an old woman and when you are well, you will be vibrant and full of life. There will be …” Glory started to go on but Jadur stopped her. “Hush now child,” Jadur cut her off. “I am happy that you are well and I am glad that I am free and I am glad that you are free; this has always been my life’s work and my prayer. At first I prayed for my freedom and Vishnu took me to the

swamps; then I prayed for your freedom and I learned that you had left the ranch and I made a vow to never give up searching for you and now Vishnu has brought you to me. Now all my prayers have been answered and my work can be fulfilled here with these kind people so now it is time for your life to begin. She then finished with a smile: “I am here and and I am happy; now you must do for Glory.” Jadur then closed her eyes as if to rest and Glory did not say anymore but she thought about the things her mother said. Just where was that place where she could be in charge of her own life. She had heard of a place called Canada, but she knew nothing about it: not even if it existed and not even if she could be free there. She was mulling over these thoughts when Maura appeared. He rode up beside her and looked down at her from his mount and smiled. Since his return, their relationship had changed. She no longer looked at him as just a man. Maybe not quite her man, but the possibility was much more palatable now. “Hello, how is this lovely brown woman today?” He said never missing a chance to compliment her. “I am just fine,” she said looking up at him. “But aren’t you the one with the sweet talk.” “I always talk sweetly to those who are sweet, it is my nature.” He said still smiling. Then nodding toward Jadur who lay on the layette with closed eyes he asked. “How is she?” “She is doing well, I am so proud and happy for her.” She said still looking up at him and smiling. Jadur was not sleeping, but she pretended to be. She didn’t want to say anything and interrupt the chatter between these two. “I’ve been thinking,” he said confidently. “Now that we have your mother with us, maybe I can occupy some of your thoughts . You see, I need a woman, but not just any woman. I need one who is strong and can endure certain hardships that are bound to come.” When she started to look at him curiously he hurriedly added. “You see I am not dictating to you and I am not so naive as to think we have conquered all and now we can live in peace. I know that there are many obstacles to come, and you and I, we can, I believe, kind of understand each other, and help each other over them.” He kind of stammered in the end. “You speak lovely and wise,” she said, walking more slowly and seeming to

mull some of things he said. “And I was glad to see you and it is good having you around again, but I can’t be sure we are ready for this husband and wife thing. We may be headed in different directions. Are you still planning to return to Cush?” “Yes, I am.” He spoke up gallantly now. And I want you to come with me. We can take Jadur and…” “But what will we find there?” She cut him off still musing and slowly walking and falling a little behind the layette? “Will there be turmoil or peace when we get there and how grueling will the journey be? We don’t want to rush into a situation that is worse than this one. We know many from Alkebulan have been brought here so is there a chance that we would be captured and sent here again? My dear man, there is much to think about and resolve before we go off on a journey that may never end, or may put us back into a slave situation.” When she finished she was standing with one hands on her hip and the other one fingering her chin as though she was deep in thought. He had stopped his mount when she stopped walking and sat astride his mount and smiled as he looked down at her. “Oh, most beautiful of women,” he answered. (For she was beautiful standing there in her buckskins and blanket wrapped around herself and satin head scarf with one plait escaping.) “I have thought about it but I haven’t made any specific plans.” He continued. “I have thought of many things, but this is a journey I must make because I cannot continue to live not knowing what has happened there. When I was imprisoned by chains, I could not think of these things because I was in no position to do anything about it. But now I am free, I must try to get there. I would very much like for you to go with me. I’ll it I have not given much thought as to how I will make this trip, but I need you, I want you, and I love you and it may be too hard for me to make this trip without you. You see all I have thought about since we parted was you and now that we are here, I don’t want to part with you again.” She was impressed by his speech, but she was not ready to leave her mother or embark on a sojourn that might kill her and she started to walk again, faster this time in order to catch up to the layette. “I have thought about you also since you were gone, and it is good knowing you are here, but there are things I must think over. It is all too much right now, I must tend to my mother.” She answered as

she hurried to catch up to the layette. “Surely,” he said as he rode off. “Think about it and please that I am incomplete without you.” And he rode off toward the front of the caravan. When he had gone, Jadur said. “There is a man for you, he speaks sincerely.” “He does, but I don’t know if I want to go galloping all over the world with him and what about you; I am not going to leave you. And do you want to make the trip? Are you able?” She asked with much concern. “Child, this trip is not for me.” Jadur answered her. “What would I do there that I cannot do here? No, that is your trip to make. He wants you. I believe he is a good man but it is for you to make up your mind. But don’t consider me, I am a happy old woman who will be even happier knowing you are doing what makes you happy.” “But I don’t want to leave you.” Glory said looking at her adoringly. “I have just found you!” “There comes a time when children must leave parents and live on their own,” Jadur answered with as much sterness as she could toward her loving daughter. She was really glad to have Glory but if Glory had a chance to live a different life she did not want to be a hindrance to that. “Yes,” Glory said seriously. “But under these circumstances ordinary logic does not apply, so I am not going to accept his proposal. He has long asked me to be his wife but before we were in dire circumstances and I didn’t know if he just wanted companionship to ease the tension of the situation. I still don’t know, but I have grown fond of him and I believe that he really cares for me but I will not leave you. And because I could never deny him the trip that he so wants to make, I must say no.” Jadur stirred a little on the layette and smiled. “You are correct in weighing these things but , I am not a reason in your decision. It is time for you to get on with your life” “Alright,” she said. “But she knew that any decision she made would involve Jadur. Jadur needed her and she was not ready to leave her.

CHAPTER XLIX

Larobe And Fawn

W hen night came they were now high in the mountains in a small clearing surrounded by huge boulders, and although they were very secluded in a snowy forest, sentries were still posted. Larobe was one of the sentries posted in the forest just beyond the camp this night when he heard footsteps softly treading the pine needles and new fallen snow which had found its way to the forest floor. He turned to find Fawn rushing into his arms. They kissed, then, he pushed her away. “What are you doing here? You know you are not to interfere with a sentry.” He whispered. “Shh,” she said. “Tomorrow slip away from the others and show me where you will be and I will come to you.” And then she was gone. And as always, she left his head spinning and if he was cold before she came, he was now very warm. The next day as they were moving deeper into the mountains, Maura rode up beside Larobe who was walking with the children and helping them along. “Well young fellow,” Maura said. “Are you still wanting to go to the homeland?” Larobe looked up when he heard Maura’s voice and mount. “It hasn’t been on my mind much lately. But sure, I am interested. Is it possible?” He asked. In reality, he could not think of anything lately, except Fawn.” “It sure is,” Maura said. “I got some information when we were living on the outside and I am going to act on it. I was wondering if you wanted to come along.” “Well sure,” he said, forgetting about Fawn for the first time in a long while. “You mean you are going!” he said excitedly. “Yes, I am going,” he said. “And I am not going to let anything stop me.”

“But how?” Larobe questioned. “I have learned there is a Chinaman with a boat who will take on engers to China.” Maura said. “And Yueng Ling says there are no white men in China so we wouldn’t have to hide when we get there. So although we will still be a long way from home, we would be free to find our way. This seems like our best chance to me.” This was news that Larobe craved because going home was always a thought reserved in the back of his mind but when he thought of Fawn he wanted her and did not want to leave her. He was torn. “Will it be very dangerous making this journey and the boat ride and do you think a wife could make this journey?” He asked. “Aha.” Maura laughed. “So my young friend is smitten also.” He continued. “I have asked Glory to come but I can’t be sure that any woman can make this journey, but if any woman can, she can. Frankly I can’t be sure that we can make it, but I must try. If you have a woman who is willing to try, sure bring her along. But I warn you, it is going to be a difficult trip and it will take a tough woman to make it.” He then rode off. That evening when everyone was getting ready to bed down for the night, Larobe picked a spot behind some great rocks a little ways from the camp with two tall pines that kept the snow away and gestured to Fawn. He then made his bed with the others but he did not sleep and when he was sure the others were asleep, he snuck away to the prearranged place. He waited until he got cold and then cleared the small amount snow which had managed to fall through the trees, folded his blankets and lay down between them. It wasn’t long before Fawn ed him. He felt the warmness and softness of her body as she snuggled up to him under the warmness of their blankets. They lay side by side holding each other beneath the warmth of the blankets. “We can’t stay here all night like this, he said nervously. “Someone will see us.” “I know,” she said. “But it feels so nice to be with you like this. When we are married, we can be together every night.” “But, with the war going on, you will have to stay in the camp. I will not be able to be with you every night.” He said still resisting.

“That is true,” she said. “Oh, but I wish there was another way.” “There may be,” he said. “Maura has a plan to go to Alkebulan. Would you go there with me?” “Ohhh, but I couldn’t,” she said sullenly, “My father needs me. My people need me. I could not leave in the middle of this war.” Then she said looking up at him. “I thought that this was your war too. I thought you were going to help us fight this war. You said so.” She was saddened. “But it is my war.” He said reassuringly. “This war is in Alkebulan also. The whites are there too. They brought me here. You would not be leaving the war. You would just be in a different area, but it is the same war.” He was lying on his back now and she on her side beside him. “You say that it is and I believe you.” She said in tears now and laid her head on his chest. “But although it is the same war, I can’t leave; I must stay here. If I left, I would feel as if I was betraying my family. I would never live with myself.” “I understand.” He said holding her closer. “Don’t you see how I have felt all this time? I was here when my people were fighting a war. Now I want to go there to be with them: To see my mother and father. They need me just as your people need you. I have a chance to go and I must take this chance or I will always be wondering what would have been or could have been.” They lay quietly in each other’s arms now, each understanding the other’s plight. She realized that what she wanted for them could never be. And he, who wanted ever so much to please her and make her his wife, knew that he had to take this one opportunity to see his homeland again. He began to kiss the wetness from her face and eyes. And soon he was kissing her mouth and holding her tenderly. This took them where they had never been before and he learned things about a woman he never knew and she about a man. They slept. They awoke before the others and each went back to their own place. There was sadness about both of them now that was borne of a love that could not be fulfilled, yet there was a new strength in them that allowed them to love but not repress one another. Yes they would always be tied to each other; such is the nature of true love.

CHAPTER L

Glory And Maura

A fter some time, the caravan was at the place where the camp would be erected and Maura went looking for Glory and found her and Jadur near the center of the procession. Although the whole convoy would bed down here tonight and busy themselves building the camp tomorrow, Maura had different plans. Jadur smiled at him and he smiled and inquired of her health. She responded that she was well and wished him well. He then said to Glory, “I would like to talk to you. The time is drawing near when I must leave.” “I will meet you over near the east edge of the camp, she said, busying herself clearing out an area near some gigantic boulders. “I need to talk to you also, after I finish here.” “Oh go ahead,” Jadur said. She was now sitting up in the layette which had been disconnected from the horse while Glory was preparing a place for them to sleep “I can make out without you for a while or someone will see to me if I need something.” Maura dismounted and tethered his mount to one of the nearby trees and they started out as it was just getting dark. The stars were beginning to wink in and out of the billowing clouds above, but the moon had not yet made its appearance and as they walked, she looped her arm through his. They continued until they came to a flat section secluded from the rest. He turned toward her and her lips met his. He was surprised and when they parted she placed her finger on his lips and shushed him. “Shhh,” she said. “Before you say anything, I want you to know I have thought a lot about what you said. I know now that you care for me and I care for you and

I believe that under different circumstances we could make a life together, but as it is, I have just been reunited with my mother and she needs me. She has not had much joy in her life and I do not know how much longer she will live, but I intend to make her remaining life as cheerful as I can. I don’t want to lose you but I cannot leave her. I hope you can understand this.” He was surprised but then he was not; he knew how much she wanted to find her mother, but the kiss was a surprise and knocked him for a loop. He didn’t expect her to leave Jadur, but he had hoped that Jadur could come along, but when she kissed him he was just as lost as Larobe was when he was kissed by Fawn. The night was growing colder now and they sat. She wrapped the blanket which she had brought around them. “I don’t know what to say,” he said. “How can I argue with what you said? I have suffered but I can never say I suffered as much as she. How can I ask you not to stay with her? She deserves the likes of you. Oh, but I want you so much. I will bring her with us. We will both care for her. We can …” She cut him off here. She was shaking her head slowly and looking at him. Her eyes twinkled in the starlight. “No, no, no, no,” she said. “She will not come. She does not want to come. She is content to stay with the Lakota. She knows better than I that you love me and that I love you but I cannot go with you, I want to go with you but I cannot.” she said. He grew more somber and moved closer to her. He put his arm around her shoulder and said as softly as he could.” Since we left the ranch, I have waited for this moment, to know that you care for me as I do you. It does my heart well to hear this from you. But it also breaks my heart to hear you say you will not come with me. Yet I can ask for no more. I would not expect anything less of you. If Jadur will not come, I know what kind of woman and what kind of daughter you are and I know you will stay with her. I love you even more for that.” She turned to him, “Do you have to go? I need you.” She said. “I found out how much in the time you were gone.” “Yes, I have to go. I must find out what has happened to my home He answered more naturally this time.” He continued. “But I will return; I won’t ask you to wait, but I will come back and I will find you. I have found the one woman who

can give life meaning; who can get me through all obstacles. The one …” “Oh hush,” she said, cutting him off with a kiss just as the moon peeked from its hiding place behind the billowing ivory clouds and now looked down on them like a heavenly voyeur. But the drifting clouds hid his shameless face and gently wafted soft snowflakes upon those two lovers, and though the night became as tender as a mother tending her babes, it could not rival the tenderness of these lovers.

CHAPTER LI

Maura And Larobe

T he men had changed from buckskins into clothes of the whites so that they did not appear as Tuleg or Lakota when they left the camp and they rode due west until they came to the gushing river and then followed the river into the mountains. The higher into the mountains they went the colder it became, but both men had also changed into long underwear beneath their other clothing and they rode with blankets around their shoulders. Still it was too cold to travel at night so they camped with a campfire each night. They steered clear of settlements too–their only purpose was a return to Alkebulan and they mostly rode in silence but when they camped at night they talked of expectations. One night as they huddled side by side under their blankets around a small camp fire canopied by evergreens laden with snow somewhere in the Colorado mountains, Maura spoke to Larobe in just above a whisper while the icy winds stung his face. “You know, I don’t know just what to expect on this trip. We may have to shoot our way through something. You can use that gun, can’t you?” He asked Larobe pointing to the pistol holstered on his hip. “Sure I can, “I can shoot a pine cone off a tree at fifty paces.” Larobe answered; he too in just above a whisper. Although they were in very secluded area they were wary because they were hunted men and danger could be lurking anywhere. “Yeah, but can you shoot a man at three paces or a woman for that matter? And can you slit a man’s throat while he sleeps?” Maura queried. Larobe blew his warm breath on his cold hands and thought for a second or two before he said: “I don’t know, I never killed anyone up close. I don’t even know if I have killed anyone at all but I have fired at them and I believe I have killed.”

“Well, I’m here to tell you,” Maura went on still warming his hands. “Before we get to that boat there might be any number of things that we will face. I got to know that you can kill when our lives depend on it–up close or from afar–we will have no time for hesitation. This is what we must do. I have seen enough of the whites to know that they are dead serious when they intend to eliminate, enslave, humiliate or harm us in any way.” “There will be no hesitancy on my part.” Larobe spoke up. “This is good because it is the only way we will survive.” Maura answered and then he said. “I’m going to tell you a story about the day you met us in the forest. “Some men we worked for and some others had harmed Glory. I mean really hurt her. You know the shape she was in? Well, I snuck into that town and I slit four of their throats–two while they were asleep. I took all their money and weapons and I fled. I wanted to wait and kill more and I wouldn’t have objected to dying to do this but I wanted to go home. I wanted to get back home so bad that I neglected my right to kill those who treated her so badly. He continued. “I still want to get back home and I will kill to get there. I will kill, even though to you and to others, it may seem the ones I kill were not likely to impede me. But if I think that there is a possibility that they might help someone to thwart my quest for my homeland, I will kill them because I am now free for the first time in a long while and I don’t intend to be any other way. Do you understand me?” He asked emphatically. “I understand.” Larobe said haltingly. “Now hear me good,” Maura said. “I can’t travel with you unless you understand this. You see I don’t pretend to be right about everything or that you don’t have an opinion and a right to assert it. That comes in when we have time to evaluate certain situations; but if you or I have to kill on the spur of the moment, that action is not open for debate.” Then he smiled and said. “Oh, we can consider what should happen next time the situation arises but for that time, there will be no time to argue. Now if you have qualms about this, you had better turn back now.” Larobe thought about it for a few seconds and then said, “No qualms. I too am dead set on getting home and I will do what I have to do to get there.”

“Fine,” Maura said. They clasped hands and embraced. “Now you take first watch and don’t let the fire die.” He said as he got ready for sleep. He curled up near the fire in blankets that the Lakota had given them and gave Larobe a wry grin before he tilted his hat over his eyes. Larobe thought about what he had just agreed to. He tried to picture situations where he would have to kill up close. It seemed a far-off thing right now, but he knew he had to develop a mentality of kill or be killed if they were to succeed in their mission. The snow was deeper the higher they went and the way was slow the next day, and as they and their horses tramped through the snow in this thick cold forest on the mountain side; they talked of their lives. Maura told him about Deadeye and Pecos, and about Stilly and Yeung Ling and how he had glimpsed them stealing out of town that day. Larobe talked about Fawn and Immeintunka and the scouting party, the wagon of weapons and the ones they discovered from the death march. After some weeks they reached the summit of the mountains, and started down the other side still following the river as Yeung Ling had said. They had been careful to skirt all settlements and cabins and outposts and they had met no one on the way up, but as they made their way down, spring was nearing and the weather was warming and there were many more campsites and outposts to look out for; but mostly they met the native people who somehow were upon them before they could detect them. They camped and ate with the Siksikas who were a totally fierce people who killed all whites who entered their territory. They met the Oceti, the Wichita, the Pawnee, the Kichac, the Hidatsa, the Arapaho, the Cheyenne, the Comanche and many others. Most of them had been driven from their homes, many from as far away as Georgia. They explained that there were not nearly so many of them as there once were and they related stories of whole villages being wiped out by murder or by diseases that they had not known before the whites came. The pales ones betrayed and massacred them even after they had welcomed them. They also told of lies, and broken promises and treaties and now that there were not so many; many nations now camped together: that is Sioux with Lipan, Comanche with Arapaho and so on.

The people also told of the Zuni who lived long ago and built houses out of white mud that glistened like gold and of the Pueblo who carved houses out of stone mountains. They spoke of the Youraper who called themselves the children of the Sun. They knew of the Winnebago who helped the whites in their fight against their King, and then were betrayed and they knew the Iowa, the Missouri and Illinois. They related stories of the old civilizations of the Incas, the Thayas, the Mayans, the Aztecs and the Tulegs whenever they talked of cities, villages, art, or statues and monuments. They also told about the trade that took place with the China people, and the burnt skin people (like Larobe and Maura) who came in long boats long before the pale ones came. They talked of their brothers from Buddahland who brought many herbs and spices and they spoke of the people who walked across the ice in the frozen North but all these things had ended now since the pale ones came. They spoke of the great chiefs of old such as Black Hawk, Tecumseh and Handsome Lake. They also talked about the ones who were still waging war against the whites such as Red Cloud, Sitting Bull, Cochise, Dull Knife, Little Wolf, Magnus Colorado, and Chief Manuelito. They told of powerful legends such as “Blood Clot” and “Rabbit Boy”. They told of numerous people, villages, cities, stories and legends. They imparted knowledge of their people from the frozen north to the frozen south, from the great ocean east to the great ocean west, all of whom had been betrayed by this curse they called the pale ones. However all these people, although they had different customs, had one thing in common and it was that all the names for themselves, though different, they meant the same thing–The people. Whatever group came upon Maura and Larobe, whether they were Cherokee or Choctaw or any other of the natives, and whenever they explained what Apache or Sioux or Cheyenne or any other name meant; it always meant the people. And as these two men traveled across this land toward the great sea to China, they learned of the greatness of the people who called them brothers and made them welcome in their camps and villages. Now when these two descended from the frozen mountains, the river was widening and becoming fiercer and they could see more mountains due west, but where they were once surrounded by freezing temperatures and mountain forest, they were now in the midst of deep canyons and burning hotness. They shed their winter garb and now donned sleeveless buckskin vests, cotton pants, and

the buckskin moccasins of the Lakota. They trekked on, their black skin glistening with sweat in the glowing sun. The hardest part of the journey was still ahead of them–they had been able to avoid the whites in the mountains, but now in this flat hot land as they headed toward this place called California, they didn’t know what to expect. Maura had about $1200 he had taken from Madison and the others and Larobe had about $200 which Immeintunka had given him but they would need much more than this. Yeung Ling told him that age to China for a stowaway was $2000 but from China to Alkebulan, he did not know. “We are going to have to rob and steal and maybe even kill in order to accumulate enough money.” Maura said to Larobe as they rode astride their mounts along a narrow sandy brown path high above a deep canyon streaked with red and white walls that reflected the sun at them. “You understand this,” Maura asked? “We don’t have time to work, besides too many things can go wrong when you work for the whites.” “I understand.” Larobe replied. “Certain things have to be done; that’s just the way it is.” As they continued to ride there were not as many places to hide in this land of rocks, canyons and mesas so their scanning for others had to be more vigilant. Sometimes they rode together. Sometimes one would ride the lower plains while the other rode the higher mesas but they were always within eyesight of each other like Pecos and Deadeye, but they grew more careful as they neared the communities of the whites. Now they camped by themselves instead of with the natives because they didn’t trust the natives who lived near the white settlements. Immientunka called them hang around the fort families who would betray you, so they camped alone with one standing watch while the other slept. Whether he was standing lookout or riding alone, Larobe often thought of Fawn and their last night together; he wished the circumstances were different, however now as they neared more and more settlements of whites, his mind turned to the things that he and Maura had talked about. He forced Fawn from his mind as he thought about their situation and he knew just what he had to do in dire situations of life and death, but in cases of killing for money this was very

troubling to him. Although his vow to kill for money distressed him he would kill if necessary but he reasoned it was because he had not received the cruel treatment that Maura had that he had reservations about killing for money. He also recognized that since he left the McCabe farm the only he had with whites was when the scouting party took the arms wagon or one of the other raids and his thoughts were not murderous then; but he had killed when it became a matter of life or death; yet he was troubled about killing for money. Furthermore Maura had warned him that he may have to act subservient in some cases to gain an advantage in a situation but it seemed such a long time ago when Maybelle and the others taught him the demeanor of a good slave. He hoped he had not forgotten if it meant saving their lives but it had been so long since he had played that role, he didn’t know if he still could. He dreaded that that time would ever arise. But what really worried him was not whether he would do whatever was necessary to save his life or Maura’s life, but could he kill in order to steal. He tried to imagine what it was like to slit a sleeping man’s throat or blast the guts out of one who stood only inches from you just to take his money. He even wondered about Maura, Maura had killed those who slept and Madison and Clem, but that was in a state of rage, but to kill in order to get money; could he? That would take cold callous nerves. Just to crawl up to a sleeping man and slit his throat in order to take his money, even if it was a pale one, was repulsive to him. If he had worked in the fields and felt the lash or had been made to wear the bit or seen his mother and sisters raped and beaten or murdered, he could call on these episodes to fuel revenge emotions, but he had not and could not. And although he had seen much suffering on the ship and he knew that many people had been killed, captured, beaten, and maimed and all this unfair treatment was a reason to hate the whites; the emotion that this evoked was not murderous–only to do what must be done to remain free. Therefore although he was hesitant about certain things he rationalized that since he was in war, killing was not murder and he had promised Maura that he would do whatever it takes. This was what he had agreed to and he was determined to do so if the need arose. However his hesitancy about killing for money caused

him to think about Romokoko, Allah, Jesus, the Creating Spirit, Vishnu; and the Spirits he had heard many others call on. Now he was not much of a praying man, but he did mention the Creating Spirit in his conversations now and then, but he had never taken the time to investigate the meaning of these Deities, or pray to them. But if they were as powerful as those who appealed to them said they were, they would guide him in his time of need. They would either keep such a situation from him or it would be their will that he kill because he had told Maura he would kill and he would. He decided to ask Maura about these Deities. After this with his mind made up and his plan to question Maura about the Spirit, his attention returned to the more pleasant thoughts of Fawn.

CHAPTER LII

Enlightenment

L ater when they were riding together along a sandy stretch with nearby rocks that could be used for cover, Larobe questioned Maura. He had heard him mention Romokoko at one time or another. “Romokoko,” he said. “Is that the same as the Creating Spirit of the Tulegs and Lakota and just how did he come to be?” “Well,” said Maura,” smiling over at him from his mount. “You are not losing your nerve are you?” “No, it’s not that,” he answered. “It’s just that I hear others call on the Spirit but they all use different names, and since we don’t know what is ahead of us, I figure I’d better learn all I can about whatever it is that can give me an advantage.” “Well,” Maura said as they continued to mosey along the sand. “As much as I know myself I will tell you. You see from my parents I learned Romokoko is from the Sun. They taught me that in Kimet, it is said that the Great God Ptah discovered himself and came out of the primordial waters–that is the first waters!” He explained. “Then In order to create the world, he first made the sun, called Aman-Ra, and he charged Ra to create all life. Ra made two of all living things and the first human he made was Romokoko. Now when Romokoko and his mate had populated the world, the sun, Ra, called him to sit with him in the heavens in order to intercede for all the humans he had made. “You see Ptah, the all-powerful basks in the glory of all that he created; the sun, the planets the moon, stars, water, wind and earth and they all pay homage to Him; but Aman Ra, since the humans he made can be right or wrong has a duty to watch over them. So he called Romokoko to abide in the heavens with him to watch over humans. And because he is human, Romokoko cherishes humans but because humans can do right or wrong he intercedes for them and he delivers all

human prayer to Aman Ra who receives power directly from the Great God Ptah. But since Ptah is busy bathing in the splendor of his creation, Aman Ra has all authority over humans but if Romokoko pleads for you, Ra will grant his request. This is the story my parents taught me of the great God Ptah, Aman-Ra and Romokoko who watches over us from his abode with the sun. “Wow that is very interesting,” Larobe said as their horses trudged on through the sand. “But then what about Vishnu and Jesus and Allah and the Creating Spirit? Are all of these the same as Ptah or Aman-Ra or Romokoko and are just called by a different name?” “You could say that,” Maura answered nudging his mount on. “That’s the way I see it, but each has His own story or conception of Who They are. You see, Vishnu is The God of those of the land of Buddha. He is the creating God but he is so splendid that one cannot look on Him in his pure form because the sight is so awesome and terrible to the human eye yet he abides in all things. So He is said to have many forms and he changes to many different shapes–He even changes to human form and appears on earth in order to help those in need.” “Well if He is the Creating Spirit then is He the same as Ptah?” Larobe asked. “Yes you could say that.” Maura answered as he continued to urge his horse through the sand. “Now the Creating Spirit of these people who has made us welcome among them is just that: The Spirit which created everything; however there are many stories of how He accomplished it. You heard many of them when we camped with them in the mountains.” “I know, I know.” Larobe said keeping his pony up with Maura. “But that leaves others of whom I have heard such as the Lord Jesus. I heard Maybelle and the others call on Him many times, do you know that story too?” “Well not to say I know exactly how it is but as far as I have learned is this.” He said as the sand became less dense and his horse was able to move faster. “The story of Jesus is that the almighty God who created the heavens and the earth and man knew that man was sinful and would go on sinning and never reach the kingdom of God because of their sin. Therefore he found a virgin who was without sin and planted his seed in her and when the child was born he walked the earth teaching all the ways of God until He was attacked and murdered. However, in three days He arose from his burial tomb and went back to his

Father. And in the end all who believe this can be cleansed of their sins because in his innocence, his death paid for the sins of all who believe in him. And once cleansed, the sinful people can then ascend to heaven.” “Wow, man, that is a powerful story and all it calls for is a belief in the story in order to be on the right side of the Great Spirit?” He asked then continued before Maura could answer. “I think it takes a lot of faith to believe that but I would be willing to do it if I am sure I am on the right side; but what of Allah? Maura was glad to be able to talk about such things without repercussions and he continued to talk as they rode. “The story of Allah is that he is the One God who has always been.” Maura answered. “He made this known some time ago by selecting a man who could not read or write to be his Messenger. He needed a prophet because men had become licentious and women promiscuous. This man Muhammad, wrote down the word of Allah in a book called the Quran and fought a war with the infidels (the unbelievers) for the sake of righteousness and many of them were his own people. Of course there is more to the story that I haven’t heard but this is the extent of my knowledge about it.” He continued. “Now me, I pray to Romokoko because that is who I grew up with but after hearing all the stories and legends, I have come to the conclusion that all these Deities are the same, but are called by different names by different people.” Larobe thought for a moment and dropped behind somewhat but quickly caught up and asked. “How do you come to know all this?” “It is just the stuff I have gleaned from others that I have come in with,” Maura answered. “I can’t be sure that I am relating it correctly but it is the understanding that I have and, to me They are the same.” Larobe looked over at Maura and said as they were now coming upon a small clump of forest. “It seems conceivable to me that all the Spirits are all the same One. And if so, then the Creating Spirit is just One regardless of the many names He has and we are his children. So that make us and all these people we know who have been kind to us the children of Creating Spirit which is the same as Ptah or Aman-Ra or the Sun, but then what about the pale ones?” He asked. Maura laughed and looked back over his shoulder as he rode ahead toward the small oasis. “They, my young friend, I am sure are the children of the devil.”

That night, he and Maura had found some huge boulders to camp beside inside the small forest and while he was on his watch atop one of the rocks, Larobe decided to pray. He didn’t want to offend any Spirit, so he began on his knees with his arms outstretched to the heavens: “Oh Great Spirit of all. Mighty is he that has created the heavens, the earth and life, and mighty is his bounty of which I have taken much and am most grateful for. But now I beseech you to guide my way in my search for home and help me to overcome all obstacles that beset me. This is my prayer O Great Spirit and I pray it does not offend You.” He felt better now, much of his apprehensions were gone. He felt that his prayer had somehow lifted burdens from his shoulders. He felt free and he felt he had another ally; he was no longer worried whether he could kill for money or any other reason if it facilitated his journey home–he knew he could.

CHAPTER LIII

Maura And Larobe

A nd now they came to the place where the river turned and headed south and this is where Yueng Ling said they must go north. They continued to travel following the directions of Yueng Ling; sometimes they rested during the day, sometimes they slept at night as they traveled through flat lands. They knew that they were getting close to the place where the Chinaman Captain was because of the new mountains ahead and they were going to have to get more money soon so it was time to start their plunder. They rode now skirting the bottom of the mountains to stay near cover and before long they could barely spy what looked like a settlement and they rode close enough to see. “Now is the time.” Maura said. “We have got to start getting some money.” “Yeah, I understand, but how are we going to get it?” Larobe asked. “I don’t know yet, but the way I figure it we are going to have to go into one of the settlements. So let’s move in closer so we can survey the town while we get a plan together.” Maura said. That night they maneuvered to a high mesa where they could not be seen but it was a moonlit night and they could observe the goings on in the town. They did not start a fire; they still had some hard bread in their supplies. After they had eaten they laid on their stomachs and peered over the cliff overlooking the town. There was not much activity tonight. Now and then someone would wander in or out of the Saloon but for the most part, this town was generally deserted at night. The town sat in a dusty plain but the forest leading to the mountains was just a few hundred yards from the plateau where Larobe and Maura camped. It wasn’t much of a town; just a main street with a general store, a saloon, a stable and a corral at one end. There was, a jail, a boarding house and a restaurant and a

couple of other buildings, some of them were unfinished, that they could not make out. Outside of town were ten to twelve houses scattered about and they could see a few more partly finished houses further out. “One of those buildings is probably a bank.” Maura said. “But from the looks of this town, there won’t be much in it.” “You are not thinking about robbing it are you?” Larobe asked very interested. “No, it’s probably not worth the trouble.” He answered. “But I’m trying to think just where the money in this town is?” “From the looks of it, there isn’t much anywhere.” Larobe said. Then Maura got an idea. “You know, I’m looking around and you know what I see?” Maura asked. “Not much.” Larobe said. “I see buildings which are half finished. I see land that needs plowing. I see a settlement that is just getting started and I believe they could use some help.” He said excitedly! Both men sat up then. “What you talking about? You said we don’t have time to work?” Larobe asked puzzled. “Not work, my boy, I’m talking about selling.” Maura said smiling at him. “Selling, what we got to sell?” Larobe asked still confused. “I’m gonna sell you my friend.” Maura answered. Larobe thought this was incredulous. “Hey man, stop joking!” He said. “No joke, it just came to me.” Maura said getting more serious. “From the looks of it they probably don’t have $100 in that bank but some of them got money they are holding on to, while they struggle to build their homes. Now they could really use some labor help. So I figure, since I’m older, I’ll march you into that town and sell you to one of them.”

“Whoa, whoa, now hold on there you are not going to sell me to nobody.” Larobe said eying Maura suspiciously. “Look it’s a good plan because I’ll be real mean like the overseer and you’ll act so afraid and be glad to be rid of me, so they won’t put no chains or nothing on you. And even if they do, after dark, I’ll just ride back and get you and we’ll high tail it out of there.” Larobe was still eying Maura in disbelief and now said while motioning with his palms as if he was stopping Maura. “No, no, no, man, do you think that after all we have been through to be free, I’m just going to go on down there and volunteer to be captured? No, no, I’m not keen on that idea at all.” “Look at it this way.” Maura said waving his arm across his body as if to wave away Larobe’s resistance. “Now I would be willing to try it myself and let you sell me, but it might arouse suspicion if you were trying to sell me.” And then he added. “Look, you are not going to be unarmed. We’ll strap a knife to one thigh and a gun to the other.” Larobe kind of acquiesced after that and said: “If I was going to go along with this, where would this take place? You are not just going out in the middle of the street and hold an auction?” He asked. “No, No,” Maura answered. “I say we watch the town from here. On the night when the saloon is most crowded, that’s where we will go.” “Okay, okay, say I go along with this plan but what if there are no takers?” Larobe asked still skeptical. “Then we rob the place!” Maura said smiling. After some more convincing by Maura the two men decided that this was their plan. They hung out in this area for three days and since they were both old hands at hiding their tracks and creating false trails, they cut three or four trails through the forest and brush. They also scouted the forest and hills in order to have an escape route. Each of the trails that they blazed went nowhere, but they made two routes which they covered that would be their escape routes. That evening they watched about twenty men enter the saloon; they figured there weren’t going to be many more than this so the time was right. Larobe changed

his buckskin shirt for a cotton one and they chopped off the sleeves raggedly and cut off the bottom of his pants to above his ankles. He also went barefooted and mussed his dreadlocks. “Boy you looks jes like a good ole slave nigger.” Maura kidded. “Knock it off man.” Larobe said. “I’m already doubtful about this plan.” “Don’t worry.” Maura reassured him. “It’ll work.” The two men broke their camp, packed their supplies, and rode into town. When they reached the saloon, Maura gave Larobe a reassuring look, while Larobe who looked unconvinced took a deep breath and dismounted. “Now you got to look like you scared and want to be left here and I’ll be mean as I can be.” Maura said as he dismounted and tied a short rope around Larobe’s waist and they started for the low-cut swinging doors. “Don’t forget the slave talk, how Maybelle taught you. We got to make this look real,” Maura whispered. When they stepped through the doors into this dusty lair with Maura tugging Larobe in his slave attire, there were about eleven men standing at the bar and another twelve or so sitting at tables and all eyes in the room immediately turned to them. The tables were to both sides of the room with a wide space in between that led straight to the bar and Maura strode straight through this ageway almost dragging Larobe as he yanked the rope. “What you niggers want wandering in here?” The bartender asked nastily while standing and suspiciously eyeing them, and fingering his weapon beneath the bar. “I would like to see the owner.” Maura said proudly. “I got business for him.” “I’m the owner.” One of them said, standing up from one of the tables and walking over to them. “What can I do for you boy?” Larobe who stood silently with his head down and his hands clasped as in a prayer in front of him was eyeing each person in the room. They had not been able to conceal a gun on his person that would a buyer’s inspection, but he could feel the blade of the knife pressing against his inner thigh. He had never believed in this scheme, but Maura had convinced him that they had to take risks. “I got this here boy here for sale and I want to sell him right here in your place.”

Maura said very friendly. He too was watching every move of those in the room. “Ha, ha, ha, ha, ha!” They all laughed. This caused Maura and Larobe to tense up. “What’s so funny?” Maura asked puzzled and edgy. He knew when whites laughed like this, nothing good was going to happen. “Boy this heah is Calleyforney. We don’t buy and sell niggers here.” The owner said and continued laughing. Maura looked at Larobe and Larobe looked at him and they said in unison. “Well in that case, this is a stick up!” And in one motion Maura wrapped his arm about the owner’s neck while sticking his pistol into his ear. In the same instant, Larobe was behind the bar and locked the bartender’s arm behind him with his knife at his throat. “Okay, the rest of you just lay any guns or weapons you have on the tables and the bar and move over to that side.” Maura said to the others who had suddenly leapt to their feet. He then said to Larobe. “Check the back room.” Larobe peeped into the backroom just in time to see a Cushnite darting out of the back door. “Get him!” Maura yelled while pushing the pistol harder into the owner’s ear. Larobe pushed the bartender aside, grabbed his gun from beneath the bar and gave chase. Don’t shoot!” Maura yelled. “A gunshot could be just as bad as letting him get away!” The runner was no match for Larobe and he caught him in a few strides, leapt upon his back and as they fell to the ground he wrapped his knife blade around an old black man’s throat. They got up and walked back to the saloon; Larobe stopping to pick up the sawed off shot gun he had dropped during the chase and putting his knife away. It only took a few seconds for Larobe to run this old black man down and he even started to apologize for knocking him down, but thought better of it. However this presented another dilemma–he had concluded that he could kill whites; but what if he had to kill this old black man? In the meantime Maura had herded all the patrons to one side of the room. “Hurry up!” Maura shouted to the bartender who was stuffing all the cash from a metal box into a sack. He said to Larobe. “Put him over there with the others and

get their guns.” Then he said, “I want all of you to place all your money on the tables in front of you. Hurry up!” He shouted! Then to Larobe he said. “Gather their money, hurry! Be sure you get all their guns. Check their bodies!” Maura was barking orders to Larobe as he held the whites at bay by pressing his pistol even harder into the owner’s ear. He kept the pistol shoved into the ear of the owner who was doing all he could not to scream from the excruciating pain while Larobe fetched the sack from the bartender and another burlap sack from the bar and collected all the guns and money from the table. He searched each patron adding a few wallets and a couple more guns and then nodded to Maura who still held onto the owner. Larobe stood at the door with the sacks slung across his shoulder and the shot gun trained on those in the saloon as he waited for Maura. “All right,” Maura bellowed as he backed to the door where Larobe was. “We are leaving now, thanks for the contributions, next time we are in town we will be sure to stop by.” He spoke in remembrance of Deadeye and Pecos–he knew they would be proud of him because they always had sassy words. Outside Maura pushed the owner to the ground with a hard shove. Larobe had already mounted and he kept the shotgun trained on those who stood at the door of the saloon watching while Maura mounted his horse. They rode as hard as they could back to their camping area then they each took one of the hidden routes toward the mountains, still riding hard. They met again about two miles into the forest but they didn’t know if they had been followed so they headed into the higher areas. When they reached a higher point they stopped and looked back over the trail they had just covered. They could see horsemen below riding in and out of the forest in a haphazard way and they slowed their pace and continued north. When they had traveled another ten miles or so they finally stopped to rest. They chose a clearing high up a rocky mountain dismounted and sat with their backs to a hard stony wall that allowed them to see for some distance in the direction they had just traveled,. “Whoa, man, that was some ride.” Maura panted. “That was some feat.” Larobe answered also breathing fast and regular. “Man, I didn’t know if we were going to pull that one off.” They looked at each other

and laughed. “Do you think they are following us?” Larobe asked. “No, I don’t think so, I believe our decoy trails and tracks threw them off.” Maura answered. “Besides we just stole their money-we ain’t runaway niggers– ain’t no real emergency in that.” They laughed nervously again. “How much do you think we got,” Larobe asked? “Not enough for them to follow us this far and high.” And they laughed again. They were laughing to relieve the tension. Neither man had been involved in such a robbery before nor did they know how tense they had been. Now they sat bantering and nervously laughing to relieve that edginess. After they had settled their nerves some Maura asked Larobe: “When you ran that one down, would you have shot him if you couldn’t have caught him?” “You know,” Larobe said, getting serious. “That would have created a problem because I hadn’t thought about that–that I might have had to shoot an African, but in the end, I think I would have. I would have had to, but I’m grateful to the Creating Spirit that I didn’t have to. I even felt bad about having to knock him down and I almost apologized to him.” Maura laughed again. “Now that would have been funny; I’m sorry I had to knock you down sir, but it was either that or shoot you. You do understand, don’t you sir?” He said still laughing. Larobe was not laughing now. “I’m serious, man. Would you expect me to shoot a Cushnite?” It was Maura’s turn to be serious now. “Look!” Maura said, dead serious now. “Once we commit to an action, I expect you or me to do whatever is necessary to conclude it and if that includes killing an African, then so be it.” Larobe thought for a minute. “Yeah, I suppose you are right, in fact, I know you are; it was just a situation I hadn’t anticipated.” Larobe said reg and being thoughtful. “We have to do what we have to do but I see that saving of our lives can be just as painful as failing to save them.” “I don’t think so,” Maura said still quite serious. “You just they will have no pity if we are caught.”

“I know that you are right again and I will keep it in mind.” Then he added changing the subject. “Shouldn’t we see how much we got?” “I think we should move along a few more miles first, and then stop to check when we are sure no one is following us.” They let the horses rest some more minutes and then remounted. They did not ride so hard now; they just moved along at an easy gait for a few miles, checking behind them as they rode until they finally stopped to rest in a wooded area. When they checked their loot, they had a little more than $600, thirteen pistols, one rifle, and one shotgun. “Not bad,” Maura said. “Not bad, but we are still short; we will need more money for our trip to Alkebulan from China and I don’t think we can make it by selling the guns” “Does that mean another robbery?” Larobe asked resignedly. “I’m afraid so, son,” Maura replied, “I’m afraid so!”

CHAPTER LIV

Maura And Larobe

A s the two now moved steadily north toward San Francisco; they robbed and pilfered camps and outposts along the way, sometimes stealing guns and money and many times, taking food, but Larobe always had their purpose of getting to Kush in mind. However he noticed that each time they encountered their white victims, Maura became harsher and crueler and Larobe was afraid that he would forget their objective. At first he would smack them around with his pistol or kick them in the groin but on their last raid he had forced one of their faces into the fire and shot the other in both knees. This behavior worried Larobe: he was concerned that these actions would cause them to be hated more and hunted more fiercely and he decided to speak to Maura. One night while they rested high in the mountains beneath a starry sky hidden by a clump of trees overlooking the lush warm valleys below, Maura sat on a large boulder across the campfire from Larobe who sat on an old log. On this night their camp fire was burning brighter than it had in some time because lately they had seen no sign of anyone pursuing them and Larobe spoke to Maura about his punishing actions. “You know, I’ve been thinking that your cruel treatment of those we rob are making them more determined to hunt us.” He said hesitantly. Maura almost shouted as he leapt from the rock and scoured down at Larobe. “Cruel!” Did you say cruel? Have you forgotten our journey to this land? Do you not the McCabe ranch? Did you not see what they did to Jadur and do you not believe what I told you about Glory? And after all this, you question what I do to them?” Maura shook his head incredulously and almost silently said. “What do they have to do to you to make you hate them?”

Larobe rose from the log cautiously thinking and paced behind the log a little before he said. “It is not that I have forgotten any of these things, and it is not your reason for your hate that I question; it is because of our mission and for your well-being that I am concerned.” “Our mission and my well-being? What do you mean?” Maura was very agitated and he still glared at him. “I’m thinking about the notion which Immeintunka taught us.” Larobe said. “He said when we rob, if we use unnecessary force, or kill needlessly, then we will only anger our enemies more and they will send more men to hunt us more persistently. Also I am worried that you are beginning to let hate motivate you instead of our mission and this may cause us to make a mistake.” Maura listened quietly as he stood before Larobe and never took his eyes off him but his voice was softened somewhat when he said. “I am sure that I do hate them. I hate what they did to me and you, to Glory and to Jadur. I hate that they are in our land and I hate they are in this land. Yes my friend I am motivated by hate. I can see nothing wrong with this hate. It is not like I wanted to hate them, but every I have had with them has been negative; so I think they deserve some payback.” He sat back down and looked up at Larobe who was still standing and said even softer. “And I have also seen what they have done to the other Africans who were here before us; and I hate how they have changed them to docile servants instead of men and women. Many of them are unaware that they have purposes outside of their duties to the whites. Their loyalty to their so-called master is how they define themselves. And so to them, you and I, are troublemakers– uppity niggers or whatever other name their masters say we are and I hate this situation and it does motivate me.” “Sure.” Larobe answered as he again sat on the old log and looked up at Maura. “All these things you say are true and I hate all these things too. But what I am saying is that you can’t let the hate make you irrational.” “What?!” Maura almost shouted again leaping to his feet. “You think that I am not rational?” Larobe paused a second looked over at Maura and said more calmly. “Yes, that’s what I’m saying.” Then added hurriedly before Maura could respond. “Look, say

I am camping out when someone comes to rob me. He takes my possessions and goes away and I am angry but I may or may not go after them depending on what they took from me. But if they also humiliate me by slapping me around or wounding me with fire or bullets, then I am sure I would go after them with a vengeance that burned to my very soul but while I am seeking vengeance, if I forget my main purpose I may jeopardize my quest because I am not being as careful as I should. That is what I’m talking about.” “In that case,” Maura answered saintly now. “Then why should I be different? Have we not been treated as bad as anything that I have done to them and have they not humiliated me to the point where I have no humility or modesty and my honor has been tried again and again?” He asked without expecting and answer. “They made me into a creature who had no life of my own and my only actions was to do their will. My body was examined by anyone they chose at any time, and my mind was assaulted daily by their accusing me of worthlessness. Now have they not taken my most valuable possession, myself, and should I not go after them with a vengeance.” “Yes, this is true, we have been treated terribly.” Larobe answered agreeing. “But even though we have been treated so badly, I do not hate every white I meet because I have heard that there are whites who do not treat us badly and some who have even helped others to escape. “Are you making excuses for them and saying that I should not treat them as they have treateded us because all have not mistreated me and that I should trust some of them. Do you want to take a chance that maybe one of them is going to help us when we have Old Ben’s foot to show us what happens when we misplace trust?” Maura answered smirking. “No I’m not excusing those who do treat us badly and I am not ready to trust any of them but I do not hate each one, and I do not seek revenge each time because it may overwhelm my thoughts and I may forget my real purpose is to get home. “You see, the actions that I take will be acts of war but will not extend to everyone who is white; besides if I only harm or kill when I have to, although I will not lessen his hate, I will lower the chance of him hunting me relentlessly. But if I allow revenge to become my main motive and inflict horrendous pain, then I make my enemy hunt me more fiercely.”

“So you think that I should not want revenge and should not hate them even though that have taken everything that I have?” Maura asked smugly. “No, no, I’m not saying that. What I’m saying is even though I hate what they do; still I refuse to make revenge my main reason because it can hinder me in my pursuit of home. You see, although I hate what they do, I do not let hate make me seek revenge. I believe that if I do that then I am dangerously close to insanity. And if I am insane my purpose will be forgotten because revenge will replace it as my main objective and I will surely not succeed” Maura sat quietly but angrily before he rose again and began to pace and then turned to Larobe. “Are you saying that I am insane? If that is what you think it is not too late for you to turn back or head off on your own if you do not want to travel with a crazy man?” “No, no that is not what I’m saying at all.” Larobe said as he stood up again and began to pace. “Our mission is what we must accomplish. And even though I hate the things they do to us, still my motivation is our mission, not my hatred of them. So I’m saying to you, if revenge will impede our purpose then that is not the time for revenge. In other words, don’t let our hatred of the things that they do to us cause us to jeopardize our mission. how you let the others in the town live because you wanted to get back home. That is what I’m talking about.” Maura was angry and incredulous when he sat back on his rock but he spoke more quietly. “You mean you think that although I hate what they do and what they have done, and are doing; I should not seek revenge? I should just go along as if these things didn’t happen?” “No, no!” Larobe said. “That’s not it at all. What I am trying to say is that when we do the things that we do, we should have our one purpose in mind and everything that we do should be to further our mission, but if we make our pursuers hunt us more persistently, then that hampers our task and that is what cruel treatment of the pale ones does. It makes him hunt us more doggedly thereby impeding our goal.” “So you think that I am not acting rational because when I punish them that makes them hunt us more persistently which is contrary to our purpose to get home,” Maura said. He then looked straight across the fire at Larobe and added.

“Let me tell you I have seen the worse things that could possibly be done to people for no reason at all and I know that they don’t need any added incentive to make them act that way, no do they need any reason other than we are black to hunt us.” “Yes, I’m sure you have seen such as you say.” Larobe answered. “And even though it is true what you say, I will not let their treatment of us cause me to be cruel because that causes me to be other than who I am.” Maura said very quietly now as he stood up again. “Son, from the moment they put chains on me and threw me in the hold of that ship, they caused me to be other than who I was. And everything that they have done to me since has caused me to be other than who I am. And whether you know it or not, they have also caused you to be other than yourself. “Now, you listen to this, if they had never grabbed you on that beach that day, maybe you would have lived your life in the tradition of your father and never have to rob and steal or sneak through a forest or even to hate and kill. And then again maybe they would have come to your home and mistreated you even more than they did here. So regardless of where you were, they may have come and caused you to be other than who you would have been.” “No, no, no, no, no,” Larobe said emphatically. “I’m not talking about how I must physically live; I’m talking about my mind. My mind is me. It is what and who I am. It’s what makes me, me. I think of what I am going to do. And although I may be reacting to things that have happened to me, I do not let revenge guide me so that I lose all my civility and sympathy and become mean and cruel; I am only mean and cruel because I am fighting a war.” He continued. “For example, the ones you say have no purpose other than to serve their masters; they are other than themselves, not only physically, but their minds have been warped and they are governed by what they think the master likes. “Now, once they were thinking people who had likes and dislikes of their own. But the ill-treatment they received when they didn’t please the master made them realize that pleasing the master eliminated the harsh treatment. They taught this to their children who taught their children and after many generations this message has manifested even without having to be cruelly treated, and since they

now believe their purpose is to serve whites; they are other than themselves.” “And you think this has happened to me?” Maura asked looking at him with a crooked smile or smirk. “Yes, but on the opposite end of that spectrum.” Larobe said. The malicious treatment you have received has made you hate, and so instead of acting from needs, you have begun to seek vengeance without regard for the results because you hate them. “I have traveled with you for some time and I see changes in you. I have seen a man go from cunning and purposeful, to reckless and hectic. Mind you, I am your friend, but I don’t want to lose a good friend to hate. Because once you plunge into that, you become other than yourself. I’m telling you my friend; if hate is your only motivation you become like those who live only to please their Massa, because you have become other than yourself and when you do this you are worse off than the whites are.” He continued in a more conciliatory tone before Maura could answer. “Now those who have no purpose except to please the whites will hate us because we spur the whites to take revenge on them, but what has caused the whites to hate us, I don’t know. But I suspect that for this hate to be so methodical by so many, that someone or something has systematically filled them with fear and envy. But while their hate stems from this or another source they have a purpose and that purpose is our labor in order to enrich themselves and they never lose sight of this. Even when they kill us it is to teach the rest a lesson. Therefore although our hate stems from the vicious treatment we have received, if we act only out of hate with no purpose then we are worse off than they are. “Also if we teach our offspring to hate without a purpose it will lead to our ruin because they will hate for no other reason than it was taught to them, and with hate in their hearts they will soon hate each other.” As Maura thought on this for a few seconds Larobe continued incredibly. “What did we ever do to them?” He asked disbelievingly. “Because they my friend, they have plunged to a depth of hate that I’m sure was guided by a system designed so that they would turn out exactly as they are. And then again, it could be as you say–-maybe they are the children of the devil, but you are my friend, and I need you; I need you to act out of need, not out of hatred.”

“Well, my young friend,” Maura said easing his glare and scorn. “You have turned out to be quite the observant one and you do speak with wisdom that belies your youthful status and I would be a fool not to think about what you have said. However, that which they did to Glory did blind me and even though I feel I have exacted that vengeance, still each time I encounter them, I feel this urge for revenge. I don’t know if it is hatred for them but I do know that I hate the things they have done to us. But we are the recipients of their anger therefore I don’t see as you do that our hatred of them makes us worse off than them.” Larobe answered again still sitting. “It is true because if we harbor hate we will become hateful even though we don’t hate them for any other reason than what they have done to us. Yet if we let our hate for those things cause us to seek revenge from every white, then we will become full of hate and revenge and punish them all severely. Then my dear friend we will be monsters. But if we can harbor a hate for the things they have done but seek no revenge from the whites, then we will retain our rationality and civility and we can think before we act instead of letting the emotion take over. If not, then they are better off because they have a purpose to profit from us while we will be led by blinding hate without a purpose except revenge.” Maura thought this over for some seconds before he replied. “Perhaps it is because you did not experience those things that I did that allows you to gain your perspective. However, I promise to think about the things you have said.” Maura answered. They then endeavored that night as they always did—with one taking the first watch while the other slept; tonight was Larobe’s turn for first watch. The two men had checked the trail as they traveled north and they had and steered well clear of those they saw camping below. However, had they checked the area ahead, they would have seen those lying in wait there who had hid themselves very well. Now while Maura slept, they stole their way into the camp of Larobe and Maura.

CHAPTER LV

The Escape

T he news of Maura and Larobe had traveled through many of these camps and these three men were intent on ending their escapades right here as they crept into the camp through the sparsely grown forest on their knees unaware of the intense brown eyes overlooking them from above. As they got closer to the bedrolls, they were startled by the call of an owl and rose alertly and quietly to their feet and looked around, but they dismissed this signal because these were niggers not Indians they were hunting . Larobe always kept a rifle and bow and arrows handy when on watch and he always found a higher perch and now he called again as he rose from his post in a nearby tree and readied his bow. Maura who always slept with his .44 cal. pistol close by now easily encircled the handle and cocked it beneath his blanket; he also kept his knife close by and he gripped that in the other hand. The three men stole closer unaware that they had been detected when Larobe rose up from his position above, took aim at the trailing intruder and silently let fly his arrow. The missile made thudding sound as it found its mark in the back of the intruder who grunted and fell forward. The other two turned and one was met by another missile which found its home in his chest. The third one, thinking they were being attacked by natives began to run back toward his camp, but Maura easily ran him down and buried his knife deep in his chest. After assuring themselves that all were dead, Maura and Larobe rushed now to gather their things and leave. They had survived this attack with hardly a sound or scratch but they didn’t know how many others were about, so after stripping the intruders of guns and ammo, they rode higher into the mountains. They knew now it was getting dangerous for them so they rode hard for San Francisco; they had already counted their money and had just over three thousand dollars and decided that this amount had to be enough. But because

Yueng Ling had said that there was a certain length of time that the captain would be in port, they had to hurry. As they rode now sometimes in plain view with scarce cover, they were more cautious than ever so they traveled by night and hid out in alcoves and caverns by day. When they figured they had gone far enough north, they began to descend to the shallow mountains and head west. When they camped they made their plan for approaching the captain: In San Francisco they would try to remain unseen and would go straight to the docks and locate the ship and swim out to the boat and board very quietly and explain their plight. They decided that they would approach the ship at night and would barter the guns they had collected as part of their fare. They would know his boat by the marking Yueng Ling had told him of, however they knew that they must be wary of everyone which is a lesson learned by all captives. As they were ing a few smaller settlements and signs that read to San Francisco they knew they were nearing their destination. Further along when they could see the buildings and lights in San Francisco, they decided to wait until very late when there would not be so many people about before they started on this last mission. However in their haste and excitement of getting so close to their objective, they failed to realize how doggedly they were being trailed by some of those whom they had robbed? They camped in a small clump of forest on a rocky ledge about a mile or so from any of the activity in town and as they stirred around to find material for a fire, Maura came across a piece of paper featuring their likenesses. There were sketches of each of them with the names, Big Buck and Lil Buckskin and a $500 reward for each. “Well, well, well, “Maura said, laughing as he showed the poster to Larobe. “Now I’m sure Deadeye and Pecos would be proud or us.” Larobe studied the poster and then said. “Yes, but this is not a laughing matter. With a poster of us, we can’t be seen in town.” “Yeah, well,” Maura said. “I wasn’t planning on being seen except by the Chinaman.” “True, “Larobe said. “But this means we had better be more careful than ever.” It was getting get dark now and they would stay here for a while and sneak into

the docks later tonight but as they sat around their campfire across from each other perched upon a couple of fallen logs overlooking the town Maura thought about Larobe and the intruders. He ed how cool and calm Larobe was when he killed the two men whom he had shot with his bow. He never wavered from the business at hand and never said a word as he slit their throats, but he was not was shaken by his deeds nor was he proud and when he talked about them, it was just a matter of what had to be done there was no hate in his demeanor. But he himself, that was a different story; he was actually glad to get the chance to kill another white and he had viciously stabbed his victim at least three times but now when he thought about it, he did not like what he saw in himself. He knew that there should be no enjoyment in the taking of another’s life but he did. He reasoned it was because he didn’t wait for others that day when he killed Madison and Clem and the two men, and now he was avenging Glory each time he killed. He also blamed the lash he felt and the bit he tasted and all the other atrocities he had witnessed or felt? But regardless of the reason he attributed it to, he killed and enjoyed it, and he did not want to enjoy it and it troubled him. He was not always like this. He ed his days in Cush: Whenever there was war; the main thrust was always to capture–not to kill. But now, he could not capture, there was nowhere to hold prisoners, and if he let them go, they would only come after him again. Yes, he figured it was alright to kill in his situation, but he would have to learn to kill without emotion like Larobe. Now as they sat around their small campfire on a rocky ledge eating warm beans from cans they had pilfered at their last raid, Maura spoke to Larobe: “You know,” he said, “I’ve been thinking about what you said about punishing and killing and becoming like the whites, and I also watched you. You seemed to have killed those two without emotion and I’m thinking, maybe that is the way I should be. But how do you become emotionless?” “Oh, I’m not emotionless,” Larobe hurriedly answered. “But while I’m engaged in war, I think of nothing else: not of the maltreatment I have received, not of how mean or nasty the enemy is, just how to eliminate the enemy. Later sometimes I have all types of emotions: Like why is it necessary for me to kill, or did I put myself in this position so that someone would come so that I could kill them. Or do I want to kill because of the mistreatment I and others have received? And these are just some of the questions and emotions I ask and feel.

But in the end I know this enemy very well and I know with him, it’s either kill or be killed and I am determined not to be killed but I am also resolute that my killing is just an act of war.” “That sounds good.” Maura said. “But you never tasted the bit or felt the lash and they did not take your woman; this undeserved treatment that we receive causes me to hate them.” He continued. “It’s because they don’t view us as human, but as some animal to do their biddings that I am beginning to view them as creatures that have no civility. I mean, I see no human quality in one who merely because he has the means to, beats another man who is no threat to him, and who has enriched him by working his fields all day. I do not understand how humans can be so cruel. You see I don’t want to enjoy taking their lives, but there is something in me that says, this is for that hurt you have caused so many. And though I feel one step closer to freedom and redemption whenever I kill one of them, there is still that part of me that does not want to kill but the revenge in me says different, but maybe I am really not slaying a human being.” Maura had stood up from his seat now and was pacing about slightly and talking rather loudly while Larobe remained seated looking up at him. “It is because I see nothing human in those who would force men to breed with their brother’s wife; who would chop off a man’s foot for trying to gain his freedom; who will take babies from their mother’s arms to sell them to others; and who will massacre a village of men, women, and children to appease something in themselves, I know not what!” He then sort of trailed off and said very quietly: “Only the devil knows because I do not.” As his voice quieted he realized he had been speaking as if he was not in danger and he sat again and continued his soliloquy with dead silence around them and he spoke in just above a whisper and leaned closer to the small fire which was low tonight because they did not want to be seen. Larobe listened intently also bending forward as Maura continued to speak. “Still I see all these things and I think, they are not human. Now I know that they appear to be human but they act in-humane towards us, and view us as some creatures here for their gain. What did we and these gentle brown people do to them to make them view us this way; and what did we do to Romokoko that He would send these ones to capture us?” He paused because his voice had again

rose and then said more softly. “I’m sure I don’t know the answer, but I know I don’t want to view them as animals or savages but this is what I see, yet I should not enjoy killing them, but if they really are the children of the devil, shouldn’t they be killed?” “Wow man!” Larobe said breaking his silence when he had finished. “Now you have taken me further than my limited knowledge can answer, but the main thing for me is that I remain human. I know that with me, as a child, growing up inside the house, I didn’t experience the many things that those in the fields did. But at the same time, there were other cruelties that I and the others did experience but I can’t be led by that, I must stay in tune with my human feelings that say I should not enjoy killing another human and suppress my desire for revenge.” Larobe stood now and looked down at Maura upon his perch. “You see there were things spoken of in front of me and the others that hurt just as bad as the bit and the lash because we had to endure whatever was said or any other captive without reprisal. These words that attacked our character, our dignity and even our humanity sent a rage through me that wanted to scream out and tell them that they were not true but I could not.” He sat back down now and lowered his voice to almost a whisper as he too realized the danger in speaking so loudly. “I saw others made cripple from this treatment; I saw self-esteem, confidence and dignity just ooze out of their being and trampled on–never to return, and I could understand this too was murder of a human being, but I could never understand the two faces of the whites. “You see, I saw the same person who ordered so much cruelty to the captives be kind and gentle to others of his kind and I didn’t see how this could be. And those that came to visit; they were the same. They talked of the cruelty that they did to their slaves, but their own families were treated with respect and gentility. And while they talked with all nicety to each other, the conversations that they had with me or the others could be called anything but nice. “Yes, there was much mental cruelty I was privy to that I did not understand at the time, and I still don’t, but this must not affect my judgement about what I should do; and I cannot let this be my only motivation for killing them because my freedom takes precedence over all else and if I am saddled with remorse then I am still not free.

Larobe continued to talk but the silence of their surrounding also caused him to lower his voice and he too was now speaking very quietly and leaning toward Maura. “I promised myself I would not let this happen to me.” He said. “Because if I become as they are I will become inhuman and thus inhumane. However whether they are children of the devil or not, I cannot answer but even if it is so I will not enjoy killing them. I don’t enjoy killing the rabbit, deer, or squirrel. I kill these so that I may live. And this is why I kill them; not because they are children of the devil nor what they have done to me nor because they are white, but because I am fighting for my life and my freedom.” Maura answered him and they both were now conversing just as he and Stilly did with each looking around before he spoke. “You know I think you are wise beyond your years, and I do take heed to some of your wisdom and I do not wish to become as they are. Maybe when we are on the boat and on our way home, I can put all of this behind me, and become a free thinking man again without prejudices.” Maura said. It was just starting to get dark now and as the two men talked they had let their guard down for the first time since they started this sojourn and were surprised to look up and see two whites enter their camp. However they were more shocked to see how the semi-dark and flickering light from their fire had rendered this pale man’s grotesquely burnt face reminiscent of those hideous images which the whites called the devil. “I guess you niggers never expected to see me again, heh, heh.” He said pointing his pistol between Maura’s eyes. The other one had his gun trained on Larobe. “This is gonna be real good,” said the one with the monstrously burned face. “I was trailing you just to kill you for what you did to me and my brother, but now I come across this poster, and you and your buckskin partner is gonna be worth one thousand dollars to us; not to mention what you got in them sacks. “Now you just take off them guns and stand over there by that rock wall. I’m gonna hold you here til Ed gets here. Since you messed up his legs, he can’t travel as fast as me; but I’m sho he is gonna take real pleasure in seeing you here.” The other one still had not said a word as Larobe and Maura stood, unbuckled their holsters and let them fall to the ground, and moved over to the rock wall. “You take a good look at my face nigger, I want that to be the last thing you see

before we send you to hell where you belong!” He said moving his horrible face closer to Maura. Then he said to the other one. “Bill see what they got in them sacks; this just might be our lucky day!” The other one walked over to a clump of bushes by the rocks, where Larobe and Maura had their two sacks of loot. As he reached for the first sack he heard, “shraharahrara.” The rattle of the sidewinder caused him to jerk back, but it was already too late; the snake struck with a swiftness that the made his movement appear as if it was slow motion. When the burnt one heard the rattle he turned his head ever so slightly. This was long enough for Larobe, who had kept his trusty blade, to strike with the swiftness of the sidewinder and slit his scabby throat. As his surreal neck was already spitting crimson, he managed to squeeze off a shot, but it was well clear of its mark. Now was the time to hurry, plans be dammed, they had to get to that boat. Maura used a branch to fling the snake clear of the sacks. The other white man’s, body jerked spasmodically, as he lay crumpled on the ground while the poison from several bites seeped into his system and Larobe drove his blade deep into his chest in a humane gesture. “We got to move out of here.” Larobe said. The others might have heard that shot.” “We could stay and ambush them.” Maura said. “We don’t know how many there are. Besides, if they trailed us, there could be others.” Larobe answered. They hurriedly loaded the sacks on the horses, gathered their gun belts and rode hard toward San Francisco; they left just in time. The others had heard the gunshot and now they hurried to the camp. They were surprised when they reached the scene of blood and vomit and death, but they wasted no time. It was not hard to pick up Larobe’s and Maura’s trail and five of them rode off leaving the sixth with the aching knees behind. When Larobe and Maura neared the town, they poked their horses off in the direction of the forest and hills; and stole quietly through the darkest alleys of this large town. They had to give a wide berth to the city in order not to be spotted and this gave their pursuers more time to catch up to them but instead they followed the horses.

When the pursuers finally encountered the horses, they realized that they had been duped and started back to town. When they arrived, they notified the Law enforcement officers, and also any others who happened to be awake. The town came alive with white men carrying torches and guns and many other weapons, searching all building including barns and outhouses, and any other shelter that could serve as a hiding place. Luckily for the escapees, the town was much bigger than most and the hunters did not know they were headed for the docks. As the escapees neared the docks, they could see the torches moving about the city and getting closer to the docks, therefore they had to find Mr. China Captain soon. They each carried a sack and now they could smell the water. They were weary, but everything that they had strove for since leaving the McCabe ranch was just a few feet from them now, and there was no turning back. Furthermore with two dead white men just a few miles away, there would be no mercy for them if they were caught. “You men keep searching here in town. I’m gonna take my men to the docks,” one of the leaders of the hunters said. “Come on men, let’s go.” They said and started out walking swiftly and noisily. The two men saw this murderous assemblage headed their way and slipped quietly into the water. As they swam under a pier and paddled quietly out to sea, they scanned each of the many vessels docked here with their high sails and mighty hulls for Chinese marking. As they swam near the end of the pier they could hear their pursuers getting closer; they would be here soon and there was no cover heading out to the ships. In the dark they could not make out the markings on the ships. “We’ve got to pick one.” Larobe said, while treading in the water. “We can’t let them find us here!” “But if it’s the wrong one–-”, Maura started, but Larobe cut him off. “They’re getting near; let’s go now!” He said. They swam faster now that they were in open water now without cover but the sacks slowed them down. They could see the torches just reaching the pier. Then Maura spotted it. “It’s there,” he said, ing the markings that Yueng Ling had in his home. The Chinese ship had those same marking and was flying

the same flag that Yueng Ling had said it would—a bright red sun. They paddled quietly now; the dark of night covered them and the lights of the torches did not reach them. “They might have boarded one of the boats,” the leader yelled. “Somebody go and get some of them Lawmen, we are gonna search every boat.” Larobe and Maura could hear every word spoken as the water brought the words crashing to their ears and they now moved with urgency. Larobe was the first to ascend the anchor chain to the deck. Maura handed one sack up as Larobe reached back as he reached the top. Maura then started above handing the other sack ahead of him. After receiving the sack, Larobe reached back to give Maura a hand and just as the two men were firmly planted on the deck, they were surrounded by the Chinese crew. The men led them away as Maura whispered: “The captain, we want to see the captain.” Soon the Lawmen arrived on the scene with many other vigilantes. “Okay,” one of them yelled. “We are gonna search each and every one of these ships. Some of you men man these boats and row out to the ships on that end. We’ll take this end. And we are going to do a thorough job. If them niggers are here, we’ll find them!” There were about forty or fifty men here now and they began to man the smaller oar boats and splash out to the ships. They carried torches, lanterns, guns, pick axes, pitch forks and just about everything that could be used as a weapon. They began to board the ships with much fanfare. Many of the ships had crews aboard and many of the men in the search parties were of some of the crews so they encountered no problems with the captains and crews. They methodically went about their searches. They looked under tarps, in barrels, through stocks of food and cargoes. They questioned captains and crews. They even checked the waters around the ships. They left no place unsearched but still they found no trace of the escapees. When they came to the Chinese ship, many of the crew spoke no English however the captain offered no resistance when the men demanded to search the vessel. Now rumor was that the Chinese captain smuggled humans between the America and China, however, he had never been caught nor had any refugee ever been detected, but it was with this in mind that the men went about their

search.

The cargo aboard this ship was mostly timber and cotton. The cotton was in bales covered by burlap and the timber were gigantic logs tightly cinched with ropes and chains. The men struck each bale with their pick axes and pitch forks. Some were even shot through. But the timber was stacked so tightly and so heavy that there was no way that they could be hidden there but they had not found their prey so they continued to search. This was the last vessel to be searched and the men were becoming disheartened. They went over the ship again searching every nook and cranny. They even searched the captain’s bed and beneath and ripped open barrels of flour and sacks of food and cut the ropes binding the timbers. Still they did not discover their prey. When at last they were satisfied that the escapees were not aboard, they departed.

EPILOGUE

N ow sometime later somewhere in the south Pacific Ocean aboard a Chinese cargo ship laden with cotton and timber, two tall weary black African men crawled from hollowed out logs and sat upon bales of cotton and enormous logs on the deck of a ship not unlike the one that they had made the trip across the Atlantic Ocean on. But now they sat aboard deck and breathed the free and sweet saline breezes so unlike the stench and rancor that they suffered on their voyage to this land that they now left behind. Yet on a green and luscious plantation in southern Georgia, an old tired black man with his straw hat slightly tilted backward upon a balding head surrounded by clumps of silver hair, limps on one and a half feet as he tends gorgeous gardens of resplendent roses and brilliant blooms and ripening tomatoes and squash and cabbage and other vegetables with a frown on his face and a smile in his heart. Here he ingests breezes of freedom that captivity cannot bind as he savors his life that all the atrocities he has suffered cannot subdue. Still, somewhere else in America, a huge muscular and determined black man in overalls and brogans, and a tall persistent black woman similarly dressed in overalls, shirt and hat trample through forests, mountains, swamps and streams in search of those longing to breathe free. Although these and many other obstacles they will encounter, the burning summers, the freezing winters, the animals, and overseers, it will not impede their purpose. So with each carrying a trusty forty-four as they tread and breathe freely of the wilderness about them, they know that they will accomplish their mission or die trying. And later somewhere in the western territory of the United States of America, high in the black hills of Dakota away from the tribulation of war, an old black silver-haired woman of India sat upon a brilliant blanket of many autumn hues outside an equally dazzling conical animal skin tipi where two tall sycamores loomed just behind. The grass her blanket was upon was thick but short and tan like straw. She was wrapped just as brilliantly in a wool shawl of vivid red over her tan leather dress with the bodice splendid with many colored beads and tassels. She was flanked by her daughter and a young woman from the Indian

world of America both similarly dressed. She held two babies in her arms wrapped in blankets just as beautiful as the one she sat on: one was her granddaughter of African and Asian Indian blood, the other a god-son from the black African man who saved her and the young Native American woman who nursed her. She and the others made a picture of serenity as they sat among the beauty which was this village with red and gold autumn leaves gently falling, and they were as free and happy as they had ever been as they inhaled the crisp sweet mountain breezes.

TO BE CONTINUED